Yaskawa LX3 Manual

PDF
문서
YASNAC LX3
CNC SYSTEM
FOR TURNING
APPLICATIONS
Before initial operation read these instructionsthoroughly, and retain for future reference.
YASKAVW
This
manual
character
is
primarily
display
structions
for
intended
(basic)
to
YASNAC
with
give
LX3
9”
CRT
operators
in–
programming,
and
operation.
This
manual
features
are
of
of
marked
your
builder’s
applies
YASNAC
with
a
YASNAC
to
the
LX3.
dagger.
LX3,
refer
basic
and
The
optional
For
the
to
the
optional
features
specifications
machine
tool
manual.
586-175
YASNAC
LX3
OPERATOR’S
STATION
PREFACE
When reading
this
manual
keep
in mind that
the
information
contained
herein
does
not cover
every
possible
contingency
which
might
be met during
the operation.
Any
operation
not described
in
this
manual
control,
should
not
be
attempted
with
the
The
functions
and performance
as NC machine
are
determined
by a combination
of machine
and the
NC control.
For operation
of your
NC machine,
the machine
tool builder’s
manual
shall
take
prl–
ority
over
this
manual.
TJnless
Feed
should
the
devices
specified,
Function
Absolute
Zero
Point:
Coordinate
Dimensions:
of
the following
programming
Selection:
Reference
Zero
Point
(Return
to reference
matic
return)
:
+
Work
The illustration
of machine
control
station
be used
for your
reference
in understanding
function.
For detailed
array
of operator’s
and names,
refer
to machine
tool builder’s
manual.
otherwise
apply
to the description
s“fiown in this
manual.
Zero
in
MM
G99
zero
by
Point
(mm/rev)
manual
+
+?
rules
examples
and
auto-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION
2.
PROGRAMMING
2.1
Tape
2.2
Program
2.3
Coordinate
2.4
Rapid
1
Format
1
Number
Traverse
spindle-Speed
2.6
TOO I Function
2.7
Miscellaneous
2,8
Preparatory
NC
TAPE
10
Rate
Function
(S-Function)
(T-Function)
3.2
Programming
3.3
NC
Tape
3.4
NC
Tape
13
14
Functions
code
6
(M-Function)
(G-Function)
148
150
Handling
4.1
Pushbuttons,
4.2
Power
ON/OFF
u. 3
Display
and
4.4
Loading
Memory
Part
(in)
STATION
151
Key S, and
Lamps
Operation
155
Writing
Operation
Programs
174
Tape
Verifying
4.6
Edit
180
4.7
Part Program
and
Operations
183
4.8
Summary
Operations
on the
Switching
Units
Operation
procedure
6.
OPERATION
Inspection
before
Turning
6.3
Manual
6.4
Preparation
Compensation
6.5
Preparations
6.6
Operation
6.7
Manual Operation
Operation
216
6.8
Automatic
6.9
MD I Operation
Operation
216
6.10
Preparation
6.11
Turning
187
Control
187
213
Turning
on Power
Station
198
PROCEDURE
6.2
150
OPERATOR’S
DISPLAY
4.5
STATION
on Power
213
213
Operation
213
for Stored
Lead Screw Error
and Stored
Stroke
Limit
214
for
Automatic
in Tape
and
Operation
Memory
214
Mode
215
148
148
STANDARD
NC
CRT CHARACTER
CONTROL
5,2
19
23
MACHINE
5.1
6.1
PUNCHING
Tape
Number
7
Functions
3.1
4.
sequence
and
Words
2.5
3.
5.
1
and
WITH
151
156
NC
Data
of Storing
186
Data
and
Output
Editing
Operation
for
off
in MD I Mode
Interrupting
Turning
Power
Automatic
off
Power
217
217
1
LIST
OF SETTING
APPENDIX
2
LIST
OF
APPENDIX
3
STORED
LEADSCREW
PENSATION
A–25
APPENDIX
4
LIST
OF STANDARD
PUT SIGNALS
A–26
APPENDIX
5
LIST
OF
ALARM
APPENDIX
6
LIST
OF
DATA
into
216
. Automatic
APPENDIX
178
NC
Interrupting
NUMBERS
PARAMETER
NUMBERS
ERROR
lNPUT/OUT-
CODES
A–54
A–35
A–1
A–?
COM-
INDEX
Subject
A
Chapter
ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL
INPUT S............................ 2
ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL
PROGRAMl,41NG (G90, G91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Accelerationand Decelerationof Rapid Traverse
and Manual Feed .......................................$......2
......................................... 4
ADDING PART PROGRAMS
ADDRESS KEYS ................................................... 4
Par.
Page
........ 2.3.5 . . . .
. . . . . . . . 2.8.31
..””
8
146
........ 2.4.3. . . . 12
“.””””.. 4.6.4 .,. . 181
.’”””””” 4.1.4 . . . . 153
Address Search ....................................................4
ALARM CODE (ALM) DISPLAY ..................................... 4
Alarm Code Display ................................................ 4
Alarm Number of Microprograms ..................................2
Argument Designation.............................................. 2
........
........
........
........
........
4.3.3.4 ““”
4.3.9 -.O..
4.3.9.1 -..
2.8.23.102.8.23.2 ‘.
AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET ..................................... 5
AU TO MOD E HANDLE OFFSET SWITCHt
...................44......5
AUTOMATIC
ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION
........0..0.....2
AUTOMATIC
COORDINATE
SYSTEM SETTING+ ..................... 5
AutomaticNose RFunction .........................................2
........
........
........
........
........
5.2.7 ‘---- 212
5.1&lt;28 ---- 195
2.4.3 ..... 12
5.2.2 ..... 199
2.8.19.1 .. 56
AU TOMATIC OPERATION INMDI h40DE ...........................6
AUTOMATIC
RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT (G28) ................ 2
Automatic Threading Cycle (G76) ...................................2
AutomaticWritingintothe Tool CoordinateMemory ................. 5
Automatic Writingintothe Work CoordinateSystem
ShiftLIemory..................................................5
........
........
........
........
6.8 ....... 216
2.8.11 .... 35
2.8.25.8 ‘. 109
5.2.3.3 .“” 203
161
172
172
88
68
........ 5.2.3.4 .“’ 204
B
BUFFER REGISTER ................................................ 2 ........ 2.1.5 ..””” 6
BUFFERING FUN CTION(M93, M92)t ..............................-2 ........ 2.7.3 .“””” 19
C
CANNED CYCLES (G90, G92, G94) ................................ 2
CHECKING REGISTERED PART PROGRAM
NUMBER ................. 4
CircularArc MultipleCornering (G112).............................2
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
(G02, G03) ........................... 2
CIRCULAR PATH hfODE ON/OFF ON TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION
(G97, L496)+ ................................................. 2
COMMAND
DATA DISPLAY ..........................................4
........
........
........
........
Command Data Display .............................................4
Command Pulse AccumulationRegisterDisplay
(COMMAND
PULSE) ........................................... 4
Conditionsfor the Automatic Nose R Compensation Function
to be Enabled ................................................ 2
Conditionsof the Specifications
to Perform FS Editing.............. 5
Considerationsand Remarks for Macro Programs ................... 2
........ 4.3.2.1 ... 158
116
180
143
28
........ 2.7.4 ..... 20
........ 4.3.2 ..... 157
........ 4.3.4.9..
165
........ 2,8.19.2.. 56
........ 5.1.31.7.. 198
........ 2.8.23.9 “. 84
CONSTANT
DISPLAY ..............................................
CONSTANT
SURFACE SPEED CONTROL
(G96, G97)t ...............
Control Comma~ ds .................................................
CoordinateSystem Setting (G50 X_. Z_. ) ........................
COORDINATE
WORD S..............................................
4
2
2
5
2
........
........
........
........
........
4.3.1 .....
2.8.27 ..-.
2.8.23,6-.
5.2.3,5...
2.3 .......
156
123
81
205
7
COORDINATE
WORDS ..............................................
CORNERING
(Gil, G12)+ ...........................................
CRT CHARACTER
DISPLAY ........................................
CURRENT
POSITION DISPLAY .....................................
CURSOR KEYS ....................................................
2
2
4
4
4
........
........
.......
........
........
2.3.1 .....
2.8.7 .....
4,1.2 ....4,3.4 .....
4.1.8 .....
7
31
152
162
154
CUTTING DEPTH OVERRIDE
CYCLE START PUSHBUTTON
D
2.8.26 ‘“””
4.6.1 .....
2,8.30.2 ..
2.8.4 .....
SWITCHt FOR G71 AND G72 .......... 5 ........ 5.1.29 .... 195
AND LAMP .......................... 5 ........ 5.1.2 .... 188
DATA KEYS .......................................................4
................................... 2
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
DELETING PART PROGRAM
BLOCKS ............................... 4
Display and Deletingof RegisteredProgram Number
(PROGRAM NO. TABLEDR
)t ................................. 4
Display and Write of Local and Common Variables .................. 2
........ 4.1.5.... 153
........ 2.1.3 ...,. 6
........ 4.6.5 ..... 182
............................... 4
DISPLAY AND WRITING OPERATION
Displayof Subprogram Run Status (SUB PROG . NESTING) ......... 4
Displayof Tool Life Control Use Status (TOOL LIFE CONTROL)
.... 4
Display in EDIT Mode .............................................. 4
DISPLAYING AND CHECKING STORED PART PROGRAMS
........... 4
........
........
........
........
........
.,.,.... 4.3.9.3 ... 173
........ 2,8.23.8 ,. 83
4.3 .......
4.3.2.2 ...
4.3.2.3 ...
4.3,3.3 ...
4.6.2 .....
156
158
159
161
180
INDEX
Chapter
Subject
D
F
Par.
Page
DISPLAYING AND WRITING PARAMETERS
..........................
Displayingand WritingParameters .................................
DISPLAYING AND WRITING SETTING DATA (SETTING) ............
DISPLAYING AND WRITING TOOL OFFSET DATAt .................
DISPLAYING STATUS INPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNALS ...................
4
4
4
4
4
........
........
........
........
........
4.3.7 .....
4,3.7.3 ...
4,3.6 .....
4.3.5 .....
4.3.8 .....
MEM]) ...................
..........................
..........................
..........................
4
5
5
2
........
........
........
........
4.3.3.2 ... 160
5.1.19 .... 193
5.1.18 .... 193
2.8.5 ..... 29
EDIT ................................... ..........................
EDIT KEYS ............................. ..........................
EDIT LOCK SWITCH ...............................................
EIA/ISO AUTO RECOGNITION ......................................
..................................
EMERGENCY
STOP PUSHBUTTON
4
4
5
3
5
........
........
........
........
........
4.6 ........
4.1.10 ....
5.1,22 ....
3.1,2 .....
5.1.4 .....
ERROR DETECT OFF POSITIONING (G06) .............4............
Example of FS Editing .............................................
Example of High-speed M Function Processing ......................
Exercisesof Macro Programs ......................................
2
5
2
2
........
........
........
........
2.8.2.2 ... 27
5.1.31.6 .. 197
2.7.8.4 ... 23
2.8.23.11.. 89
Facing Cycle B (G94) ..............................................
..........................
FEED FUNCTION
(F- AND E-FUNCTION)
FEED HOLD PUSHBUTTON
AND LAMP .............................
FEED/MINUTE AND FEED/REVOLUTION
SWITCHOVER
..............
Feed Per Minute (G98 Mode) .......................................
2
2
5
2
2
........
........
........
........
........
2.8.26,3 .. 121
2.4.2 ..... 10
5.1.3 ..... 188
2,8.28 .... 124
2.4.2.2 ... 12
Feed Per Revolution(G99 Mode) ...................................
...........................
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CANCEL SWITCH
FinishingCycle (G70) .............................................
FS AUTOMATIC
EDITING FUNCTION ...............................
FUNCTION KEYS ..................................................
2
5
2
5
4
........
........
........
........
........
2.4.2.1 ...
5.1.12 ...
2.8.25.5...
5.1.31 .....
4.1.3 .....
Displayin Memory Run Mode (PROGRAM
DISPLAY LOCK/MACHINE
LOCK SWITCH
DRY RUN SWITCH ......................
DWELL (G04).o.....................o....
E
(Conttd)
17o
171
168
166
172
180
154
194
148
189
11
192
106
196
152
Functions ......................................................... 2 ........ 2.6.5.2 ... 17
Functions ......................................................... 5 ........ 5.1.31.3... 196
G
H
I
...........................................................
...........................................................
...........................................................
...........................................................
PROGRAM
FORM .........................................
2
5
5
5
3
........
........
........
........
........
2,8.25.1...
5.1.8.2 ...
5,1.31.1...
5.2.3.10...
3.2.2 ......
94
190
196
206
148
G50 POINT RETURN SWITCHt .....................................
..............................................
G50 POINT RETURNt
GROOVE WIDTH COMPENSATION
(G150, G151)*.....................
Grooving in X-Axis (G75) ..........................................
5
5
2
2
........ 5.1.24 ....
‘-------5.2.4 .....
........ 2.8,32 ....
........ 2.8.25.7...
195
208
147
108
General
General
General
General
GENERAL
HANDLE AXIS SELECT SWITCH+ ................................s.. 5
....&lt;............... 5
HANDLE DIAL+ (MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR)
HANDLE DIALS FOR SIMULTANEOUS
CONTROL
OF
.......................................... 5
UP TO TWO AXESt
Handle Interpolation
Function ...................................... 5
........................................ 2
HIGH-SPEED M FUNCTION
..-.-... 5.1.8 ..4-. 189
.....+.. 5,1,8.1---- 190
........ 2.7.8 ..... 22
Improved MultipleRepetitiveCycle Function........................
INCH/METRIC DESIGNATION BY G CODE (G20, G21)t .............
Input/Output ......................................................
I/OChannel
......................................................
..............
INPUTTING SETTING DATA AND PARAMETER
DATA
2
2
5
2
4
........
........
........
........
........
2.8.25.10.. 115
2.8.8 ...... 33
5.1.31.2... 196
2.7.8.1 ... 22
4.4.5 ..... 178
...............
INPUTTING TOOL OF OFFSET DATA INTO MEMORY
Input Unit andl O Times Input Unit ...............................
INSPECTION BEFORE TURNING ON POWER ........................
.................................
INTERLOCK INPUT (INTERLOCK)
InternalToggle Switchesf .........................................
4
2
6
5
4
........
........
........
........
........
4.4.4 .....
2.3.3.1....
6,1 .......
5.1.23 ....
4.3.6.2 ...
177
7
213
195
169
................................................... 1 .....................
1
INTRODUCTION
........ 5.1.6...... 189
‘-------5.1.5 ----- 189
J
JOG FEEDRATE SWITCH AND FEEDRATE OVERRIDE SWITCH ....... 5 ........ 5,1.10 ..... 191
.................... 5 ........ 5.1.9 ..... 191
JOG PUSHBUTTONS
AND RAPID PUSHBUTTON
K
KEEPING
OF NC TAPE
............................................ 3 ........ 3.4.2 ..... 150
INDEX
(Cent’cl)
Subject
L
...........................................
LABEL SKIP FUNCTION
LEAST INPUT INCREMENT AND LEAST OUTPUT INCREMENT
......
Least Output Increment ...........................................
LINEAR INTERPOLATION
(GOl)t ...................................
LIST OF ADDRESS CHARACTERS
AND FUNCTION CHARACTERS
..
LIST
LIST
LIST
LIST
LIST
Par.
Chapter
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
2
2
2
2
2
........
........
........
........
........
Iv
2;
4
4 ................A-?.&amp;
........
........
........
........
2.8.23.1 .. 66
2.8.23 .... 66
4.3.9.5 .... 174
4.4.2 ..... 176
MANUAL
MANUAL
MAN UAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
ABSOLUTE
SWITCH ......................................
INTERRUPTION
POINT RETURN Sh’ITCH .................
INTERRUPTION
POINT RETURN* .........................
OPERATION *...... .......................................
OPERATION INTERRUPTING
AU TOhfATIC OPERATION
....
5
5
5
6
6
........
........
........
........
........
5.1.21 .....
5.1.25 .....
5.2.5 .....
6.3 .......
6.7 .......
194
195
209
213
216
MANUAL PULSE hlULTIPLY SELECT SWITCH+ ......................
hfANUAL REFERENCE POINT RETURN SWITCH . ....................
MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT ..........................
L4AXIMUM PROGRAMhfABLE DIMENSIONS ...........................
MAXIMUM SPINDLE-SPEED SETTING (G50)+ ...........4............
5
5
5
2
2
........
........
........
........
........
5.1.7 .....
5.1.14 ....
5.2.1 .....
2.3.4 ...-.
2.8.21 .-..
189
192
198
M CODES FOR INTERNAL PROCESSING
(G99 TO M109) .............
MCODES
FOR STOP (MOO, MO1, M02, M30) ........................
k4DIOPERATION INTERRUPTING
AU TOhiATIC OPERATION .........
MEASURED WORKPIECE VALUE DIRECT INPUT + ....................
MEMDATA
(MEMORY DATA) KEYS ................................
2
2
6
5
4
........
........
........
........
........
2.7.2 ----- 19
2.7.1 ..... 19
6.9 ....... 216
5.2.3 ..... 199
4.1.11 ....- 154
Message Display (ALARM)t ........................................
M-FIJNCTION LOCK SWITCH (AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK) .......
MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTIONS
(M-FUNCTION) ......................
MODE SELECT SWITCH ............................................
MODIFYING PART PROGRAM
BLOCKS
.............................
4
5
2
5
4
........ 4.3.9.2 ...
.......,5.1.20.....
........ 2.7 .......
........ 5.1.1 .....
........ 4.6.3 .....
..........................................
Operationin MDI Mode .....................
(Gill, G112)+ .............................
CYCLES (G70 TO G76)t ...................
CUTTING (G32)t ..........................
2
4
2
2
2
........
........
........
........
........
..........................................................
CHECK ..................................................
..............................................
HANDLING
.................................................
PUNCH
PUNCHING
..............................................
3
3
3
3
3
........ 3.3........
........ 3.3.3 .....
........ 3.4 .......
........ 3.3.2 .....
.....................
NEW COORDINATE
SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTION ...................
NEXT KEY ........................................................
New Tool SetterFunction ..........................................
No. of Servo Lag Pulses Display (ERROR PULSE) .................
Notes .............................................................
2
4
5
4
2
........
........
........
........
........
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
TAPE
TAPE
TAPE
TAPE
TAPE
NOTES
0
6
7
MACHINE CONTROL
STATION .............................
Macro Program Call Commands ..................................... 2
MAC REPROGRAMS
(G65ANDG67)
................................ 2
MaintenanceHistory Display (MAINTENANCE)
.......................4
MAKING ADDITION TO A PART PROGRALf ......................... 4
M3-DIGIT BCD OUTPCTt
Multi-blockWritingand
MULTIPLE CORNERING
MULTIPLE REPETITI\’E
MULTI-START
THREAD
N
2.1.4 .....
2.3.3 .....
2.3.3.2 ...
2.8.3 .....
2.1.2 .....
ALARM CODE .......................................AppENDIX 5................A-35
DATA ...............................................APPENDIx 6 ................A-54
................................................ 2 ........ 2.8.1 ..... 23
G CODES
..............................APPEND IX . ............... A-7
PARAMETER
NUMBERS
SETTING NUMBERS ..................................APPENDIX 1 ................ A-1
LIST OF STANDARD
INPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNALS .........-......APPENDIX
LIST OF TAPE CODE ......................................
LOADING PART PROGRAM
TAPE INTO MEMORY ............
LOADING PART PROGRAMS
AND NC DATA INTO MEMORY
(
LOADING PART PROGRAM SBYMDI
.......................
M
Page
WHEN
USING THE CONVENTIONAL
G50T****FUNCTION
2
5
5
2
2
........
........
........
........
........
172
194
19
187
180
2.7.7 ..... 21
4,3.3.1 ... 159
2.8.30 ..... 134
2.8.25 ..... 94
2.8.16 ..... 41
150
150
150
150
148
2.6.5 ..... 17
4.1.6 ..... 153
5.2.3.9 ... 206
4.3.4.8 ... 165
2.7.8.3 ... 23
.... 2 ........ 2.6.6 .....
OffsetCalculationof Automatic Nose R Compensation Approach
and Relief....................................................
Offset Screen Display .............................................
Operation..........................................................
Operation Commands ...............................................
Operation Expression for CoordinateSystem Setting................
6!
19
2.8.19.3 .. 57
5.2.3.8.... 205
5.1,8.3 ... 190
2.8.23.5 .. 79
2.6.5.3 ... 18
INDEX
Subject
o
P
R
(Cent’d)
Par.
Chapter
Page
OPERATION IN TAPE AND MEMORY MODE .........................
OperationProcedure ...............................................
..........................................
OPERATION PROCEDURE
..........................................
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Operation Time Display ............................................
6
5
5
6
4
........ 6.6 .......
........ 5.1.31.4 ..
........ 5.2 .......
.....................
........ 4.3.9.4 ...
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP (/1-/9)+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP SWITCH ..................................
ORG (ORIGIN) KEYS ..............................................
OTHER M CODES ..................................................
OUTPUTTING
PART PROGRAM
TO PAPER TAPE ...................
2
5
4
2
4
........
........
........
........
........
2.2.3 .....
7
5.1.17 .... 193
4.1.9 ..... 154
2.7.6 ..... 21
4.7.1 ..... 183
OUTPUTTING
SETTING IPARAMETER
DATA TO PAPER TAPE ......
OUTPUTTING
TOOL OFFSETS TO PAPER TAPE ....................
Overview .........................................................
Overview of L4acroProgram Body ..................................
4
4
2
2
........
........
........
........
4.7.3 ..... 184
4.7.2 ..... 184
2.6.5.1 ... 17
2.8.23.3 .. 69
PAGE KEYS ....................................................... 4
..................................................~.. 3
PAPER TAPE
Parameter of Bit Display Format ................................... 4
Parameter of Decimal DisplayFormat ............................... 4
Parameters ........................................................ 2
........
........
........
........
........
4.1.7 ......
3,3.1 .....
4.3.7.1 ...
4.3.7.2 ...
2.7.8.2 ...
153
150
171
171
22
Parameters ........................................................
...........
PART PROGRAM
AND NC DATA OUTPUT OPERATIONS
Pattern Repeating (G73) ..........................................
Peck Drillingin Z-axis (G74) ......................................
Position...........................................................
5
4
2
2
4
...............
........
........
........
5.2.3.2 ‘o4.7 .......
2.8.25.4 ..
2.8.25.6 ..
4.3.4,4 ..-
203
183
104
107
163
Position[ABSOLUTE] ..............................................
Position[EXTERNAL I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position(EXTERNAL) “O” Setting..................................
Position[INCREMENT] .............................................
POSITION (GOO, G06) .............................................
4
4
5
4
2
........
........
........
........
........
4.3.4.2 ...
4.3.4.1 ...
5,2.3.6 ...
4.3.4,3 ...
2.8.2 .....
163
162
205
163
24
Positioning(GOO) ..................................................
................................
POSITION STORED PUSHBUTTON+
.......................................
POWER ON/OFF OPERATION
POWER ON IOFF PUSHBUTTONS
...................................
Precautionsin Programming G70 through G76 ......................
2
5
4
4
2
........
........
........
........
........
2.8.2.1 ...
5.1.30 .....
4.2 .......
4.1.1 .....
2.8.25.9...
24
196
155
152
112
215
196
198
213
174
PREPARATION
FOR STORED LEADSCREW
ERROR COMPENSATION
AND STORED STROKE LIMITt ............................... 6
PREPARATION
FOR TURNING OFF POWER ....................... 6
PREPARATIONS
FOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION ..................... 6
PREPARATORY
FUNCTIONS
(G-FUNCTION) ........................ 2
PROCESS SHEET ...........................”.. ..,.......-.””-”-””3
........ 6.4 ....... 214
........ 6.10 .“...- 217
........ 6.5 ......-. 214
.......” 2.8 -------- 23
““-””--” 3.2.1”””-”- 148
....................................................
PRoGRAMh41NG
....................................................
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAhIMING OF ABSOLUTE
ZERO POINT (G50) .................
PROGRAM
MIRROR IhiAGE (G68, G69)t ............................
................................................
PROGRAM
NUMBER
2
3
2
2
2
.....................
1
........ 3.2 ‘.....- 148
........ 2.8.20 .-”-4 61
........ 2.8.24 .... 92
........ 2.2,1 .....
6
......................
PROGRAM
NUMBER AND SEQUENCE NUMBER
PROGRAM
RESTART SWITCHt .....................................
PROGRAM
RESTARTt
.......-..........~..........................
Program Return ...................................................
PUSHBUTTONS,
KEYS, AND LAMPS ...............................
2
5
5
4
4
........ 2.2 .......
........ 5.1.26 ....
....---- 5.2.6 ““”-........ 4.3.4.5 ...
...$.... 4,1 .......
6
195
209
164
151
RADIUS PROGRAMMING
FOR CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
(G22, G23)t .................................&quot;&quot;-&quot;&quot;&quot;&quot;----&quot;&quot;&quot;-&quot;&quot;2
RAPID TRAVERSE
RATE ........................................... 2
RAPID TRAVERSE
RATE.... ....................................... 2
RAPID TRAVERSE
RATE OVERRIDE SWITCH ....................... 5
REFERENCE POINT CHECK (G27) .................................. 2
““””””””2.8.9 ”-””-- 33
.....s.. 2.4 ....... 10
...~....2.4.1 ..... 10
........ 5.1.11 .... 192
........ 2.8.10 -... 34
........................................ 5
REFERENCE POINT LAMPS
Registrationof Macro Programs .................................... 2
RESET KEY ..........................................-.....O------4
RETURN FROM REFERENCE pOINT (G29) .......................... 2
........ 5,1.15 .... 193
........ 2.8.23.7... 83
.-o-----4.1.12 ..-.. 155
........ 2.8.12 ..... 36
v
INDEX
(Cent’d)
Subject
s
Par.
Chapter
Page
2ND REFERENCE POINT RETURN
(G30)t .....0....4................
...............................................
SEQUENCE NUMBER
SettingData of Bit Display Format .................................
SettingData of Decimal Display Format ............................
S4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING
At .......................................
2
2
4
4
2
........
........
........
........
........
2.8.13 ...... 37
2.2.2 .....
7
4.3.6.1 ... 168
4.3.6.3 ... 169
2.5,2 ..... 13
S4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING
B+ .......................................
SIMULTANEOUS
CONTROLLABLE
AXES ............................
SINGLE BLOCK SWITCH ...........................................
SKIP FUNCTION (G31)t ...........................................
SUBROUTINE
PROGRAM
(M98, M99) ...............o................
2
2
5
2
2
........
........
........
........
........
2.5,3 ..... 14
2.3.2 .....
7
5,1,16 .... 193
2.8.14 .... 37
2.7.5 ..... 20
Spindle Counter ...................................................
SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE SWITCHt ..............................
SPINDLE-SPEED FUNCTION
(S-FUNCTION) ........................
SPLICING NC TAPES ...............................................
S2-DIGIT PROGRAMMING
(SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS) .............
4
5
2
3
2
........
........
........
........
........
4.3.4.7 .... 165
5.1,13 .... 192
2.5 ........ 13
3.4.1 ..... 150
2.5.1 ..... 13
STANDARD
NC OPERATOR’S STATION WITH
CRT CHARACTER
DISPLAY .................................. 4 ..................... 151
Stock Removal in Facing (G72) .................................... 2 ........ 2.8.25.3... 101
Stock Removal in Turning (G71) ................................... 2 ........ 2.8.25.2... 95
.................APPENDIX 3 ................A-25
STORED LEAD SCREIi ERROR COMPENSATION
STORED STROKE LIMIT (G36-G39) ................................ 2 ........ 2.8.18 ..... 44
SWITCHING
UNITS ON THE CONTROL
STATION
................... 5 ........ 5,1 ....... 187
2 ........ 2.1 .......
2 ........ 2.1.1 .....
1
1
2 ........ 2.8.19.4...
2 ........ 2.6 ........
2 ........ 2.6.1 ......
61
14
14
TOOL
TOOL
OFFSET MEMORY t........................................... 2 ........ 2.6.2 .....
POSITION OFFSETS ......................................... 2 ........ 2.6,3 .....
14
15
W
WORK
COORDINATE
17
x
X-AXIS DIAMETER /RADIUS SWITCHING
T
TAPE FORMAT .............................................. .......
TAPE FORMAT .....................................................
The G40 GO1 X_ Z—I— K—; Command Cancel Function is
Also Availablein the AutomaticNose R Function ..............
TOOL FUNCTION
(T-FUNCTION) ..................................
.........................................
T 4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM
SHIFTt .............................. 2 ........ 2,6.4 .....
............................ 2 ........ 2.3.6 .....
10
1. INTRODUCTION
YASNAC
LX3,
is a combination
microprocessors
ing our modern
to provide
the
IIultraspeed
dual
processor
CNC”
. Part
. Programming
tool radius
The dual processor
CNC system
drastically
reduces
the data processing
time to meet highBlock-to-block
stop time despeed
cutting.
creased
by the use of high-speed
buffer
function and buffering
function.
. Enhanced
cutting
capability
includes
To meet FMS trends,
program
interrupt
function,
tool life control,
user macro,
tool set
error
correction,
stored
stroke
limit per tool,
and other
functions
can be installed.
memory
can
be
extended
to a
is further
compensation
facilitated
function,
by improved
G 50–work
coordinate
system
setting,
angle–specified
line–
ar interpolation,
and combined
beveling/rounding function.
a maximum
of 24 meters /rein feed
command,
precise
feed
command,
500-milimeter
lead
thread
cutting,
continuous
thread
cutting,
multiple
thread
cutting,
and variable
pitch
thread
cutting.
program
maximum of 320 meters . Its data input loutput
interface
is available
with FACIT,
RS232C
and,
in addition,
RS422 serial
interface
capable
of
high-speed
long distance
transmission.
of two high-performance
16-bit
Incorporatrunning
in parallel.
system
technique,
it is designed
highest
lathe
performance.
E
. The servo
function
uses a drastically
miniaturized and low-noise,
newly
transistorized
PWM
control
unit and a high-performance
DC servo
motor.
The position
feedback
is available
standard
pulse
generator
(PG)
system
the inductosyn-applied
complete
closed
system.
with the
and,
loop
2. PROGRAMMING
TAPE FORMAT
2.1
2. 1.1 TAPE FORMAT
A variable
block
format
conforming
to JIS# B
6313 is used for YASNAC
LX3.
Numerals
Table
2.1 shows
the tape format.
following
the address
characters
in Table
2.1
indicate
the programmable
number
of digits.
—
L
1EXAMPLE
a
+
4
3
L
Down to thtro
dec]mal
places
,n mm or inches
Four d[glts of
Integer
Sign
~
.Oodnaeadd=s
(X, ZI,
# Japanese
Industrial
K
)
Standard
Note:
The
decimal
point
may be omitted
in
For making
a program
actual
programming.
including
decimal
points,
refer
to 2. 1.3
Decimal
Point
Programming.
The leading
zeros
can be suppressed
for all address
codes.
Plus signs
need not be programmed, but all minus signs
must be programmed.
In the manual,
EOB code in a program
example
is represented
by a semicolon
(;) . In actual
programming,
CR (EIA
code)
or LF /NL (1S0
code ) should
(;).
be
used
instead
of the
semicolon
2, 1.1 TAPE FORMAT (Cent’d)
Table
2.1
Tape
Metric
No.
output
Inch Output
.—
~–-
Address
Metric
1
.2
Format
Input
Inch Input
Input
-
G-Function
i
-7—
G3
Coordinate Wmd
a:
5
(a-
X, Z, 1, K, U, W, R
B
B
. .
~
(a-44)
a_53
a-44
~~
I
‘—
Feed/rev
and
Thread Lead
*-
—-~
E26
.___B_
-
\
-~-——–
!
‘“-—---
.+F24
E34
B
-“;42
+——
F32
6
B
---
G3
53)
F 50
Feed/rein
Basic
Option
N4
I
.=-
4
B:
O:
~
-_
N4
No.
Inch Input
~
04
—-
I Sequence
Metric
04
Prcgram No
‘
——–
~
F 42
F 24
B
——
E44
E!26
———
~
B
.
S2
7
S2
I
-.
S-Function
–——–
54
B
.—
—+
S4
0
————
T(2+I)
8
T(2+I)
B
-.
T-Function
T(2 +2)
T(2 +2)
0
.—
9
M3
M-Function
U (P)
Dwel I
-.
11
M3
53
_+_
.-
Program No. Designation
‘(P)53
L....
Sequence
13
No. of Repetitions
No.
Designation
L8
Angle Designation
~ Line
for Straight
Angle Designation
~ Thread
for Multiple
2
I
;
B3
1. Inch/Metric
output is set by setting parameter *6007
2. Inch/Metric
input is set by setting (#?6001Do).
can be switched
D3,
by G 98, G 99
‘
__
---~
B
.––——
——
—..
.—
0
A (B) 33
——
or feed/rev
Q “) 4
L8
A (B) 33
Notes:
3. F codes for feed/rein
:
Q (P) 4
...+
15
.
‘4
4---
14
B
P4
——
.—
12
..—
r
-–-~-
10
——
—,
B3
o
Table
2.2
List of Program
Metric
Commands
Output
Inch Output
—-——-—
Address
I
Metric Input
Inch Input
Metric Input
Inch Input
Program No. O
1-9999
1-9999
Sequence
1-9999
1– 9999
0-199
0-199
No. N
G function G
I
Coordinate Addressl
* 99999.999
X, Z, 1, K, U, W, R
mm
? 3937.0078
in
1
1– 24000
F
Feedfmin
mmlmi n
~ 0.01 –944.88
in/rein
~:=
F
Feed/rev
0.01-500.00
mmlrev
0.0001-19.6850
in/rev
0.01 –1270.00
and Thread Lead
0.0001-
E
S2
0.0001 –50.00CQ inlrev
ooo~
o,CKD30419,685030 in/rev
500,0CK)0 mmlrev
mm/rev
1270.0000
o,oooolo_
mmlrev
o-99
50 .00Ci)OO inhev
o-99
——
S-f unction
I
i
T-function
L
S4
0-9999
T3
o-999
T4
o-9999
M-function
0-9999
I
I
o-999
Dwell U, P
0.001 – 99999.999
Program No. Designation
1-9999
Sequence
1–9999
No. Designation
No. of Repetitions
Angle Designation
o-999
o-9999
0-999
I
sec
0.001 –99999.999
1–9999
1– 9999
I
1-99999999
for Straight Lin#
O– ? 360.~0&deg;
sac
1– 99999999
I
0- t360.000&deg;
—
—
Angle Designation
for Multiple Thread
Note : For angle designation
0-360”
of included angle for G 76, see 2.8.26.8
0–360”
Automatic Threading
Cycle (G 76).
3
2.1.2
LIST
OF ADDRESS
CHARACTERS
AND
FUNCTION
Table
2.3
Address
CHARACTERS
Address
Characters
Meaning
Angle designation for GOl and Gill,
A
o
—–
Spindle shift angle Ol multiple thread, angle designation
.——
for multiple cornering
o
.—
——
o
———
User macro character
c
Basic
Optional
includfxf angle for G76
-.
B
B:
O:
———
Depth of cut and number of cutting cycles for G 71 to G 76
D
0
.—.
Specifications
E
Specifications
F
for precise feed and precise lead for cutting
——
~.
‘—
for normal feed and normal lead for cutting
B
+-
Preparatmy function
G
—–
—
(G-function)
B
.—
I._
H
-
User macro chaacter
o
.——
I
X-component
of arc center,
—
canned cycle parameter,
B, O
.——
—
———
User macro character
J
Z-component
Incremental
of arc center,
canned cycle p~ameter,
.-
Miscellaneous
M
Sequence
N
~
beveling value
function
+
—–——
–—
——
—–—
o
G 13 to G 16 angle and coordinate
.—.
—
(M-function)
B
B
I
.—
—t—
\
Program number
-
P
Dwell,
Q
Subprogram starting sequence
canned cycle starting sequence
-—
number, canned cycle ending sequence
B
~
——
I
number, program number, user macro number
-——
—
—–—
B, O
-—
Radius of arc, rounding value, tool radius value
—.
s
Spindle function
T
Tool function
X-axis
(S-function),
(T-function),
incremental
.—
maximum spindle revolution
tool coordinate memory number
.
—
B, O
number
——
u
B, O
.—
.—
number
—
F?
B, O
–——
value of variable lead thread
Number of subprogram repetition,
L
o
I
K
o
beveling value (radius value)
B, O
.—
B
B, O
—.
command value, dwell, canned cycle parameter
B, O
.—
v
o
User macro character
–—— .——
w
Z-axis
incremental
command value,
canned cycle parameter
B,
——
x
X-axis
coordinate
value
Y
User macro character
o
z
Z-axis
B
coordinate value
B
o
Table
2.4
Function
Function
ISO Code
EIA Code
I
Blank
Characters
Remarks
Error in significant data area in EIA Disregarded
NuL
in ISO
i
——~—
Disregarded
0S
BS
.—
e--
-~
HT
Tab
—
—
—-––~-
1------._
—+
End of Block (EOB)
LFINL
c!+
Disregarded
SP
Space
‘-
&gt;
SP
--+&gt;5::::----‘-2Z2::F
.. . ..
2-4-5bits
----/–
.1.
(
~ Control out (comment start)
bits
)
~ Control in (comment end)
-
- ._:-=..
-!I
]
~“—
2-4-7
‘-
Disregarded
EIA:
Special
code
1
..~
Disregarded,
User macro operator
*“”
‘-;~~
oto9
Minus sign, User macro operator
O to 9
I
Numerals
‘ Ad===
—~tx—----~
‘:+*
-------------‘‘-–-
‘-
:-ti~––--
1 Disregarded
—.~
-Parameter
~
starting
~
I
*
‘
:
I
s
I
i
*
!
[ Asterisk
‘---
(Including All Mark)
------!----
(Multiplication
operatcx)
‘
-H17
I
---4
Sharp (Variable designation)
-Ld=:k--
?
-.
------4
-1 “A:
‘“iacde
I
User macro operator
Notes :
1. Characters
other than the above cause error in significant data area.
2. Information between Control Out and Control In is ignored as insignificant
3. Tape code (EIA or ISO) is automatically
data.
recognized.
5
2.1.3
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
are
Numerals
containing
a decimal
point
may be used
as the dimensional
data of addresses
related
to
coordinates
(distance)
, angle,
time and speed.
They
can be input”
from punched
tape or MDI.
Decimal
points
dress
words.
Coodinate
Angle
can
Feedrate
used
in the
following
. MOO, MO1,
. M codes
manding
A,
U,
W,
I,
K,
R
F,
U,
P
[inch
X15.000
mm
or
z20.5—
220.500
mm
or
220.5000
(G99)F.2t
—FO.20
(for
mm/rev
F32)
(G98)F25.6
F25
(for
G04Pl.—
Dwell
When
data
control
without
regards
mm/min
F50)
1.000
in.
in.
or
Program
for the
point
is input,
mm (or 0.0001
the
inch).
NUMBER AND SEQUENCE
numbers
may be prefixed
to programs
purpose
of program
identification.
Up to 4 digits
may be written
after
an address
“O” as program
numbers.
Up to 99
character
program
numbers
can be registered
in the control,
and up to 199 or 999 can be registered
employing
an option.
One program
begins
ends with M02, M30
In
placed
placed
LABEL SKIP FUNCTION
2.1.4
the
becomes
CRT .
following
cases
effective,
the
and
. When
the
power
. When
the
RESET
supply
label
LSK
skip
of
the
part
end
end
a program
number,
and
M02 and M30 are
of
of
main programs,
subprograms.
and
M99 is
on the
on.
is executed.
While the label skip function
is effective,
all data
on the punched
tape up to the first
EOB code are
neglected.
When LSK is displayed
on the CRT
in
the MEM (memory)
or EDIT
(editing)
mode,
it indicates
the presence
of a pointer
at the leading
end
at the
at the
with
or M99.
function
is displayed
is turned
operation
the
time
compensaTo reduce
Buffering
When opera5 in M93
is reduced
PROGRAM NUMBER
2.2.1
F25. 60 mm/min
(for
F32)
sec
a decimal
11111as o.001
:
2.2 PROGRAM
NUMBER
FO. 2000 infrev
(for
F24)
or
com-
Block-to-block
stop
time
due
to
required
to compute
tool
radius
tion is not eliminated
or remains.
this
stopping
time,
use
2.7.3
Function
(M93,
M92) (optional).
tion
of consecutive
blocks
up to
mode,
inter-block
stoppage
time
to zero.
]
X15.
M30
( 6 maximum)
set by parameter
to stop advance–reading.
2.
EXAMPLE
X15.0000
M codes
This
function
is effective
for G22 and G 23
where
the control
is provided
with Radius
Programming
for Circular
Interpolation
option.
E
[mm]
following
1.
B
word:
words:
Z,
M02,
the
.
adNotes
X,
words;
words:
Time
be
The blocks
including
not read in advance
program.
PROGRAM
WITH
PROGRAM
NO.
10
ER (or % at 1S0 code)
parts
of the tape.
Notes
1.
PROGRAM
WITH
PROGRAM
No.
is punched
1224
on both
end
:
The
blocks
for
optional
/M02; , /M30; , /M99;
of programs.
block
are
not
skip
such
regarded
as
as end
2. 1.5 BUFFER REGISTER
2.
During
normal
operation,
one block
of data is
read
in advance
and compensation
is computed
for the follow-on
operation.
In the tool radius
compensation”mode,
two
blocks
of data or up to 4 blocks
of data are read
in advance
and compensation
computing
required
for the next
operation
is executed.
One block
can contain
up to 128 characters
including
EOB .
It
&amp;
possible
with
a parameter
change
(#6201Do)
, to make the reading
of M02, M30,
and M99 ineffective
as a program
end,
and
to make the succeeding
ER (EIA)
or % (ISO)
as a sign of program
end.
2.3
SEQUENCE NUMBER
2. 2.2
Integers
consisting
of up to 4 digits
may be written following
an address
character
N as sequence
numbers.
Sequence
numbers
are reference
numbers
for
blocks,
and do not have
any influence
on the
meaning
and sequence
of machining
processes.
Therefore,
they
may be sequential,
non-sequential,
and
duplicated
numbers,
also
not using
Generally,
any sequence
number
is possible.
sequential
numbers
are convenient
numbers.
When searching
for
to search
or specify
hand.
sequence
program
as
COORDINATE
commands
for movements
in axis direcGenerally,
tions
and commands
for setting
coordinate
systems are called
coordinate
words,
and coordinate
words
consist
of address
characters
for desired
axes and numerals
representing
dimensions
of
directions.
COORDINATE WORDS
2.3.1
sequence
I
1 I
Address of Coor-
numbers,
numbers
1.
x,
3.
z
I
:
Absolute coordinate position of t~get
position
Incremental
U, W
Five
or
sequence
2.
Meaning
dinate Words
be sure
before-
Main Axis
Notes
WORDS
more digits
number.
must
not
be
written
I
as a
—
When two or more blocks
have
the same sequence
number,
only one is retrieved
and
read,
and no more searching
is performed.
Blocks
without
sequence
numbers
can also
be searched
for with respect
to the address
data contained
in the blocks.
Direction in X-axis,
W:
Direction in Z-axis)
Incremental
+
Radius
distance
(U:
distance between
start point
and center of circular arc.
1, K
Value
(1:
X-axis
component,
for Circular
K:
Z-axis
component)
Interpolation
R’
Radius value of circular arc
I
Note:
When G 90 and G 91 are used, addresses
X and Z are
not fixed as absolute value and follow accofdi ng to G 90/G 91
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP
2.2.3.
(h - /91+]
designation.
Incremental
Those
blocks
in which
“ /n” (n = ( 1 - 9) is inIn and the end of
cluded
are neglected
between
optional
block
skip
that block,
when the external
switch
for that number
“n” is on.
EXAMPLE
/2
N1234
When the
neglected,
this
x1OO
switch
for
and when
block
N
GO1
is read
1234
With
“ 1, “
Notes
:
/3
Z200;
/2 is on, the. entire block is
the switch
for /3 is on,
GO1
xlOO;
be
The control
provides
two-axis
control
for X- and
Z–axis.
Number
of simultaneously
controllable
axes,
when commanded
in the same block,
is
two axes ,
Xand
Z.
For the axis without
commands,
movement
will not occur.
LEAST INPUT INCREMENT AND LEAST
2.3.3
OUTPUT INCREMENT
.
omitted.
The optional
block
skipping
process
is executed while
the blocks
are being
read into the
buffer
resister.
Once the blocks
have been
read,
subsequent
switching
on is ineffective
to skip the blocks .
While reading
this function
3.
The
block
and
/1 is
Absolute and
as if
1!l!! may
2.
refer to 2. 3.5
SIMULTANEOUS CONTROLLABLE AXES
2.3.2
2,3,3.1
1.
For details,
Inputs.
or punching
is ineffective.
skip
a basic
/2 -
/9 is
out
an
The
by
Input Unit and 10 Times Input Unit
minimum
punched
input
tape
units
or
Least
MDI
that
are
can
shown
be
commanded
below.
Input Increment
programs,
option
function,
one.
X-axis
is specified for diameter,
7
2.3.3.1
Input
Unit
and
10
Times
Input
2.3.4
Unit
MAXIMUM PROGRAMMABLE
DIMENSIONS
(Cent’d)
Inch/MM
input
is selected
by setting
#6001D0.
Inch/MM
input
selection
by G20/G21
is optional.
Selection
of multiplication
factor
xl /x10 is made
by parameter
#6006D 5.
Maximum
programmable
are shown
below .
values
Maximum
Programmable
Metric
Metric
Output
In O. 01 mm increment
eration
must be made
. Programming
o Write
for
operation
o Programming
. Program
Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
system,
the following
opin the unit of O. 01 mm.
operation
in MDI
for
in TAPE
in MEMORY
operation
in EDT
mode.
mode .
If NC tape programmed
by O. 001 mm is fed
into or stored
in an equipment
set by O. 01
mm increment,
the machine
will move ten
times the intended
dimensions.
If the increment
system
is switched
when the
contents
of NC tape are stored
in memory,
the machine
will move by ten times or one
tenth
of the commanded
dimensions.
When the stored
program
is punched
out on
the tape+,
the stored
f?gures
are punched
out “as stored”
regardless
of switching
of
the increment
system.
factor
10X
(10
times
the
input
unit)
is effective
for distance
command
only.
It does not function
on the designation
of
When multiplication
factor
time,
angle”,
etc.
10X is set as effective
( #6006D5 = 1) , the
same address
word
is multiplied
by 10 or not
depending
on type
of G command.
Inch
;—Not
;—
2, 3. 3.2
multiplied
Multiplied
by
by
10 (Time)
10 (Distance)
Least Output Increment
Least output increment is the minimum unit of
tool motion. Selection of metric system or inch
system is made by parameter (#6007D3) .
Least
“-”J
Inch output
8
Output
Increment
X-axis
(Radius value)
Metric output
0.0005
--”1-””-
in
input
Y 99999.999
mm.
input
I
‘99999
.999 in.
In incremental programming,
specified values must
not exceed the maximum programmable values. In
absolute programming,
move amount of each axis
must not exceed the maximum programmable value.
THE MACHINE
MAY NOT FUNCTION
PROPERLY
IF MOVE
COMMAND
OVER
THE MAXIMUM
PROGRAMMABLE
VALUES
IS GIVEN.
The above maximum
programmable
values also
apply to distance command
addresses 1, K, R
in addition to move command
addresses X , U , W .
2.3.5 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL INPUTS
!
Z-axis
mm
0.001 mm
0.00005 in.
‘-”--””
0.0001 in.
“---”-
input
Both
absolute
be used for the
EXAMPLE:
X..
Incremental
es U and
incremental
input
can
is
specified
.
input
Z..
is
by
the
addresses
;
specified
by
the
address-
W.
EXAMPLE:
U..
input
in one
EXAMPLE:
and
control.
Absolute
input
Xand
Z.
used
G04 U...
-3937.0078
Output
Absolute
EXAMPLE
GOO U...
mm.
mode.
:
Multiplication
-9999.999
—
input
Metric
Inch
command
mode.
operation
editing
Inch
move
Values
input
— -—
Tool offset
value
must always
be written
in O. 001
mm (or O. 0001 inch) , and offset
is possible
in
these
units.
of
.
and
block
X..
u..
W.,
.
;
incremental
mixedly.
.
.
W..
z.
;
;
input
can
be
When addresses
X and U or addresses
Note :
and W are used in one block,
the latter
is effec
tive.
Table
Address
Increment
System
Absolute
Input
Diameter
—
z
u
Diameter
—
I
Radius
Position in X-axis
direction *
Position in Z-axis
direction *
Move amount in X-axis
direction
Move amount in Z-axis
direction
Distance
canter
in X-axis
direction from starting point of arc to
Distance
in Z-axis
direction from starting point of arc to
Input
—
K
Incremental
Meaning
Input
w
incremental
2.5
Designation
x
Incremental
The addresses
1 and K for designation
of arccenter
must be specified
by the incremental
dimension.
Z
-
center
Direct programming of circular arc
Input
+x
G code
Meaning
I
G9CI
I
Absolute command
Incremental
G 91
As shown
below,
G90 and
effective
only to addresses
command
G 91 commands
X and Z.
are
—+Z
Addresses
b+-Xand
Z:
Absolute
U and
W:
Incremental
*
MDI modes
~+
Input
Cases
mental
where
by
the
movement
Absolute Coordinate Values and
G 90
commands)
,::::al*
Input
is
EXAMPLE
:
Incremental
Coordinate
~ G 91 Command
TAPE, tvfEtvf,
Since
X and
U are
designated
values
in diameter,
the actual
the half of the values.
Fig. 2.1
G 90 Command
Incremental
. When special
G code I (basic)
selected,
G90 and G91 codes
or
can
and
incre-
II (option)
be used.
move
GOO
X40.
Z50. ;
o“. . .
command
. Auxiliary
data,
1, K, R, etc. , of circulai
interpolation
are always
incremental
commands.
Values
and G91 (absolute
are used.
G91
is
Note :
G90 and G91 cannot
be programmed
together
in the same block.
If they
are written
in the same block,
the one written
later
only is
effective.
EXAMPLE:
GO1
G 91 is effective,
become
incremental
G90
and
x80.
in this
in both
G91
block,
the
z60.
;
commands
X and
Z axes.
2.3.6
X-AXIS DIAMETER/RADIUS
SWITCHING
2.4
Addresses
X and U for X–axis
coordinate
words
This is called
are specified
by diameter
value.
The addresses
X can be
diameter
designation.
used for designation
of both diameter
and
is made by the setting
radius . The switching
of parameter
#6006D s.
o:
Diameter
1:
Radius
designation
2. 4.1 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE
The rapid
traverse
motion
is used
for the motion
for the Positioning
(GOO) and for the motion
for
the Manual Rapid
Traverse
(RAPID)
.
The traverse
rates
differ
among
the axes
since
they
are
dependent
on the machine
specification
and are
determined
by the machine
tool builders.
The
rapid
traverse
rates
determined
by the machine
are set by parameters
in advance
for individual
axes.
designation
When the tool is moved
in rapid
traverse
in
each axial direction
simultaneously,
motions
in
these
axial directions
are independent
of each
other,
and the end points
are reached
at differTherefore,
ent
times among
these
motions.
motion
paths
are normally
not straight.
w-zPP+z
I
(a)
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE
I
In the
ameter
case of DiDesignation
(b)
In the case of radius Designation
Address X command
Address U command
X-axis
position display
I
I
Tool position offset
For each axis,
rapid
traverse
rates
can
set by parameters
#6280,
#6281 at some
suitable
multiple
of 125 p /sec.
Least
output
increment)
(p:
(2)
The
2.6
Diameter
Radius
Programming
Programming
Diameter value
rapid
uPPer
traverse
limit
Radius value
rate
shown
I
i
Inch Input
can
be
set
be
to the
below.
Metric Input
~
mental value
The
1 ~dius
Incremental
~
valuevalue
24,000
I
mmlmin
2,400 inlmin
upper
limit
for
X-axis
speed
is half
the
listed
values.
The optimum
value
of upper
limit is set according
to the machine.
Refer
to the machine
tool builder’s
manual,
for the definite
value.
Diameter value
Diameter value
2.4.2
FEED FUNCTION (F- AND E-FUNCTION)
G code listed
and E function
Nose radius R
Radius value
1
G code
below
must be
is commanded.
I
designated
before
Function
t
Feedrate F, E in
X-axis
direction
I
Radius val uehev
“-*-”Radius value
interpolation
G90-G
G70-G76,
G 98
Designation
of feedrate
in mm/min.
G99
Designation
of feedrate
in mm/rev.
Radius value/rein
Radius data 1,
R for circular
Note : For the details, refer to 2.8.28, “Feed Function
Design ation.”
94,
Parameters
for
cornering, and
multlple cornering,
a
Diameter incre-
I
I
Fo, 25%
rates,
set by
(1)
t
value
rates,
traverse
feedrate
Range of Rapid Traverse Rate
Fig. 2.2
Table
For override
rapid
traverse
50% and 100% of the basic
rapid
Fo is a constant
are available.
parameter
(#6231) .
Radius value
Since
F, E codes
are modal,
these
codes
are
effective
until next
F , E codes
are given.
However,
when
G98/G99
are switched,
new F
code must be designated.
D, 1, K, P, Q, R
In G98 mode,
E code cannot
be commanded.
If
commanded,
PROG
ERROR
“030” will be activated.
F ,
2.4. 2.1 Feed Per Revolution
EXAMPLE
(G 99 Mode)
G99
(1)
Tool
feed per revolution
of
be specified
with F (normal
feed)
.
(2)
the spindle
can
feed)
or E ( fine
(r/rein)
GO1 U1OO.
In
The feed ranges
that can be specified
the F and E codes
are as follows.
S350
the
F x
by
F200
above
S
;
. . . In
;
case,
= 2.0
the
case
feedrate
mm/rev.
x
35o
input
E34
Metric
output
input
E 500.0000
F 0.0301 –F19.6Ek50 in./rev
input
Inch
output
Inch
input
4.
in./rev
F 0,01 –F1270.00
F 32
E34
E 0.0003-E
F 24
FO.001 –F 50.0000
E 26
F O.000010-E
ranges
are
depending
subject
on the
ql
mmlrev
E
Metric
These
feed
restrictions
E 0.0001-
mm/rev
I I
I 26 1 E0.000004–E 19.685000
F 24
Inch
,
~
mmlrev
1270.0000
I
F(E) XS~24,000mm/min
Inch output
I
F(E)XS
F command
at linear
or circular
in–
represent
the tangential
feedrate
axes are simultaneously
controlled.
EXAMPLE
1
G99
S1OOO (r/rein)
GO1
U60,
F
the
x
S
W40.
above
5 mm/reV
0,
=
500 mm/min
following
speed
S.
~3002
rr
in./min
Io(lf)
r/rein
#+
@~
x
Lz-axis
feedrate
feedrate
component
component
TANGENTIAL
remains below 12,000 mm/min or
Refer to the machine tool builder’s manual.
——-
I
IO’
~
limit of the machine.
EXAMPLE
~ 300 mm/mln
FEEDFIATE
+x
1,200 in./min.
400 mm/mln
.Z
(a)
2
G99
s1OOO
(r/rein)
G03
U..
W..
;
:
1.
A command
2.
Any minus value
should
not be specified
If specified,
the machine
F commands.
not operate
properly.
“FO”
causes
data
for
will
EXAMPLE
F-250
;
. . . . .
-
.
I
. .
F20
;
errors.
In
3.
x
is
~.o
2. This uppar limit may still be reduced by the performance
Notes
feedrate
+ 4002
I
I
;
the
=
1. Program feed per revolution within such a range that the
component
F50
case,
Notes :
X-axis
;
‘X–axis
S 2,400
700 mm/mn
Values
of
terpolation
when two
In
50.00C0OO in/rev
Metric output
FEEDRATE
I
mmlrev
in./rev
to the
spindle
is:
r/rein
+x
Feed/Revel ution
F 0.01- F 500.00
F 32
Metric
F32.
= 700 mm/m~n
G 99 Mode, F and E Feed Ranges
Rangeof
of
Wrong
Feedrate
commands
in the direction
X–axis
must be given
in radius.
of
the
above
FxS=
the
case,
x
0.2
(mm/rev)
=
200 mm/min
.
4fx2
+
feedrate
is:
1000
(r/rein)
fz2
CENTER
the
+x
t
L----
fx
.Z
(b)
11
2.4. 2.2
(1)
Tool feed
can be specified
in/rein with F codes .
(2)
EXAMPLE
Feed Per Minute (G 98 Mode)
The
with
feed range
F codes
is
in mm/min
that can be
as follows.
or
programmed
1
G98
;
GO1
u60.
In
this
W40.
F500
case,
F = 500
= ~3002
(mm/min)
~
G 98 Mode F Code Feed Range
4002
+
1. Program feed-per-minute
ccmponent
values so that the X-axis
wi II not exceed
speed
half the above upper limit
feedrates.
EXAMPLE
component
~-a~i~
component
Lx-axis
Notes :
;
2
G98
;
G03
X..
.
Z..
.
1..
.
F200
;
EXAMPLE
G98
In
GOI U300. —!
F1200’
(Metric output, metric input)
2. The upper limit value is further subject to the limitation
impoeed by the machine performance.
machine tool build&amp;s
manual.
to be set in parameter
#6228
this
case,
F=200=ifxZ+fz
(mm/min)
Z
Refer to the
CENTER
This upper limit value is
–x
Notes
1.
I
:
Do not write
F command
in
FO or
negative
values.
2.
Commands
speeds
in
in the
radius.
X-axis
direction
indicate
AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION AND
DECELERATION
2,4.3
Example
Acceleration
and deceleration
for rapid
traverse
and for cutting
feed
are automatically
performed
without
programming
,
G98;
GO1
X200.
F700
;
-!-+
2.4. 3.1 Acceleration
and Deceleration of Rapid
Traverse and Manual Feed
FEEDRATE
700 mm,’mlq
F 700
l——————+,
Values of F command
at linear or circular
interpolation represent the tangential feedrate when
trolled.
12
two
axes
are
simultaneously
con-
In the following
matic acceleration
(See
Fig.
operation,
the pattern
of autoand deceleration
is linear.
2.3. )
Positioning
(GOO)
Manual
rapid
Manual
continuous
traverse
Manual
HANDLE
(RAPID)
feeding
feeding
(JOG)
(HANDLE)
Once specified,
S-code
is modal and effective
until the next
S-code.
When the spindle
stops
M05 (spindle
stoD) , S-command
is stored
in
memor~
of the u~it.
at
EXAMPLE
GOO
TIME
S11
M03
;
. . . S command
Spindle
CW
—
Fig. 2.3
Rapid
traverse
rate and the acceleration
eration
constant
of rapid
traverse
rate
set by parameter.
( #6280 to #6287)
/decelcan be
x..
.
z..
.
;
Z..
.
F..
.
;
GO1
Sll:
Effective
Sll:
Effective
S22:
Effective
1
As shown
in the following
operation,
linear
acceleration
and deceleration
ified.
(independent
of each axis)
o Cutting
feed
(GO1
the two–step
can be spec(See
Fig.
2.4. )
GOO
X..
.
Z.. . M05
. . c Spindle
..-M03
to G03)
—
P.——
v
x..
.
Z..
.
GO1
G00
S22
;
stop
1
;
z..
.
;
F..
.
;
z..
.
F..
;
x . . .
.
VELOCITY
Note :
t
TIME
Fig.
—
time constants
feedrate
bias
by parameters.
are
set
is set at
( #6092,
at 2 msec inter2kpps intervals
#6093)
Note :
The automatic
acceleration
/deceleration
parameters
are set to the optimum
values
for the
Do not change
the setting
respective
machines.
unless
it is required
for special
application.
2.5
SPINDLE-SPEED
BCD output
is
S and two-digit
sent to the
command
2.4
2.5.2
Feedrate
vals and
The two-digit
machine
when
is issued.
FUNCTION
PROGRAMMING AT
S4-DIGIT
S (S ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ) are
speed
in r/rein.
(1)
Four digits
following
to specify
the spindle
(2)
When S command
is given
in a block
together
with M03 (spindle
forward
running)
or the
proceeds
M04 (reverse
running)
, the control
to the next
block
after
the spindle
speed
reaches
the speed
given
by the S code.
For
details,
refer
to the machine
tool builder’s
manual.
(S-FUNCTION)
used
EXAMPLE
2.5,1 S 2-DIGIT PROGRAMMING
(SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS)
S1OOO M03,
The spindle
lowing
the
For
each
speed
address
S code
speed
(r/rein),
manual.
is specified
by
S (S00 to S99)
and
refer
its
two
.
corresponding
tO the
machine
digits
fol-
spindle
tool
builder’s
SPEED
s
1I
1000 FUMIN
————
I
SYNCHRONIZATION
.
.
~
ACTUAL
SPINDLE
SPEED
When a move command
and an S code are issued
in a block,
execution
will depend
on the machine
tool design
and construction
(Whether
the S command is executed
together
with the move com–
mand or after
the completion
of tool movement)
.
Refer
to the machine
tool builder’s
manual.
I
I
u
t
START OF THE BLOCK
13
2. 5.2
(3)
to the
Notes
within
the
by spindle
range
gear.
of
spindle
speed
Notes
.
When the control
is provided
with the S 4digit
command
function,
the “Spindle
speed
override”
option
can be built into it.
With machine
tools with which
the main spindle gear ratio changes
can be specified
by
M codes,
first
write
the applicable
M code
gear
Refer
the machine
tool builder
gear ratios,
the speeds
and other
details.
ratio,
and
to the
data
for the number
at various
gear
then,
of
of
ratios,
:
1.
When the tool number
is changed
by the T
command,
a turret
lathe begins
to index
the
tool instantaneously.
Therefore,
the turret
should
be removed,
before
the command,
from the area where” an accidental
collision
might occur.
2.
Tool
:
The lower
limit of the spindle
speed
depends
on the spindle
drive.
Refer
to the machir,e
tool builder’s
manual
for the low-speed
limit.
Negative
S commands
must not be programmed.
to preselect
the desired
write
the S command.
4.
specified,
manual
S command.
When S command
is changed
after
the spindle start
by M03 or M04, S command
should
be given
selected
3.
For applicable
tool number
to be
refer
to the machine
tool builder’s
are modal.
Although
the spindle stops
at the M05 command,
the S comTherefore,
when M03
mand is retained.
(or M04) is given,
the spindle
runs accord-
(4)
2.
(2)
A+(Cont’d)
S commands
ing
1.
PROGRAMMING
S 4-DIGIT
2.6.2
offset
number
PROGRAMMING
tool
offset.
The area in which
tool position
offset
values,
tool
radius
compensation
values,
and other
compensation data are stored
is called
Offset
Memory .
(1)
The entire
including
memory
areas of Offset
the options
are as shown
[
‘TOOL
S 4-DIGIT
the
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY+
When the control
is provided
with this func tion,
the spindle
maximum
speed
commanding
function
with the instruction
“G50
S . . .
;“
can be used.
2. 5.3
00 cancels
MEMORY
NO
OFFSET
MEMORY
,50 GROUP5MA:
B+
OFFSET
Memory
below.
f
Ii
---
‘---’”--–_-–
‘---
~:~i;:;
-MEMORY
(1)
This
function
is to modify
the
mand A output
freely
through
mable machine
interface.
S4-digit
comthe program-
I
“TOOL
(49
(2)
Basically,
this function
is used in the same
as the S 4-digit
command
A function,
way
but it is normally
used to set the manually
controlled
spindle
speeds
controlled
by the
rotary
switch
on the m“achine control
station
corresponding
to S command
speeds.
For
the details
of S command
speeds,
refer
to
the machine
tool builder’s
manual.
2.6.1
(1)
TOOL FUNCTiON
(T-FUNCTION)
T 4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING
Four digits
following
the tool number.
the
address
T
TDDDU
Tool offset
(O - 160r
1
14
Tool
number
50)
selection
specifies
GROUPS
SUPPLEMENT
51
\
—
MAXI
‘g
1‘I&amp;/
“TOOL
RADIUS
MEMORY
-r-
Note :
For the actually
usable
range
within
the
above
Offset
Memory,
refer
to the machine
tool
builder’s
manual.
(2)
2.6
COORDINATE
MEMORY
J
;0
The
“tool offset
Nos. “ specified
by the T
function
directly
correspond
to the “offset
memory
Nos. , “ and their
contents
are used
for various
compensations.
However,
the
tool coordinate
memory
Nos.
( for setting
the
work
coordinate
system)
correspond
to the
tool selection
Nos . in the T function
. The
work
coordinate
shift
memory
is an independent function,
not related
to the T function.
)
(3)
Write
these
data in the memory,
before
starting to operate
the machine
under
automatic
procedure,
refer
co; trol. - For the writing
to 4.3.5, “ Displaying
and Writing
Tool Offset
into Tool Coordinate
Values .“ For writing
Memory,
follow
the procedure
described
in
6.2.3, “ Work Measurement
Value
Direct
Input *.”
(3)
When the coordinate
value
of the actual
tool tip
has changed
due to tool wear or some other
reasons,
the tool position
offset
values
should
be
Thus,
the programmed
machining
is
set again.
(1)
without
Range
of
correcting
tool
the
position
The programmable
is shown
below.
range
OFFSET
of
offset
offset
motion
VALUE
I
T
(+6X1,
value
tool
position
T101
program.
offset
tool
When there
is no move command
in the block,
the tool moves
only by the offset
value.
Once,
the tool offset
number
is designated,
the tool moves
always
to the offset
position
until another
number
is designated.
When
the other
offset
number
is designated
or
the offset
value
is changed,
the offset
value
is compensated
for by the amount of the
difference
between
the old and new offset
values.
When the tool offset
number
is specified,
the offset value
corresponding
to the tool offset
number
is added
algebraically
to the command
value
in
the program
and the tool is moved
to the offset
Therefore,
the difference
between
the
position.
coordinate
values
of the programmed
tool tip and
the actual tool tip must be stored
into tool offset
memory
in advance
as the offset
value.
attained
of
As mentioned
above,
when the tool specified
by the address
T and 4 digits
is moved,
the
offset
value
corresponding
to the tool offset
number
is added
to the command
value
in the
program
algebraically
and the tool tip is
moved
to the offset
position.
TOOL POSITION OFFSETS
2.6.3
Description
+ 6z~)
T115
value
(+
T
6X2,
+ 6Z2)
+x
OFFSET
{3
MOTION
+- 8Z2:
-—
Metric
Inch
input
I
o- f9999.999rnnl
+
,
out put
Inch input
I
O–
Sign
of
tool
position
offset
COMPLETION
,,1+
L!x~
OF
@
.-8KL
2
fE@3.&amp;307in.
7 L?z.
( X,z)
(2)
1
values
store
the tool position
offset
values
in the
The offset
value
is the deOffset
Memory.
viation
from the tool tip position
of the
reference
tool which
is determined
as zero.
EXAMPLE
‘Tlol
;
. . . . . . . . . . ...+...”..
a
+x
tiOLpO’’T’oN
GO1
z
I
I
I
J.
I_
6“
~
P~OGnAtMMED
–x
Fig. 2.5
X..
.
T115
I&amp;
Z..
.
;
.
...... a
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..... B
F(E)
. . .
;
( Block
of the
offset
motion)
DIAMETER)
+Z
(4)
Move
speed
with
tool
offset
The move speed
of tool offset
is determined
by the feedrate
command
that is effective
in
the block.
Therefore,
the feedrate
command
should
be issued
before
(GOO or GO1 F ..)
or in the block
containing
the tool offset
number.
15
---——
25
—————.
EXAMPLE
3 TOOL POSITION OFFSETS (Cent’d)
~
EXAMPLE
G50
X..
.
2..
.
GOO
S..
.
M03
x..
.
z..
;
TO1O8
.
;
GOO
T0202
;
GO1
X.. . Z.. . F.. .
;
GO1
U+. . .
.
Off set mot ion is
made at the rapid
traverse
rate.
;
~
Instructions
offset
for
commanding
tool
T0216
I
position
a.
F..
,OE ~~L
OFFSET
;
l/AL~JE 3ET’,vEEN
AhD T 0202
MOVEMEN”
,
T
‘
-~1
~-
OF COMMAND
UOVEMENT
~,
wITHO IIT CCIMMAN17
‘- ‘-”
–;y
“-=.
STARTING
.Z
~
Tool offset
starts
at the block
in which
the
T-code
is commanded.
When T–code
is read,
the tool selection
signal
( BCD)
is fed and
the tool starts
to move by the offset
value
corresponding
to the tool offset
number.
Since T code is modal,
it is retained
until
the other
T code is designated.
T0216
/
,.L
Tool position
offset
is executed
by designating the tool offset
number
corresponding
to
the actual
tool must be designated.
. .
DICFER~NcE
-x
(5)
W-.
POINT
EXECUTION
T07. R Ih
&lt;
- ‘-
(BEFOQE
OF COMMAND
THE
~,,
When the T command
and the move command
are issued
in the same block,
the tool nose
Therefore,
in
moves
to the offset
position.
the taper
angle
is corrected
the above
case,
by the difference
of the offset
value
between
T0202 and T0216.
EXAMPLE
GOO
b.
When
T0202
the
;
tool
. . .
The tool number
N 02 is
selected.
Tool offset
motion
is made accord–
ing to the contents
of
the tool offset
number
02.
offset
value
must
the T–code
whose
tool offset
written
should
be commanded
be
number
again.
d .
EXAMPLE
changed,
is re–
EXAMPLE
GOO
T0202
GO1
X..
.
Z..
GO1
T0216
;
Note
case,
c.
that
the
When the tool position
offset
is required
to
cancel,
the T code with the tool offset
num❑ ~ 00) must be commanded.
ber O or 00 (T
The tool Dosition
offset
is instantaneously
cancelled~
GOO
T0202
GO1
X..
GO1
U+. . .
GOO
X.. . Z.. . T0200
.
Z..
.
F..
.
;
F..
.
;
.
F..
.
;
Tool offset
number
02
is replaced
with
16.
Tool offset
motion
is made
at the cutting
feedrate
,
if the tool number
is changed
tool indexing
motion
starts.
@
W-.
. .
ro216
. . . . The
offset
motion
is
cancelled.
Tool moves
according
to
the position
in this
The angle of taper cutting can be changed
by the following procedure.
T code for change of tool offset number
should be commanded
in the block together
with cuttin~ feed command .
;
specified
Xand
Z.
The
into
G(IO
T0200
block
~
of EXAMPLE
two blocks.
X..
.
;
Z..
.. . . .
.
can
be
by
divided
;
Only cancel
motion
is made
at rapid
traverse
rate.
Notes
1.
Tool position
operation.
2.
The tool offset
must
or M30 is commanded.
3.
The tool
Automatic
4.
When
mand
the
offset
offset
Zero
is
be
should
Return
cancelled
by
cancelled
RESET
before
M02
tool
offset
number
When the Zero Return
ecuted,
the tool offset
tally.
6.
The
zero
the
tool
the
the
med
becomes
O (or
(4)
When the contents
of Work Coordinate
System Shift
Memory
are rewritten,
the new
shift
values
become
effective
from the moment the operation
a, b, c, or d above
is
subsequently
executed,
(5)
The
procedure
of
5.2.3, “ MEASURED
WORKPIECE
VALUE
DIRECT
INPUT”
is
effective
for
the Work
Coordinate
Shift
Memory
with an offset
memory
No,
“00. “
00) .
(auto
or manual)
is exis cancelled
automati–
tool offset
must be also cancelled
before
Return
Check
( G27) is commanded.
If
G27 is commanded
at the state where
the
offset
is effective,
the control
will be
state of Zero Return
check
error,
because
tool offset
value
is added
to the program–
position.
this
function,
coordinate
systems
set
by
the Work Coordinate
System
Setting
function,
can be shifted
through
desired
distances.
(2)
This
shift
function
is executed
any of the conditions
described
and d is met.
Notes
a.
When
G50
2.
T~noO
b.
When
G50GT
G50
work
system
coordinate
is
—
;.
T~UOJ;
. . . .
Tool
position
. . . Work
offset
coordinate
cancel
system
setting
The tool offset
No
00 in these
instructions
has nothing
to do with the contents
of Work
Coordinate
Shift
Memory.
3.
values
become
effective
described
below,
coordinate
:
The shift
command
by the Work Coordinate
Shift
function
can not be cancelled
unless
the setting
value
is changed
to “O. “ NO
reset
operation
is effective
in canceling
it.
G50,
etc.
Shift
values
in the X and Z axes can be
written
into the Work Coordinate
System
Shift
Memory
(one group ) with which
the
offset
memory
No. is “ 00, ” by the same procedure
as for writing
tool offset
values.
The written
shift
from the moment
at each time
in a, b, c,
1.
WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT i
2.6.4
(1)
(3)
be cancelled
also before
( G 28) is commanded.
the control
is reset
by M02 or M30 comor by executing
RESET
operation,
5.
With
For positive
shift
values
AX and AZ, the
coordinate
axes are shifted
in the direction
shown
above.
Xo and Zo are original
coordinate
system
setting
values.
:
When G50 coordinate
system
is set or when
position
absolute
display
is reset
by ORG key
1, parameter
#6018 D7 determines
whether
work
coordinate
system
shift
amount is effective or not.
set
system
is
set
NEW
2,6.5
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
SETTING
FUNCTION
c.
When
automatic
coordinate
system
is
set
d,
Position Absolute display is reset by ORG
key
That is, when these coordinate systems listed above are set, the-shift values are simply
Tools are not shifted.
added.
Overview
A completely
new approach
setting
is employed
in this
are the features.
(a)
A coordinate
system.
(b)
The tool nose
on the current
(c)
There
in the
system
to coordinate
system
function.
The following
is
a machine
coordinate
-x
4-v,
.
2.6.5.1
.
.
.
~
z
20
ORIGINAL
COORDINATE
AXES
Xoi2
—
point
can always
be displayed
value
display
(absolute)
.
+2
is no need
program.
to
set
the
coordinate
system
p%
8
SHIFT
~+z
SHIFT COORDINATE
I, AX,12
2.6.5,2
AXES
Fig. 2.6
Functions
What kind
performed
of coordinate
and at what
system
frequency
setting
?
is
17
2.6.5.3
Operation
Expression
for Coordinate
System
Setting
The
following is the
coordinate
frequencies
X-axis
operation
setting
at
system
?
coordinate
value
expression
various
time
for
= Machine
position
+ tool
coordinate
memory
+
work
coordinate
system
shift
amount
Z-axis coordinate value = Machine position + tool
coordinate memory +
work coordinate system
shift amount
position
is
called
the
2.6.5,5
Timing of Coordinate
the Automatic Mode
The machine
machine.
position
(2)
The tool coordinate memory value number is
of two types; the number when the timing for
the next coordinate system setting is manual
and when it is automatic.
Setting
under
Under
the automatic
mode,
coordinate
system
setting
is performed
when
the turret
is called
up
The tool coordinate
memory
by the T code.
number
uses the turret
number
commanded
on the
command
screen
or the offset
number
for
operation.
Unlike
the conventional
offset
method,
the
code command
in the coordinate
system
setting
specification
is given
as follows.
T
The setting
of parameter
#6011 DO decides
whether
to set the tool coordinate
memory
number
at the front
two digits
of T4-digit,
or at the last
two digits
of the T4-digit,
The execution
setting
differs
as
setting.
( 1)
System
(1)
of the
follows,
When set at the
(#6011 DO = O)
T**
front
coordinate
system
by the parameter
two
digits
$$
T—
(3)
The work
called
the
2.6.5,4
Timing
the Manual
coordinate
system
offset
TOO, X, or
of Coordinate
shift
amount
Z data.
System
Setting
is
—
~
Offset
01
,_
Under
the manual mode,
coordinate
system
setting
The
is made with the following
times
(a) to (c) .
tool coordinate
memory
number
is created
from the
tool number
binary
value
set in 1/0 input
#13174
(TP1)
to #13178 (TP8) , to be used
for operation.
The coordinate system can also be set up
inside the NC, or by a request from the
When set by a request of the
sequencer.
sequencer, coordinate system setting is executed
to turn on output #12194 (end of coordinate system
#13127
(coordinate
setting output) when input
(a)
(b)
(c)
setting
request
input)
turns
——
Tool
When turret
operation,
indexing
(Sequencer
is
the tool nose
measurement.
performed
setting )
by
Note :
manual
The
(tool
number
memory
value
+ 50).
nose
R)
tool
to 49
coordinate
memory
number)
coordinate
memory
number
is:
Thus,
the tool coordinate
the contents
of (tool
number
+ 50).
selects
(a)
By executing the T**$$ command, the turret
is called up wherever the tool post is located,
and is moved for the offset amount of the
offset number, to execute the coordinate
system setting corresponding to the selected
tool coordinate memory number.
(b)
By executing the T**OO command, the turret
is.called up wherever the tool post is located,
and the offset amount cancel movement is
executed, to execute the coordinate system
setting corresponding to the selected tool
coordinate memory number,
(c)
The tool nose coordinate system is always set
by the coordinate system setting.
(2)
When
(NC
Note :
Coordinate
system
cannot
be set by manual
operation,
when parameter
#6011 DO = 1 [when
the
tool coordinate
memory
number
follows
the last two
digits
of T**$$I.
18
offset)
(Tool
number
to 16/01
(Tool
on.
Upon zero point return.
(NC internal setting
at label skip, or sequencer setting for other
cases. )
when
On the tool setter,
contacts the sensor upon
internal setting)
(Wear
to 49
under
Mode
01
system
number
to 16/01
(#6011
set at the back two digits
DO =
1)
T**
These commands stop the advance reading of the
control. For these M codes, M 2–digit BCD code
and their respective decoded signals are output.
$$
-l-T
L—
Offset
01
number
to 16/01
(Tool
(a)
(b)
(c)
coordinate
Tool
01
Note :
49
offset
(TooI
memory
)
nose
R)
number)
2.7.2 M CODES FOR INTERNAL PROCESSING
(M 90 TO M 109)
1,
(offset
memory
number
(Wear
to
number
to
16/01
to
M90 through
M109 are for internal
Even when they
are programmed,
output
signal
(BCD
and decoded
49
The tool coordinate
memory
number
is:
Thus,
the tool coordinate
number
+ 50).
value
selects
the contents
of (offset
+ 50) .
By executing
the T**$$
command,
the turret
is called
wherever
the tool post
is located,
and is moved
for the offset
amount
of the
offset
number,
to execute
the coordinate
system
setting
corresponding
to the selected
tool coordinate
memory
number.
By executing
the T**OO command,
the turret
is called
wherever
the tool post
is located,
and the offset
amount
cancel
movement
is
No coordinate
system
setting
is
executed.
performed.
The tool nose
coordinate
by the coordinate
system
system
setting.
is
always
processing.
no external
output)
is sent.
M96 -?:
Tool radius
compensation
circular
path mode
M97 ‘:
Tool radius
intersection
compensation:
computing
mode
M98:
Subroutine
program
call
M99:
Subroutine
program
end
M100 to 109:
2.7.3
(1)
Not
used
( for
:
special
application)
BUFFERING FUNCTION (M 93, M 92)+
The following
M codes
buffering
function.
are
issued
for
set
t
2.6.6
NOTES
AL G50T
****
WHEN
USING
THE
M93
CONVENTION-
4-tIlock
buffering
FUNCTION
Note:
When using
the coordinate
system
setting
specification,
do not give
the G50 T****
Error
will occur
if commanded.
MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTIONS
command.
MOO:
Program
stop
MO1:
Optional
M02:
End
of
program
M30:
End
of
tape
machine,
the
following
the current M code is changed
However,
it is not changed
by
4-block
buffering
(M 93)
When M93
; command
is given,
the control
enters
the 4-block
buffering
mode,
which
remains
until M92 is commanded
subsequentup to 4 blocks
of data
ly . In this mode,
are read in advance
for subsequent
opera–
tion.
With programs
in which
the operation
time for the 4 blocks
read in advance
is
longer
than the reading
and processing
time
of the subsequent
4 blocks,
interruption
between
blocks
can be eliminated.
This
function
is effective
in avoiding
a shiny
streak
on the workpiece
caused
by feed
stop between
blocks .
(M-FUNCTION)
2.7. I M CODES FOR STOP (M 00, M 01, M 02, M 30)
and
wirh~.
RESET operation.
The miscellaneous
function
is specified
with the
The function
address
M and a maximum
3 digits.
of each M code
(MOO to M99) is determined
by the
Refer
to
machine,
except
for
several
M codes.
the machine
tool builder’s
manual
for the function of M codes
except
for-the
following
M codes
concerned
with the control.
To stop the NC control
codes
are provided.
When power is applied
to the M code maked
(2)
2.7
I
(3)
1- block
buffering
(M92)
When M92 command
is given,
buffering
mode is cancelled,
buffering
mode is restored.
the 4-block
and the 1 block
stop
Note :
While
the tool radius
is being
compensated
for with the M93 function
, up to two blocks
not
containing
move
commands
ar-e permitted
, and as
the result,
up to 6 blocks
may be read
in advance.
19
2. 7.3
BUFFERING
FUNCTION
(M93,
M92)t
(Cent’d)
(3)
EXAMPLE
N51
M93
;—
N52
GO1
N53
X..
U..
.
a. GO1
Start of 4-block advance
reading
-
Z..
F..
.
.
.
;
N54
X.. . Z.. . F.. ;
(GO1) X..
Stop between
blocks
for tool radius
com
pensation
or other
calculation
can be
avoided.
;
Commands
of M96 and M97 become effective
from the edge in the following command
blocks .
b.
GO1
M96
Z.. . M96
(or M97)
X..
Z..
(or
M97)
.
F..
(G 01)
M92
; —
Canceling
reading
.
4–block
2.7.4
CIRCULAR PATH MODE ONIOFF ON TOOL
RADIUS COMPENSATION (M 97, M 96)+
(1) The
are effective
the tool nose
following
when
radius
M codes
are
M 96
1
Tool radius compensation
M 97
the control
is
compensation
Tool radius compensation
circular path off
point)
When power is applied, the current M code is
it is not changed
contour
lines
gents
larger
two categories.
With this function,
have
been numbered
called
and executed
subroutine
programs
which
and stored
in advance
are
as many times as desired.
(1) The
M codes
following
function.
(2)
with~
by RESET operation.
are
used
I
for
this
Meaning
with
than
the angle
between
tan–
180&deg; is in the following
P..
.
Q..
.
L..
.
(M98)
;
With this command,
the subroutine
program
starting
with a sequence
No. following
Q in
the part program
with the program
No
specified
times.
by
However,
p is called
and
is executed
L
when
P is omitted:
The center of the tool nose radius describes
a circular arc around the perimeter in the
contour line.
M97 mode
The center of the tool nose radius moves
along the locus that is formed by straight
lines shifted from the contour line by the
distance
Call of subroutine program
M98
M96 mode
b
PROGRAM (M 98, M 99)
circular path on
With the tool radius compensation mode by
G41 to G44, the locus of the tool (center
of tool radius) for commanded
workpiece
a
From the move
around
the edge
in this block.
used.
(Execution of intersection
changed to the M code m=ked
(2)
;
Meaning
M cede
However,
.
; -1
Z..
SUBROUTINE
M code
Note:
;J
advance
2.7.5
These
M codes
provided
with
option.
X...
From the move
around the edge
in this block,
;
1
M58
1
equal
to the
tool
radius.
lNTFFiSELll
subroutine
program
following
the sequence
No. Q in the main program
is called.
Q is omitted:
subroutine
program
end of the program
called.
L is omitted:
Subroutine
4 times.
starting
at the leading
No.
specified
by P is
execution
programs
is only
can
be
once.
nested
up to
ON
=Q!c3:000’nO”dO’
‘3)
End
.1
~,t~
I
\
—z
\
‘b
M 97 mode
M 96 mode
(circular
reference pan! of lmtemacfmn.
(calculation
intersection)
arc)
Fig.
2.8
of
of
subroutine
program
(G99)
; is written at the end of subroutine
M99
program to end it.
When this code is written, the operation returns to the block immediately following the
main block in which the subroutine program
was called after the execution of the subroutine program.
M99
P..
.
EXAMPLE
;
When this is written
at the end
routine
program,
the operation
the sequence
program.
No.
specified
by
of a subreturns
to
p in the
Man
Program
Subroutine
Simple
jump
command
-111
--
-M99
P
1
,/’ ,!
/’
(4)
t
,1 ,A
, ,/
main
‘“”
;
—-
When this command
is used in the main program,
the operation
simply
jumps to the
by Q in the main
sequence
No. specified
program.
If Q is omitted,
the program
simply
jumps
to the leading
end of the main
program.
I
—’——J
G50
GOO
XO
. . .
20
;
–&gt;:
_,/’‘$
‘1
\
‘\
\
‘,
--l
N“20 hi 99 ;
“-:’.
,--.,
One hme
OTHER M CODES
;
How to use the other M codes other than the
above depends upon the machine.
Refer to
the machine tool builderfs manual.
(1)
Tadle 2.7 Typical
I
L
Writing
multi
this program
make endless
1
1
,’
ITotlmes
2.7.6
N1
N2
blocks
(10 lines maximum)
and executing
cycle
start
operation.
Example
of M codes
Meaning
M 03
Spindle forwa’d running
M04
Spindle reverse running
M 05
Spindle stop
of
Remarks
Direct switching from
M 03to
M 04 cannot be done,
M 05 must be inserted
between
When the program
No.
specified
by address
P and the sequence
No.
specified
by Q are
not found,
alarm
code
041 is displayed.
2.
While command
L for the number
of repetitions
is under
execution,
the remaining
number
of
repetitions
can be displayed.
For details
refer
to 4.3.2.2.
3.
This
function
can be used when
subroutine
programs
are stored
in the part program
Main programs
can be commanded
memory.
through
NC tap-es ~r the part program
memory.
4.
When subroutine
programs
than 4 times,
alarm
code
for Machine
I
M code
Notes :
1.
program
M 08
Coolant on
.—.’
M 09
Coolant off
(2)
When these
same block
will, depend
—
M codes
are commanded
in the
with move command,
execution
on the machine
tool design
and
construction.
(Whether
the
are executed
simultaneously
completion
of move command.
are nested
more
“042 “ is displayed.
(3)
2.7.7
When
them.
M commands
with or after
)
For these
M-code
commands,
puts M 2-digit
BCD codes.
the
control
the
M 3-digit
M 3-DIGIT BCD OUTPUT+
the
control
is provided
with
BCD output
option,
it can command
codes
between
MOO and M999.
(1)
M codes
between
MOO and
and M999 are output
codes.
M11O
(2)
out-
M90 through
M109 are
M codes,
and no BCD
put.
See 2. 7.2
PROCESSING
.
M
M 3–digit
M89,
in
and
3-digit
internal
code for
CODES
FOR
between
BCD
processing
them is outINTERNAL
21
27
7 M 3-DIGIT
(3)
BCD
OUTPUTt
(Cent’d)
(b)
With MOO, MO1, and M30, decode
signals
output
in addition
to the BCD output.
See 2.7.1, “ M CODES
FOR STOP. ”
The
(4)
specific
depends
machine
usages
of
the
M
3-digit
on machine tool design.
tool builder!s manual.
. . . For setting
ing to the
MD7’
#6645
the M code corresponddecode
output
1MD4 to
are
r?
=1224
MD7
MD6
n“
codes
l-’-m-l
‘Refer to
36645
‘1
–——
I
~
~
MD51MD4
‘--
:.~=x
‘
~
--
; xm---(Commanded by 2 digits)
2.7.8
HIGH-SPEED
M FUNCTION
(Example of setting)
This function is used to execute the M function at
high-speed without the need of the ending
response.
The
M code
is
not
output
when
the
M code
. . . 63
. . . 67
#6644
#6645
(3)
controller.
Sets the following
setting
parameter
M
can
be
set
by the
When resetting
to hold or reset
2.7.8.1
(1)
1/0
For
~. -—_
F1224
the
parameter,
it
decoding
output.
(a)
:-”
~ IMD71MD6
‘-‘
——
FI
MD51MD4
MD31MD2
7-
MD1
(1)
Parameters
High-speed
#6007D5
(2)
M code setting
decode
0:
1:
. . . For
setting
ing to the
MD3’
The
The
function
function
parameter
for
is
is
disabled
enabled
setting
the
the
same
as in
the
the M code corresponddecode
output
‘MDO to
-T-–-–..
1’
MD3
MD2i
MDl
MDO
m-m
lxx~x;
xx
rl- ~ ~“----xx
i;
(Commanded by 2 digits)
. . . For setting
ing to the
MD7’
#6647
the M code
corresponddecode
output
‘MD4 to
._.
—.—
—
#q ‘P,
~1 --~
, ,..---i
FD7”F===TT7”””i
xxix.
L
output
for resetting the
!
=7
M function
... . .
parameters,
of (2),
MDO
(b)
2.7.8.2
#6646
==1
output
60
64
M code setting parameter
decode output
Channel
decode
61
65
is
commanded,
but the M decode output is setlreset.
Thus, there is no need for the M code decode
in the programmable
processing and FIN processing
The M code that perform
the high-speed
function
processing
is preset
in the parameter.
(There
are both
a setting
parameter
and a
resetting
parameter.
)
62
66
Xx
lxx
——
(Commanded by 2 digits)
The 1,4code is set in the parameter
to the decode output bits.
corresponding
(Example
Up to four M codes can be set in a single
parameter.
(a)
. . . For setting
ing to the
MD3’
#6644
the M code corresponddecode
output
‘MDO to
. . . 73
. . . 77
(4)
Decode
(upon
output
reset)
(a)
Sets whether
output
upon
(b)
t! 6644
”--~-”
~
.xxxlx~
‘
(Commanded by 2 digits)
22
setting)
#6644
#6645
#6135
~-
of
DO to
72
?6
71
75
70
74
holdlreset
to hold
reset.
or
setting
reset
the
parameter
decode
D7
When the decode
output
is to be held,
the
numerals
corresponding
to each bit are added
The result
is output
to #1224.
to the total.
MD4 MD3 MD2 MD1 MDO
MD7 MD61MD5
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
2.7.8.4
Example
Processing
(Exampje
of
bit
when
the
.. .
...
Set MD1 output
Reset
MD1 output
{;$$
:::
Set MD4 output
Reset
MD4 output
JM67
. ..
reset,
When
set
Sets the parameter
of the
(for setting, resetting).
output
63 62 61 60
#6644
#6645
M code
setting
setting
for
67 66 65 64
#6646
#6647
73 72 71 70
77 76 75 74
M code
resetting
setting
for
setting)
{M~~
M
\M77
decode
M Function
The following are simple examples
high-speed M functions.
(1)
Value
of each
is to be held
of High-speed
Set
(2)
M60;
M61;
M62;
M63;
M64;
M65;
M67;
M30;
MD7
OUtpUt
... Reset MD7 outpUt
the
the
decode
output
parameters
as
is to be
follows.
kept
upon
#6644 00006100
#6645 67000064
M code
setting
for
setting
#6646
#6647
M code
setting
for
resetting
00007100
77000074
(3)
The value of each bit corresponding
and MD7 are added to #6135,
01;
02;
M70;
M71;
M72;
M73;
M74;
M75;
M76 ;
h177;
M30:
to MD4
16 + 128 = 144
The left program
is executed.
The bits corresponding
to #1224 DO to
D7 are set.
M60 to M67 do not wait for FIN.
If an M code is to be held,
set the total
of each bit corresponding
to #6135.
The value
to be held is set in #1224 at
the end of the program.
The left program
is executed.
The bits corresponding
to #1224 DO to
D7 are reset.
The M codes
M70 to M71 do not wait for
FIN .
144 is set in #6135.
#1224 is 1001000 upon
reset.
2.8
2.8.1
Functions
(G-FuNcTlON)
LIST OF GCODES
Notes
2.7.8.3
(1)
preparatory
Do not set
the original
the following
M code.
hl codes
when
setting
Address
G, plus
ing of the block.
their
groups.
up to 3 digits
Table
2. 8.1
specify
the meangives
G codes
and
. MOO, MO1, M02,
M30
When these
M codes
code functions
are lost;
has the priority.
are set,
the original
M
the high–speed
M code
(1)
G codes
following
are broadly
two types.
classified
into
the
. M90 to M99
When
functions
when
these
have
M codes
are
the priority.
Check
that the above-M
setting
the M code.
set,
codes
the
are
M code
not
Meaning
found
(2)
If an other
process
is waiting
to be completed
in the same block,
it waits
for the first
process
to be completed.
(3)
Do not command
same block.
*
If
executed,
two
alarm
or
more
occurs.
M codes
in
the
(2)
Modal
G-ccdeeffestive
G-code
G-cede
of the same group is commanded.
Non-modal
G-code
effective
G-code
block.
G codes in groups
modal.
When the
the power
switch,
➤
in Table
2.8.
from
until the other
only in the commanded
01 through
11 are
control
is energized
with
the G codes
marked
with
1 are automatically
selected.
23
2.8.
1 LIST
(3)
G codes of * group in the Table 2.8.1 are
They should not be commanded
non–modal.
together with the other G codes in one
block .
(4)
The modal G codes can be commanded
ly in a block.
(5)
G codes in Class B are basic, and those in
Class O are options. The use of optional
G codes is determined by the machine tool
design. See the machine tool builder’s
manual,
(6)
(7)
OF
G CODES
(Cent’d)
mixed-
When
the sDecial G code IIowtion
is incor.
POSITIONING (G 00, G 06)
2.8.2
2.8.2.1
Positioning (G 00)
GOO X( U)...
This
rate
Z(W) . . .
command
moves
to the point
(X,
;
(4)
GOO is a modal G code in the 01 group
When it is commanded,
it remains effective
until other G codes in the 01 group are
commanded.
(5)
For the positioning
with G 00, the pulse
distribution
is started
only after
the ERROR
DETECT
state
is turned
on, and the program
advances
to the next block
only upon the
activation
of the ERROR
DETECT
state
after
the completion
of the pulse
distribution.
When this G code is used,
therefore,
the
workpiece
edges
are machined
true,
and
rounding
is avoided.
(6)
Notes
For
the
upon the
builder’s
rapid
:
a.
The ERROR
DETECT
ON state
means the
decrease
of the servo
lag pulses
to the permissible
level
after
the pulse
distribution
for move command.
b,
When T code is commanded,
GOO should
be
put in the T-code
block.
GOO is required
for designation
of tool traverse
rate for
tool offset
motion
using
T code.
EXAMPLE
a tool at rapid
traverse
Z ) in the coordinate
system
set by the G50 command
or moves
it
away by (U, W ) from the present
point
for
each axis independently.
(2)
Along the axes specified by GOO, the machine slide moves in rapid traverse rates ,
independently of each other. The resultant
tool locus may not be a straight line, and
when working out the program , care must
be taken to avoid fouling between the tool
and the workpiece .
Standard G codes can be coverted to special G codes I by parameters.
This is a
basic feature, and, when parameter #6005D7
is set to 1, standard G codes are converted
to special G code 1.
porated
in the control,
the setting
of param–
eter
#6005D 7 to 1 will convert
G codes
to
Setting
the parameter
special
G codes
D.
to the standto O will reconvert
the G codes
ard G codes.
(1)
(3)
G50
X150.
Z1OO.
;
GOO
TO1O1
S1OOO
M03
; . . .
. . . GOO for designation
rate for tool offset
of traverse
motion
traverse
rate,
as it depends
refer
to the machine
tool
machine,
manual.
(GOO)
X30.
Z5.
;
. . . GOO can be omitted
in positioning.
EXAMPLE
E--l
X-Axis:
12 m/min
Z-Axis:
6 m/min
P-’
“1
-.
~,
-x
i
,/’
/’
i f’
--
5
30
DIA
1-
-z
[
z
Table
Gscf~l G Special
Code II
G Code
r
r
r
G 00
r
GO1
GOiI
GO1
v
G#
v
GOI
—
2.8
List of G Codes
Function
Group
Positioning
Basic
O:
Optional
Section
(rapid traverse feed)
Linear interpolation,
B:
B
angle programming for linear interpolation
B, O
01
G02
G 02
G 02
G 03
G 03
G 04
G04
~
G03
~
1
B, O
Gircular interpolation CCW, (radius R designation)
.—
B, O
Dwel I
GM
*
G06
GC6
GOB
GIO
G 10
GIO
G 22
G 22
G 22
G 23
--+
G 23
G 23
G 27
G 27
G 27
G 28
G28
G 28
G29
G 29
G 29
G30
Gm
G31
G31
~
I
i
—
Circular interpolation CW, (radius R designation)
—
G%
G%
G36
G 37
G 37
G 37
G38
G28
G28
B
o
Radius programming for circular interpolation CW
Radius programming fm circular interpolation -~
CCW
Automatic
—
%T=T%G36
OFF positioning
01
*
return to reference
point
-=
tam=
Retunrn to 2nd reference
G31
G35
ERROR DETECT
Tool offset value setup
G30
G=
B
Threadcutting,
point
continuous threadcutting,
-~
“~
multi-start
threadcutting
O’
Variable
*
Tool set error compensation
o
Stored stroke limit 2nd area ON
o
Stored stroke limit 2nd area OFF
o
Stored stroke limit 3rd area ON
o
Stored stroke limit 3rd aea
o
lead threadcutting
07
06
G39
~-.;:
v
—
G40
G 39
r
OFF
~ Tool radius compsmsation cancel
—–
G40
o
Tool radius compensation
No. 1
0
Tool radius compensation
No. 2
0
G43
Tool radius ccfnpensation
_—
No. 3
0
G44
Tool radius compensation
No. 4
0
G41
G41
G41
G 42
G 42
G 42
G43
G43
-.
G44
G44
06
I
~ shows the G codes selectedwhen the control
is powered or reset.
2.
When the control is reset,
whether G code
of 01 group should be GOO or kept as the
current one can be set by parameter #6005D6.
3.
Radius programming for circularinterpolation
can be made by G02 and G03 instead of G22
G23, respectively.
Notes :
1.
The followingG codes for initial
state when
power is applied can be set by parameters.
Group
G code
4.
Cornering can be programmed by GO1 instead
of Gll and G12. Refer to 2.8.7 Cornering.
5.
Initialstates of G codes of 05, 07, 08 groups
when power is applied are determined by
their respective setting data (#6001D0, Dl,
D2).
Parameter
01
GOOor
GOl
#6005 DG
04
G980r
G99
#?6005 DI
03
G900r
G91
h6005 Do
25
2.8
PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS
G Code
(Cent’d)
Table
List of G Codes
Special
; ~s~~~ll
Group
II
G Code
G 92
G 50
(G-FUNCTION)
*
G 92
.—
G,,
G51
G 51
t---*
G 65
G65
*
2.8
(Cent’d)
B:
Basic
O:
Optional
Function
~
Section
Coordinate system setup
-—
*
Maximum spindle revolution setup, work coordinate system setup
4—
-—-—
-—--—
i Return of current display value to origin
L -—..
User macro simple call
G65
B
0
~—
-
0
0
.
---
User macro modal call
0
I
User macro modal call cancel
0
Mirror image by programming ON
-—
L
Mirror image by programming OFF
-——
Finishing cycle
——
.-—
Stock removal in turning
Stock removal in facing
G 72
G 72
G 74
.—
G 73
G 73
G75
G 74
G 74
G76
Pack drilling in Z-axis
G 75
G 75
G 77
Grooving in X-axis
G 76
G 76
G78
Automatic
G90
G 77
G 20
I
G21
~
G 92
I
G78
I
;
0
Pattern repeating
*
Multiple
repetitive cycies
0
0
-0
threadcutting
cycle
.L
0
I
Turning cycle A
01
L
B
Threading cycle
—4---B—
Facing cycle B
&amp;--–
Constant surface speed control
—-~
Constant surface speed control cancel
Feed per minute (mm/min)
—
Feed per revolution
—
I
G93
-H..
(mm/rev)
Absolute command
.---c
03
Incremental
G 91
G122
G 122
G122
r
G123
r
Gill
I
GI12
T
G 123
Notes
G123
Gill
1
Gill
G712
~
GI12
Tcml registration end
;
Ta~r
01
I
o
7.
o
—
I
Arc multiple beveling/rounding
*
selected
when
the
G cede
GOOor
G(X
041
G980r
G99
03
G900r
G91
control
I
Parameter
~
#6005 ~6
ti6005 DI
i
0
.—. ..—
multiple beveling/rounding
2.
:
I
]
Tool life control
The following
G codes for initial state when
power is applied
can be set by parameters.
Group
B
–——-
11
~ showe the G codes
is powered
or reset.
1.
command
—.
Tool registration start
:
~
----J—
o
+.— -—
46005 Do
3.
.—
o
When the control is reset, whether G code
of 01 group should be GOO or kept as the
current one can be set by parameter #6005D6.
Radius programming for circularinterpolation
can be made by G02 and G03 insteaclof G22
G23, respectively.
4.
Cornering can be programmed by GOI instead
of Gll and G12. Refer to 2.8.7 Cornering.
5.
Initialstates of G codes of 05, 07, 08 groups
when power is applied are determined by
their respective setting data (#6001D0, D1 ,
D2).
2.8,2,2
(1)
Error
G06
Detect off Positioning
x(u)”””
‘z(w).”-
With this command
is identical
to that
following
EXAMPLE
(G06)
G50
X1OO.
z60.
;
GOO
T0202
s600
M03
;
the positioning
of GOO except
process
for the
x35.
;
aspects.
@ GO1
a.
Z5.
;
G06 is a non-modal
It is effective
only
ZO
F1.
Executed
;
----
G code in the * group.
in the programmed
block.
x60.
Q
FO.2
by
linear
interpolation
GO1.
;
EXAMPLE
b.
Note :
+x
GOO
X..
.
Z..
.
;
G06
x..
.
z,.
.
;
—
Move
by
G06
x..
.
z..
.
;
—
Move
by
GOO
i
The
ERROR
DETECT
on
only
the
ON /OFF
.
signals
for cutting
feeds,
and
motion
under
GOO and
Angle
LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G 01) 1
Z(W).”.
F(E).
”0
for
linear
interpolation
X(U)”””
A..
Z(W)”.
A.”.
.
F(E)
. ..
;
(a)
F(E)
. ..
;
(b)
or
GO1
X(U)”””
programming
With the control
equipped
with this option,
linear
interpolation
can be commanded
at
specified
angles.
GO1
‘GO1
/
With the positioning
of G06, the positioning
pulse
dis~ribution
&amp;. immediately
‘started
on the completion
of the pulse
distribution
for the preceding
block,
after
making
an
ERROR
DETECT
check,
and the program
advances
to the next
block
after
the comple–
tion of the pulse
distribution
process.
For
this reason,
wrokpiece
edges
are rounded
to the extent
of servo
lag pulses.
(SMZ’)
are effective
have
no influence
G06.
2.8.3
/
//
i
;
A tool is moved
to the point
(X,
Z ) on a straight
line at the traverse
rate designated
by the F or
code in the coordinate
system
set by G50
moved
away by (U, W ) from the present
point.
E
. F or E code must be specified
in the block
containing
the G 01 or in the previous
block.
If
Feedrate
designot,
i; causes
a format
error.
nated
by the F or E code is the tangential
feedrate.
With these
commands,
a linear
interpolation
will be executed
by specifying
angle
A in
the + direction
of the Z-axis
and distance
either
in X– or Z–axis
direction.
rate in the tangential
direction
by the F or E code.
The range
specifiable
with
%
+,x
address
I
The feedis specified
of angle
A iS as fOllOWS.
programmable
Range of Angle A
Metric Input
POSITION
PROGRAMMED
O- *360.0i)O0
z
\~
1
/
u
2
Inch Input
I
I
PRESENT TOOI
POSITION
+2
27
2. 8.3
LINEAR
INTERPOLATION
(GO1) t (Cent’d)
Table
Meaning
Table 2.9
Sign
Meaning
I
‘..
~
from
.A
G 03
counterclockwise
-z
.—
End point of arc on X-axis
(Diameter value)
x (u)
POIN1
+ .x EfQDPOINT
z
End point of arc on
z (w)
Z-axis
Iv
ii!=
START POINT
~ CENTER
---
Distance fTom start wi nt of
arc to arc center on X-axis
I
(Radius value)
START
I
c)(;1)3
Circular interpolation,
–Z
+ Z-axis,
(;{1?
..
-z
*
+sr.rl-pyJ-y&amp;%
A–
clockwise
A-
wise from +Z-axis,
Angle clockwise
Circular interpolation,
G 02
Angle counterclock-
A+
2.10
2
K
.
.—
Distance from start point of
K
arc to arc-center
on Z-axis
EXAMPLE
CENTER
+x
~
GO1
X50.
~
GO1
zO.
F
A+150.
A–180.
FO.3
;
;
7’Y-f+150”
/--
50 DIP
I
1
/
)/
WJ--’
.
I
1
U-/
Fig, 2, 9
-7
60
Circular
rant can
interpolation
of
be programmed
an arc on
in a single
multiquadblock.
EXAMPLE
.x
2.8.4
CIRCULAR
G02(G03)
INTERPOLATION
X( U)...
(G 02, G 03)
Z(W) ... 1.. . K.. . F(E) ...;
A tool is moved on the circular arc whose center is away from the present position by (I, K) .
The end point of the arc is (X, Z) in the coordinate system set by G 50 or away from the
present position by (U, W)
A tool moves along a circular arc at the traverse rate specified by the F or E code.
The meanings of G02, G03 and each address
are shown below .
B
60
1~
DIA
L
j
‘
100 [11A
.Z
-z
Table 2.11
Note
shaded
Arc Center
Coordinate
(10000,
I
100 – 60
—=20mm
2
– J2~2
K
The
– 2700)
case
can
tool
will
The
end
z-.
] G02
.
F.. .
z-46.6
x60.
point
– 202.
,;~
–19.60
mm
be programmed
as follows.
;
120.
K-19.6
F..
.
to move
endlessly.
coordinate
when
the
in the
and the
should
circular
be
precisely
interpolation
is
apphed
to the tool nose radius
compensation,
or
the tool may not move properly.
Generally,
it
is recommendable
to calculate
up to the next
digit
of least input
increment
and count
fractions over
1/2 as one and disregard
the rest.
3.
Gol
continue
commanded
= –19.596+
above
that if the end point
is designated
area,
the alarm is not displayed
; \
When the control
is provided
with Radius
Programming
for Circular
Interpolation,
radius value
can be commanded
by G02, G03
instead
of G22, G23.
EXAMPLE
The
feedrate
tangential
commanded
by
the
F code
is
a
a.
G03
X80,0
Z15. O
1-10.0
K-30.
O
F150
;
feedrate.
x
I
Notes :
1.
The direction of the arc of G02 for Clockwise
is defined as follows.
!!
When viewing the X, Z plane in -Y direction
in the right–hand coordinate system, the tool
moves clockwise from the beginning point of
the arc. “
Therefore, the direction of rotation in the
plate (-X, Z plane) in the figure below is
presented inversely.
END
‘a”aatl=?oo
b.
G03
U40. O
.
u
-.
I
I
15.00
55.00
W-40.
O
z
1-10.0
K-30.
O
F150
:
x
G 03
END
POINT
&amp;
–40 {Jo
40.00
2.
20.00
When the end point
of arc is not designated
on the circumference
specified
by the radius,
the alarm is not displayed
and the tool path
The mark o indicates
the end
is as follows.
point
of
CENTER_~-
15 0[1
v
&amp;
Y
42
*--
2.8.5
(1)
W/c
– 10.0(1
–30 lx)
arc.
/
20.00
:,500
z
DWELL (G 04)
G04
U(P)
. . .
;
CENTER
This command interrupts feed for the length
of time designated by the address U or P.
o--
-0
(2)
P
Dwell
block
is programmed
as an independent
.
/
29
2.8,
5 DWELL
(3)
(G04)
(Cent’d)
The maximum
length
of
designated
with address
lows .
Dwell
time:
0.001
Dwell time
increment.
is
EXAMPLE
Notes
not
to
Table
time which
U or P is
can be
as fol-
Meaning
P
9999.99
influenced
seconds
by
input/output
:
For specifying
U3.5
...
3. 5-second
dwell
G04
P3500
. . .
3. 5-second
dwell
For changing the tcol offset value to the
z
specified
u
For adding the specified
w
tool offset values.
1.
G04 is a non–modal
2.
The counting
of dwell
time is started
from
the instant
the control
enters
the ERROR
DETECT
ON state
upon completion
of the
move command
block
before
G04.
Therefore,
with G04
UO ; , the control
advances
to the next block
immediately
after
detecting
the ERROR
DETECT
ON
state.
value.
For changing the tool radius to the specified
values
for which
no
are not changed.
—
1 mm feed
;
—
O. 2 second
;
—
1 mm feed
F25
G04
UO.2
GO1
W-1.
G1O
P16
x32.5
-r
T7————
wO.05
;
program,
chip
dwell
cutting
;
~ 0.05
Z- axis
(2)
With the above
is obtained.
time
tool
mm is added
value
offset
No.
16
The above
format
is used to make offset
value
tapes,
and to store
the values
in
Offset
M-emery at once.
The tape format
is as follows .
feed
\
/
+x
Label
I
Q0;
02 DWELL
1 mm
GIOP.
..
X...
Z..
.R
.. .
;
GIOP.
..
X...
Z..
.R
...
;
h
—.—
GIO P...
X..
~
2. 8.6
(1)
G1O
P-.
.
X(U).
tool
.
offset
values
Z(W)
With this command,
tool
set or corrected
in part
30
/
TOOL OFFSET VALUE (G 10)+
With G 10 command,
set and corrected.
is
EXAMPLE
LContents
of
is changed
W-1.
address
G code.
EXAMPLE
GO1
value to the original
vai ue.
The offset
programmed
:
tool offset No.
x
R
G04
2, 12
C..
can
R...
offset
values
programs.
be
;
are
~
. Z.. .R
... ;
to
2.8.7
(1)
CORNERING (G 11, G @ ‘
Beveling
This
(Gil)
command
workpiece.
X( U)...
K..
{ Z(W) . . .
1..
1
.
F(E)
Gll
.
. . .
specified
;
removes
Addresses
the sharp
corner
of
X and Z cannot
be
simultaneously
Meaning
of
each
in a block.
address
is
shown
below.
Table 2.13
Beveling for Z-axis
Beveling for X-axis
Gll
X( U)...
K..,
K-
F(E)...
Z(W)...
Gll
;
1... F(E)...
;
K+
END POINT
,,50
END POINT
I+
N
START POINT
45”
+X
K
m
START POINT
*
I
L
~
Value
Bevellng
Dlrecllon
Beveling
values
(K and
the following
values.
I)
The command
format
error.
the
@
exceeding
X30.
Gll
Z-20.
I (Gil)
ZO
x80.
7,
8.
limited
above
within
value
(2)
20.
Bevellng Value
(Raalus Value)
Beve, ing Dlrectlon
Rounding
(G12)
causes
command
performs
the
rounding
of
the
corner.
Addresses
X and Z cannot
be spec ified
simultaneously
in a block.
The corner
ZLS a quarter–round.
is formed
Meaning
of
F30
K-7.
;
I
DIA
are
;
18.
—
L-
This
GOO
O
f
JZ
Bevellng
[
~
w
@7
(DIAMEI “ER)
I
/
I–
Ux
2
each
;
address
is
shown
below.
I
I
+x
‘~
lo
30
DIA
-z
Fig. 2.10
B
31
2. 8.7
CORNERING
(Gil,
G12)t
(Cent’d)
Table
2.14
Rounding for X axis
G12
X( U)...
K..
K-
.
F(E). .,
Rounding for Z axis
G12
;
Z(W)...
K...
F(E)...
;
KEND
POINT
END
POINT
&gt;
\
1+
x
u
~
-x
I–
[DIAMETER)
iv
m
I
START
Po ,N?
/
L.-...-.,
z b
START ~OINr
K*
K’
L-,,”,,,,
T___
,,!”.
,Our,lr,g
,Ja,”e
T
T-_
qcu~d,r,g
Rounding
values
( K and
the following
values.
]Kl
The
command
causes
,
&lt;lU/21
error.
GOO X20.
ZO
are
w
limited
within
Notes
the
above
:
1.
Gll
and G12 are modal G codes
in the A group
They
remain
effective
until other
G codes
in
the group
A are commanded.
2.
Gll
and G12 are for one axis only.
If they
are commanded
for both axes in the same
block,
they constitute
a format
error.
Ill&lt;lwl
exceeding
format
I)
c red
value
EXAMPLE
;
G12
:
25.
DIA
9
DIA
I
K..
.
Error
;
“ 050”
Tool radius compensation functional”
is effective to the blocks containing G 11 or G 12.
5.
In the finish
form commands
G70 through
G 73
of the special
canned
cycle t, blocks
contain–
ing Gll
or G12 can be commanded.
6.
GO1 code can be used
fy identical
beveling.
+7
GO1
7.
X( U)...
z(w)
. . .
instead
K.. . I
1$. .
J
F(E).
of
.
Gll
to speci-
;
I
GO1 code can be used instead
of G12 to speciHowever,
in this case,
R must
fy rounding.
be used instead
of I and K.
Gol
32
.
4.
1
20
f
W..
no block
without
In the G 10 or G 12 modes,
I and K nor block
in which
I and K are O
can be commanded.
If such a block
is commanded,
correct
tool movement
can not be
assured.
.x
.-.
I “ .970
.
3.
m
6
X..
~ X( U)...
Z(W) ...
i
R...
‘
R, ..;
F(E)
““”
;
.
2.8.8 INCHIMETRIC
(G 20, G 21)+
Unit
of
data is
codes.
make the display
reset
opera–
b. In principle,
tion when current
position
display
(external) is useci.
DESIGNATION BY G CODE
measurement
selectively
(metric
or
specified
inch)
by
the
of
input
following
G
4.
The tool offset
values
ently
in the G20 mode
G 20/G21 must
the tool offset
4
Stored Offset
Values
These
G codes
are programmed
at the leading
If these
G codes
end of a block
of its own.
are commanded,
the units of all the following
motions
are than ged.
a.
Subsequent
part
b.
Tool
c.
part
of
settings
d.
Part
of
manual
e.
Displays
offset
parameters
G 21 is commanded,
the
selection
is changed.
fore,
the state of G20/G21
power
application
depends
by parameter
#6001D0.
G22
at the time of
on the setting
( G23)
in G 21
(Metric)
1,5000 in.
15.000 mm
FOR CIRCULAR iNTER-
,
address
X( IJ) . . .
Z(W)
R and
. . .
performs
R..
.
F(E)
circular
. . .
;
1
A tool moves
along
the circular
arc whose
center
is radius
R away from the present
position.
The end point
of arc is at coor–
Z) set by G50 or is away from
dinates
(x,
the present
position
by (U, W) . Tool moves
along the circular
arc at feedrate
designated
by F code.
1
ER
CR
01234
Processing
(Inch)
In programming
of G2.2 or G23, the control
automatically
calculates
the arc center
coor–
dinates
(1 , K) from the radius
value
designated
by the
interpolation.
setting
There-
EXAMPLE
G20
I
modifying
movements
(1)
When G20 or
of inch/metric
in G 20
after
differmode.
In programming,
circular
interpolation
(G02,
G03)
the control
requires
the data of the arc-center
Normally,
they
are given
by using
coordinates.
the addresses
I and K.
values
Notes :
1.
Processing
2,8.9 RADIUS PROGRAMMING
POLATION (G 22, G 23)+
programs
and
be commanded
values.
I
15000
are processed
and the G21
;
Inch
;
input
(2)
The meanings
of
are shown
below.
(3)
Designaticm
designation
of
G22,
radius
G23
value
and
each
address
R
T
Radius
value
R is commanded
by incremental
value
with a sign of radius
programming.
2.
When G 20 /G 21 selection
is commanded
program,
take the following
procedure
forehand.
a. Cancel
used.
work
tool
b. Cancel
compensation
3.
Take
mand
coordinate
position
(G41
the following
of G20/G21
system
offset,
– G44)
In this case,
When radius
value
R &gt; 0, an arc,
describing
less than
180&deg;,
and when R &lt; 0, an arc
describin~;
more than 180&deg; are specified.
( G50T ) , if
and
tool
radius
.
procedure
selection.
a. Program
absolute
zero
before
move command
in the
be-
point
(G50)
after
for
the
com-
all axes
.
33
2. 8.9 RADIUS
INTERPOLATION
PROGRAMMING
(G22, G23)t
Table
FOR CIRCULAR
(Cent’d))
Notes
1.
2, 15
2.
Circular interpolation by radius for
...
L!4_
\
.I
~(,z
3.
G 23
x (u)
Circular interpolation by radius for
I
The X-coordinate
(Diameter
of the end of the i
+~
value)
the
G22
or
G23
mode,
the
‘They
are kept
is commanded
.
block
in
which
designated
as zero
Radius
cannot
be
When R is varied with both start and end
points fixed , the tool will move along the
following circular arc .
END POl’-
--&amp;7
K:GIN
~
l:w.~po.
“---:
=F--
The Z-coordinate
of the end of the ~
—,
Distance from the start point of arc ‘
R
‘-t
In
are modal.
of 01 group
-z
Ccw
arc
G23 codes
other
G code
R is not contained
or R is
should
not be commanded.
designated
by I and K .
x
Cw
G 23
G22 and
until
Meaning
G 22
:
z
+
to arc center
(Incremental
value with sign)
Therefore,
ter does
!
in
the
following
not
exist which
(alarms “031,” “034”).
R &lt; (Distance
between
case,
the
arc
cen–
causes data error
start
point
and
end
point)
2
4.
Tool
for
5.
Fig. 2.11
START
POINT
6.
END
POINT
.-
&amp;
nose
the
radius
block
compensation
containing
The
block
containing
designated
in finishing
special
canned
cycles
When
the
control
is
G22 or
is
effective
G23.
G22 or 23 can be
shape
commands
(G70 to G73) .
provided
with
radius
gramming
option , cir’cular
interpolation
radius
(R)
programming
can be made
G03 instead
of G22,
G23.
ARC
CENTER
R
of
proby
by
G02,
u
X2
z
2.8.10
START
POINT
\v
~
(1)
EXAMPLE
$,
G02
X40.
Z-10.
I(X40.
)
z-52.5
F20
;
R30.
(F20)
;
G27
X(u)
...
Z(W) . . .
‘
]
ARC CENTER
/
/’
END
POINT
,/’
‘
R 3U
.Z
;
With this command,
the tool is positioned
to
the absolute
coordinate
point
( X , Z ) or incremental
coordinate
point
(U, W) by moving
along
the two axes simultaneously,
and then,
the position
is checked
for conformance
with
the reference
point.
For the axis for which
no command
is given,
positioning
and check–
ing are not executed.
IFig. 2.12
GO1
REFERENCE POINT CHECK (G 27)
Fig, 2, 13
(2)
If the position
is the reference
point,
the
return–to–reference
lamp lights.
The posi–
tion is the reference
point
in all the axial
directions
specified,
the automatic
operation
If the position
is not
is continued
further.
INTERIU
POSITIONING
-x
,,AR:T’OY
cd+--.-”
POINT
RETURN
z
x
z
:
—
1.
The reference
point
is an fixed
point
on the
machine
tool to which
the tool can return
by
the motion
under
the control
of the automatic
reference
point
return
or G28 automatic
ref–
See 6.2.1,
erence
point
return
function.
“Automatic
Reference
Point
Return
.“
2.
If G27 is commanded
in the tool position
offset mode,
the tool returns
to the position
displaced
from the reference
point
by the
tool offset
value.
Positioning
cannot be made
at the reference
point.
Before
commanding
G27,
cancel
the
tool
offset
Fig,
The tool does not
which
instruction
(2)
mode.
Canceling
tool
ceding
G27.
offset
U..
.
Canceling
G27
U..
the
block
move along
is omitted.
to
W..
.
W..
.
;
block
containing
TGT.;
OO
G 27.
for
is com–
for the
returns
the
The series of RETURN
TO REFERENCE
motions are as follows, With initialpower
application, the return motions to the
reference point are as shown below in the
low-speed mode as shown below.
;
The mirror
image
function
is effective
with
motion
commanded
by G27.
To avoid
the
return
position
error,
command
G 27 in the
G 69 mode ( Opposite
tool post mirror
image
off) .
2.8.11
axis
reference
motion
Point
Return
lamp
APPROACH
3,
the
pre-
;
in the
.
in
(3)
TEIE]OO
G27
When the return
pleted,
Reference
+Z
2.14
returned
axis lights.
When the tool
to the reference
point
in both axes,
automatic
operation
is resumed.
EXAMPLE
b.
TO REFERENCE
i’
\i”
a.
REFERENCE
POINT
4+
the reference
point
even
along
one axis,
this constitutes
the return-position–error,
and the automatic
operation
is interrupted.
(Cycle
start
lamp goes off. )
Notes
POINT
the
SPEED 1
,pEE,r-U::j::TER
I
SPEED REDUCTION
LI!vIIT SVV
REFERENCE
POINT
Fig, 2.15
AUTOMATIC RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT
(G 28)
(1)
G28
X(U)”””
z(w)
...
;
With this command, the tool can be brought
back to the reference point automatically
after passing througkl an interim point. In
other words, the tool positions to the commanded absolute coordinate position (X , Z )
or incremental position (U, W) by moving
simultaneously along the two axes, and then
automatically returns to the reference point
by the reference point return function.
The specified point (X, Z) or (U, W) is
known as “INTERIM
POSITIONING
POINT ,“
or “INTERIivl POINT. “
Thereafter, the RETURN
TO REFERENCE
POINT motion is in rapid traverse as under
the command of GOO.
I
RAPID TRAVERSE
Fig. 2.16
(4)
However, when low traverse speed is speci–
fied by parameter #6010D 5 set to 1, the
same law motion speed as in the 1st time is
obtaineci.
35
2.8.11
POINT
AUTOMATIC
RETURN
(G28)
(Cent’d)
TO
REFERENCE
(2)
When G.29 is used,
consideration
on the distance
between
points
B and C is unnecessary
in programming.
Especially
when incremental instructions
are used,
this function
is
useful
to return
the tool to the original
co–
ordinate
system
after
returning
to the
reference
zero.
(3)
Motions
C + B and B + D are made simultaneously
along
the two axes in rapid
traverse.
However,
the tool will not move in
the direction
for which
instruction
is omitted.
(4)
Where
G28 is programmed
several
times,
the point B creat~d
by the latest
G28 instruction
is effective
for the motion
by G 29.
Notes :
1.
For parameter setting and other details of
the low traverse speed return motion shown
in Fig. 2.8.11.2, refer to 5.2.1 Manual Return to Reference Point.
2.
The starting point for RETURN
TO REFERENCE POINT motion must be in the area
shown in Fig. 2.8.11.4. Fig. 2.8.11.3 can
be started from any position.
RETURN
DIRECTION
~
3.
“’s
Canceling
in
TU
G28
b.
X..
.
Canceling
G28
the
1100
Z..
.
Z..
.
block
of interim
blocks.
input)
N20
G28
X1O.
z20.
N25
G28
x30.
; —
N26
G29
x-40.
point
is equivalent
;—G.
block
containg
TE~OO
;
to
‘z
20. )
G28
X..
—“
.
Z.. .
(G28)
B
X..
Z.. .
Point
;
Point
C+B+D
D
~
[REFERENCE
ZERO POINT,
-&amp;
RETURN TO
REFERENCE ZERO
INTERIL!
i
.4’.4
.
Point A-+B+C
(reference
Point
G29
COMMAND
:
z-50.
;
POINT
Fig, 2.17
GOO X30.
GOO X-40.
Z20.
Z-50.
20. )
I I
‘+-;
Notes :
with the tool position
compensation
on, the
is automatically
can-
With this function,
the tool is positioned
to
a specified
point
via the interim
point,
after
it has been once returned
to the reference
zero point
by the AUTOMATIC
RETURN
TO
ZERO
u
G28
RETURN FROM REFERENCE POINT (G 29)
REFERENCE
(30.
l--r
I
:
in the
X..
preceding
;
.
When G 28 is written
offset
or tool radius
offset
or compensation
celled.
2,8.12
(1)
(absolute
Coordinates
these
two
Before
writing
G28 in the program,
cancel
the tool position
offset
as shown
below .
a.
4.
EXAMPLE
zero
point)
1.
Commanding
G 29 without
G28 after
turning
on the
an error
“059. “
2.
cancel
tool offset
before
proIn principle,
gramming
G28 or G29.
If they
are programmed while offset
is effective,
the interim
point
B will be offset,
and the tool will pass
point
B’.
the execution
of
control
constitutes
3.
EXAMPL12
Commanding
G29 in the TOOL
RADIUS
COMPENSATION
mode
(G40 - G44)
or in CANNED
CYCLES
(G70 - G76, G90, G92 and G94) constitutes
an error.
T0300
N51
G28
N52
T0400
N53
G29
;
u80.
w20.
INTERIM
TO 2N0
POINT
u-80.
w40.
;
Notes
,/
/
(REFERENCE
t 6613
commanding
G 30,
after
the
energiza-
tion of the control,
G28 or MANUAL
RETURN
TO REFERENCE
POINT
must be executed.
/’
2.
,/
For the 2rld REFERENCE
POINT
RETURN
motion,
there
is no area from where
returning is impossible
, and the tool can be return
-x
\\
\
PARAMETER
:
Before
1.
ZERO POINT)
+
,0”
\
POINT
POINT
REFEPENCE
;
c
\
W30
;
;
B /“
\
\
U-40.
T-],,,,/-~~E:
EXAMPLE
N50
G30
3.
\\
~L~l-
from
any
position.
The
same notes
Automatic
Return
to G30 command.
+Z
3.
and 4. of
to Reference
(5)
for
Point
2.8.11
apply
ID
%--l
2.8.13
(1)
40
2ND REFERENCE POINT RETURN (G 30)+
G30
X( U)...
Z(W) . . .
;
With this command,
the tool first
moves
to
an interim
positioning
point
(X,
Z) or (U,
W ) in two axial directions
simultaneously,
and then,
moves
to the 2nd reference
point.
The tool does not move along
the axis for
which
no coordinate
position
is specified.
2ND
z
!
/
/
+
4. When G29 is commanded
after G 30, the tool
moves via the interim point specified by G30
to the position specified by G 29. However,
the interim point is renewed only in the axis
specified by G30.
2.8.14
(1)
REFERENCE
a.
(2)
X( U)...
immediately,
when a skip
(2)
Fig. 2.18
G31
Z(W)
. . . (F(E)...);
With this command,
a special
linear
inter–
polation
is executed.
During
the interpolation
movement
under
this instruction,
the
tool interrupts
the interpolation
motion
POINT
INTERIM
POINT
SKIP FUNCTION (G 31)+
The motion
varies
with
block.
and proceeds
to the
signal
is received.
after
the receipt
the instruction
When the next
block
mental
values :
of
of
next
block,
a skip
the next
signal
is programmed
in incre-
The tool moves
incrementally
in accordance
with the next block
from the point
where
the interpolation
is interrupted.
The 2nd reference point is specified in
advance in terms of the distance from the
1st reference point commanded
by G28, by
parameters #6612 and #6613.
37
2, 8.14
SKIP
FUNCTION
(G31)t
(Cent’d)
(3)
EXAMPLE
G31
W120.
;
GO1
u1OO.
;
ACTUAL
MOTION
COMMAND
,-+
.—
--
:J
,50
G code.
The feedrate for blocks containing G 31 are
set in the following two methods, selectively
specified by parameter #6019D 4.
a.
Designation by F in the same way
normal programs .
b
Presetting of feedrates by parameter
4
1~~
~z
(4)
1
I
x
G31 is a non-modal
When no skip signal is received during the
execution of the block containing G 31, the
tool stops at the end of the block, and alarm
“087” is displayed.
(5)
ON
When
a skip signal is received, the coordinate
values
at that moment
as parameter
data.
#6568
When the next
block
lute values
only for
The tool moves
position
in the
at the position
ceived,
if axis
is programmed
one axis:
to the specified
specified
axis.
where
the skip
is not specified.
in
abso-
coordinate
It remains
signal
is re–
Notes
G31
Z400.
;
GO1
X1OO.
;
ACTUAL
MOTION
COMMAND
~
3.
--l
ON
When the next block
is programmed
lute values
along
two axes :
The tool
from the
received.
moves
point
in abso-
to the commanded
position
at which
a skip signal
is
\
2
200.
EXAMPLE
G31
W1OO.
GO1
X300.
Z200.
;
\
x
L
300
#656 9 for
storing
Z coordinate
value
be
used
as system’
variables
:
programming
G40 for canceling
SATION
. Failure
alarm
“024. “
4’
SKIP SIGNAL
value
Before
DIA
400
X coordinate
2.
--—-
z
storing
stored
When parameter
#6004D0 is set to 1, the program is advanced
to the next
block
automatically
even
when no skip signal. is received
during
the execution
of the block
of G31.
x
L-
automatically
1.
v~
100
are
for
These
data can
in user macros.
EXAMPLE
c.
#6232.
/
SKIP
SIGNAL
b.
as with
Commanding
the program
the current
G31,
be
sure
to program
TOOL
RADIUS
COMPENto do this
initiates
G31 with skip signal
ON
to the next ~loc~
without
block.
advances
executing
2.8.15 THREAD CUTTING, CONTINUOUS THREAD
CUTTING (G 32)
This
taper
ing.
function
threads,
(1)
G32
is
for cutting
scrolls
and
X( U)...
Z(W)
straight
threads,
for continuous
thread–
. . .
F(E)
. . .
;
With this command,
the tool cuts threads
to the point
(X,
Z ) specified
in absolute
coordinates
or (U, W ) specified
in incre–
mental
coordinate
values,
at a lead desig–
nated
by F or E code.
DIP
\
\
___
up
100
L
I
/
SKIP SIGNAL
ON
(2)
The range
E codes
is
of leads
to be
as follows.
specified
by
F and
Table
Feedrates
follows.
2.16
are
limited
Output
Metric
by
I
spindle-speed
S as
F(E,XS&lt;= 24,000 mm/min
Metric
inch Output
Input
F(E)x S S 2,400 in./min
=
Metric
output
F24
FO,CxJOl–F19.6850
I
The
half
in.
Inch
Input
I
E 26
F 32
(4)
in.
Command
below.
of
E34
I
EO.0303-E1270.0000mm
F24
\
FO.COl-F50.0000in.
X-axis
format
component
Command format
Inch
output
Straight
Thread
inch
R~
Input
(3)
EO.O3OO1O-F5O.OOCOOO in.
E 26
F code
is
for
normal
E code
is for
precise
thread
The direction
of lead
codes
is shown
below.
by
F and
E
EXAMPLE
of Lead
I
Limitation of Taper Angle
+x
“dI=*
cutting.
specified
Direction
(x,z)
cutting.
thread
~~~~
Thread
Direction of Lead
+2
0&gt;
45”
Lead in the direction of X-axis
Y
+x
I
cI
I
I
Straight
leac[
L
---------
/
Cutting
= 5.0
mm
Omm
tiz=3.
Omm
depth
(iJ
GO(I u--42.
@
G32
END POINT
Thread
6~=5.
Lead in the direction of Z-axis
o
L~
:
= 1.0
GOO IJ,Q.
mm
;
w--68.
F5. O
;
w 68.
;
u-44.
;
+Z
G32
START PO IN T
GOO U44.
L [Lead)
Fig.
w--68.
–x
2.19
is
is shown
2.17
I
Type
speed
of threadcutting
Table
FO.01 -F 1270.00 mm
I
Metric
Input
E 0,~0004-E19.685000
upper
limit
the above.
;
;
_12-
.-— ——
I
(’
+2
2.8.15
e
THREAD CUTTING, CONTINUOUS
THREAD CUTTING (G 32)
EXAMPLE
: Taper
Thread
lead
(Cent’d)
Thread
51=3.
Omm
62=2.
Omm
Cutting depth
(b) Worm Screw
= 1.0 mm
GOO
X13.
;
G32
x38.
W-35.
GOO x60.
Since
the stop time between
thread
cutting
blocks
is approximately
zero,
smooth,
continuous
thread
cutting
is possible.
If
thread
lead specification
is changed
midway,
the thread
becomes
irregular
near the
boundary
of blocks.
F4. o;
;
W35.
G32
1.
L = 4.0 mm
;
X-n.
;
X36.
w-35.
GOO x60.
Notes
;
1.
;
:
Allowances
6 1 and 6 z are
cutting
because
lead error
starting
and end points.
I
(.
I
2.
I
I
Continuous
G32
thread
X( U)...
Z(W)
. . .
F(E)
(G32)
X( U)...
Z(W).
;
(G32)
X(U)””
Z(W)”.
;
This command
. . .
;
executes thread cutting.
I
I
Pipe
(a)
Joint
i
—
&amp;
‘!
—
—
.Z
lag.
3.
Threading
up for
If necessary,
G32.
commanded.
4.
The following
operation
is disregarded
ing thread
cutting
including
G 32
cutting
thread
the
If spindle
speed
is not constant
during
thread
cutting,
the leads
become
incorrect
due to the
servo
I
for
near
v
f-------~
+x
I
required
occurs
thread
G92
is not effective
at
(or G76t)
should
be
0.0
. Feedrate
Override
o Feed
Hold Operation
. Single
Block
Operation
Regarded
5.
The G 32 command
in G98 mode.
not
6.
In Dry
rate.
7,
Do
Run
mode,
should
be
the tool moves
dur-
as
100%
commanded
at Jog feed-
not command M code for continuous thread
the commanded
block
cutting. If commanded,
stops as feedhold and will not permit continuous thread cutting.
(6)
Allowance
for
lead
error(
61,
6
MULTI -S,TART THREAD CUTTING (G 32)’
2.8.16
2)
+x
With this
1
tJ-
two or
without
cutting,
#-—
start
point
pulse
( 1 pulse /revolution)
generated
by a pulse
generator
installed
on the spindle
to
control
the starting
point of thread
always
at the
same position
around
the workpiece
circumference.
+Z
i
Fig.
61 and 6 z are obtained
following
equation.
function,
multi–start
threads
containing
more threads
per lead can be machined
shifting
the starting
point.
In thread
the tool feed is started
in phase
with a
2.20
approximately
from
the
Table 2.18
With the multi-start
thread
cutting
function,
after
cutting
a thread
by controlling
the starting
point
by the starting
point
pulse,
another
thread
is cut by starting
the cutting
feed at an angular
position
of the spindle
which
is displaced
from
the starting
pulse
position
by a preset
angle.
Equation
m
LEAD
L (mm): Lead of thread
S(r/min): Spindle speed
K: Constent
(Normal value:
a ( –):
33)
Accuracy of thread
_ AL.
Lead error
—
1In: Natural logarithm
(Icg e)
1150
a
1/100
1/150
1/250
1/200
1/300
Two Start
(ln~
– 1)
2.91
3.61
4.01
4.29
; 4.52
4.70
Thread
Fig. 2.21
(1)
G32
X((J)
. . .
Z(W)
. . .
F(E)
. . .
B..
.
;
EXAMPLE
Lead
of
thread
L
= 3.0
Spindle
speed
S = 500 rjrnin
Thread
cutting
a = 1/100
With this command,
the tool cuts a thread
starting
at an angular
position
which
is
displaced
from the position
corresponding
to the starting
pulse
by an angle
specified
by B, to X(U)
or Z(W)
point,
at a lead
mm
specified
by
F Or E code.
61&gt;
(2)
_3.
—
62&gt;
ox
500
60.K
~=
60. K
x3.61
3.0X500
60. K
=3.
Omm
=0
p,qmm
“
The data specified
multi–start
thread
as follows.
Least
input
Programmable
by address
B in the
cutting
function
is
increment:
range:
O. 001 deg.
O s
B
s
360.000
When decimal
point
input
is used,
B 1.=ldeg.
The B code is non-modal,
and is effective
only in the programmed
block.
41
MULTI-START
2.8.16
THREAD
CUTTING
(G32)
(Cent’d)
(3)
Number
of starts and
B code
t
EXAMPLE
G32
W“”.
B90
G32
W.”’
Continuous
ting
cannot
because
of
this block.
In principle, the thread
the
the
starting
points
on
workpiece
circumference
sh&amp;jd
divide
circumference
into equal portions.
EXAMPLE
2START THREAD
START:NG POINT
3-START TbREACI
STARTING PO NT
4-START THREAD
STARTING POINT
@&amp;@
1 S- n-READ
21,:
‘1PEA2
NO 8
CO MtJAh D
E180
1 ST ‘H REAC
2ND THRE/t2
3RD T}it?EA3
NC e
c c 1.1b&gt;’
-.h 2
6’20
E240
1 ST T-IREAD
2N0 TH5EAD
3 R13 THREAD
4 T+ THREAD
hO B
COMI.lANG
B90
3180
B270
:
Two-start
GOO
U..
.
;
G32
W..
.
F.-.
GOO
U..
.
;
w..
.
;
u..
.
;
thread
cutbe performed
feedhold
at
G32
W..
.
;
GOO
U..
.
;
G32
W..
.
B180
GOO
U..
.
;
.
B180.
Thread
1
~ Threading
Fig. 2, 22
Notes :
1.
Since
(4096
the angular
pulses/rev.
position
detection
) generated
from
pulses
the spin-
dle pulse
generator
is used to define
the
angular
position
of the spindle
with respect
to the starting
point
as controlled
by the B
command,
the least
detectable
increment
is
360&deg;/4096
pulses
~, O. 08790/pulse.
From the position
commanded
by B codes,
an error
up to fl pulse
may occur.
2.
The angular
position
from the starting
can be specified
in both forward
and
directions
by BO - B 360. commands.
pulse
reverse
3.
When B command is made to specify angles
outside the permissible range (O - 360.000) ,
alarm “062” is displayed,
If multi-start thread cutting B is specified, continuous thread cutting cannot be
executed.
w..
.
;
u“””
;
G32
W..
;
1
of
part
I@)
(1)
(3)
VARIABLE LEAD THREAD CUTTING+
2.8.17
G34
X( U)...
z(w)
. . .
K..
F(E)
-$”
variable
increase
specified
VARIABLE
Fig.
(2)
The
lead
Least
range
screws
b.
Lead
input
mm/rev.
(Metric
Input)
The highest
programmable
(metric)
or
for
4194.303
mm (metric
output)
419.4303
in.
Feedrate
variation
(metric
d.
Lead
(inch
value
should
(iii)
Accumulated
value
of movement
lead variation
must not exceed
mm (metric
output)
or 419.4303
output)
.
(iv)
Feedrate
variation
(metric
at end
be
The control
above
using
or
must
50 in
be
minus
due to
4194.303
in (inch
checks
the restriction
the following
equation.
F:
Fixed
rev)
K:
Variable
in./ rev )
w:
Distance
between
on Z–axis
(mm or
lead
command
lead
command
s:
Spindle
speed
N:
Spindle
speed
start
and end
described
(mm /rev
start
inch)
For facing
screw,
as U on X-axis.
-(F
minus
point
exceed
change
corres~ondin~
to lead
must not exceed
5, 400 mm /rein
output)
or 540 in /mm (inch
output
output)
not
of
following
not
changes
change
corresponding
to lead
must not exceed
5, 400 mm /rein
output)
or 540 inJmm (inch
output).
in the
Feedrate
value.
Input)
from
is restricted
(ii)
is within
the maximum
range
( 500 mm/rev
(inch))
resulting
following.
K command
not
range:
feedrate
feedrate
50 in/rev.
for
cutting.
Feedrate
at end point
must
programmable
range.
500 mrfl/rev
(metric
output)
rev
(inch
output)
in./rev.
(Inch
lead
K command
conditions.
(i)
b.
variable
0.000001
The total displacement
in lead is within
the
c.
are
of
K.
increment:
0.0001
thread
Threadcutting
of K programmable
is as follows.
Programmable
a.
lead screws
or decrease
by address
LEAD SCREW
Variable
2.23
calculation
variable
;
a.
With this command,
controlled
with the
lead per revolution
Confirmation
or
in,f
(mm/rev
or
and
.
points
distance
end
is specified
(rev/rein)
for movement
points
(rev)
+$)
+
N=
i
(F
between
+*)2
+2.
K.W
K
(i)
value.
Equaticm
F +
~
for
+ KN
limit
in
a.
(i)
S 500.000
50.0000
mm/rev
in/rev
limit
in
a.
(ii)
limit
in
a.
(iii)
or
Notes :
(ii)
1.
When variable
lead threads
are cut by continuous block
programs,
command
pulses
are
interrupt
ed at block
junctions.
If K commands
exceed
the permissible
alarm (1060!!” will be displayed.
3.
When G 34 command
is executed
in the Dry
Run mode,
the
tool
moves
only at the speed
specified
by the manual
continuous
feedrate
command,
if parameter
SCRDRN
( #6019 BIT5)
is set to 1.
for
(F+~-)2+2Kw&gt;I)
(iii)
2.
Equaticm
range,
Equaticm
~KN2
for
S
4194, 303 mm or
419,4303
4.
5.
!11oIN!!
( #6006D5)
When parameter
1, least increment
for K commands
mm/rev
or O. 0001 in./rev.
Commanding
address
alarm
11(360.II
B in G34 block
is set
is
(iv)
Equaticln
&amp;
. K.N
for
S
limit
5,400
in a.
in
(iv)
mm/min
or
540 in/rein
to
0.001
causes
43
2.8.18
STORED STROKE LIMIT (G 36-G 39)+
G36
U..
.
W..
1..
.
K..
.
;
z=
This
function
is for preventing
the entry
of the
tool into the prohibited
area, in both automatic
operation
mode and manual operation
mode,
to
Three
types
of pro–
secure
safer
operation.
hibited
areas
can be set up as shown
below.
coordinate
(3)
1 ST PROHIBITED AREA
(BY PARAMETER)
OLTSIDE PROHIBITION
2ND PROHIBITED
(BY G36)
I
/
.4
; .
Setting
area
3rd
prohibited
is turned
off
by
Set up + side boundary
point
E and - side
boundary
point
F by the setting
function.
b.
Selectively
designate
the inside
side of the area between
points
parameter
#6007D 1.
c
c1
The area check
function
single
code block
G37
a.
AREA,
/
coordinate
a
or the outE and F by
INSIDE OR
OUTSIDE
PROHIBITION
I)
-x
E
=
INSIDE OR OUTSIDE PROHIBITION
c.
I
~
P
4+--- ‘z
In addition
to the method
by the s’etting
function,
the following
instruction
can be
used to set a prohibited
area,
and to turn
on the area check
function
also.
3RD PROHIBITED
AREA (BY G 38)
G38
Fig. 2.25
(1)
a.
Setting
Set
+ side
B by
b.
c.
1st prohibited
boundary
This
area
programs.
can
not
- side
boundary
a.
Setting
+ side
Set
D by
b.
2nd
the
range
between
points
be
specified
by
part
prohibited
area
Setting
\
boundary
C and
setting
function.
to the
- side
;
Point
F
coordinate
is turned
method
by
the
off
by
a
; .
Prohibited
Area
A
Point B
for
Area
Z axis
z 66m
z 66m
~ %06
8 &amp;137
Division
—
Parameter
boundary
or the outC and E by
setting
function,
the following
instruction
used to set a prohibited
area,
and
on the area check
function
also.
44
.
X axis
Point
Prohibited
=
addition
K..
Table 2.19 Parameters and Settings
Selectively
designate
the inside
side of the area between
points
parameter
#6007D0.
In
.
A
(4)
c.
1..
The area check
function
single
code block
G39
Ist
(2)
W..
area
A and
the
.
Y--rPoint
E
coordinate
parameter.
The area outside
B is prohibited.
U..
can be
to turn
Coordinate
system
for
area
setting
The above
Points
A through
G are all set
absolute
values
on the machine
coordinate
is, the position
system
(MACHINE)
. That
is written
as the distance
from the ( lst)
in
reference
point
( 1 = least output
(move)
inthis function
will not
crement)
. Therefore,
become
effective
unless
the manual or automatic RETURN
TO REFERENCE
ZERO is ex–
ecuted
once after
the energization
of the
control.
(5)
Effective-ineffective
are a
selection
of
c
prohibited
With the following setting, the 2nd and the
3rd prohibited areas are selectively made
effective and ineffective.
Setting
Meaning
I
F
o
2nd prohibited area check OFF
1
2nd prohibited area check ON
0
3rd prohibited area check OFF
1
3rd prohibited area check ON
~6001 DI
EXAMPLE
When G36 through
G39 are commanded,
these
setting
data are automatically
rewritten.
Therefore,
the ON or OFF state
ultimately
specified
by G code commands
or setting
The
1st profunction
becomes
effective.
hibited
area is always
in the CHECK
ON
mode.
(6)
Starting
/
/
10,-8000)
area check
stroke
limit
(8
moved
Displaying
remaining
in the
return
Two prohibited
overlapping.
3.
In the
CHECK
MACHINE
function
WORKPIECE
CENTER
I
Contents
~ 6007 DO
o
a 6007 D,
o
~ 65rXI
– 5000
+ 6501
–6000
:6502
~
# 6503
)
c
–11000
–10000
~L
e;
#e601
First Area
2.
/ /h.
=s
Pararnetar/
Third Area
Notes :
&lt;_.
//////////
Setting
direc-
distance
///
Table 2.20
With this function,
the distance
between
the
current
tool position
and the boundary
of the
prohibited
area in the X and Z directions
are displayed
on the CRT . Refer
to 4.3.4.6.
“ Stored
Stroke
Limit .“
The points
on the
axes are included
/
/
B . D (-11000, -100’00)
error
manually
1.
/
/
—
the tool enters the prohibited area,
it stops just inside the boundary line, and
the control enters STORED
STROKE
LIMIT
ERROR
state. In this case, the tool can
be
REFERENCE
POINT
/
3RD PROHIBITEDAREA(INSIDE)
7-/////////
When
only
tion.
/
E (-4000 6500)
ir
+Z
/
i:D AREA(NISIDE)
Inside/Outside
Stored
A (2003, 10CO) )
7000, -9000)
When the tool is returned
to the reference
point
once manually
or automatically
after
the energization
of the control,
the area
check
function
is started
immediately.
Therefore,
if the reference
point
is in the
prohibited
area,
immediately,
STROKE
LIMIT
ERROR
will be caused.
In
this case,
turn off the area check
function,
and change
the data.
(7)
+x
1
1STPROHI131TED
AREA
1000
?6606
–11000
+ 6607
–ICQOO
“)
B
boundary
line in both
in the prohibited
area.
areas
LOCK
is not
can
be
set
ON mode,
effective.
with
partial
AREA
45
2 8.19 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
(G 40 THROUGH G 44)
VI RTJAL
TIP NOSE
Because
of a nose radius
of lathe
tools,
there
is
a deviation
between
the desired
curve
and the
Therefore,
tool offsets
actual
curve
produced.
are not enough
for taper
and circular
cuttings.
The tool nose radius
compensation
option
resolves
See Fig.
2.26.
the problem
of nose radius.
ALL ROUND
INSERT
Fig.
—-
2.27
For the writing
of radius
values
for tool
nose radius
compensation,
refer
to Fig .
4.3.5
Displaying
and Writing
Tool Offset
Data.
The address
character
is R .
m-+
(2)
a.
T
code
The
designation
T code
must
be
for
tool
nose
programmed
radius
with
compensation
sign
(+ or
-) .
CENTER
PROGRAtiMED
CIJTTING CONTOUR,
WITH TOOL
NOSE RADIUS
COMPENSATION
j
‘TOOL
\
T
NOSER
f
~n
Tool
nose
radius
values
~
a.
Radius
value
T
T
3-digit:
4-digit:
Refer
b. Range
Radius
range.
of
tool
value
nose
can
Offset
radius
be
set
within
the
following
c.
Setting
of
Right
side viewed
of tool travel
rl_ll
. . .
Left
side viewed
of tool travel
tool
Radius
value
out signs.
nose
of
tool
b .
o *9.9999
radius
nose
tool
in
values
must
nose
the
in the
radius
direction
direction
..,1. ,,
Fig. 2.28
i
I
for tool position
nose radius
number
. . .
Inch
o *99.999
4-digit)
‘x-lfiii2
4iiL
.“
values
Metric
Tool
““1’-“
Memory+
T
number
offset
and tool
compensation
ll+l!
9 sets
16 or 50 sets
to 2.6.2, “ Tool
of
Direction
of
compensation
storage
Tool nose radius
value
must be written
in the
storage
before
the tool nose radius
compenNumber
of pairs
that
sation
is commanded.
can be written
in the storage
depends
upon
the machine.
(In the case
1- Offset
L
VIRTUAL
TOOL NOSE
Fig. 2.26
(1)
~’~
l--T-l-
be
set
When a tool is used for turning and for facing , as the direction of tool motion changes ,
the correct direction of compensation should
be programmed
with sign of T code .
q,~~. s,~~
with,X
CO!b)PEhSATION
(T
~‘
LEFT SIDE
COMPENSATION
—
—-z
*
Fig.
2.29
T
(ii) When the power
is in effect.
The direction of compensation is changed
from + to – or - to + during program execushould not
tion. G40 or T~ U 00 command
be necessarily programmed
to cancel the
tool nose radius compensation.
(3)
G code designation (G40 to G44)
a.
(iii) When the RESET
button is depressed, G
code of 06 group are cancelled and G40
becomes effective.
(4)
Tool
to G44)
motion
-Ku2)’
- L=t
2.31.
.
Fig.
a.
One of G41, G42, G43 and G44 and T code
should
be programmed
before
the execution
These
of tool nose radius
compensation.
four G codes
specify
the relationship
between
the virtual
tool nose and the tool
center.
VIRTUAL
TOOL TIPS
motion
on the
tool
nose
radius
compen-
sation
G code of tool nose radius compensation
(G41
supply is turned on, G40
shows
the
outline
of
the
tool
...
..&gt;
BLOCK OF
COMPENSATIOh
~,
+x
WITH G 00
-Z
‘:3;,
t
R
Q&gt;l
G 43
\
TOOL
CENTER
‘
G~~
Fig. 2,31
Fig.
Regardless
compensation,
of
2.30
the mode of
the current
virtual
tool nose is displayed
ing the POS pushbutton.
b.
Issue
G40
pensation.
c.
Cautions
(i)
to cancel
the
by
tool
in programming
nose
radius
c1
G41
\
/
com-
(
(iii)
(iv)
G ‘NJ
//
c1
tool
tip
(
@
and
@)
the
path
.
bto
@).
The (connection
between
two blocks
in
compensation
mode is provided
by the
intersection
of tool center
paths
(M97)
and I:)y the circular
arc (M96) . In the
above
diagram,
blocks
3 and 4 are connected
by a circular
arc.
Block
@
for
compensation
start
and
block
@
for compensation
cancel
perform the connection
of compensation
mode and compensation
cancel
mode.
Program
should
be made carefully
for
these
blocks.
+’
n]
virtual
is cancelled,
meets with the
In compensation
mode,
the tool center
path is deviated
by radius
from the programmed
contour.
Therefore,
the path
of virtual
tool nose does not meet with
programmed
contour.
But the current
position
displayed
by depressing
POS
ke
is the position
of virtual
tool tip
G code
G 42
v
of
depress–
Since
G40 to G44 are modal G codes
of
06 group,
they
are retained
until the
other
G code is commanded.
Before
switching
one of G41, G42, G43 and G44
to another,
G40 must be intermediated
to
cancel
the compensation.
El
When the compensation
programmed
contour
tool nose radius
position
of the
\\
b,
G 44
G 43
Relationship
pensaticm
and
between
tool
tool position
nose radius
offset
com-
c1
Tool nose radius
compensation
apply
to
the programmed
contour
which
has been
offset
by the tool position
offset
function.
47
2 8.19 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
(G 40 THROUGH G 44) (Cent’d)
(5)
a.
HOW
enter
to
compensation
(b)
mode
Compensation
mode is set when both the tool
offset
number
by T code and G41 (or G42
through
G44) are instructed.
When this
mode is set,
tool nose radius
compensation
is
started.
More precisely,
compensation
mode
is entered
when the AND condition
between
T code and G code is established.
Hence,
the order
in which
these
codes
are specified
does not affect
the operation.
~)
GOO
T+0202
@
GO1
G41
@
G02
U30.
Compensation
;
x20.
z7.
W-15.
F600
115
;
FO.2
;
7
Movement
at Start
of Compensation
(for
GO1)
Mode
I
-x
G U1
CEhTEP
.
3
DIA
x
h
-z
-
b.
At the start
of compensation.
is offset
onto the n~rmal
of
the tool
the origin
center
of the
block
G41 to G 44 which
entered
the compensation
mode first
or of the block
immediately
The offset
is made to the
after
T code.
right
of tool advancing
direction
when T +
is specified
and to the left when T– is specified.
Sample
Program
(A)
:
(a)
~
GOO
T+ O1O1
(2J
GOO
G41
,-,
3
‘U
GO1
z-18.
Compensation
;
X30.
FO.25
[
;J
Z5.
;
Movement
at
Start
of Compen sation
( for GOO)
c.
If
the
block
satisfying
of
the
G41
(or
G42 through
compensation
mode
does
not have
the move
command,
the compensation
starts
and the tool center
is moved
on the normal.
Since
G41 (or G42 through
G44) involves
such a movement,
it is necessary
to specify
GOO or GO1 in th last or current
block
for
the G code of 01 group.
Specification
of a
G code other
than GOO, GO1, and Gll
will
result
in alarm “026. “
EXAMPLE
(B) : G41 (or
has no move command.
G42 through
Mode
(c)
48
G44)
condition
l@
GOO
T+0303
g
GO1
G41
(3’
GO1
X..
;
F..
.
Z..
.
;
.
F..
.
;
G44)
(d)
(ii)
@
GOO
T-0404
@
GO1
G44
@
G03
X..
;
F..
.
.
Z.. .
;
1..
m
F..
!
For an outside corner (tangent-line angle
is more than 180&deg;) , the movement is controlled.by the following M-code commands:
M96
... Tool radius compensation
circular path ON
M97
... Tool radius compensation
circular path OFF
(execution of intersection
calculation)
;
\/\\
m
/
\
‘.,
\
G44
.
I
CENTER
M96:
Note that the tool center
point
normal
to the start
diately
after
G41 (or G 42
T code,
for each of above
through
(b) . If G41 (or
(6)
have
Movement
no move
in
command,
compensation
an error
is
mode
When the tool nose radius
compensation
mode
is entered
by G 41 (or G 42 through
G44) command,
the tool center
keeps
moving
along
the path which
has been offset
by the tool
nose radius
by the program
command,
until
the mode is cancelled
by G40 or T •l 000
The path is automatically
calcucommand.
So, only the cut conlated by the control.
tour may be specified
in the part program.
However,
the following
should
be considered
for the inter-block
movements
and special
contours:
a.
Inter-block
Mode
M97:
Intersection
Computing
Mode
Movement
of circular
path is included
in
the previous
block.
Normally,
M96 is used for this operation
However,
when there
is a possibility
of
an “overcut”
in cutting
special
shapes
with the M96, M97 should
be used.
b, Movement
in GOO mode
The instruction
G 00 positions
tools independently
alc,ng each axis toward
the final offset
position,.
Care
should
be taken
on the cutter
path so that tool does not contact
the work.
TOOL
MC VEMENT
movement
For an inside
corner
(tangent-line
angle
is less than 180&deg;) , the intersection
point
(Intersection
is computed
and is passed.
point
computing
formula.
(i)
Path
through
G44) or
examples
(a)
G42 through
G44)
block
or the block
following
T code has no
move command,
one block
ahead is read
and
the compensation
start
operation
is performed
With no move command
specion that block.
fied,
up to two blocks
may be programmed
However,
if three
or more
consecutively.
blocks
caused.
Circular
is offset
onto the
of the block
imme-
GOO
G 01
OR
PROGRAMMED
COMMAND
Fig.
2.32
v
PASSING
POINT
INTERSECTION
49
2.8.19
NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
TOOL
d.
(G 40 THROUGH G 44)+ (Cent’d )
(6)
Movement
in compensation
Programming
mode
c.
(i)
consideration
Be careful
not
shaped
cutting
(a)
mode
a wedgeT–
T-
Wrong
M 96
‘IY.---”~---”
-=::
--.–_.:,___________
-------
~;;::oo,
f
QINTERSECTION
;l&amp;cJp,4::
NOSE OF
GET IN
i
IS 4“
FAR AWAY
T+
GO1
G41
G04
U..
F..
.
;
T
\l 97
M..
\f 97
------i-
;
L
_
Q
1
---—-.
1
.
.
;
;
j
-----------
Compensation
is normally
made by the two or less
blocks
without
move command.
1
PROGRAM
IS MADE SO
THAT TOOL NOSE OF
2 R CAN GET IN THE
WENDGE
M40
~
;
If
instruction is programmed
no movement
in three consecutive blocks , tool center is
offset on the normal line at the end point
of the block immediate before them.
Program
the tool movement
so that the
tool nose of 2R diameter
can be in the
contour,
e.
(a)
in compen-
Correct
(b)
(ii)
no movement
The control
normally
reads
two blocks
ahead
during
tool radius
compensation
mode and
calculates
the tcml path.
If either
of these
blocks gives no coordinate
instructions
such
as G04 (dwell)
, the control
reads
a block
further
ahead
and makes calculations.
When
coordinate
instructions
are missing
in three
or more blocks
, tool radius
compensation
becomes impossible
and accurate
tool path can–
Therefore,
in a program
not be obtained.
where
G41 to G44 are used ensure
that,
after
them , two or more blocks
without
movement
command
in the compensation
plane
will not
follow .
(Cent’d)
in compensation
to program
contour.
Command
involving
sation
mode
Wrong
PROGRAMMED
CONTOUR
Use
If
of
dummy
blocks
it is impossible
to specify
a move
command
in three
or more consecutive
blocks
and the
offset
on the normal
line is not satisfactory,
a dummy
block
may be inserted.
The dummy
block
does not cause
an actual
This
block
is specified
for the
movement.
purpose
of providing
the data necessary
for
the tool nose radius
computation.
For the
address
of this dummy command,
I and K
are used.
(b)
Correct
PROGRAMMED
/
CONTOUR
I:
X-axis
K :
Z -axis
dummy
dummy
command
command
(incremental)
(incremental)
.
.
EXAMPLE
I and
:
type
N1
GO1
G41
N2
X..
.
z..
N5
2..
.
;
N6
1..
.
K..
N7
fvfxx
N8
G04
N9
MM
X..
.
Z,..
F..
;
.
; —
N1O
X“”.
Nll
Z“.
z..
.
1
blocks
or more
.
signed
according
to
the
arc.
CIRCULAR
PATH MODE)
block
By dummy
block
N 11, the linear command
block
of N 10 stops
at point
A for the following circular
movement.
f. Switching
between
T + and
T - in compensation
mode
;
This
coml?ensation
provides
the switching
between
T + and T - without
canceling
the
compensation
by G40 or T 3P 00 command.
;
Ii
be
circular
;
/
Dummy
Three
;
the
,M96
.
U.””
.
K should
of
11
EXAMPLE:
%0
IN5
5
‘x
Namely,
specify
incremental
to
K, which
are equivalent
in N6 for the dummy
mand,
If the purpose
Remarks:
is a circular
interpolation,
linear
dummy block
that
tion of the tangent
line
the circular
command.
N1O
IN1l
N12
GO1
Z“.
GO1
1(-a)
kfxx
;
N13
MOO
;
MM
;
G02
X...
N164.
.
Designates
hand side
N6
commands
N 10 block
I and
com-
X.. . Z.. .
;
the
dummy
GO1
x..
N9
N1O
block
generate
the
specifies
the direcat the start
point
N7
N8
X..
F..
.
.
T-O1O1
X..
.
Z..
Z..
.
.
;
;
r:
block.
of
G41
right-
compensation facing {he
proceeding direction
&gt; F..
F600
7::::~:eft-
.
;
;
compensation
/
x
(M96
MODE)
of
:
N14
rN15
; ~
~
THREE BLOCKS OR
MORE INCLUDING
NO MOVE COMMAND
EXAMPLE
GOO -T+O1O1
.
F..
.
;
K(-b)
; I
Dummy
block
I
Z...
1...”
K...
;I
g .
CENTER
Modification
of
tool
offset
volume
in compen-
sation mode
It is invalid
number
by
to newly
specify
a tool
offset
T
code in compensation mode.
The originally specified tool offset number
remains valid until the compensation mode
is cancelled by G40 or T G3 00 command.
-b
Nil DUMMY BLOCK
(LOQEAR LINE)
51
2.8.19
TOOL
(G40
THROUGH
(6)
Movement
NOSE
RADIUS
G44)
COMPENSATION
SINCE THE TOOL POSl TION OFFSET IS CANCELLE2
THE POSITION
IS (110 40) FOR THE
REFERENCE TOOL
\@
c ()[,
(Cent’d)
in compensation
mode
(Cent’d)
However, the tool nose radius value may be
changed by varying the offset memory con–
tents corresponding to the originally speci–
fied tool offset number, by means of MD I
operation. After this modification, the new
tool offset number is made valid beginning
with the block newly stored in the prefetch
buffer.
(;4!
,,7,
,
---::-----––=U
,,’
\
/’
—--+---”’
(b)
(T+0202,
G41)
MOTION
ON
COM-
PLETION
OF COMPENSATION
(GOO)
(7)
a.
to cancel
How
compensation
mode
When
G40 or T q~ 00 is specified,
compensation mode is cancelled, terminating the
tool nose radius compensation operation.
.~i
%
*CJ
~-d
~o
I._.
G40
;
-;
‘--G~Oj-–iOlOo
@
GO1
U24.
@
GO1
G40
@
GOO
T+0200
.
Z..
.
FO.3
x80.
F..
.
;
I
;
z40.
F6.
;
-1
;
;
;
Upon termination of compensation, the tool
center is offset onto the normal line to the
end point of the finalblock in compensation
mode, or the block immediately before
that for which G40 or T 3700 has been
specified. (Consequently, if a retracting
which results in acute–angle contour is
specified in G40 or T 3E 00 block, no uncut
portion is produced. )
Then, the tool moves so that the virtual
tool nose matches the end point of the move
command
specified in G40 or T all 00 block.
EXAMPLE
.~f
1.
MOTION
TION
(GOO)
(~1
GO1
U20.
~
GOO
G40
IQ
TO1OO
;
c.
If
the block
of G40 (Nose
radius
compensation cancel) does not have the mov-e com–
mand, the virtual tool nose moves to the
specified end point.
(and
T DU 00) commands
contain movement.
Specify GOO or GO1 in the block previous to or
the same as G40.
If the G code of 01 group is
other than GOO, GO1, or Gil, alarm II027!!
will be
activated.
(a)
si?
1
—--+-’--z
G40
A :
(T+ O1O1, G41)
z
X..
____
j-”--’i6iO;
TOlOO
21.
GO1
.
CLz
.
g.
U
G40
b.
@
FO.25
X11O.
ON
OF
;
Z40.
COMPLE-
COl [PENS ATION
; ~
EXAMPLE
B:
G 40 block
Move command
for canceling
in
Notes :
is not included
compensation.
programmed
errors
a.
(c)
(T-0303,
G41)
(i)
@
GO1
X...
‘~
GO1
G40
GOO
T-0300
Z...
F...
shapes that produce
When programming
compensation,
if
tool
radius
d
an inside
programmed
input
arc
arc
with tool
radius
R
;
TOICL
F...
62
;
—
;
-—-.
R
:&gt;
r
r..
G41
R
\
7
,5;
,
-
/’
,.’
,~, MOVEMENT
/
~]
“
P
AT
COMPENSATION
START BY 2
r~:$.?.L
--.,,
(d)
(T+0404,
G44)
)
‘-
r
Outside
compensation
made even when
r &lt;
r&lt;d
—
G02
X..
.
Z..
GO1
G40
GOO
T+0400
F..
.
K..
.
.
F..
.
(ii)
‘Z MOVEMENT
-—. —-—
;
:
;
When
:no intersection point exists on the
locus lofthe offset tool center.
AT
,--
I s:H%s8T’ON
I COMMAND
m
cc
,.,
NO INTERSECTION
.-
/’
/
-.
‘
\)&lt;
-.
5,2:
,’
,
G44
I
~
/’
,’
/
is correctly
R
1
I
TOOL
%
–L_..
-–_.
i
(a)
CENTER
Note that,
for each of above
examples
(a)
through
(b) , the tool center
is temporarily
offset
onto the normal line to the end point
of the block immediately before G04 or
T E200 command.
When tool nose radius
compensation
is cancelled
by the use of T’~E 00 command,
the
is pertool position
offset
cancel
operation
formed
concurrently
with the operation
at
tool nose radius
compensation
termination.
\
NO INTERSECTION
&amp;
R,
(b)
The cancel operation provides the movement in which the virtual tool nose matches
the last specified position for which tool
position
offset
has
been
cancelled.
If
co-
existence of these operations is not desired,
cancel either of them by the use of GAO
command.
53
s
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
(G 40 THROUGH G 44) (Cent’d)
2.8.19
(iii) When reversing command or an angle
close to reversing command is programmed in M97 (Outside Corner Circular
Arc Path Off) mode.
(a)
Reversing
GOO, GOI,
G04,
G06,
Gll
G 96, G 97
Constant surface speed control
G 98, G 99
command
Feed function designation
(G90,
G 9t)
Absolute/incremental
G02,
G03,
G12,
Command
G70,
(b)
Command
close
G71,
Gill,
R
fied
Interference
shapes
are
e.
check
To prevent
the tool
finished
shape
than
G23
G72,
Inhibited in
G73
the block of
from cutting
deeper
was programmed
in
compensation
cancel
Multiple cornering
d. The
b.
G22,
including circular arc
G112
(Beveling,
above
designation
Multiple repetitive cycle
to reversing
In M96 mode,
all of the
correctly
compensated.
Remarks
Usable G codes
into the
advance.
Interference
check
error
is activated
when the
difference
of moving
direction
is 90&deg; to 270&deg; between
the programmed
virtual
tool nose and compensated
tool
When an error
is detected,
the block
prior
center,
to the block
in which
overcutting
may occur
is
immediately
stopped
and an alarm is shown.
or start
rounding)
subprogram
(M98 or M99)
in compensation
mode.
When the tool offset
mand of “00, “ T:=
ing two meanings
:
(i)
Tool
position
( ii)
Tool
nose
offset
following
N2
G41
;
N3
GOO
T+O1O1
be
speci-
number
is T code com00 command
has the follow-
radius
The
may
is
cancelled.
compensation
program
can
be
is cancelled.
specified:
;
This function does not always prevent over–
cutting. There might be occasions when overcutting
is not detected as an error or normal cutting is
detected as an error.
TOOL
RADIUS
COMPENSATION
MODE WITH
TOOL
NO . 110111
:1
N21
GOO
TOlOO
;
TOOL
RADIUS
COMPENSATION
TOOL
POSITION
OFFSET
N25
OIRECTION
IS 180C
GOO
T-0202
;
TOOL
RADIUS
COMPENSATION
MODE WITH
TOOL
NO.
“02”
DIFFERENT
:1
c.
G codes
usable
in
compensation
mode
As a rule
G codes
other
than shown
below
not be used in the compensation
mode.
54
N40
GOO
T0200
N41
G40
;
should
;
CANCEL
f. Inhibition
of MDI
mode
(i)
Operation
in the MDI mode cannot
be performed
in the compensation
mode.
When
,RESET button
is depressed,
GOO (compensation
cancel)
becomes
effective
and
the operation
in the MD I mode becomes
possible.
(ii)
G40 through
G44 cannot
operation
in MDI mode.
g.
Command
or
compensation
Even in M96 mode
sation
and circular
i,
operation
for
be
written
(tool
arc
nose
path
radius
compenare on) , if
circular
arc distances
AX,
AZ are smaller
than the fixed
values,
the tool does not
follow
the corner
circular
arc path but moves
directly
to point
B . The fixed
values
are
those
which
are set by parameter
#6230.
~z
by the
@X,’2
--—————
TOOL
MOVEMEN1
‘\
canceling
‘.
*
The following
command
or operation
during
tool radius
compensation,
cancels
the compensation
completely
or temporarily.
The command
or operation
should
not be
performed:
PROGRAMMED
In
case
COMMANO
of
A/’
AX/2
S NEGNR
AZ
S NEGNER
Constant
parameter
NEGNR:
1. Three
consecutive
blocks
without
move command
value
for
setting
1
2&lt; MOO or
3.
4.
Temporarily
cancelled
M-code set by parameter for stopping
advance reading
(6 Max)
G commands
for
advance
reading
G38,
G39
5.
M02,
6.
Reset
7.
MO1 command
EXAMPLE
I
stopping
G36, G37,
A :
?41 G50
X140.
z.30.
N2
COO
s1700
M03
N3
(cOO)
G41
XO
;
T+02132
z5.
;
_TOOL
NOSE
CO,MPENSATION
START BLOCK
;
N4 GO1 20 F0,2 ;
rJ5 X20, ;
1
N6 z-20. ;
Completely
can celled,
M30 commands
+
N7 X30, w-15, S11OO ;
operation
Turning
off
power
supply
N8 G12 w-20. 13, ; —ROUNDING
i
j
Gll
N9
X50.
K-3,
S700
;
—BEVELING
TOOL NOSE
COMPENSATION
N1O GO1 X-70. ,
h. Commands
The
for
1.
causing
following
they
G28,
commands
cause
G29,
CIRCULAR
Nll G22 X90. Z-90, R20, s360 ; —ARC
BY
RADIUS
N12 GO1 xI1O. S300 ;
error
must
not
be given,
errors.
G30
N13
G04
UO
N14
(GO1)
:
‘DWELL
Z-11O. ;
N15 X120, ;
2.
G50,
G51
3.
G74,
G75,
G76
4.
G90,
G92,
G94
5.
G31
- G35
6.
G68,
G69
7.
G122,
J
TOOL NOSE
N16 GOO x140. Z30. T0200 ; ~o~p~Ns*~~oN
COMPLETE
N17
G40
;
/’
,.’
~lj
BLOCK
:___
=-------------------------------a
‘:O;’
CC$,IPENSATION
-__..
CANCEL
-— --—---
T~j:~&amp;~:N-&gt;;,@
OF%ET MOTION,,.’
/.
---ill;--
G123
\
1109;$
j#’
/,
~~~L
PROGRAMMED
CONTOUR
CENTER
~
3;3
COMPENSATION
START
.1
j
,{
;
II
I’
+X:J’
I
50.
3 fv/M
BEVELING
:!0.
,!
30.
‘
15.
k
DIA
II
20.DIA
20.
‘r
b
K-no.
: 1’
It
1 ~
R3 RI:) UN61NG
20.
//
DIA
15.
‘1
N4
20.
b
-z
5
--90. P-70
55
2.8.19
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
(G 40 THROUGH G 44) (Cent’d)
(7)
How to cances
compensation
~.
-
mode
2.8.19.2
Conditions
Compensation
The
2.8.19
point
(1)
T-
Normal
R
following
.2.1
are
the
Designation
Direction
of
the
details.
of
the
projected
projected
tool
nose
tool
nose
point
The shift
direction
of automatic
nose
R is
prescribed
by determining
the projected
tool nose
point
position
by specifying
a numeral
of O to 9.
(a)
Nose
to be Enabled
becomes
effective
Automatic nose R compensation
the projected
tool nose point
by four
conditions:
designation
set by the offset
number,
the radius
of tool nose
R, the offset
side setting
by G41 and
G42, and the T code command.
(Cent’d)
T–
-
T+–
for the Automatic
Function
The
Insert
direction
is
as
shown
in
Fig.
2.34
(X
plus specification).
All ROUND
INSERT
2
G41
T.
4
G -il
T:
G
42
~_
G42
T,+
@
VI RTIJAL
TOOL NOSE
71
L
(2)
How
to
The projected
offset
screen
All
(b)
Fig. 2.33
Round
2.8.19.1
Insert
( G code to be used
side of virtual
tool nose. )
by setting
Relations
for Tool
Automatic
between
Nose
Nose
G code
Radius
and Sign
8
3
Fig.
decided
5
0’9
I
I
is
6
2.34
Projected
set
the
tool
(Fig,
the
“
Tool
Nose
projected
nose point
2.35) .
tool
is
nose
set
Select
(b)
Select
the corresponding
from TO1 to T49.
tool
projected
is
of T Code
tool
nose
point
R Function
The offset side switching from the end face to
the outer diameter becomes simple.
Then the tool coordinate system based
machine coordinate system is set.
After
the T command
is given,
for nose R compensation
is performed
control
point
and G41, G42.
tool
is
on the
the calculation
by the
Fig.
through
offset
Compensation.
When the T command
is executed,
the
selected
and the nose R and control
point
corresponding
to the tool is also selected,
point
the
m
•~~ “ function.
n
(a)
Nose R compensation is performed by the nose R
control point (0 to 9) command and G41, G42.
56
Direction
2.35
Offset
Screen
3.
memory
2.8.19.2.2
How to set the tool nose R data
(1)
Approach
GOO + GO1 or
relief
GO1 + GOO
(a)
When the cutting
command
move axis direction
is larger
than 45&deg; against
the Z-axis
vector
(wall)
(1 X/21 &gt; I ZI ), a projected
parallel
to the Z-axis
is assumed,
to calculate
the compensation
with the cutting
move axis.
memory
The tool nose
offset
screen
R data memory
(Fig.
2.35).
is
set
through
the
-the
“
a
OFS “
(a)
Select
function.
(b)
Select
the corresponding
from TO1 to T49.
tool
offset
The
position.
memory
(b)
tool
2.8.
nose
19.2.3
R data
G41,
The offset
commanded
G42
direction
by the
specification
is
“O, 8 mm” ,
command
of the current
cutting
G41,
G42 commands
(X
is
plus
machine
moves
toward
this
calculated
When the cutting
command
move axis direction
is smaller
than 45&deg; against
the Z-axis
( lX/21 &lt; = I ZI ) , a projected
vector
(wall)
parallel
to the Z- axis is assumed,
to
calculate
the compensation
with the cutting
move axis.
The
position.
machine
moves
toward
this
calculated
).
Nose
R offset
off
Forward
direction
of nose
R
Forward
direction
of nose R
G40:
G41:
G42:
x
on
the
left
is
on
the
right
center
is
A
center
LARGER
THAN
45 a
-z
2.8.19.2.4
T
code
command
PROJECTED
The T code number
( 4 digits)
determines
the
coordinate
system,
wear off set,
and tool nose R.
For details,
refer
to par.
2,6.5
‘! New coordinate
system
setting
function.
(a)
It
PROJECTED
VECTOR
T**
VECTOR
x
$$
-rT
~
offset
number
(wear
(tool
01 to
~
16/01
number
(tool
coordinate
to
16/01
R)
SMALLER
to 49
Too,
01
offset)
nose
THAN
45”
-z
memory
number)
to 49
(b)
2.8.19.3
Offset
Compensation
Calculation
Approach
of Automatic
and
Nose
The automatic
nose R compensation
function
been
improved
from the nose R compensation
function
of the conventional
YASNAC
LX3.
2.8. 19.3.1
compensated.
performed.
The
2.8.
Compensation
19.3.2
In
GOO + GOO block
is
short,
positioning
is
R
Relief
performed
not
alone
has
is
for
approach
GOO + GO1 (G02,
G03) by setting
a
prolected
vector
(wall)
on the tool to prevent
excess
infeed
or shock,
as follows.
(G02.
(wall)
Compensation
is performed
for relief
GO 1
G03) + GOO, by setting
a projected
vector
to prevent
insufficient
cut,
as follows.
57
2. 8.19.3
Offset
Compensation
Calculation
Approach
of Automatic
and
Nose
R
Relief (Cent’d)
—
(Example)
I
U7
,/
/
/
,
/’
,,
,/’//
‘/
(PARALLEL
WITH
‘
.
I
(a)
PROJECTED
/,,
THAN
PROJECTED
VECTOR
45-1
---\’
~ Ooy:&lt;;..
x
,
\
//.
M--
(pARALLEL
z-AXIS)
WITH
#T,,
Q ,,
/
&amp;/
c:, 1
I
(b)
co],
‘@42)
PROJECTED
vECTO
R
l/’
/’
SMALLER
THAN
45
GOO(G42:I
(2)
Approach
(or G03)
(a)
When the circular
cutting
command
move
direction
is larger
than 45&deg; against
the
Z-axis,
a projected
vector
(wall)
parallel
the Z–axis
is assumed,
to calculate
the
compensation
with the cutting
move axis,
The
position.
(b)
58
GOO + G02
+ GOO
machine
(or
moves
G03)
toward
or
relief
this
G02
axis
to
calculated
When the circular
cutting
command
move
axis
direction
is smaller
than 45&deg; against
the Zaxis,
a vector
(wall)
parallel
to the Z–axis: is
assumed,
to calculate
the compensation
with
the cutting
move axis,
The
position.
i
-7.
“ED
I
/
/
Tool nose point 3
machine
moves
toward
this
calculated
( Example)
Tool
nose
point
PROJECTED
SMAIIER
THAN
3
VECTOR
j;/
@/
PROJECTED
45&deg;
QQ ,
G,/
VECTOR
SMAIIER
?HAN
45”
/
/
T
C03(G
G03(G
42)
42)
/
%
59
2. 8.19.3
Offset Calculation of Automatic Nose
Compensation
Approach
and Relief (Cent’d)
Table
2.20A
Automatic
R
Nose
R Approach
and
Relief
Patterns
LINEAR
CIRCULAR
45 ~ OR LESS
MORE
THAN
45
\\
\
7
A
i,
\
‘\
C=l
*
2.8.19.4
The
Cancel
Nose
G40
Function
; Command
GOIXZIK
is Also
Available
in the
Automatic
R Function
ZIK
: command
cancel
The G40 GOO X
function
(menti=ned~at=)
, ~s” well as the same
function
by the GO I command
are available.
This
commands
command,
makes
a projected
wall by the I,
in the block
before
the G40 GO1
to execute
the nose R calculation.
x.—
2
K
ABSOLUTE ZERO
POINT (O, O)
d
+Z
Notes :
1.
2.
The nose R center is on the normal of the
end point in the G40 GOO X — Z— ; block or
G40 single-block.
Fig. 2.34
The nose R complete cancel is performed in
the block immediately before the G51 singleblock or G28 block,
3.
The cross point is calculated in the block
immediately before G40 GOO X
Z
I
K
;
and the vector indicated by ‘~, ‘K. ‘r
—
4.
When GO1 and G41 (G42) are commanded
at
the same time, the nose R center will be on
the normal of the start point of the next
block .
(2)
G50
.
W.. .
; (Incremental
G50 )
When the addresses
U and W are specified
instead
of X and Z, the new absolute
coordinate
is set up by adding
incremental
values
U (X-axis)
and W ( Z-axis)
to the
absolute
coordinate
previously
set.
When the tools
the incremental
are very
cliff erent
in length,
G 50 (addresses
U, W) is
use f ul.
groups.
The tools should
be divided
into two
Then,
the difference
between
the
length
of the reference
tool and that of the
second
group
of tools can be set at the
incremental
G 50 command
and an absolute
coordinate
system
can be stored.
However, in canned cycle, start up can
be performed by GO1 G42 of the first block,
but cannot be performed by repeating the
command later.
G50
5.
U..
U1OO.
; and G40 GO1 Z
I ; are
G40 GO1 X
K
of the sam~com—mand
format as th~ ch&gt;mferin g
command, but the cancel function has priority
only when the G40 command is given.
W-1OO.
;
G50 COMMAND
OF REFERENCE
100.
+x
. . . Setting
Position
of
B
FOSITION
TOOL
B
I
H
FOSITION OF
THE SECONO
GROUP
2.8.20
(G 50)
PROGRAMMING
OF ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT
(1)
absolute
G50
X..
coordinate
.
Z..
.
/(G50x
z
‘)
+------+’
Absolute
coordinate
system
should
be set before
After
setting
up the absolute
move command.
all motions
can be commanded
coordinate
system,
on the
50
y
Fig.
2.35
system.
;
This
command
makes the present
position
of
tool tip the absolute
coordinates
(X,
Z) .
The values
with a sign following
the addresses X and Z are the distances
between
tool
tip and the absolute
zero point
(O, O) to be
Therefore,
it can be said that “G50
set.
command
specifies
the
absolute
zero
point.
”
61
2.8.20
PROGRAMMING
(G 50) (Cent’d )
(3)
OF ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT
Assume that the tool No. 01 is reference
tool, and perform the setting of the following coordinate system for this tool:
G50
X80.
z62.
4.
When
5.
The current position of the tool in G 50 coor–
dinate system is shown in “POSITION
ABSOLUTE”
of current position display.
6,
The coordinate system which was set is not
affected by reset operation. The cmrdinate
system is reset by one of the following operations:
;
then , select the tool No. 02 which has the
tool position compensation value shown in
the figure below and peroform the compensation operation, and the tool No. 02 moves
to point A.
N3
G50
x80.
N4
GOO
TO1O1
the power
supply
is turned
on, the preof tool is set to the coordinate
sent position
Therefore, the absolute coordinate
(o,
o).
system should be set up before operation.
z62.
GOO
(ii)
G50
mode
(iii)
The
;
G50 COMMAND
POSITION AT
TOOI NO 01
~;
=
62
is
turned
on
is written
in MDI
again.
MAXIMUM SPINDLE-SPEED SETTING (G 50)t
function
S 4–digit
is used for
designation
(1)
G50
.
S..
the control
provided
option.
;
the address
S
Four digits
following
the upper
limit of spindle
speed
specifies
in rpm.
If an S command
exceeding
the
limit is issued
in subsequent
blocks,
the
spindle
speed
is governed
at the
upper
limit,
(2)
In G 96 (Constant
Surface
Speed
Control)
mode, when spindle speed rises up too fast
as the current X-coordinate of the tool is
too small, the spindle speed is clipped
the limit.
EXAMPLE
:
T , S and M commands
following
that
in the block
are programmed
containing
G50,
be programmed
GOO should
the traverse
This
designates
offset
motion.
in the block.
rate for tool
G50
X..
GOO
S500
.
Z..
M03
.
TO1O1
G50
S2000
The maximum
2000 r/rein.
;
spindle speed is clipped at
Notes :
;
;
G code which
is valid only
G 50 is a nonmodal
block.
in the specified
the other
Generally,
be
G codes, and M, S, and T codes cannot
specified in the same block. Note that
is a
;or
G50
T.. . ; command
G50
S.. .
separate
feature
and is not for coordinate
system setting.
3.
power
This
with
2,36
1. When
2.
XO ZO ; command
and is executed.
40mm
If the coordinate
system setting is performed
tool
and tool position
com–
with the reference
pensation
is applied
to the
other
tool as
shown
above, the tool movement
may be
programmed
on a single
coordinate
system
for alltool noses.
Notes
(see
is per-
NO 02
+------+z
Fig.
key
When setting
work
coordinate
system by G50,
Work
parameter
#6o 18 D7 can select whether
System Shift in 2.6.5
will be efCoordinate
fective
or not.
2.8.21
TOOL
‘H+
by ORG
ABSOLUTE)
formed.
;
T0202
reset operation
4.3.4.2, POSITION
;
7.
N1O
The
(i)
be commanded
after
G 50 should
set and tool
radius
compensation
the tool offare cancelled
1.
Maximum
spindle speed specified by G50 can
be displayed on the CRT
display. Refer to
4.3.2.1,
“Command Data Display.
”
2.
The specified maximum
spindle speed is not
cleared by reset operation.
3.
In case of S 4-digit designation B , unit of
Refer to
address S is not shown by rpm.
machine tool builder’s manual. For S 2-digit
designation, this function cannot be used.
WORK COORDINATE MULTI-SHIFT
2.8.22
(G 50T, G 51)+
+Z
This feasure is used in combination with “5.2.3,
Measured Workpiece Value Direct Input” option.
Hence itis necessary for the programmer to be
familiarwith paragraph 5.2.3.
The number
of available
tool coordinate
memory
units
corresponds
to the number
of tool offset
memory
combinations
as shown
below.
b.
Zm
+Z
Xm
(&lt;
%
I
\
:~g~~
Memcxy Combinations
Menwy
COORDINATE
SYSTEM” SET BY
TOR AT ‘“WORK MEASURED
VALUE
INPUT’OPERATION
Fig. 2.37
(2)
Work
G50
a.
coordinate system setting (G50T)
TZLAA
1-1--
~
Specifies tool offset number
(00
L
%tilable
wORKPIECE
T,
—
Number of Tool Offset
Number
this
command,
Work coordinate
system
setting
value
c. For ease of use, write the coordinate data
for tool No. 01 in tool coordinate memory
No. 51, etc. , as shown below:
Content
of
programmed
I
tool coordinate
(51 to 99)
memory
system
for each of
the following
work
value:
Memory
50)
to
Specifies
Tool Coordinate
Using
Tool Coordinate
2
r -1
(number)
It is necessary, before specifying G 50T, to
write the coordinate data for each tool to
the tool coordinate memory.
For the writing procedure, see 5.2.3,“Measured WorkpieceValue Direct Input.”
I
TOOL SLIDE AT THE
POSITION INDICATED
BY CURRENT POSITION
DISPLAY (0, O)
(SEE NOTE 1)
Xtn
DIRECT
a.
Tn
Atn
The purpose of this feature is to retain a
“work coordinate system” with a certain point on
the work used as absolute zero point by performing G 50T coordinate system setting at the replace–
ment position of each tool. In other words, programming may be performed with a single coordinate system throughout the entire machining.
(1) Tool coordinate value memory
I
Ztn
Tool No.
[
coordinate
tool
memory
I
number
set
the
coordinate
K axis and Z-axis
coordinate
system
with
setting
‘[~:~n:
1[ 1
+
Content
of
programmed
tool
offset
memory
1!unit
current
position
value”
is
Note :
the one which
is shown
in “POSITION
[EXTERNAL]
screen
of the current
position display
(POS ) on CRT
display.
b. Usually,
number
d.
It
ory
is assumed
contains
that the tool coordinate
the following
coordinate
Xtn and Ztn for each tool Tn:
.
memdata
EXAMPLE
G50
“ 00” in the tool
specify
specification
field
AA .
offset
:
T51OO
L
;
1100,1 specifies the work
coordinate system setting
with the contents of tool
offset memory being zero.
When the above program is specified with
the tool slide at a given position (for
example, –x, –z in the unit current position display) , the work coordinate system
defined by the operator is set correctly as
shown below :
63
WORK COORDiNATE MULTI-SHIFT
2,8.22
(G50T,
G 51)T
4.
When the G 50 T work coordinate system setting is performed,
2.6.4,“ Work Coordinate
System Shift” is made valid.
5.
The current position of the tool in the set
work coordinate system is shown in the cur–
rent position value “POSITION
ABSOLUTE.
“
It is not shown in POSITION
EXTERNAL.
6.
The work coordinate system set by G 50 T
cannot be cancelled by a reset operation.
(Cent’d)
T1 WHEN TOOL SLIDE IS
AT A GIVEN POSITION
(–\,
—:)
-x
M
z,,
I
,
+--T--;T,
P,
‘-~
‘--i
T
1 VJHEN TOOL SLIDE IS
AT POSITION (O, 0)
r,
EXAMPLE
A :
(The start point is current position display
(0, 0))
.
~
/
X,l
2
N1 G50 T51OO
;—
Work coordinate system
setting for tool No. 01.
N2 GOO TO1O1 M03 s1OO ;
Selection of tool No. 01
(Note 1).
WORK
COORDINATE
Fig.
c.
G50
TOOOO
(Machining by tool No. 01)
SYSTEM
2.38
N20Goox.
;
By this command,
the coordinate
system
is
set with the unit current
position
value.
This
means that the canceling
of the work
coordinate
system
setting
is performed
with
the content
of tool coordinate
memory
= “ O“
and the content
of tool offset
memory
= “ 0“
by the specification
of TOOOO.
N21
G50
N22
GOO T0202
(Machinig
(3)
a.
Return
to current
With
position
value
and Z-axis.
a part
program
coordinate
system
start
point
is the
(O, O) in principle,
command
facilitates
point
(O, O) after
c.
origin
G51 command
a single
block
is
(O,
by
—
; —
;
—
tool
No.
Positioning
to a given
point.
Work coordinate
system setting
for tool
No. 02.
Selection
of tool
No.
02 (Note
1) .
02)
to the
the unit
O) , on both
N40
G51
; —
Return
to current
display
that
uses
work
setting,
the machining
current
position
value
Hence,
the use of G51
the return
to the start
completion
of machining.
should
basis.
T5200
..;
(G 51)
By G51 ; command,
tool is returned
point
at rapid
traverse
rate where
current
X-axis
b.
position
..z.
always
be
specified
(O,
Note
1:
The tool position
offset
in TO1O1
and T0202 commands
may be used for the
When specified
compensation
for tool wear.
during
machining,
the tool position
offset
may also be used for the compensation
for
taper
machining.
on
Notes :
1.
G 50 T and G51 are nonmodal
G codes
which
are valid
only for the specified
blocks.
2.
When
this
#6005D5to
display
is
3.
function
O (G50
off) .
is
preset
used,
of
G51 ; command
is equivalent
two block
commands.
set
parameter
POS-EXTERNAL
to the
following
“
m
Consequently,
after
the execution
of this
command,
the tool offset
number
is cancelled
together
with the work
coordinate
system,
setting
the tool offset
number
to “ 00. “
64
position
O) .
wCRK
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
MACHINING
BY TOOL NO 01, 02
CAN BE PROGRAMMED
ON THIS
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
Notes :
N1
G50
EXAMPLE
N2
GOO TO1O1
B:
If the machining
which
was started
by the
following
program
is interrupted
and the
program
is restarted
without
returning
the
tool to the machining
start
point,
the tool
correctly
moves
to the first
approach
posi–
tion.
@
N1
G50
T51OO
N2
GO1O1
T51OO
(Machined
;
N25
G50
N26
GOO
by
G96
N4
GOO x20.
S150
M03
TOOOO
;
;
z-35.
;
Tool replacement
position
of T 02 is current
position
display
(-50,
-35) .
;
z2.5
S1OOO
TO1)
x-50.
. . .
;
N3
;
M03
;
iN27
N28
PROGRAM
STARTED AT THE
POSITION OF CURRENT
POSITION DISPLAY (–20
–27 5)
AFTER MACHINING
INTERRUPTION
G50
T5200
GOO
T02020
(Machining
;I
M03
by
s800
;
T 02)
/
-x
.P
T 01
-rO1
MACHINING
‘CURRENT
10 o)
40.
--l
B
p“
(
/1
WORK
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
N48
START POSITION
POSITION OISPLAY
-
The
480.
A APPROACH
POSITION
[20
25)
~z
TOOL COORDINATE
51X=80
512=40
G51
;
coordinate
system
setting
are
as follows:
by
this
command
X
= (-50.
)
+ 110.
z
= (-35.
)
+40.
= 60.
= 5.
MEMORY
1
88
=
This
is because
N1
G50
T51OO
; command
at point
B performs
coordinate
system
set–
ting with the following
values
to retain
the
work coordinate
system,
thus keeping
approach
position
X = (-20.
EXAMPLE
+ (40. )
=
/
F--h.
s.
110
+x
I
60.
=
To,[Z
Z=i.
12.5
DI.A
Tool Coordinate Memory
No.
x
51
Im.
52
110.
z
47.5
———
40.
x=
60.
47.5
$
TO
30. 2
—’
100D[A
–35.
T 01
T
C :
This
example
shows
a program
for which
the
replacement
position
of each tool is different
from each other,
and the values
for work
coordinate
system
setting
.
MACHINING
START
POSITION =
CURRENT POSITION
DISPLAY (O, 0)
40.
P-
A unchanged:
) + (80. )
Z = (-27.5)
values
DIP,
+r—————
‘z
\
wORK
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
28.23
MACRO PROGRAMS (G65
AND G67)
Special programs written by the machine builder
or user by the use of a group of instructions are
memory.
These
registered in the part program
programs
can be called
by the use of G65 or G66
command
to execute
These
special
them .
programs
are
referred
to
as
The
“argument
designation:
in calling
a macro
program
body
from the main program
makes it
possible
to assign
the real numbers
to the variables in the body.
This
enables
this macro
program
to run as a series
of specific
programs
that provide
tool movements,
In this manual,
the macro program
body
is some–
times referred
to as simply,
“macro. II
the
macro program body, which can be written and
stored in the same format as a subprogram.
2. 8.23.1
Main
User
Program
A macro program
Body
Macro
following
/+09001
G65
P9001
/
L
\
Main
Operation
Command
Control
Command
1
1
YI
M99
Program
ma~
be
called
in
the
;
-.
tiemams
Code
Type of Call
No.
r~ Variable
(Argument
Designation)
body
manners:
“fiv;
;
)
#
Macro Program Call Commands
1
Simple call
G 65
2
Modal call
G 66
3
Call by arbitrary G cede
Gxx
4
Call by M code
Mxx
5
Call by T code
Txxxx
G 67:
For cancel
4digits
max.
Subprogram
( 1)
Simple
Call
(G65)
G65
P.. . L.. .
The
macro
(argument
program,
whose
designation)
program
;
number
was
specified
by p) is called
and is executed
L times.
The
default
value
of L is 1.
When the designation
of an argument
to the
macro
program
is
desired,
specify
it in (argument
designation)
.
I!Argument
designation”
is the assignment
of real
numbers
used in the
to the
‘Ilocal
variables”
For details, see 2.8.23.2,
macro program.
“ ARGUMENT
DESIGNATION. ”
However.
unlike
gram
allows:
( 1)
Use of variables.
(2)
Computation
a subprogram,
between
variables
a macro
or
pro-
between
constants.
(3)
Use of
al branch.
control
commands
such
(2)
Modal Call (G66 and
G66
P.. . L.. . (argument
designation) ;
This command
calls the macro subroutine specified
by program number P. Each time a move command is executed, the specified macro is run L
times.
as a condition-
G67
These
to provide
complicated
G67)
features
enable
the user macro body
a generalized
program
that requires
computations
and decisions
.
;
This command
cancels the modal callmode.
(3)
Macro
Gxx
Call
by
(argument
Arbitary
designation)
G Code
(5)
;
All the T code commands
mand .
This
provides
the command
with is equivalent
to
(argument
designation)
; . For Gxx,
G65 P...
ten G codes
of GO1 through
G199 excluding
those
designated
by NC maker
can be set by parameter.
The macro program
numbers
which
correspond
to
these
G codes
are as follows:
#6120
~. . Sets
G code which
09010.
calls
the
macro
of
#6121 . . ~ Sets G code which
program
number
09011.
calls
the
macro
of
program
number
Macro
G. . .
Call
X..
by
T
Code
Z..
.
provide a macro call com-
Txxxx
;
With this command, the macro of program num–
ber 09000
is executed after the move command
in the same block is completed.
Transmission
of T code and TF signal
is not performed.
Whether
a T code is to be used as a
macro call command
may be specified
by the following
parameter
:
Parameter
\
No.
#6134
#6129
...
program
Sets
G
number
code which calls the macro of
09019.
o ... T code
designation is handled as a T code.
1 . . . T code
Note :
Macro
call by arbitrary
G code permits
Namely,
the macro which
only sin gle nesting.
was called
for by using
arbitrary
G code,
M code,
or T code does not permit
another
macro call by
arbitrary
code.
(4)
Macro
G.
X“.
Call
”
Z-”-
by
M Code
h’ixx;
This
command
may call macros.
In this case,
the
macro is executed
after
the move command
is
completed
in that block.
MF and M codes
are not
For Mxx,
four M codes
may be destransmitted.
ignated
by parameter
excluding
MOO, MO1, M02,
M30,
M90 through
#6130
number
which
calls
the
macro
When a T code is specified as a macro call
command, the value designated by T “XXXX” (up
to decimal 4 digits) becomes the argument of
common variable #149. NOTE
THAT
THE ARGUMENT
DESIGNATION
OTHER
THAN
THIS IS NOT
PERMITTED
. When a T code is programmed
in a
macro subroutine that has been called by an arbitrary G code or by a macro M or T code, it will
be processed like a normal T code.
(6)
Multiple
Call
G65 Simple
of
As
a subprogram
program,
a macro program
may be called
from
another
macro program.
Quadruple
nesting
is
permitted
for simple
call and modal call combined.
Multiple
call is disabled
for the macro
call by arbitrary
G code,
or M code or T code.
09001.
~ Sets M code which
number
09002.
calls
the
macro
of
#6132 . . . Sets M code which
program
number
09003.
calls
the
macro
of
#6133 ~ .. Sets M code which
program
number
09004.
calls
the
macro
of
#6131 .
program
as a macro
of program
a.
M99.
. . ~ Sets M code
program
designation
is handled
call command
to call the macro
number
09000.
b,
Multiple
Call
Call
is
by
And
called
G66 Modal
from
G66 Modal
Call
another
sub-
Call
In
NOTE
DOES
THAT
THE MACRO
CALL
NOT PERMIT
ARGUMENT
BY M CODE
DESIGNATION.
When a macro M code is programmed
in a
macro
subroutine
that has been
called
by an arbitrary
G code or by a macro M or T code,
it will
be processed
like a normal
M code.
modal call, each time a move command is executed, the designated macro is run. This is
also valid for the move command in the macro
called by multiple call. The macros are sequentiallyexecuted from the one designated latest.
67
2. 8.23.1
Macro Program Call Commands
S ample
(Cent’d)
Program
For the address in which no argument
need
designated , the command may be omitted,
Sample Program
#1
1
G66 P9400 ;
G65
09500
P91OO
L3
A30
B60
Main Program
@
;
Argument
A,
K
@
Macro
o
Designation
B,
and
arguments
C arguments
may
be
;
Designation
The above sample program
following order:
is executed in the
and
10 sets
designated.
Variables
Argument
is the real value
to be assigned
to a
variable
used in the macro program
body.
Argument
designation,
therefore,
is the act of
assigning
real values
to variables,
Argument
designation
is of type
I and type
II,
which
can
be selected
as required.
Designation
I
Argument
may be designated
in any address
exThe relationships
cept
for G, L, N, O,and
P.
between
the argument
designation
addresses
and
the variables
are as shown
below .
Address of
I
Macro
Variable in
Program
Body
M
#2
#3
$7
:8
#9
#11
#4
H
The
suffixes
#l
72
#3
*4
85
#6
87
*8
?49
$10
*11
*12
#13
#14
#15
#16
#17
#18
#19
%20
#21
#22
#23
$24
$25
#26
$27
$28
#29
WI
#31
#32
K33
1 through
;:
$13
Z17
k18
termined
by the order
and K combinations.
?19
420
?!21
#22
#23
#24
#25
#26
be
For the address
designated,
the
in’
User Macro Body
A
B
c
11
J,
K,
12
Jz
K~
Is
J3
K3
Id
J4
K4
Is
Js
K5
1~
Je
KG
IT
J7
K,
1~
J8
K8
19
J9
Kg
1,~
JIO
K,.
Argument Designation
Argument Designation
D
Address of
Argument Designation
68
z50.2
J
-l
A
B
c
D
E
F
H
I
J
K
M
Q
R
s
T
u
v
w
x
Y
z
x34.8
of I, J, and
I, J, and K
The
relationmust be designated
in this order.
ships
between
the argument
designation
address–
es and the variables
are as shown
below .
Id
;
Argument
+
Macro
0
+=
x60. ;
GOO Z70. ; *I
M99 ;
(1)
+
I
Argument
P art
(2)
@
GOO
2. 8.23.2
#26
o
17
09400 ;
M99
#24
++
P9500 ;
Z20. ;
;
;
Z30. ;
GOO X40. ;
GO(J z50. ;
#2
@
GOO X1O. ;
G66
GOO
G67
G67
GOO
be
10 to 1, J,
of the
and
designated
K are
de-
1, J,
in which
no argument
need
command
may be omitted.
Sample
2,8,23,
Program
#4
#5
#6
#7
A macro
+++++
G65P9005A.
..
C..
.C.
.. I..
combination
(1)
Designation
of Decimal
Point
in Argument
An
argument
may generally
be designated
with a
For the designation
withsign and decimal
point.
out decimal
point,
the position
of decimal
point
is
as shown
on the
next
page.
Metric
Inch
Input
Input
A, B
3
3
D, H
o
0
E
4
6
Address in
Argument Designation
1214
F (In G 99 mode)
3 (2)
4 (3)
M, S, T
o
0
Q
o
0
R
3 (2)
4 (3)
I
u, v, w
3(2)
I
3 (2)
x, Y, z
4(3)
4 (3)
in
Argument
Designation
Argument
designation
types
I and II may be
If the same variable
has been
used concurrently.
designated
twice,
the last one is validated.
a.
b.
For
both
types
In
the
I and
II,
addresses
I,
J,
be designated
in this order.
The
may be designated
in any order.
argument
sign and decimal
of the address.
the
Variables
Local
variable
b.
Common
c.
System
(#1
variable
through
#33)
( #100 through
variable
#549)
( #1000 through
(2)
operation
Commands
a.
Arithmetical
operations
b.
Functional
(3)
Control
operations
(+,
-,
(SIN,
#5104)
*,
/,
COS,
“ “ “)
ROUND,
. ..)
Commands
a.
Branch
command
(IF
b.
Repeat
command
(WHILE
Do
and
2. 8.23.4
&lt; qualification&gt;
GO TO
n)
&lt; qualification&gt;
m)
designation
point
may
be
part,
used
a program
which
and conditional
re-
Variables
assigning
a value
to an adInstead of directly
dress
in a macro program
body,
the address
may
be designated
by a variable.
When this variable
is called
during
execution,
the corresponding
value
is fetched
from the variable
area to provide
the address
value.
There
variable,
Each
are three
types
common variable,
is identified
by
of variables:
and system
a variable
local
variable.
number.
To the local variables,
real numbers
assigned
using
the argument
designation
macro
call command
by G65 or G66.
can be
part of
other
(1)
c.
using
judgements
may be written
in the general
format.
Hence,
the feature
of user macro is to enable
the
programming
of the wide range
of NC functions
from a simple
machining
cycle
which
is rather
a
subprogram
to a special,
complicated
canned
cycle,
and the storing
of these
cycles
in the machine.
Described
below
are details
of the commands
mentioned
above.
The value shows the position of decimal point
as counted from the least significant digit. The
value in parentheses indicates the number of
digits that follows decimal point at the time of
parameter #6006-D5 = 1.
K should
addresses
program
body
is programmed
of the following
commands.
Using
these
commands,
quires
complicated
operations
1, J, K, C
Considerations
Body
1012
F (In G 98 mcde)
(4)
Program
Part
a.
Position
of Macro
.J..K,..K...K...;
Argument
(3)
3 Overview
#9
Local
Variables
(#1
through
#33)
negative
regardless
G65 and G66 should
d.
In G65 and G66 blocks,
always
be specified
before
each argument
desigThis
holds
true with the macro
call by
nation.
G code.
A local variable
is the one that is used for each
That
is, when the local variable
macro locally,
is used,
the variable
area ( #1 through
#33) is
independently
allocated
for each macro
call,
Certain
values
are stored
by argument
designation,
and the results
of operations
in macro are
retained
,
69
Variables (Cent’d)
2,8.23.4
Main
Double-level Macro
Single-level Macro
Program
~.
———————
09201
09205
;
;
1’
“
#1,
#2,
#3
#i
G65 P9201
A..
#2
.B.
..
C,*
G65
;
o
P9205
#l
\“\
Hence,
the variables
#1, #2, #3, , . . of
the
same macro assume
different
values
each time it
is called.
Each local variable
is reset
for each
macro
call and is registered
by argument
designation.
The variable
not designated
becomes
“blank.
“ Each local variable
is set to “blank”
at the time of power-on
and reset
operations.
Variables
( #100 through
#149,
A common
variable
may be shared
by all macros
and through
all macros
of all nesting
levels.
That
is, the common
variable
enables
a macro
to refer
to the result’s
obtained
by another
macro.
Variable
Local
variable
area
for duplicate-level
area
macro
a.
#100 through
are
cleared
b.
#500 through
are not cleared
operations.
These
common
variables
of power-on
and reset
to IIblank. !1 In some con-
These
#549:
at the time of
operation
common
powe-on
if
variables
and
reset
The common
variables
are available
to the
They
cannot
be
user without
restrictions.
designated
by arguments.
Indirectly,
however,
they
can be designated
as follows:
Area
(3)
Double-nest
Macro
#149:
time
macro
operations
and are set
trols,
they
are not cleared
by reset
parameter
#6008Dl
is set at 1.
oJIoKIJ’\oK
Single-nest
Macro
at the
I
=...
#500
#549)
Common
#l
=...
Local
variable
for single-level
Common
Read /write
Enabled
eadlwrite
Enabled
Designation
(2)
ow
~
Argument
throuth
#3
Tripple-nest
Macro
Quadruplenest Macro
into the following
conditions:
Designation
Interface
#1015,
b.
#1
input
signals
use is unique
types
of sys-
. . . #1000
through
#1032T
Interface
#1115,
of
Variables
A system
variable
is the one whose
There
are following
to the system.
tem variables:
a.
Common
variables
are divided
two types
depending
on clear
System
‘Argument
#1132.~
output
signals
. . . #1 100 through
c,
Tool
offset
amount,
and tool wear amount
#2051 through
#2080,
through
#2150,
#2151
through
#2199,
#2201
d.
Alarm
message
e.
Clock
. . . #3001,
f.
Single-block
completion
wait
tool
coordinate
display
RS232C
YASNAC
. . . #3000
#3C102
stop and auxiliary-function
control
. . . #3003
Feed-hold
feedrate-override,
g“
control
. . . #3004
h.
data.
#2050,
. . . #2001 through
#2081 through
#2099,
#2101
through
#2180,
#2181
through
#2250
data
output
and
. . . #3100
exact-stop
(printout
feature).
i.
Modal
jm
Positional
information
. . . #4001
through
. . . #5001
information
#4120
through
#5102
Note:
The interface
input
and
a. and b, may not be installed.
specifications
tails
of
the
machine
tool
The following
paragraphs
of the variables
mentioned
a.
Intervace
#1032)~
Input
i.
of
When
one
the
Signals
system
output
signals
Follow
the
of
builder.
describe
above.
the
de-
( #1000 Through
variables,
#1015,
#1000
through
#1015, is specified
to the right-hand
side of an operational
expression,
the on/off
state of each of user–macro–dedicated
16-point
The relationships
between
input
signals
is read,
the input
signals
and the system
variables
are as
shown
below.
#loo7 #l@36 #loo5 mo4
UI7
UI6
27
26
:1015
#lo14
UI15
~15
UI5
mo3
*IOO2 fm)l
UI 4
24
UI 3
23
UI 2
22
#lo13
#lo12
:1011
:1010
UI14
(JI 13
UI12
Ulll
Ullo
214
~13
212
25
Variable
Value
I
211
2’0
Input Signal
u! 1
2’
UI19
.29
When system
variable
#l 032 is designated,
ii.
the input
signals
(UIO through
U115) that consist
of 16 points
(16 bits)
are collectively
read as a
decimal
positive
value.
#looo
#1032 = \5#
UIo
2’3
#1009 #1008
+
Each read variable
is 1, 0 or O. 0 when the assoor “open”
respectively,
ciated
contact
is “closed”
regardless
of the unit system
of the machine.
UI 18
28
[1000
+ i]
* 2i
i =0
Sample
IF
Program
[#1015
EQ
O
1
GO TO
100;
Bit 215 (U115) is read and, if it is “O,”
is made to sequence number N1OO.
#130 = #1032
AND
a branch
255
Bits 2&deg; through
27 (UIO through
U17) are
tively
read to be stored
in common
variable
as a decimal
positive
value.
Note:
System
not be placed
expressions.
variables
#1000
to the left-hand
through
side of
collec#130
#1032 canoperational
71
2.8.23.4
b.
Variables (Cent’d)
Interface
#1115,
Output
Signals
(#1100
Through
#1132)*
i. When one of system variables #1100 through
#1115 is specified to the left-hand side of an
operational expression, an on or off signal can be
sent to each of the user–macro-dedicated
16–Point
output signals. The relationships between the
output signals and the system variables are as
shown below:
#1107
#1106
#llo5
#llo4
ZII03
$1102
#lloo
#llol
I
Uo 7
UO 6
Uo 5
Uo 4
Uo 3
Uo 2
Uol
27
26
25
24
23
22
2 “20
#1115
#1114
%1113
#1112
~1111
~#1110~
UO15
UO14
Uo 13
Uo 12
Uoll
~ Uolo
2
15
2
14
2
13
2
12
.,-.,,
t
. .,
. . .
,,----When system variable 7fl15LIS speclllea, Tne
output signals (UOO through U015) that consist
of 16 points (16 bits) are collectivelyoutput.
At this time, the decimal positive value substituted
in #1132 is output in the form of binary 16-bit
value.
11.
2
11
2
10
Variable Value
Output Signal
1
Contact Closed
o
Contact Open
#1109
U09
29
i Uoo
#1108
UO 8
~ 28
#1132
=
operational
expression,
o
* 2i
its
value
is
read.
iv. Considerations
When any values
other
than 1.0 or O. 0 are substituted
into one of the system
variables,
#1 100
through
#1115, the values
are handled
as follows:
“Blank” and any values less than O.5 are assumed to be “O. “ Any values of O.5 and over
and other than “blank” are assumed to be “1,“
Sample
Program
#llo7
I
+ i]
i~i. With system variables #1100 through #1132,
the value sent last is retained. Hence, when one
of them is written to the right–hand side of an
YASNAC
20
~
#[1100
i=O
= #lo
; (#lo
= 1.5)
The output signal of bit 27 (U07) is outputted in
the contact (closed) state.
Uoo
21
#1132
Uo 1
= (#1132
AND
240)
OR
(#8
AND
15)
G-4
U02
U03
U04
The output
signal
of bits
24 through
27 (U04
through
U07)
are outputted
without
change
and
the contents
of local variable
#8 are outputted
to
the output
signals
of bits
2&deg; through
23 (UOO
through
U03) .
(Decimal
240 = 11110000
Binary
15 = 00001111)
U05
U06
c.
Tool
Data,
Offset
Tool
Amount
Wear
And
Tool
Coordinate
Amount
U07
U08
#2001
#2101
-
#2050,
#2150,
#2051
#2201
- #2099,
- #2250
#2151
-
#2199,
U09
Uolo
b’
2’2
h–-t
211
I
Uoll
U012
U013
U014
U015
When
1.0 or ().
O are substituted in any of #1100
through #1115, the associated output contact is
output in the “closed” or “open’’state.
72
i,
When
one
of
the
system
variable
#2001
through
#2250 is specified
to the right-hand
of an operational
expression
, the tool offset
amount,
tool coordinate
data,
and tool wear
amount
can be read,
ii.
The
numbers
below :
relationships
between
the
and the system
variables
tool
are
side
offset
as shown
System
Alarm
When a condition
macro program,
specified
to put
01
to
to
#2050
50
i.
I
01
to
I
#2250
System
#3000
to
be three
chine.
50
ii.
to be
alarmed
occurs
in a user
system
variable
#3000 may be
the machine
in the alarm state.
= n ( &lt;alarm
digits
When
message&gt;);
this
and
not
be one
#3000 command
used
by
the
is executed,
ma“ALM”
Memofy No.
Press
ALM
function
key.
51
to
to
#2099
80
#2151
( #3000)
or “A/B”
is displayed
on the bottom
of CRT
screen
regardless
of the mode and function.
Its message
can be seen by the following
operation:
Tool Coordinate
Variable
#2051
X-axis
Display
Using
this command,
specify
the alarm message
(less
than
32 characters)
preceded
by a 3-digit
alarm number
n and enclosed
with control-in
and
control–out
symbols.
The alarm number
should
I
#2201
Tml Nose
Radius
Message
Memory No.
#2001
X-axis
d.
Tool Offset
Variable
The alarm
the bottom
number
of CRT
and message
screen.
-
and
displaved
.
.
\
51
~
‘ALARM
to
Z-axis
on
09100
NO054
80
#2t~80
I
I
iii.
When
specified
expression,
Sample
one
of
above
system
variables
is
side of an operational
be changed.
USERS
550
E:
Programs
#116 = #2016
The contents
are substituted
#2081
The tool
is erased
are set.
the
to the left–hand
its value
can
= #24
wear
and
MESSAGE
MACRO
ERROR:
:“A”
o“iRd
;
of
tool offset
for common
number
variable
Message
display area and
sample display
;
amount
(memory
the contents
of
“ ALM “
t
16 for X-axis
?4116.
No.
local
81) of X-axis
variable
#24
When
cause
state
RESET
key is pressed
of alarm,
the message
can be cleared.
Sample
#3000
after
removal
of the
display
and the alarm
Program
= 550 (MACRO
FLOW )
ERROR
:
DATA
OVER-
73
2.8.23.4
e.
Variables (Cent’d)
Clock
i.
(#3001
, #3002)
When system
specified,
the
is
System
Variable
variable
#3001 or
clock
can be read.
Unit
Type
#3002
for
clock
When the finish
signal
is not waited
for,
the
distribution
end signal
(DEN)
is not transmitted.
In this case , the FIN is waited
for in the block
with the check
skip cleared.
Hence,
when the
FIN is not waited
for,
be careful
not to specify
the next
auxiliary
function.
Condition
Z3002
I lms
Clock 2
Reset to “O
~
power-off
~
this
the expression.
value
side
with
of
iii.
. . . The
clock
is preset
to value
accuracy
of
Feed-Hold,
tioning
clock
1 is
8 ms.
reached,
to “ O. “
When
and
overflow
Program
Argument
of variable
Program
o
Valid
1
Invalid
21
The accuracy
of clock
2 is 8 ms.
When
429496800 sec has been
reached,
an overflow
occurs
, setting
the clock
to “ O. ‘t
Main
Control
Posi-
designation
#1
. . . Macro
,Seconds
to wait
I
‘
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
+
Positioning
Completion
Valid
I
Invalid
I
Valid
31
Invalid
I
Invalid
I
Valid
41
Valid
I
Valid
I
Invalid
51
Invalid
I
Valid
I
Irival id
61
Valid
I
Invalid
I
Irival id
7
Invalid
Sample
[~]
Invalid
Invalid
Program
for
Special
Threadcutting
Command)
Macro
And
( #3004)
Feedrate
Override
Feed Hold
$3004
4294968000
msec has been
occrus,
setting
the clock
Sample
Feedrate-Override,
Completion
“ O. 1’
Restrictions
The
Waited
When the value listed in the following table is
substituted in system variable #3004, feed hold,
feedrate override, and positioning completion
can be made valid or invalid.
Sample Program
#3001=o;
I
signal is on
substitute
the
at the left-hand
To preset
the clock,
system
variable
put
Valid
FIN Signal
When STL
time
g.
ii.
!
Always
Same as
1s
[
Single
Block Switch
I
o
I
lClockl
;3001
I
+3003
Count
At Power-On
Cycle
(Incremental
+x
Program
o———————–~—
09351
G 0(1
;
-+
#3002 = O ;
WHILE
END
I
M99
[ #3002
LE
#1 ]
DO1
;
%~
lJ–2
THREADCUTTING
AKk
1 ;
r?
I
;
Block
Wait
Stop And Auxiliary
Control
( #3003)
-7
/
\
Macro
f.
Single
Completion
I
ii
,y
C all
Function
When the value
listed
in the following
table
is
substituted
in system
variable
#3003, the single
block
switch
can be disabled
or the next
block
may be entered
without
waiting
for the checking
of the finish
signal
(FIN)
of the auxiliary
func–
tion (MST)
.
%Lead
[L
#21:
74
~
#6:
Without
radius
#23:
Negative
value
Negative
value,
sign,
value
value
diameter
Macro
iii.
Program
09093
;
M93
— Buffering
;
#10 = ROUND
[#6]
#11 = ROUND
~#21]
+#10
#12 = ROUND
[#23]
+#10
#3003
#3004
Single
block
invalidated
Feed
hold invalidated
F eedrat e override invalidated
Positioning
completed
= 7 ;
G32w#12
;
G32
w-#6
U#10
#3004
switch
r
w-#6
F#9
1
;
;
= o ;
GOO U-#11
;
GOO w-#23
;
above
Sample
;
U-#10
4 blocks
;
= 1 ;
GOO U#ll
G22
*2
The
M92
#3100=(
h.
= o ;
#3100
= (TOOL
#3100
= (I.JU Xuuuuuuuuuu
Data
Output
Output
of
#3100 = [ #2101
;. ..=
#3100
= [ #2201
:..
#3100
= (
)
= (&lt;Message&gt;)
When
this
command
is
enclosed
by control–in
via RS232C
interface.
Each
(Carriage
output
Return
specified,
and
feed
R);
;..
. = 10.000
mm
-10.000
mm
. =0.800mm
;
Data
OFFSET
01
I
R
z
x
0000 uuuu
I-10.80000
I
1
A ~aximum
of 6 digits (data plus signs)
before the decimal point can be output.
(#3100)
messages
external
interface.
the above
Messages
#3100
system
ret urn /line
z UUUUUUUUUU
;
when
the macro program.
previously
attach
as a printer
via
the parameters
that
01) ;
UUUU1O. OOOOUUU–10.
I
I
RS232C
#3100
which
OFFSET
#3100 = [ #2001
I
When system
variable
#3100 is specified,
and NC internal
data can be output
to
euuipment
via RS232C
data input/output
is a printer,
If- tie
external
equipment
information
is printed.
i,
. . . Carriage
);
Printout
;
M99
is performed
Program
I TOOL
#3003
output
variable
#3100 is executed
in
It is required,
therefore,
to
the external
equipment
such
RS 232c interface
and preset
use the interface.
the
i.
Modal
Information
#4001 Through
#4120)
i.
When one of system
variables
#4001 through
the modal
commands
that
are
#4120 is specified,
specified
up to the immediately
preceding
block
These
modal
commands
are somecan be known.
times
called
the current
values
of modal
information commands.
message
control–out
is
output,
message
is followed
by CR/LF
/Line Feed)
. Hence,
when
System
= (
) is specified,
only CR/LF
is outputted,
is useful
in tabulating
the punched
data.
Variable
I
Modal
# 4001
G
Information
code
(group 01 )
\
Note:
enclosed
ii.
When
by
Output
#3100
= [ i
the message
is output,
it
control–in
and control–out.
should
be
of Data
variable
&gt;]
When this
command
is
local variable,
common
specified,
the value
of the
variable,
or system
varia–
ble at the right-hand
side is output
via RS232C
interface
as plus or minus
decimal
9 digits
(4
digits
after
the decimal
point,
5 digits
before
the
decimal
point)
data.
Notes:
1. The value
is rounded
after
the decimal
point.
2. When the value
is of
the
decimal
point,
the
# 4021
G code (group 21 )
?$4108
E code
#4109
F code
#4114
Sequence number
#4115
Program number
#4119
S code
#41 20
T code
Notes :
1
M code
can
not be read
out
because
of non-modal
information,
out
to the
6 digits
asterisk
or
fifth
more
digit
before
2
The
value
of either
just
before
being
same
E (#4108)
stored,
giving
or
F ( #4109)
# 4108
and
is specified
# 4109
the
value.
is output.
75
2,8.23.4
Variables
(Cent’d)
Positional Information
Read During
Move
$5061
X-axis skip signal
position (ABSKP)
(Note)
Enabled
#5062
Z-axis skip signal
pesiton (ABSKP)
#5081
X-axis tool offset
amount
$5082
Z-axis tool offset
amount
T5101
X-axis servo position
deflection amount
z5102
Z-axis servo position
deflection amount
System
V=iable
ii
#4001 through #4120 cannot be placed to the
left-hand side of the operation expression.
Sample Program
Main Program
I
G65 P9602
&lt;Argument
Designation&gt;
I
;
Program
Macro
~Gcodes(.oothr.u.h
Note:
Reading of #5021,
and #5102,
GOO
X..
.Y.
GO1
Z..
.F
G03
X..
.Z.
GOO
Z..
. ;
G#l
;
M99
.;
I
G03) of
retained.
01 group
ar~
performed
dingly,
after
nose
..
;
ABSIO
Mnemonic
Accor-
is not performed.
Information
( #5001
Through
#5102)
Coordinate
obtained,
The unit of the information is millimeters or inches .
System
Tool
Position
Work
Machine
Work
coordinate
ccardinate
coordinate
ccordi nate
system
system
system
system
block
Compensation
Amount
program
invalid.
body,
the
“input
unit
x
10”
Position
at which
skip signal
did not go
on in G31
block.
Wofk
/
Not
included
Offset
Tool
Radius
ABSKP
Command
current
position
(same as
Pos.
ABSOLUTE
display).
before.
When system
variables
#5001 through
#5102 are
specified,
various
positional
information
can be
ABSOT
Command
current
position
(same as
Pos.
MACHINE
display).
immediately
is
of the movement.
ABSMT
tion of
feature
?I5101,
will be
compensation
End posi -
In the macro
z5041,
R...;
G codes
of 01 group
are restored.
Positional
#5042,
during movement,
completion
radius
(Note)
Enabled
. . . ;
Meaning
].
#5022,
when commandd
Enabled
,’
Not
included
/“
Iv’
~ Included
Included
Included
Included
v
Notes:
1. When the skip signal is not turneri on in G 31 block, the skip
signal position is at the end of G 31 blcck.
2. The “input unit x 10” feature is valid up to the macro call
System
Variable
X5001
X-axis block end
position (ABSIO)
115002
Z-axis block end
position (ABSIO)
#5021
X-axis current
position (ABSMT)
$5022
Z-axis current
position (ABSMT)
IJ5041
X-axis current
position (ABSOT)
z5042
76
Positional Information
Z-axis current
position (ABSOT)
I
Read During
Move
Enabled
block (the argument designation
3. System variables iz5001 through ~5102 may not be placed to
the left-hand
(Note)
Enabled
(Note)’Enabled
I
pert by G&amp;5 or G 66) but is
in valid in the user macro body.
side of operational
expression.
Sample
List of Variables
Program
The tool is positioned
to the
(X,
Z) on machine
coordinate
and
the specified
M feature,
point.
Main
specified
system,
returns
location
performs
to the start
Variable
Meaning
No.
# 1 to #33
#loo to #l’@
.mcal variables.
:ommon
variables
(reset to “blank
at
power-off).
Program
$500 to #549
G65P9603X.
..z
Common variables
(retained at power-
Dff)
OM” #”:.:
rllo~
to #lo15
Interface input signals (each signal for
each bit).
#13
#26
zH032
Interface input signal
irlloo to #1115
signals
Interface
output
(
#[lOCO + i] *
;
,=0
2i
)
(each signal for
each bit).
L
#24
Interface output signal
#1132
Macro
Program
09603
#1
;
#5001
;
#2 = #5002
;
❑
G91
;
z2001
to #2050
#2101
to #2150
#2201
to t2250
~ #[1100+
( ,=~
[X-axis,
Z-axis,
nose radius)
#2051
to 12080
Tool coordinate
#2151
to ?i2180
[X-axis,
data
#2081
to ti2099
Tocl wear amount
:2181
to #2199
[X-axis,
Z-axis)
Z-axis)
;
g3000
Alarm message
GOO Z [#26-
;
#3001
Clock 1 (In units of 1 ins).
#3002
Clwk
+3003
Single block stop, auxiliary function
M#13
;
GOO Z#2
;
GOO X#l
;
M99
;
).
amount
Tooloffset
GOO X [#24 -#5021]
#5022]
i] * 2 i
display.
2 (in units of 1 s).
complete wait control.
f13004
Feed-hold,
feedrate-override,
exact-stop
control.
and
83100
RS 232 C data output (print out feature).
Z4001 to *41X
Current value of modal information
command.
$5001
to $5002
End position of the immediate
preceding block (for each axis).
85021
to #502Z
Current position of machine ccerdinate
system (for each axis).
#5041
to +5042
Current position of POS.
UNIVERSAL
(for each axis).
+508 1 to 85062
Position at which G 31 skip signal is
turnad on (for each axis).
t!5081 to # 5082
Effective tool position offset
amount (X-axis,
~5101 to $5102
Z-axis).
Servo position deflection amount
(for each axis).
77
2. 8.23.4
(4)
Variables
Variable
Sample
(Cent’d)
(i) When #l = 45.2346
x#l ... = X45.235 mm (for metric input)
Representation
Each variable is represented
that follows #.
a.
How
#i(i=l
in a variable number
to designate a number
,2,3,
4,...)
(iv) When #4 = 2.7236
M#4 . . . M03
GW.
#130
#2000
How
b.
number:
to designate
an expression
as a variable
4.
the
# [#loo]
In the following
description,
variable
replaced
with variable
#[&lt; expression
#i may
&gt;].
a. The
replaced
Reference
value
that follows
by a variable.
an address
may
be
When &lt; address&gt;
#i or &lt;address&gt;
-#i is specified,
the value
of the variable
or its negative
value
(complement,
more exactly)
is made the specified
value
of the address
.
#30=
#lol
#lo3
#140
G#30
Es!2P.k
The
above
specification
GO1
l.o;
= 100.
= 300.
= o. 3
X#lOl
specification
below.
x1OO.
Z-300.
;
;
;
Z-#102
Sample
2.
A variable
a variable.
Sample
/ , 0,
and
/#8,
N#100
number
that follows
&lt;expression
not
an address
&gt;.
exceed
may
be
F#140
is equivalent
FO.3
;
to the
;
N may
not
refer
to varia-
. . . Error.
may
not
Undefined
Variable
The value of an undefined variable is assumed to
be “blank. “ An undefined variable occurs in the
following situations:
a.
The local variable
for which
argument
designation
was not performed
in macro
call command.
b.
time
Common
of
variables
power–on
and
#100 through
reset
#149 at the
operations.
c.
The local variables
and common
variables
for which
the values
were
not written
from MDI
panel.
Notes:
1.
Address
bles .
value
with
should
value.
be
(6)
Variable
Value
for each address
maximum
programmable
(J. The constant without decimal point enclosed
in brackets [
] is assumed to have a decimal
point at its end.
# [#500 + 1]
# [#2012J
(5)
..GO3
5.
The
replaced
# [ &lt;expression&gt;]
&amp;22E&amp;
#2 = O. 255
FO. 26 (mm/rev)
(iii) When #3 = 5.37672
G04 P#3 ... = G04 P5, 377 (see)
directly:
#lo
me
(ii) When
F#2 ...=
be
replaced
with
##20 . . . Error.
#[ #20] . . . Correct.
3. When a variable
is used as address
values
below
the least significant
digit
ed.
data,
the
are round-
Designation
and function
of &lt;blank&gt;
is classified
in the following
two versions
A and B.
The
Switching
from
control
is set for either
version.
versions
A to B and from B to A cannot
be inter–
changed,
—
Version B
Version A
—
.#O defined as
variables of
No conception
(blank&gt;.
of #o.
Concept of #0
‘Commanding
*O
#0 at the lefthand
side of the
equation.
&lt;blank&gt;
is commanded
in
-Where
‘Where #2 is
(blank&gt;,
mand #3 = n2.
aquation.
means #3 = O.
&lt;blank&gt;
*3 = &lt;blank}.
(blank&gt;,
in the part
#2;
prcgram.
to command G C
is equivalent
is equivaler
GOOXO;
is commanded
in the condition
of EQ and NE.
Definition
. . .
and
definition,
Replacement
replacement.
(2)
Add-Type
#i.
#j+#k
Operations
. . .
Sum.
#i=#j
-#k
. . .
Difference.
#i=#j
OR#k
. . .
Logical
32 bits)
#i=#j
XOR
#k...
sum
.
Exclusive
(for
each
to
(for
each
of
logical
sum
of 32 bits).
command G 00;
(Address is
(3)
Operations
Multiply-Type
ignored.)
‘Where
‘Where $2 is
‘
#2 is
mand6CX3 X ‘$2;
command 600 ~
&lt;blank&gt;
Variable
&lt;blank&gt;, com-
is commanded
Variable
com-
means
-Where
(1)
#i = #j
mand #3 = ?22;
‘Where #2 is
Variable
Various
operations
can be performed
between
variables
and between
variables
and constants
.
The operation
expression
is represented
in the
form of #i = &lt;expression&gt;
, in which
&lt; expression&gt;
is a general
arithmetic
operational
expression
produced
by combining
variables
and constants
with
operators
and functions.
The available
operations
and functions
are as follows.
Instead
of
fi and #k, constants
may be used.
#2 is
(blank&gt;,
com-
the replacement
Commands
“Commanding
causes alarm.
Variable
Operation
2.8,23.5
#i=#j
*#k
. . .
Product.
. . .
Quotient.
ti2 is
&lt;blank&gt;,
&lt;blank),
#i=#j
/#k
#3 is O.
#3 is O.
#i=#j
AND
@condition
@’Condition
“IF #3 EQ #2&deg; is
“IF #3 EQ #2&deg; is
established,
established.
@Condition
@Condition
“IF #3 NE w2&deg; is
“IF #3 EQ X2” is
not established.
established.
Logical
product
(f&amp;
each of 32 bits)
#k...
Note:
In OR,
XOR , or AND
variable
value
(or constant)
the binary
32–bit
equivalent
is performed
on each bit.
.
operation,
the
is converted
into
and the operation
—
— In these command,
#3 = (Blank)
?3 =F [#o+~o]
?3=R2
*60;
Y3=PO+$O;
In these
Y3=*OI$O;
commands,
$3 =0.
1
?3=5*+O;
?3=2–$0;
I
Others
maans #3=2
,!3 =51}
O; causes alarm.
&lt;Blank&gt;
in the replacement
described
Functions
#i=
SIN
. . .
Sine
#i=cos[fi]
..
Cosine
#i=
. . .
Tangent
. . .
Arctangent
. . .
Square
[~]
. . .
Absolute
. ..
Convert
from
BCD.
[#j]
. . .
Convert
into
BCD .
Produce
integer
#i
[#j]
TAN[#j]
❑
ATAN
IF ?3 GE Z2 is established
when #2 and P3 are &lt;blank&gt;, or
#2 is O and $3 is &lt;blank),
-Condition IF:3
established
(blank&gt;,
LT fi2 is not
when #2 and ‘P3 are
or 72 is (blank),
and *3 = O.
#i=
SQRT
i+i=ABs
#i=
BIN[fi]
#i-
BcD
[#j]
#i = ROUND
#i= FIX
(in
degrees)
(in
.
degrees)
(in
.
degrees)
.
[#j/#k]
above is treated as “O.”
‘Condition
—
(4)
[#jj ..
[#j]
#i= FUP[#jj
.
root.
value.
by
... Truncate
the
... Raise
fractions
the
rounding.
fractions
.
to a unit.
79
2.8.23.5
(5)
Operation Commands (Cent’d)
Combinations
of
GOO
‘k
#i= #j+
* SIN
Sample
[#L]
Y
IJ2._J
(6)
Change
of Operational Order
by
[
]
@
#10 = 12.3758
;
@
#11 = 13.1236
;
@
G()’O U#10
@
GO1
U#l~
@
GOO
U-
If @
*h]
]
(b)
‘:;;;a
;
—
F..
re-
.
+x
;
[ROUND
[#10]
+ ROUND
[#lI]] ;
This is because the data of #10 and #11 in @
and
@
blocks are substantially rounded before
being executed.
Priority
may be given
to an operation
by enclosing it in brackets
[
] . Up to quintuple
(fivehold)
nesting
of brackets
is permitted
including
those
of functional
operations.
Sample
above;
When ROUND
is used as follows, the program
turns to the start point correctly:
~
@
;
Usually, ROUND
is not used as mentioned
it is used as shown below :
Operations
The above operations and functions may be used
in combinations. A functional operation is performed first. Then, a multiply-type operation is
performed.
An add-type operation is performed
last.
S ample
X#10
block is
@
GOO
U- [#10 +#11]
then, the movement
amount:
U- [#10
+ #H]
;
is made
by the following
= U - [12.3758 + 13.1236]
= U - [25.49@
—
- U - [25. 499]
On the other hand,
block movement
of
~+@is
u
I
I
(7)
Considerations
for
a.
The constant
without
&lt;expression
&gt; is assumed
at its end.
Operational
decimal
to have
rJ#10 + U#ll
I
Commands
point
used in
a decimal
point
Hence,
(8)
= U12. 376 + U13. 124
= U25. 500
the program
Operational
of @
is not correct.
Errors
The data format and the operational errors in the
macro programs are as follows:
a.
Data
Format
b.
When used in conditional Expression IF or
WHILE, function ROUND
truncates the fractions.
c. When used in address data, function ROUND
rounds off the part below the least significant
digit.
Sample
[ROUND
GOO x12.376
because
8 of
This
80
where,
b.
When the least significant digit of address
X is O.001 mm, the following command
command
[ #lo]];
;
12.3758
is
also
is rounded.
equivalent
to
are
m
(a)
#10 = 12.3758
Goo
x
means
The numeric data handled in macro programs
of the floating point format.
M is sign
+ data 52–bit binary,
E is sign + data 10-bit binary.
Operational
Errors
Each time an operation
is performed,
the following error
is caused
and is accumulated.
The number of significant
digits
is 15 to 16, which
compensates
the error
sufficiently.
2.8,23.6
Control
The commands
micro–program
which
control
the flow of the
are of the following
two types:
a.
Branch
command
ssion&gt;]
GO TO n ;
b.
Repeat
expression
(1)
a.
Command
. . . IF
[ f conditional
. . . WHILE
expressions
are EQ , NE, CT,
LT,
They
are represented
as follows:
Conditional
expre-
[ &lt; conditional
&gt; ] DO m ,
Branch
IF
Conditional
and LE.
Commands
Command
[ &lt; conditional
expression
&gt;] GO TO
n ;
If &lt; conditional
expression&gt;of
this command
is
established,
a branch
is made to the block
of
sequence
number
n within
the same program.
When a variable
or an expression
is used for n,
the branch
destination
may be changed.
If the
condition
is not satisfied,
the program
proceeds
to the next
block.
r E ;F [&lt; Conditional&gt;]GO
Q
expression
;
.(Next Block)
~ -“
*
“
m
.
0
5
“
TO
(#i=
#i
(ifi=k?fj)
NE#j
?#j)
#i GTi!j
(#i&gt;
#i
(#i &lt; #j)
LT#j
#j)
#i GE#j
(#i2#j)
#i
(#i Z #j)
LE#j
constant
and &lt; expression&gt;
may
and #j.
A variable
and
&lt;expression
used for n.
A
be
used
for
&gt; may
#i
be
Notes:
1. The sequence
number
must be located
at the
head of the block
when it is called
for by a
branch
command.
Otherwise,
the data prior
to
the sequence
number
is ignored
as shown
below:
Branch Destlnatloc
Se~uence
No
~
,gnored
~
2.
The reverse
longer
execution
(2)
expression&gt;]
may be omitted
to
branch
command
as shown
below:
a.
Repeat
TOn;
branch
on the
time than the
program
forward
takes
branch.
Command
WHILE
(m = 1,
[ &lt; conditional
2 and
END
GO
Meaning
ExWession
#i EQ#j
n;
~..;l
IF [&lt; conditional
provide
a simple
GE,
m
expression
&gt;] DO
m ;
3)
;
While
blocks
&lt;conditional
expression
&gt; is satisfied,
the
between
DO m and END m are repeated.
When
it is unsatisfied,
to the
block
following
the
END
processing
branches
in.
Nn. .. ;
—
---- .
TJ
- WHILE
2
~
*
:
[&lt;Conditional
DO
m;e
—
expression&gt;
.c
m
1
~
~
r
I
END
d
m;
(Blockfollowing
END m)
81
2. 8.23.6
Control
Commands
5.
Triple DO-loop
micro progralm.
(Cent’d)
nesting is permitted for each
When the specification is made omitting WHILE
L&lt; conditional expression&gt;], the blocks between
DO m and END m are repeated infinitely. Generally, this is used in the format shown below .
I
DO1;
I
I)ol;
D02;
D02;
D03;
D03;
G65.. ABC
END
END
Gb5... XYZ ;
;.
END 3 ;
3 ;
2 ;
END
END
END 1 ;
IF[&lt;Condlt&gt;
onal GO TOn;
expmssmn&gt;]
2 ;
1 ;
I
.;
.
Enabled
-Nn..
,
6.
The
(i
codings
shown
be
specified
before
END
DO1;
m.
2.
m of DO m and END m should
have
the same
value.
However,
only
1, 2, or 3 may be specified
in m.
(ii)
The valueof m, 1, 2, or 3
iscalledthe identification
number, which isused by
1
D02
1~
DO1;
1
One END 1 ismissing.
END 1 ;J
‘?
Do and END to calleach
other.
END 1 ;-J
--l
(iii
DO1;
DO1;
1
Overlapof DO
rangesisnot
‘? permitted.
Rewriteas
shown right.
D02;
3.
The same identification
repeatedly
except
where
number
may be used
repeat
ranges
overlap.
To
get
out
of
a Do
loop,
a GO TO
used.
However,
a GO TO n does not
entrance
to a DO loop as shown
below:
n can
be
enable
: ;
L !__
DoI;
5
al GOTO 100 ;
25
,% END 1 ;
!$
N1OO ;
82
GOTO 100
DO1;
z
d
.2
Q
N1OO
;
END 1 ;
‘1 1 ;
END
“-1
END
2 ;
I
I
D02;
END 2 1;
ENDl;
4.
an error:
J
END 1 ;--l
DO 1
END
cause
The returndestination
of END 1 isunknown.
?
DO m should
below
?
DO1;
Notes:
1.
Enabled
—
(iv)
DO1;
(2)
D02;
The program
following:
Classification
of Program
numbers
Numbers
are classifiedinto the
D03;
DO1;
1END 1 ;J
Quadruplenesting.
Max. nestingpermitted istriple.
When D 7 of #6021 is set to 1, the
09000 to
registration,
09999
END 3 ;
erase, and adit of
programs are disabled.
END 2 ;
ENll 1 ;
(v)
2.8.23,
DO1;
8
Display
and
Write
of
Local
and
Common
Variables
‘~”””””
;T
Local variables (#1 through #33) and common variables (#100 through #149, #500 through #549)
can be displayed and written by the following
operatio~s:
Do loopmay not
enteredfrom
I be
outside.
END 1 ;
I
(1)
IF.,GO
2. 8.23.7
(1)
How
‘T07000
;d
Registration
to
Make
Display
of
Macro
of
Operations
Variables
may
Press
SET function
key.
be provided
anywhere.
b.
Key-in the variable number
a.
of Macro Programs
Registration
Display
Mode
select
position
Programs
The registration
and edit of macro program
bodies
are performed
in the same manner
as usual part
Hence,
there
is no
programs
and subprograms.
program
size restriction
that applies
to the user
Part programs,
subprograms,
and
macro body.
macro programs
may be stored
together
in the
part program
memory
to its full capacity.
and press
cuRsOR Ikey or ~ ~uR-soR
key. However,
#
1
need not be keyed in. Ten sets of variable num–
hers including the specified variable number and
their data are displayed. The data are displayed
in the signed 8-digit integer part and the 8-digit
fraction part.
—
Macro nestinglevel
(0: Macro not ln execUtlOn)
I SETTING
*LEvEL
#oloo
#olol
#olo2
~
MACRO
01234 “0035
0
-12345678,
12345678
0.00000001
3. 00000000
#olo9
I
RD Y
Sample Display of Common
Variables
83
2. 8.23.8
Display And Write Of Local And Common
Variables ( Cent’d )
2. 8.23.9
Considerations
(1) Summary
display may
be scrolled up or down,
variables may
for
Macro
of Restrictions
#33
#l through
Common
for review.
Remarks
Available Variables
a.
Remarks
a.
and
Programs
~~ ~
#100 through
#149
#500 through
#549 T
always be displayed
System
Local
variables.
Common
variables.
variables
b.
For local variables , those of the macro currently executed are displayed. Consequently,
when a macro of a nesting level is in execution,
the local variables belonging to macros of the
other nesting levels cannot be seen. The local
variables after completion of execution are all
rest to “blank. “
b.
Available
Maximum
value
Minimum
value
c.
(2)
Write
Writing
of
Values
b.
Key-in
ever,
m
the
variable
Mode
number
select
to be
position
‘ey ‘r .CG,9K ‘eya ‘Ow-
~.
Key-in
the value
to be written.
Press
WR
key.
The keyed-in
value
is stored
as the data
of the variable
number
with the cursor
positioned.
Sample
d.
Usable
in
&lt; Expression
&gt;
~w
key
or
=1
or
PAGE
~
n
e.
Repeat
operations
values
to the desired
key
key
to move
the
e.
d.
Minimum
value 30.0000001
Macro
Accuracy
Call
Quadruple
f.
Maximum
Nesting
Level
(four-hold) .
Maximum
Nesting
(three–hold)
Level
for
of Repeat
each
Command
macro.
or
Repeat
Command
(DO)
Identifier
m
cursor.
m
in c. and
variables.
value 399999999.9999999
Decimal 15 digits significant.
g.
key
(7 digits below
Maximum
Operational
Triple
Press
~A-GE
n
Values
written
# need not be keyed-in.
The keyed-in
variable number is specified and the cursor is
positioned to it.
d.
o.- :10+308
... +10–308
:(8 digits above decimal point) .
decimal points ).
to Variables
Press
SET function
key.
be provided
anywhere.
‘ress
Constant
Values
Operations
may
a.
Variable
to write
the
h.
❑
1, 2, and
Maximum
Quintuple
3.
Nesting
Level
of
Brackets
Macro
Program
( five-hold)
Remarks
a.
Common
b.
Local
other
time
variables can always be changed.
variables
may not be written
at any
than when a macro is in execution.
Any
attempt
to do so is invalidated.
However,
rewriting
of local variables
during
macro
execution may cause
an unexpected
failure.
Before
attempting
the rewriting
, stop the machine
operation by single
stop function
and check
to see if
it is safe to rewrite
variables.
The written local variables and common varic.
ables #100 through #14$1are reset to ‘Iblankllby
the reset operation or the power-on operation .
(2)
Difference
program.
between
User
macros
designation
but
G65 and G66
the subprogram
a.
b.
and
allow argument
(M98)
does
Sub-
not.
The macro program directly branches to the
macro program body without executing any command that was specified in G65 or G66 block and
has no relationship with the macro.
With the
subprogram,
however, a branch is performed
after the execution of the command
(if any) other
than P and L in M98 block.
The maximum
nesting
level
of macro program
c.
That
is quadruple
including
G65 and G66 calls,
of subprograms
is also quadruple
but separately.
If macro programs
are specified
via MDI
d.
during
automatic
operation,
the maximum
nesting
level
is restricted
to quadruple.
With subprograms,
up to four levelS
of nesting
are permitted
in tape mode or memory
mode,
or separately
in
MDI mode,
(3)
Relationship
a.
MDI
execution
with
MDI
writing
permits
of the called
b.
MDI writing
does
body
commands
such
control
commands.
not permit
or
as operational
c.
When a macro program
being
stopped
by the single
block
stop
MDI writing
command
not related
may be specified
and executed.
(4)
Relationship
with
call
Address
and
the
execute
macro
commands
and
executed
is
function,
any
to the macro
Relationship
with
Single
Block
Switch
a.
The operational
command
and control
command blocks
do not single–block
stop if the
This
switch
single
block
switch
is turned
on.
is enabled
for the other
macro program
blocks.
b.
However,
when setting
number
#6004D1 = 1,
the single
block
switch
is enabled
for the opera–
tional
command
and control
command.
System
variable
#3003 (for
the control
of
c.
single
block
stop see 2.8.23.
5) and setting
#6004
Dl mentioned
above
operate
as shown
below:
When Single Blcck
Switch is on
L-DI=O
DI=O
4
I
T
Dl=l
Dl=l
=lor3
=Oor2
with
Optional
Block
Skip
(7)
Parameter
Setting
of
Program
Number
Classification
Disabling
And Edit
of Program
Registration,
Erase,
The following
setting
is permitted
to protect
the
registered
user macros
and subprograms
from
inadvertent
destruction:
Setting
Number
#6004
D2 =1...
The
programs
of
program
#8000 through
#8999 are
tion,
erase,
and edit.
disabled
D2 =0...
erase,
for
numbers
registra-
Search
The address
search
function
is not permitted
to
search
for the sequence
numbers
in the macro
body.
(5)
Relationship
The slash
“/” character
used in the right-hand
side of an operational
expression
or in brackets
is assumed
to be the operator
for quotient.
It
does not mean the optional
skip.
(1)
Operation
the macro
macro,
(6)
None of the operational
commands,
control commands,
and general commands stoD,
Operational
commands
and
Registration,
and
edit
are
enabled.
Parameter
Number
#6021
D7
=1...
The
programs
of
program
#9000 through
#9999 are
tion,
erase,
and edit.
disabled
D7
erase,
=0..
. Registration,
for
and
numbers
registra-
edit
are
enabled.
(8)
Effects
a.
A reset
of
Reset
operation
Operation
resets
all local
(#l through
#33) and part of common
( #100 through
#149) to “blank.
“
variables
variables
b,
A reset
operation
resets
the user-macro
multiple
call state
and the multiple
DO loop state,
making
the program
pointer
return
to the program head.
control command do not stop.
General ccfnmands
stop.
None of the operational
=lor3
command,
control commands,
and general commands stop.
All of the operational
=Oor2
commands,
control commands,
and general commands stop.
85
2.8. 23.9
Considerations
Programs
(9)
and Remarks
for
2.
the
Macro
(Cent’d)
Special
Codes
Usable
in
Macro
Program
Body
(1) The special codes listed below may be used
in the user macro body :
When the codes
shown
NC unit for punch-out
uPPer
code
immediately
a.
Codes
b.
Code
(UC)
or
before,
lower
preceded
preceded
C. Codes
designation
by
by
preceded
. . . (,)
2.8.23 .9.1
Command
below
are output
from
or other
purposes,
the
code
UC
LC
. ~ ~ #,
of
User
+,
$,
output
?.
at parameter
Macro
The following
macro
commands
addition
to the standard
user
(1)
(2)
(3)
is
. . . @.
by UC only
, *, =.
Outline
(LC)
External
are available
in
macro
commands.
Open
command
(POPEN)
Data output
command
(BPRNT
Close
command
(PCLOS)
or
DPRNT)
The above
commands
are used
to output
and characters
via external
dev”ices
with
RS-232C
interface.
2.8.23
(1)
.9.2
Open
(Format)
Details
of
command
Each
Notes :
1.
For the hole pattern
of EIA code,
when the
character
is attached
with an asterisk,
the pat–
tern
shown
above
is standard.
However,
other
patterns
may be specified
by using
the following
pzirameters:
#6110
..
[
#6111
. . . J
#6112
. .
#6113
. . . =
#6114
..
#6115
...
variables
the
Command
(POPEN)
POPEN
La]
T
;
-RS-232C
(Function)
Output
port
number
The DC2 control
code is output
from
Give this command
the NC side.
before
the sequential
data output
The RS–232C
number can
commands.
be specified as 1 or 2.
The default is the 1st RS-232C.
(Example)
; ..... Opens the 1st RS-232C.
[2] ; ,... Opens the 2nd
RS-232C.
POPEN
POPEN
(2)
Data output command
(a)
BPRNT
(BPRNT
or DPRNT)
*
(Format)
1
(1
)J
Read the desired
hole pattern
in the binary
value,
convert
it into the decimal
equivalent,
and set it
to the parameter.
For examfile,
the hole pattern
shown
below
is set as “ 152” :
When the value of the parameter is “O, “ the hole
pattern listed in the above table is provided.
86
BPRNT
[a
~
$b
~
[cl.,..];
L
L;:::
~Character
Effective
digits
po’n’
below
2
(Functions)
The commanded
characters are directly output
in 1S0 code,
. Alphabets (A to Z)
. Numerals
. Special characters (*, /, +, -)
However, ‘*’ is output by
Can be output.
the space code.
1
The variable value is output by commanding
the variable number after l’#il
. Then the
digits before the decimal point, and the digits
after the decimal point are each commanded
in
parentheses.
Assume that the variables have a maximum of
8 digits. When the higher order digit is O,
the output follows parameter #6016D7.
The value of the variables is regarded as 2word data (32 bits) considering the digits
below the decimal point, and is output from
the higher order bytes, directly as binary
data.
2
[Parameter
After outputting the command
code is output in ISO code.
data, the EOB
When the sign is positive, the output of the
space code follows parameter #6016D7.
When the variables are;
#100 = 0.40956
#101 = -1638.4
#10 = 12.34
it is output as;
C3
AO AO D8
01 9A
59
FF
E7
~~~T~~o~
I
Cl) 00
1
Output space
code.
No output. :
When the digits after the decimal point of the
commanded
variable is other than O, as many
digits after the decimal point as commanded,
digits after
are output. When the commanded
the decimal point is O, no decimal point is
output .
BPRNT
[C ** X #100 [3] Y #101 [3]
M #10 [01;
(Example)
#6016D7 = 0:
#6016D7 = 1:
The effective digits after the decimal point
are commanded
in parentheses after the
variable command.
3
The variable values are output from the
higher order digit, digit-by-digit, for as
many digits as commanded.
The decimal point
is also output in 1S0 code.
[Parameter
#6016D7 = O:
Output space
code.
No output. ]
#6016D7 = 1:
4D
OC
i
OA
(Hexadecimal)
After outputting the command
code is o~tput in ISO code.
DPRNT
(Example)
When;
Variable value
~12
data, the EOB
[X#2[531Y#5[531 T#30[2011;
#2 = 128.47398
#5 = 91.2
#30 = 123.456
And;
When
parameter
#6016D7 = O
Space
Space
AO
AO
AO
61
B2
B8
2E
B4
37
B4
‘c’
I
(b)
DPRNT
(Format)
DPRWT
[ a
T
~
L
#b[c
d].. ]
128.474
;
-x
TTT
Digitsafter
decimal
point
Digits before
decimal
point
Variable
I
~
Character
~;-”’”2&deg;
D4
AO
B2
33
OA
(Functions)
1
The commanded
characters are directly output
command.
in 1S0 code, as in the (i) BPRNT
87
2, 8. 23.9
Considerations
Programs
(Cent’d)
When
2
parameter
and
Remarks
for
Macro
(2)
The output
data output
command
can be
stopped
by resetting
the command.
All later
data will also be erased.
#6016D7 = 1
Therefore,
if reset
is commanded
by M30 ,
etc.
At the end of the output
program,
it
necessary
to give
the close
command
at the
wait until
all the data
end of the program,
are output,
and then
command
M30, etc.
~:’’”
(3)
User macro
and
required
to use
p. 8.23.
L
(3)
Close
(Format)
(Example)
105
I
htAc Ro
(1)
command
PCLOS
106
(PCL OS)
PCLOS;
MACRO
There
[a];
port number
The DC4 control code is output from
the NC side.
This is commanded
after all the data
output command is given.
The RS-232C number is given in the
same manner as the (1) POPEN
command.
ERROR
alarms
(CONSTANT)
107
ERROR
are too many
MACRo
ERROR
G67 cancel codes.
(FoRMAT)
A format other than expression
has an
error.
108
MACRO
The
ber
ERROR
(UNDEFIN
value
not defined
is designated.
#NO)
as a variable
num-
when
Using
This
outputting data by the BPRNT,
DPRNT
command, set #6022D3 = O (no parity bit upon
ISO tape output) .
MACRO
The variable
the one that
ERROR
(#NO
NOT
LEFT)
of assignment
statement
is
is disabled
for assignment.
When
When outputting data by the DPRNT
command, set whether the leading zero is
to be output by spaces.
= 1:
2,8.23 .9.4
88
programs
.... Closes the 1st RS-232C.
Setting Necessary
#6016D7 = O:
(1)
Macro
T
110
Output space as leading zero
when outputting data by the
DPRNT
command.
No leading zero is output.
111
ERROR
( [
bracket
nesting
upper
limit (5) .
MACRO
ERROR
]
5 LIMIT)
level
is in excess
(MOVE
G66 - M99)
A move command
is specified
end command
M99 called
by
112
MACRO
ERROR
113
in the
G66.
level
.
is in
of
macro
(5)
The macro
call nesting
of the upper
limit (4)
Notes
The open command
(POPEN) and close
command
(PCLOS) do not need to be
commanded
in sequence.
Once the open command is given, there is no
need to give another open command until the
close command is given.
MACRO
The
the
If #6022D3 = 1, the data cannot be output
correctly.
(2)
Of
The number of constants is in excess of
the specified range.
-23
109
2.8,23 .9.3
Function
Number
is
~EOB
RS-232C
(Function)
Alarm
option
Shown below are the user–macro-associated
and their causes.
~;’””
???
I(I
1/O interface
this function.
is
excess
MACRO
114
DO
and
ERROR
END
MACRO
115
are
(DO
not
ERROR
T :
FORMAT)
Type I for small number of variables. This
type allows the use of U , W and F and therefore makes the argument designation easier
to understand.
paired.
([
] UNMATCH)
m3)
S:
The
format
116
DO
of
&lt;expression
&gt; has
MACRO
ERROR
(DO
- END
m is not
in the
range
of
MACRO
ERROR
(GO
TO
N)
range
of
OK.
When type I is used, we have the following variables:
an error.
NO.
)
1 Sms
3.
117
T:
118
n is not
GO TO
9999.
in the
O Sn
Right,
former
S:
L
Using
these
variables
program
(P 2) .
, rewrite
the
OK.
(P4)
2.8.23.11
(1)
T
Exercises
of
Cycle
by
Canned
(Teacher)
:
Macro
~
pro9rams
:
We have
ed rules
Where
;
~
G32 w#23
F#9
~
GOO U-#21
;
~
GOO w-#23
;
Is
this
;
G92
discussed
you have
many complicatto understand
to
write
user macros.
Now,
let’s
create
some user macros
as exercises.
Let’s
take straight
threadcutting
cycle
by G92, because
it is
a simple
operation.
S (Student)
GOO U#21
shall
we
T:
Yes.
user
all right?
Just
macro
add this
body.
and
we
have
a complete
start?
~
T:
An example
of usual
following
format:
G 92 command
takes
the
s:
That’s
easy.
(Pi)
G92
u-50.
w-60.
F6. O
T:
Then, using G65, create this macro call and
the macro program body in the complete
formats.
s:
Let me try it.
:
This
command
is divided
into the following
It is
and executed
within
the NC unit.
assumed
that Rapid
Pull Out of Threading
is not included
i; this command.
Supposing
the
body
is 09093;
be:
(P2)
‘(?J
Q_––––_
Q
I ~
GOO U50.
;
@
GOO w60.
;
L
(P5)
r
G65
m
l&amp;-
(Z
program
No. of macro program
the macro
call command
will
The
P9093
macro
u-5o.
w-6o.
program
body
-z
S : They are local variable #1 through #33,
aren’t they ? But which type of local varia–
ble ?
is:
(P6)
1
Fir st, these
moving distances and lead
threads can allbe converted into variables.
F6. O ;
09093
;
GOO U#21
;
G32 w#23
F#9
;
GOO U-#21
GOO w-#23
;
1M99 ;
89
2.8.23.11
T:
Exercises
of Macro
Programs
(Cent’d)
T :
**********
s:
I think something is wrong.
With this program, I have to specify points W and F
every time !
T:
That’s true. With a usual canned cycle,
when points W and F have been specified
once, their values are retained. Thereafter,
only U is specified.
s:
Do you have any trick to overcome
convenience ?
T:
common
variables
I do. In such a case,
Using
common
variables,
(#100 - #549) help.
write
points
s:
good.
That looks OK.
**********
s:
Very
I’ve
the macro to designate
W and F.
got
it!
Now,
I divide
the
the
position
macro
to program
Rapid
threading
How about designating the width of
rapid threading pull–out using address K ?
T:
OK.
s:
AH
right.
Let’s
see
. .. . .
of
body
Macro
(P8)
;
#100 = #23 ;
#lol
to try
.
this in–
into ;WO parts as follows:
09000
I’d like
pull-out
= #9 ;
call
is as
follows:
G65 P9000
w-60.
K4.8
G65
u-50.
;
P9093
G65 P9093
u-51.4
G65P9093
U- . . . ;
F6. O ;
;
M99 ;
(P9)
Macro
09093
body
is as follows:
;
GOO U#21
09000
;
G32 w#100
F#lOl
GOO U-#21
;
GOO w-#100
M99
;
and
I write
;
#100
= #23 ;
#lol
= #9 ;
#102
;
M99
the
;
macro
call
= ABS
09093
as follows:
[ #61;
;
;
#10 = ROUND
[ #1021 *2
;
(Plo)
#11 = ROUND
[ #211 + #10
G65 P9000
w-60.
F6. O ;
#12 = ROUND
[ #1001 + ROUND
G65 P9093
u-50.
;
GOOO U#21
G65 P9093
u-51.4
;
G32 W#12 F#lOl
G65 P9093
u-52.6
;
G32
G65 P9093
U. . . ;
GOO w-#100
M99
Is
90
this
OK?
[#102]
;
U#10 W-#102
GOO U-#11
;
;
;
;
;—RAPID
THREADING
PULL-OUT
;
T:
your
reasoning
is right.
Practically,
Yes.
vou had better
prevent
a malfunction
by
invalid
control
of single
~rogramming
#3i03:
invalid
control
of feedhold.
block
or #3004:
09093
#3003
M93
This
threadcutting
can be performed
in Uand W-directions
only.
Now we’d like to
expand
this function
in four directions.
?’-??_-Q
-—
; ~
#10 = ROUND
[#102]
IFIABS]
LT
[#21]
?
N2
‘J
L-----------
K = #6 (RADIuS
F=#9
[ABS
[#100ILT
#13]
GT
O] GOTO
3 ;
IF
EQ
o ]GOTO
4;
#14 = ROUND
[#1001
[ #loo
u41.4
G65 P9093
U..
#14 = ROUND
#3000
[#100]
Negative
;—W:
-#13
;—W:
INPUT
Feedhold
Feedr ate
Positioning
completion
;
I
I
;
. ;
G32 w#14
F#lOl
;
G 32 U#12
W#15
;---(
#3004
body
is as follows:
Positive
M92
M99
Error
)
:
display
override
Invalid
1
:~~_~;threading
;
;
;
#3003
#100 = #23 ; —w
ERR.
= o ;
GOO W-#100
;
;
4 ;
;
= 7 ;
GOO U-#11
#102 = ABS
+ #13
= 499 (MACRO
N5 GOO U#21
is as follows:
K4. O F5.0
The macro program
= #9 ;
GO TO
L
-~
09000
;
GO T05;
N4
;
G65 P9093
Positive
#15 = #13
VALUE)
command
u40.
;—U:
;
3
G65 P9093
M99
[#102]
IF [#100
N3
VALUE)
w-45.
I
I
-#n
;
#13 = ROUND
#3004
#lol
[#21]
with a sign
without
a sign
u = #21 (DIAMETER
W = #23
G65 P9000
Negative
GO T05;
?)
G 00
call
[#21 ] + #10 ;—U:
#11 = ROUND
#15 = -#13
macro
4 ;
;
#12 = -#lo
program
IF
The
;
GO TO
GO T02;
N1
Let me think.
I see.
--- How about
the next
Designation
Designation
buffering
*2
#10]
invalid
Tel;
#12 = #lo
UL---J
K:
block
4-block
#11 = ROUND
%w
,,
U,
K:
Single
JF[#21EQO]GOT04;
---
~-__---#+
s:
= 1 ; _
IF[#21GTo]Go
II
L
;
= o ;
;
—
[#6]
;—
1:1
T:
Well.
If
Uor
W=
O,andl
U/210rl
W I&lt;K,
error will be displayed in “your’pro~rarnming,
That’s good.
91
PROGRAM MIRROR IMAGE (G 68, G 69~
2.8.24
h. The operational direction after X-axis tool
position compensation is inverted.
Program
mirror
image is the feature
to reverse
the NC program
operation
in all directions
around
the work
center
line
(Z-axis)
by the use
of G command.
(1)
G68;
G69;
i. T command
for tool nose radius compensa–
tion tool nose center is inverted in the sign.
G command
for tool nose radius compensation virtual tool nose position is inverted.
~.
. . . Program
mirror
image on.
The program
mirror
image on
state is held until G 69 is speci–
fied.
“-”
Program
mirror
image off.
The program
mirror
image off
state
is held until G68 is speci–
fied.
?rogrammeo
!00
rad]us com~en sation
Tool center
,, .,,,
T-,
..,..
Wrtual 1001 r ose
G 41
1
til RTUAL
When program
mirror
image
is on, the Xaxis operation
by the NC program
IS inverted
with Z-axis
being
the center
line.
The manual operations
(manual
continuous
feed
and handle /step feed)
are not affected
by this feature.
TOOL
NOS’?
TOGL
NOSE
.
VIRTUAL
‘OOL
CENTER
.
P
u
Fig. 2,40
(2)
Details
of
program
mirror
image
When the PROGRAM
mirror image feature is
on, the movement
by the NC program is
inverted with Z-axis ‘being the center line.
The following inversion is processed in the
NC unit:
a.
X command
inverted.
for
X-axis
coordinate
b.
U command
for X-axis
value
is inverted.
incremental
c.
I command
arc center
coordinate
d.
Circular
for x -axis
is inverted.
motion
direction
{
G 02”.
CHANGED
TO G 03
f
value
is
coordinate
value
of
inverted.
PROGRAMMED
CIRCULAR
DIRECTION
OF ROTATION
ARC
‘..-
CIRCULAR
ARC ROTATIONAL
OIRECTION
OF ROTATION
WITH PROGRAM
MIRROR IMAGE
FEATURE
ON
Fig. 2.39
command
for X-axis
volume
and direction
e.
I
f.
I command
for canned
distance
is inverted.
!3.
U and
finishing
92
I commands
allowance,
beveling/rounding
is inverted.
cycle
for
special
etc.
are
taper
X–axis
canned
inverted.
cycles
COm PellSatlOfl T.
and tool center
G44 when PROGRAM
m,rr Or Image fumt,o”
m 0.
Cautions
(3)
for
G68 and
Power
G69 commands
on
+
a.
G68 and G69 are modal
belong
to “ 10” group.
fied
on
a single
block
b.
G69 (program
mirror
the time of power-on,
program
reset.
c.
These
commands
tool nose radius
state.
d.
e.
These
commands
finishing
shape
cycle.
G commands
They
must
basis,
image
reset
which
be speci-
must be specified
in the
compensation
cancelled
may not be specified
program
of the special
in the
canned
\
/,----7
G28 X...:...:
\___
/’
/’
Program
execution
NOOO1 G50 x240.
N0002
X40.
NO003
G68
Z120.
240.000
1
; —96.000
u-144.000
-96.000
NOO04 G50
U480.
z80.
NOO06 G69
: —
N0007
u480.
NOO08 x120.
TO1O1
; —
;
NOO05 x80.
G50
Z220.
z40.
+384. 000
;
Tllll
;—
+144.000
u240.
000
-144.000
336.000
;
TO1O1
;—176.000
u-160.000
x
ABSOLUTE
ZERO
POINT
—---
PROGRAMMED
iNTERMEDIATE POINT
/’
reference point return
+
off)
is used at
operation,
and
If automatic
origin
return
“G28
X. . . Z. . . ; “
is specified
whe–n the X–axis
mirror
image
of the interfeature
is on, the positioning
mediate
point
specified
in X and Z is affect–
ed by the mirror
image,
but the machine
origin,
which
is an absolute
position,
is not
affected
by this feature.
+x
Manual
in principle.
OFFSET
t
A
01 X56.
28
TURRET
220
u
T 01
4
F
INTERMEDIATE
POINT PRODUCED
BY X-AXIS MIRROR IMAGE FEATURE
—+Z
Fig. 2.41
EXAMPLE
:
Described below is a sample program which
uses G68 and G69 for the opposed tool rest
shown in the diagram on the following page,
and the X-axis movements.
B
OFFSET
TURRET
11 X64
Z 8.
L
93
2.8.25
MULTIPLE
CYCLES (G 70 TO G 76)+
REPETITIVE
(3)
General
2, 8. 25.1
Multiple Repetitive
G 70
Finishing cycle
G71
Stink
G 72
G 73
[
(4)
Remarks
—–
G74
Cycles
Name
G code
—
—-
removal in turning
-~
Stock removal in facing
‘=
Pattern repeating
~ byG70
Peck drilling in Z axis
~
In the block
after
G 76, the G codes
specified
again.
group
G codes
may have been
Tip nose radius
~ comknsa~on
Finishing
internal
memory
shape
program:
Automatic
(6)
G70 through
modal.
G76
(2)
The program
by G71, G72
of finishing
and G73 are
I
Program
capacity
of
finishing
in
*
for
group
shape
stored
the
shape
and
non-
specified
in memory.
finishing
shape
S 45 blocks
When cornering
(Gil,
G12) and
Note:
multiple
cornering
(Gill,
G112)
are used,
each block
containing
them must be counted as the value
listed
below.
No. of blocks
One blwk
including
G 11
or G12
*
TWO blocks
G 111
Four blocks
One block including G 112
Five blocks
One blcck including
finish-
specified
changed
before
the cycle
to other
G codes
by the execution of this cycle.
possible
(5)
(1)
The memory
is 45 blocks.
the
possible
threadcutting
are
storing
the cycle
of G70 through
of 01 group
should
be
This is because
the 01-
It is possible
compensation
G73.
to perform
tool
on the cycle
of
-=c!=minxais
.: ::=::di”scOmRnsatiOn
G 76 ]
for
To shorten
the stock
removal
cycle
compu–
t ation time,
the finishing
shape
program
is
binary-converted
and then is stored
in the
memory
for storing
finished
shape
program
(one pair)
in the unit.
This
memory
is
called
the internal
memory
for finishing
shape
program,
which
differs
from the part
program
memory.
This option makes program simple and short.
For instance, both stock removal and finishing
are performed only by commanding
the finish–
ing work shape.
Table 2.21
The
ing
~
J
nose radius
G 70 through
Tool nose radius compensation cannot be
performed on the cycle of G1’4 through G76,
Any attempt to do so will result in an error.
2.8, 25.2
Stock
Removal
Stock
removal
ante remained
Commands
for
(1)
in Turning
(G71)
in turning
with the finishing
uncut
can be commanded
by
finished
contour
are different
increase
Monotonous
shape
/decrease
I
I--nf
’
Pns
monotonous
increase
shaped
path.
/decrease
and
con-
finishing
ns:
G71
tween
caved
allowG71.
be-
—
Sequence
number
for
cycle
start
Sequence
number
for
cycle
finish
— —
1~.,.
K*.
..
D..
F(E)
.
. ..
S..
.
;
T_TT__’l==_
Feedrate
and spindle-speed
designation
for stock
removal
in turning
Nns
. . . ..
;
. .. . .
.
. . F . . .
;
. . s . . .
;
Depth
of cut
(designation
Rough
Rough
(radius
finishing
in X-axis
direction
without
signs)
allowance
finishing
allowance
designation)
in
in Z–axis
X-axis
direction
direction
. . . . .
Nnf
. . . . .
I
;
I
Finishing
direction
allowance
of Z-axis
in the
Finishing
allowance
in the direction
X-axis
(diameter
designation)
of
Note:
Feed command
F(E)
and spindIe
command
(S)
are given for executing
Finishing
shape
program
(45 blocks
maximum)
A+
A’+B
Tool path:
Sequence
number
should
start
with ns and end with nf.
F and S commands
are effective
only when G 70 finishing
cycle
is executed.
–x
I
~-r
“ --------
A
‘4
D
E&amp;x
B
L-,
Start and f(n!sh
at posjt!on A
‘\
~\
\*
!
!~I
ING AL
I*
3
D
x
------1 ““’’N’E’-t-H-H
-1
~_
~
Q
(Retrac:ng)
/
+x
(Relractlng)
stock removal cycle.
Flnlshlng shape
program
FINISHING
ALLOWANCE
Stock removal
cycle
Rough fln!sh[ng
cvcle
Fig. 2.42
terminated.
In the case of I = O and K = O (or no
designation) , the rough finishing cycle is
omitted.
!-4
I
w
+Z
G 71 starts
at point
A, executes
rough
finish
cycle
(—)
and the rough
finishing
to point
A to be
cycle
(–--)
, and returns
3;
‘
Fig.
+2
2.43
Retracting
is performed
by rapid
traverse
Thrust
motion
depends
on the speed
GOO.
(GOO or
AA’.
GO1)
specified
by
the
program
of
Each depth
of cut D along
X-axis
can
be overrided
by 10% step within
the range
of O to 200%, by G711G72
cut depth
over–
ride
selection
or setting
. See item (3) , g.
95
2,8.25.2
Stock
Removal
in Turning
(G 71) (Cent’d)
Note 1: Specifies the feed command
(F(E))
and spindle command
(S ) for the execution
of stock removal cycle.
Notes :
1.
The tool path of finishing shape should be
programmed
to be monotonous increase or
decrease in X and Z coordinates.
2.
The following
should
be taken
into consideration in programming
the start
block
( Nns)
and the end block
(Nnf)
of a finishing
shape
program.
Note 2:
concaved
specified.
X
MONOTONOUS
INCREASE
the cutting
path for the
shape
program
if R 1 is
IRelr,]ct
\‘--+
---”-–j---+~j-,
,
‘\
\
MONOTONOUS
INCREASE
‘:/
[Cti TTlh S,
;pxq:,
:p&lt;~
\’\
\
,,/
\
w%. ‘i
-x
\
\
pg~:;c,’
L .—
FINISHING
SHAPE
-+---
FINISHING
ALLOWANCE
~i~&lt;,s~,~~~~Af3E
PL30GRAM
STOCK REMOVAL CYCLE
““””””””””””ROUGH FINISHING CYCLE
—
—-——
—________
_
t’1.--l
( GOO or GO1) specified
by the program
of
Each depth
of cut D along X-axis
AA’.
can be overrided
by 10% step within
the
range
of O to 200%, by G71/G72
cut depth
See item (3)
override
selection
or setting.
.4~
Nns
AA IS N
~A;&amp;LEL
A’
Speclf!ed
WITH
g.
I
Cautions
gram
(i)
Concaved
finishing
Command
format
G71
PAS
~
COMMAND POINT
Cf FINALBL02K
Cf FINISHING
SHAPEPRffiRAM
CJf
.,:
u:.
..
;
,
F.
;
,
s.
.. ..
12 . . .
...,,,
D..
F(E)
. . . . . .. . .
;J
S... R1
L
finishing
allowancem X-ares
directmn (radiusdesignation)
Rough
Finishingallowancein the direction
of
X-ax~s (diameterdesignation)
I_
shape
pro-
by G71 starts
from
to the start
point.
B
@
23
A
START
POINT
;
Note 2
T Depth of cut m X-axis direction
(designation
withoutsigns)
L
,~
Rough
cutting
cycle
the closest
concave
finishing
farcyclestart
Note 1
lTI
;
concaved
Sequence number forcyclef&gt;nish
~
Nns..
for
contour
ns: Sequence number
J
,
:$:&amp;
b.
Nnf
$,,,
G71 starts
at point
A, executes
the rough
and the rough
finishing
cutting
cycle
( —)
to point
A to be
cycle
(---)
, and returns
if I is not specified,
the rough
terminated.
finishing
cycle
is skipped.
lletracti~g
‘is per forrn~d
by rapid
traverse
Thrust
motion
depends
on the speed
GOO.
11
a.
~—~’~
A’
21
“12&amp;5iil
(2)
/‘
/
id
–x
1)
.1
,.—~
\
!
FCSIT:CNI
Shl FTED
FRC~J POINT
ABYu2-
.GI
/
r
B
X
Computes
finishing
Fnmshmg shape progrm
Tool path: A + A! + B
(45blocksmaxmtum)
A’
COMMAND PO(NT
OF 1ST BLIXK OF
FINISHINGSHAPE
PRCGRAM
Since
cutting
starts
with the concave
nearest
the start
point,
the cutting
path
is interrupted
if it hits the convex
be–
The concave
is cut to
yond
the concave.
Then,
the
its bottom.
turns
to the interrupted
cutting
beyond
cutting
cycle
repoint
to perform
(iii)
Any contour
having
an overhang
does not
allow cutting.
Hence,
the Z-axis
specification
value
of the finishing
shape
program
should
be a monotonous
variation.
(iv)
The termination block for the finishing shape
program has the following limitations:
it.
DISCONTINUATION
DEPTH OF
CUT D
(ii)
a simple
concave,
only one
interrupted
However,
for a complex
point
is provided.
concave
containing
a smaller
concave
and
a convex
as shown
below,
the cutting
path
interrupted first at the larger convex
is
For the G command
; ) , specify
(Nnf.
. .
pal.
For
(v)
The
cYcle
retracting
may
of
the termination
block
GO1 or GOO., in princi–
amount
be
set
by
after
the
each
approach
setting.
then at the smaller convex.
RETRACTING
AMOUNT
#6202 (FOR G 71)
DISCONTINUATION
1
\
\
)T
SETTING
.-----—
CUTTING
PATH
‘1
\
cONcAvE
\
UA
/
CONCAVE
(vi)
Each block
of the finishing
shape
program
should
be of monotonous
increase
or monotonous
decrease.
A circular
arc which
extends
over
two or more quadrants
must
be divided
into two blocks
before
being
programmed.
(vii)
Generally,
Z–axis
finishing
allowances
W
and K are not specified.
Otherwise,
a bite
is caused
into the wall of the corresponding
side.
If “R 1“ is not specified,
the conventional
monotonous
increase
/monotonous
de–
crease
stock
removal
cycle
is provided.
The maximum
number
of interrupted
points
that, allows
cutting
is three,
beyond
which
cutting
is disabled,
causing
“ 097” error.
Within
this limitation,
any
number
of concaves
is allowed.
DISCONTINUATION
1
,
(viii)
DISCONTINU-vA
ATION 4
Approach
is performed
at the feedrate.
[t is not affected
by the G code of the
finishing
shape
program.
Hence,
depending
on the finishing
shape
program,
positioning
may be performed
by rapid
traverse
after
the approach
at feedrate.
—A
A
Sample
Contour
Not Allowing
Cutting
:ing
APPROACH
*
‘d
97
2. 8.25.2
(3)
a.
b.
c.
d.
Stock
Rules
Removal
in Turning
in programming
G71
Addresses
U , W, I and K must be programIf a wrong
sign is promed with signs.
grammed,
the workpiece
may be gouged.
An address
D for depth
of cut must be programmed
without
signs .
Finishing
shape
program
must be programmed immediately
after
the block
containing
G71.
Even
a block
between
them is ignored.
When F and S codes
are not specified
in the
block
containing
G 71, F and S codes
specified
in the preceding
block
are effective
for G71 mode.
F and S codes
specified
in the program
of
finishing
shape
become
effective
only for
G 70 mode and are disregarded
in G71 mode.
The following
should
be taken
into consideration in programming
the start
block
( Nns )
and the end block
(Nnf)
of a finishing
shape
program.
I
Usable G code
Remarks
A blcck containing these codes
Gill
must be counted as four blccks.
—
A blcxk containing these codes
G112
e.
(G 71) (Cent’d)
must be counted as five blwks.
When a program has entered the tool nose
the G 71
radius compensation mode before
is
tive
commanded,
for
the
the
G71
compensation
is effec–
cycle.
However,
the compensation
in the stock
removal
cycle
is executed
but in the
not
rough
finishing
cycle.
Thus,
the compensation
is ineffective
for
the program
in which
the rough
finishing
cycle
is omitted.
(I = O, K = O)
f. The above rules and cautions in programming G71 also apply to G72 cycle. In other
words, the G72 cycle is the same as G71
except that cutting is made in parallel with
X-axis.
g.
Cut
depth
override
of
G71 and
G72
Ten percent
step override
may be applied,
within
the range
of O to 200%, to the depth
of cut D of each time in the following
two
manners:
(i)
By
(Set
(ii)
setting
with
#6004D3
5-bit
code.
through
D7.
)
By G71/G72
cut depth
override
switchEither
of the above
methods
ing.
shown
in (i) or (ii)
may be selected
by parameter
#6023D2.
Parameter
Function
EXAMPLE
Tool
A:
finishing shape
nose compensation
without concaves
applied to
+x
D
-- (260 220.
)
1
!
A“
.-
m’-~mm’”)
------
-.—
i
k.
(L+qi
J-u
100.
DIA
--—-
60.
DIA
1-
10.
40.
40.
!
DIA.
X
‘-+
G50
x260.
20.
Z220.
N2
GOO S1OOO M03
N3
G41
N4
X145.
mm 0)
O.,rnm
(})
+Z
30.
30.
10.
,.
N1
2
-0.5
mm (W)
;
TO1O1
;
;
z180.
Stock
F
;
removal
in turning
1
N5
G71
P6
Q13
U1.
WO.5
12.
K2.
D4.
FO.3
s800
;
\
N6
GOO
X40.
s800
;
Rapid
.“”
traverse
cutting
N7
GO1
N8
x60.
N9
G12
W-40.
FO.15
;
s600
;
w-30.
Finishing
W-20.
15.
N1O
GO1
X1OO.
Nll
W-20.
N12
X140.
W-20.
N13
X145.
;
N14
G40
N15
GOO
;
W-10.
“ “ “ ~qb:fikl~t
s300.
‘0
shape
= 9 blocks
;
;
x260.
S200
;
/
Z220.
TO1OO
;
99
2. 8.25.2
Stock Removal in Turning (G 71) (Cent’d)
EXAMPLE
B :
Tool
concaved
shape
compensation
not
applied
CENTER
1P
~.
1
1
I
-x
to
i’
1
I
25
R
’6(’”’
“
—.
15.
~
i
\
./’’”(
&gt;Ji’
-
\
120
L)IA
I
wI
\~/’
ii
5.15
I
I
I
1
20.
I
t
IT’
20.
I
10. 1
10,
%A
:0
I
\
1
!
50,
1
I
I
A
z
NO1
G50
x260.
N02
GOO S500
N03
x124.
z70.
;
M03
Z-10.
+2
TO1O1
;
;
~
Stock
removal
in
facing
,
100
N04
G71
P5
N05
GO1
X120.
N06
x80.
N07
W-10.
N08
x
N09
W-10.
N1O
G02
Nll
X11O.
N12
GO1
N13
X120.
w-5.
N14
x124.
;
N15
GOO
N16
T0202
N17
G50
N18
X124.
N19
G70
Q14
U2.
D6.
FO.2
S250
RI
;
;
Z-50.
FO.1
S500
;
;
110.
w-lo.
;
Finishing
shape
;
I
X90.
W-20.
w-20.
w-5.
115.
125.
K-20.
;
;
;
;
/
x260.
270.
TO1OO
z70.
;
;
;
x255.
Z-10.
P5
Q14
;
;
Executes
finishing cycle of G 71 shown
above.
Stock
2.8,25.3
This
cycle
finishing
remaining
(1)
a.
in
Nnf
provides
facing
in
Facing (G72)
G 71 is for cutting
in parallel
with Z axis
and G72 is for cutting
in parallel
with X
stock
removal
and rough
with the finishing
allowance
axis.
Monotonous
Command
G72
Nns
Removal
Pns
increase
ldecrease
finishing
shape
format
Qnf
Ut...
. . . . . . . ..
;
. . . . ...&lt;
.
;
F
. .. . . . .
;
s
. . . . . . .
;
.........
;
. . . . . . . ..
;
Wf...
If.
. .
Kf,
..
D..
.
F(E)
. . .
S..
.
;
T
Depth
of cut
in Z axis
direction
(without
signs)
~T
Significance
is the same
of each address
as that of G71 command.
Finishing
shape
program
Tool path:
A
+ A’ +
J’
(45
blocks
Retracting
is performed
by rapid
traverse
Thrust
motion
depends
on the speed
GOO.
+x
l-%
{
maximum)
B
( GOO or GOl)
specified
by the program
of
AA’.
Each depth
of cut D along
Z-axis
can
be overrided
by 10% step within
the range
of O to 200%, by G71/G72
cut depth
over–
ride selection
or setting
.
b. Rules
and
cautions
in programming
finish
shape
G72 is the same as G71
cuts into the workpiece
Refer
to 2.8.25.2
axis.
Turning.
_
Flmshlng shape prograrr
—
Stock removai
-----
Rough flnishlng cycle
cycle
except
that the
in parallel
with
Stock
Removal
tool
Z
in
Siart and
ftnlsh at
PosIton A
Fig. 2.44
Cycle
moval
turns
starts
at point
A executes
cycle
and rough
finishing
to A when completed.
In case of I = O and
K
the
cycle
rough
finishing
= O (or
stock
cycle,
rere–
no designation)
,
is omitted.
Nns ~~~ AA IS IN PARALLEL
Speclfled
WITH Z AXIS
Nnt
~~~
X AXIS
Fig.
Fln!shng
A
w’
—
,n GOO or
BA IS IN PARALLEL
1
G 01 mode
2.46
shape program
Stock removal
cvcle
Fig. 2.45
101
2.8.25.3
(2)
Stock Removal in Facing (G 72) (Cent’d)
Concaved
finishing shape
Nns
r
r
Pns
G72
ns:
Cycle start sequence
nf:
Cycle finish sequence
Qnf
W~...
Kf. ..
D.. .
number
number
F(E) ...
S.. .
;
(See Note 1.)
........ .
T
........ ;
F ...... .
s ...... ;~
~T
........ .
Depth of cut in Z–axis direction
(without signs )
Rough finishing allowance
in Z-axis direction
........ ;
Nnf
R1. ..
Finishing allowance in Z–axis direction
Finishing shape program (45 blocks maximum)
B
Tool pat~ : A- +- AI-+
cutting
path is comIf “R1” is specified,
Note
1:
puted
for the- concaved
finishing
shape
program.
b.
Cautions
gram
FINISHED SHAPE
PROGRAM
‘—
ROUGH
CUTTING
_----
ROUGH
CYCLE
FINISH
concaved
finishing
shape
pro-
G 72 only performs
the operations
which
are
The same cautions
as
parallel
to Z axis.
with G71 are applied
to G72 except
that the
retracting
amount
of G72 may be set by
setting
#6203.
A
—
of
A’
(3)
Cautions
The
for
same
G 72 command
cautions
as with
G71
are
applied
to G72.
RETRACT
MOTION
FINISH
ALLOWANCE
EXAMPLE
:
compensation
In
case
of I
is not
= K = O, tool
applied.
ROUGH CUTTING
ALLOWANCE
–x
-x
i
I
,
L.:
t-l
I
‘\
+
m
~.
‘4
R
-z
L1l-1
‘~M
D
K
160.
LMA
G 72 starts
at point
A , performs
stock
re–
moval cycle (- ) and rough finishing cycle
(---), and returns to point A when comIf K is not specified, rough finishpleted.
ing cycle
is skipped.
Retracting
formed
by rapid traverse
rate depends
on the speed
specified
by the program
E-ach depth-of
overrided
by
O to 200%, by
selection
102
or
cut D along
X-axis
10% step within
the
G71/G72
cut depth
setting.
is per-
GOO.
Cutting
(GOO or GO1)
of AA’.
can be
range
of
override
mm (1))
I
I
I
1
I -,.
nose
radius
N1
G50
X260.
z60.
N2
GOO S1OOO M03
N3
X170.
N4
G72
P5
N5
GO1
z-60.
N6
x120.
s250
N7
Z-50.
;
N8
x80.
N9
Z-20.
;
N1O
X40.
ZO
Nll
Z5.
;
N12
GOO
x260.
N13
T0303
;
N14
X170.
Z5.
N15
G70
Z5.
;
T0202
;
;
i---
011
uO.6
FO.15
WO.5
;
IO
Stock
KO
D4.0
Cutting
. . .. .
removal
FO.3
in
facing
s200
;
at feed
1
I
I
;
Z-40.
S400
;
I
Finishing
shape
program
S800
;
J
z60.
;
P5
011
U,l
&gt;0
W,K&lt;O
,
Executes
;“””””””
finishing
cycle
Ul&gt;o
$li7?sl.%
A
x
WORK SHAPE
OR G71 AND
+Z
FINISHING
ALLOWANCE
,-
‘%2
x-
A
U,l
&lt;o’
WK&lt;O
Fig. 2.47
In
the case that U, W, I and
K z O are erroneously
programmed.
A
U,l
&lt;0
w,K&gt;O
Relation between
Finishing
Shape Program and Signs of
Addresses U, W, I and K
A wrong
workpiece
sign will cause
a grouging
as shown
below .
of
the
2.8.2.5.4
Pattern
Repeating
(G 73)
This cycle is useful for cutting the workpiece
such as moldings and forgings whose cutting
shapes are roughly made beforehand.
(1)
Command
G73
W*. ..
—
If.
I
1
Nns
. . . . . .
;
. . . . . .
. .
——
l--
K+. . .
D.. .
—
F(E) ...
I
I
s.. . ;
Note
L Number of cuttings
(1 S D S 127, without signs)
L Rough finishingallowance
in Z–axis direction
I
L Finishing allowancein X direction
(Radius designation)
– Finishing
—–
allowance
in Z-axis
direction
Finishing allowancein X -axis direction
(Diamet&amp; designation)
Finishingshape pro~ram (45 blocks maximum)
Tool pat;: A- ‘“A’-+ B (See Fig.
Sequence number should startwith ns and end with nf.
F and S commands are effectiveonly when
G70 finishingcycle is executed.
Note: Feed command (F(E)) and spindle speed command(S) are
given for executing closed loop cutting cycle.
(2)
K
-x
(Retractlnal
r
t--i
I
Rules
in programming
G73
c
I
I
B
?
a.
Address
U , W,
med with signs.
b.
Address
D for number
of cuttings
programmed
without
signs,
obeying
lowing
restriction.
THRUST
I and
K must
be
program-
must
the
be
fol-
MOTION
u
FINISHING
ALLOWANCE
(
-1
2
D command
t#&amp;
72
I
—
Flnlshlng shape
Pattern repeating
——-
program
cycle
Slart anc f]nsk
at posltlon A
Fig. 2.48
out
of
the
above
range
causes
data error.
(Alarm
code
“ 096”)
When D is 1, the cutting
of I and K values
is completed
in a single
cycle
remaining
finishing
allowance.
c.
Finishing
mediately
d.
The start
finishing
shape
after
(Nns)
shape
should
be programmed
imthe block
containing
G73.
and
cycle
with GOO or GO1.
But these
2 blocks
X or Z axis.
end (Nnf)
block
of
must be programmed
need
not
be
parallel
a
with
e.
Finishing
shape
program
does not
be repetitive
monotonous
increase
crease
in X or Z coordinate.
EXAMPLE
need to
or de-
Incase
Notes :
1.
2.
When F(E)
and S functions
are not specified
in the block
containing
G73, the F (E) and
S functions
specified
in the preceding
blocks
are effective
in the pattern
repeating
cycle.
F (E) and S functions
specified
in the program of finishing
work
shape
are effective
in finishing
cycle
G 70 and ignored
in pattern
repeating
cycle.
Table
below
shows
the G codes
which
can be
specified
in the program
excluding
the blocks
of Nns and Nnf.
GO1, G06, G02,
G 03, G 22, G 23
Gil,
3.
4.
—
of I
AI
= ~
AK
=+=
=0.
01 mm,
K
=0.
01 mm,
=0.001mm
0.001mm
1st to 6th cycle “.“ AI .AK
7th cycle
...... AI =LK
(6)
When
the
program
=0.001mm
.O.004mm
has entered the tool nose
radius
compensation
mode
manded,
the compensation
all cycles
of G73.
before
G 73 is comis effective
for
EXAMPLE
L/
Counted as 2 blocks
G12
D =7
Therefore, the cutting allowance of each
cycle is as follows.
Remarks
Usable G codes
2
Gill
Counted as 4 blocks
GI12
Counted as 5 blocks
20.)
When I and K are O or not designated, it
causes input error. (Alarm code “096” is
displayed. )
A I and
A K (rough cutting allowance per
+Z
cYcle ) are calculated as follows.
K
AI=~
D-l’
*K=
D-1
D~2
where
N1O
G50 x260. z220. ;
N1l
GOO s300 M03
T0303
;
N12 X220. z160. ;
Note
that
the
control
ignores
below
0.001 millimeter.
program
should
be made
are
not
smaller
Processing
of
than
AI
the
As a rule,
the
so that A I and
N13 G73 P14 019 U2.
AK
O. 001 millimeter.
and
N14 GOO x80.
N15 GO1 w-20.
AK
N16
In case
D=7
Pattern repeating
w-40.
18. K8.
W1.
s400
D3 FO.3
S200
;
;
FO.15
Finishingshape
program
X120. w-lo. S300 ;
N17 W-20,
EXAMPLE
~
value
;
1
of
I = 0.005
*1
=
0.005
6
*1
=
0.005
6
mm,
K = 0.005
mm,
N18 G22
x160. W-20. R20. S200
N19 GO1
x180. w-10.
N20 GOO
x260. z220. ;
;
;
=0
Input
=0
error
occurs.
1
105
2.8.25.5
Cycle (G 70)
Finishing
a,
After
rough
cutting
of G71, G72 and
finishing
cutting
can be made by the
G73, the
commands
Operation in Tape
G71
Pns
Qnf. .
Mode
;—
Stock removal
in turning
followin~ Gi’0. (1)
G70
Pns
Qnf
‘L
;
T nf:
Sequence number
cycle finish
‘:s-
for
I
Nnf. ..
L
ns:
Sequence
number
cycle start
S functions
specified
program
are effective
G70
in the finishin the finish-
“G72
Pns
Pns’
Nns’
The internal memory for storing the
finishing shape program:
To shorten the stock removal cycle time, the
finishing shape program is binary-converted
and then is stored in the memory
(one)
pair) in the unit. This memory is called the
internaf memory for finishing shape program.
G70 does not need to be commanded
immediately
after
the block
of G71, G72 or G73.
Necessary
information
such as tool change
from a rough
cutting
cutter
to a finishing
cutter
can be inserted
between
them.
and operaHowever, the following command
tion should not be programmed
between them .
]
Inhibited Command
Result
and Ooeration
Storage
program
. .
;—
Execution of
finishing cycle
Qnf ’. . . ;—
. . .
Stock removal
in facing
;
Nnf’ ...
.
After
Note :
(3)
Qnf.
Finishing shape
program (B)
(25 blocks
maximum )
L
F(E)
and S functions
for rough
cutting
specified
in the block
containing
G71, G72 or G73
are ignored
in the finishing
cycle.
(2)
;J
for
This command permits the execution of the
finishing shape program in G’71, G72 or
Gi’3 which is commanded
previously.
F(E)
and
ing shape
ing cycle.
Finishing shape
program (A)
(25 blocks
maximum)
and
search
of
the
finishing
;
J
executing
the
above
b. Operation in memory
(MEM)
the
pro-
mode
When the sequence number specified by G 70
matches the sequence number in the memory
of finishing shape program, the finishing
cycle is normdl y executed.
If they do not
match, a search for the specified finishing
shape program from the part programs is
performed.
Then, the program is stored in
the memory and is executed.
This is called
the finishing shape program search feature.
This feature enables , only in memory mode,
the programming
in which the stock removal
cycle (or closed loop cutting cycle) is per–
formed two or more times as shown below
and then the finishing cycle is performed
for each stock removal cycle :
shape
The processing of the finishing shape
gram is different in tape operation
mode and memory operation mode.
program
gram (A) is eliminated and the program (B)
is retained in the finishing shape memory.
Therefore, the finishing command
with G 70
in the trailing program is effective for the
finishing shape program (B) .
If the sequence number specified by G 70
does not match the sequence number in the
memory for finishing shape program , an
error (“091” ) is caused.
Stock
removal
cycle
(A)
Stock
+
removal
cycle
(B)
pro-
Finishing
Finishing
*cycle
4
cycle
(A)
(B)
(ii)
Supplement:
(i)
The
use
ture
increases
of
, Example
the
finishing
the
of
shape
cycle
time
finishing
shape
program
fea-
1.
the
cters)
gram
long and the finishing
is stored
in the middle
the
cycle
machining
time
tape
is about
is
5 m ( 2000 char-
Drilling
in Z-axis
Command
G74
only
in the
number
For the sequence number ns for cycle start
and nf for cycle finish, the following case
causes input error.
When the sequence
number
ns of G70 is
commanded
in advance
of sequence
number ns, or ns = nf.
2.
When the program
radius
compensation
manded,
G70.
the
has entered
the tool nose
mode before
G 70 is com–
compensation
is effective
for
(G74)
This
command
permits
the operation
ing with pecking
motion
in parallel
(1)
program
When the sequence
numbers
ns and nf
of G70 are not commanded
in the finishing shape
program
(Tape
operation)
100 msec.
When the size of the finishing
shape
prothe execution
time is
gram is 30 blocks,
about
1 sec.
However,
the storing
of the
searched
program
in internal
memory
is
performed
in the block
which
precedes
the block
of G70 command.
Hence,
the
cycle
time is increased
by the amount
obtained
by subtracting
the execution
time of the preceding
block
from
the
above
time
(about
1 see) .
Peck
is executed
shape
prothe tape,
of
. Example
of the execution
time for storing
the searched
finishing
shape
program
in
internal
memory:
2.8.25.6
feature
Notes :
search
time:
When
search
part program
having
the
for which
G70 is specified.
as follows:
program
This
of peck
drillwith Z axis.
format
z(w)
X(U)*”””
f...
1..
.
K..
.
D..
.
F(E)
.. .
~~~~~
(Rl)
;
N~tel
1
$eedrate
Retracting
amount of the tool
cutting
bottom
(without
signs)
Move
Z coordinate
X coordinate
of
position
-x
Depth
of
amount
in
of position
X-axis
in
Z–axis
direction
direction
(without
(without
signs)
signs)
C
B
R
Rap]d traverse
F
~.
Specified
by F code
Retracilong
amount
(Sett!ng t6204)
i
cut
at the
“m:
The cycle starts and finishes at position A.
The fixed amount of pecking is set by the
parameter No. ’74.
is of the cause
Note
1: The above diagram
“R1” is not specified.
When “R1” is
where
specified,
the retracting
amount
( 6 ) for
each approach
is ignored
and the tool returns
to the approach
start
point,
namely
point
A in Z-axis.
This
cycle
starts
at point A and ends at it.
+------z
Fig. 2.49
107
2.8.25.6
Peck
Drilling
in Z-axis
(G 74)
(Cent’d)
8.
The
tive
tool nose radius
compensation
for G74 and G75.
is ineffec-
Notes :
Addresses
I,
without
signs.
1.
K and
D must
be
EXAMPLE
programmed
G74
When the command
of I &gt;lU/21
is issued,
the cycle
finishes
after
the finish
of the
pecking
motion
from position
B following
the pecking
motion
from position
A.
2.
3.
When D is programmed
as O or D is not
programmed,
the retracting
motion
is not
made at the cutting
bottom.
5.
The final cutting
K‘ and the final
tion
I’
are
Z50.
14.
If
X(U)
, I or
operation
which
is
7.
is made
used for
only
in the direction
drilling.
80.DIA
40.DIA
\
-z
120.
one-cycle
of
Z-axis,
When the contents
of setting
#6204 are set
to O, the cutting
is made at once to the cutting bottom
without
pecking
motion.
2. 8.25.7
(1)
a.
Grooving
in X-Axis
This
command
permits
drilling
with pecking
X–axis.
Command
G 75
(G 75)
the operation
of peck
motion
in parallel
with
format
x(
+...
—.
Z(!A
—.
‘TT~te=
Retracting
cutt!ng
Move
wttmg
coordinate
X coordinate
108
of pos(tlon
C
of posit{on
25
-h: -=53
calculated.
D is omitted,
FO.
4
amount
in the Z direction
move amount
in the X direc-
automatically
D1.
15
1
50.
6.
K15.
+x
When the command
of K &gt; I W I is issued,
the cutting
is made at once to the cutting
bottom
without
the pecking
motion.
4.
X40.
amount
amount
bottom
jn Z-axis
depth (n X-axw d!rection
B
of the
(without
d(rection
tool
at the
signs)
(wtthout
(without s(gns)
signs)
;
EXAMPLE
:
N1
GOO
X86.
Z70.
;
N2
G75
X50.
Z40.
16.
.. +x
B
h?
A
-F
—.-—
R
R
Rapid traverse
F
Speclfled
K4.
(DO)
FO.2
by
F code
8
Retracing
amount
(Setttn G# 6205)
w
z
Fig. 2.50
The above
diagram
is of the case
Note
1:
where
“R 1“ is not specified.
When “R1” is
specified,
the retracting
amount
( 6 ) for
each approach
is ignored
and the tool re–
turns
to the approach
start
point,
namely
point
A in X-axis.
This
cycle
starts
at point
A and ends at it.
+2
Notes :
G74 permits
the cutting
in the direction of Z-axis,
and G75 in the direction
of Xthe cautions
in programming
axis.
Therefore,
G75 is the same as those
of G74.
Refer
to 2.8.
25.6 Peck
Drilling
in Z-axis
(G74) .
2.&amp; 25.8
This
cycle
and taper
(1)
G76
Threading
Automatic
provides
threadings
Command
X(1
t_.. .
Cycle
(G 76)
automatic
cutting
along
the angle
of straight
of thread.
format
Z(w
*...
—.
It.
. .
-
K..
.
D..
F(E)
. . .
A..
.
;
T T T =-I
First
Height
Distance
( radius
.
of
of tapered
designation)
Lead
depth
thread
of
of
thread
cut
(without
(without
signs)
signs)
section
Z coordinate of position C
X coordinate
of
position
C
109
;
2 8.25.8
Automatic Threading Cycle (G 76) (Cent’d)
The sign of figure following the address I is
decided by the direction of position B‘ viewed from position C .
x
I
Fig. 2.53
(3)
If “Rapid threading pull-out input (CD Z )“
is on when G76 is specified, Rapid threading
pull-out is performed.
(y) may be set to
parameter #6080, in the range of O to 25. 5L
and in increments of O. lL , where L is the
lead of the specified thread.
,Z
2.51
Fig.
The
following shows
around
The
poin~
B (In
G76 cycle
Notes :
the cuttin~ position
case
starts
and
of
tap~r”thread)
ends
at point
Rapid threading pull-out
.
1.
A.
The depth of cut D in the first cycle is restricted by height of thread K as follows.
,
‘----CYCLE
2ND CYCLE
3RD CYCLE
NTH CYCLE
Addresses K and D must be programmed
without signs.
2.
j&gt;
FIXED AMOUNT
(SETTING .6206)
When taper threading is commanded
with an
effective angle, except O, X coordinate of
threading start position does not extend to
the depth of cut.
Fig. 2.52
’441
THREADING
~.
The depth of cut in Nth cycle is:
L).
,q:~
.-.
-..
_
THRE4DING
START
POSITION
The following six angles can be used
command
of thread angle.
A
= 0&deg;,
29&deg;,
30&deg;,
55&deg;,
600,
as the
80&deg;
Cutting in final cycle is made with the depth
of fixed amount a, which is set by the setting
#6206.
(2)
Straight thread
When the address I is O or not designated,
a straight thread is cut as shown below.
110
3.
If the thread angle other than the above listed (0&deg;, 29&deg;, 30&deg;, 55&deg;, 60&deg;, 80&deg;) is arbitrarily
commanded,
the next larger angle is selected.
EXAMPLE
(Command)
When
A
A15
j
80&deg;,
_
A80
(Execution)
is
executed.
A29
4.
When the depth
of cut in the final cycle
along
the thread
angle
( =
D ) is not met with
(K - a),
the difference
between
K and a is deThe depth
of cut in first
ducted
from D.
cycle
never
becomes
larger
than
5.
D.
D
K
.-.
o
a
--.-
THREADCUTTING
CYCLE
PATH WITHOUT FIOLD
B’
@
cutting hold (option)
When this option is used, depressing the
FEED HOLD during thread cutting causes
the tool to perform threading up immediately
and then return to start point A. When
parameter #6019D7 ❑ 1, the tool stops at
position B where Rapid threading pull-out is
terminated. Then, the tool returns to point
A upon depression of CYCLE
START .
B
N,.,
Thread
DIFFERENCE
~-------
EXAMPLE
k_
Incaseof
a (Fixed
D =5.
amount)
r
-D
= fix
1
Difference
Second
5.000
= H
D -
(K
depth
cycle
cycle
of
cut
. . .
fix
cycle
. . .
=EED HOLD
- 0.200)
If the thread
cutting
selected,
depressing
in each
cycle
hold option
is not
of the FEED HOLD
during
thread
cutting
does not hold the
operation,
which
stops
at point
C where
retracting
operation
is completed.
is
the
0.400
(4)
Tool nose radius
compensation
available
for G 76.
(5)
G code of 01 group
must be newly
programmed in the next
block
of G76 cycle.
5.000-0.400
= 6.671
Third
‘\
- a)
5.000. ““““““
= 4.600 mm
l~zR
HOLD
i,,
mm,
= 10.000mm
= 10.000 - (9.800
=0.400
&gt; 0
Thus,
the
as follows.
First
Omm,
K =9.8
= 0.2 mm
START
POINT
mm
fix
5.000-0.400
= 8.260 mm
t is not
EXAMPLE
Fourth cycle ... ax
5.000-0.400
= 9.600
Fifth
cycle
. . . . . ..
mm
9.600
G76. . .
+ 0.200
GOO
M30
;
;
(a)
= 9.800
mm
111
2.8.25,
Single
8 Automatic Threading Cycle (G 76) (Cent’d)
EXA.MPLE
. Executing
switch ON
:
GOO
X66.
G76
x56.2
GOO
. . .
block
Z115.
operation
G70 through G76 at SINGLE
BLOCK
brings the following results.
;
Z30.
K3.9
D2.
F6.
A60
G70,
;
G71,
G72,
G 73, G 74, G 75
Program Stops at Every Block.
I
A
r—- —-~
-x
I
&lt;
G 76
I
t
1
;tr:::;
:Y.le
IS finished.
I
64.im~
Program stops
56. 2 1)1.1
Symmetrical
(a)
pattern
.2
The symmetrical four patterns can be commanded by each of G71 to G76.
Signs of U, W and I should be properly specified in the finishing shape program for G71 to
(See Fig. 2.8.25.33)
G73.
30.
\
),.
,,.
1
Command
position
of (X,
Z) or (U,
W)
spect
to position
A should
be properly
ed for G74 to G76.
60”
(b)
~390
/
~
+x
a
Depth
of cut for
a (fixed
amount)
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
cycle
cycle
cycle
cycle
cycle
~–, ~--,]–
u-, w-. 1–
LJ+,W’-.1-
L’–,w , I+
each cycle
when
is O. 2 mm
—1.700mm
—
2.528
—
3.164
—
3.700
—
3.900
mm
mm
mm
mm
-z
I
Though D20(I (2.0 mm) is programmed,
the
actual depth of cut becomes 1.7 mm by the
calculation of =
D because of the dif–
ference between ~=
D and (K - a) .
2. 8.25.9
Prohibition
Precautions in Programming
of
G 70 through
G 76
MD I mode
. Operation
in MD I mode cannot
be made
multiple
repetitive
cycles
( G70 through
are executed.
. Multiple
repetitive
cannot
be written–in
MDI mode.
112
with respecifi-
while
G76)
cycles
(G 70 through
G 76)
Through
the operation
in
Fig. 2.54
Four patierns
of G 76
Table 2.22
Multiple Repetitive Cycles
I
Cutting Cycle
c
n~
-— ---
-—
A
___
D
3
‘1
‘-l
L--
Command Format
(1) Monotonous increase/decrease path
G71Pns Qnf U...
W.. . 1.. . K.. .
F(E). . . S.. . ;
Nns. . .
‘1
\\,
I
‘&gt;
l—-G 71
Stock
-1
-
TAPE COMMAND
N(ns) –N(ni)
F
’112
1
~
Nnf.
;
Finishing shape program
I
(2) Concaved shape
G71Pns Qnf U...
Removal
in Turning
D.
1...
D...
F(E)...
s.. . F/J;
Nns. . .
;
Finishing shape program
Nnf. . .
;.
(U, W, 1, and K must be programmed with signs.)
TAPE
COMMANO
t-%
A
(1) Monotonous
G72Pns
TAPE
COMM
F(E)...
S...
Nns. . .
;
I
u
~
1
Nnf.
A
W..
.
path
1.. .
K.. .
D
;
Finishing shape program
I
iv’ti
G 72
increaseldecrease
Qnf U...
; J
Stock
(2) Concaved
Removal
shape
)f W...
G 72 Pns
in Facing
s..
.
K.. .
Nns. . .
F(E)
;
Finishing sham
Nnf.
D.. .
~
program
;
(U, W, 1, ar._ K must be programmed with signs.)
\\’
K
D
2. 8.25.9
through
Precautions
G 76
in Programming
G 70
(Cent’d)
Table
2.22
Multiple
Repetitive
Cycles
(Cent’d)
Cutting Cycle
Command Format
Kl\
._
G73Pns
&lt;
‘I
G 73
-
Quf U...
F(E). . .
S.. .
Nns. . .
;
W,,
1.
K.. .
D.. .
;
I
I
Pattern
I
~
Repeating
Nnf.
Firwshing
shape
program
;
(U, W, i, and K must be programmed with signs.)
.——
—
G 70 Pns Qnf ;
G 73
Peck
Drilling
:;:
I
in Z-axis
x(u). . .
IL. .
K.. .
z(w)
D.. .
F(E), . .
~;
(t) “R 1“ not specified:
The operation shown left is performed
(2) “R 1“ specified:
Retracting
amount (6)
for each approach
is Ignored and the tool
returns to the !evel of point A every time.
G 75
(1, D, K must be programmed without signs.)
Grooving
in X-ais
G76
X(U)...
F(E). . .
G 76
A:
Automatic
A.. .
Z(W).. .
1.. .
K., .
D.. .
;
Angle of thread
(0”, 29”, 30”, 55&deg;, 60’,
80=)
ThreadK and D must be programmed without signs.
cutfing
‘=--
.4
2,8.25.10
Improved
Multiple
Repetitive
Cycle Function
(1)
G74 executes
by
2.8.25 .10.1
Nose R compensation
can
executed
in the finishing
form program
G70 to G73 cycles.
also be
against
the
following
(Upgrade
the
of
G74x(u)
_z(w)_l
—.
—
a cycle
as shown
command.
“Par.
2.8.25.6
in
(l)”.
_K_D_A_
B_
This
adds
G41 and G42 to the G codes
that can be
specified
in the blocks
of the finishing
form
Nose
program
(except
for the Nsf.
Nnf blocks).
)
-
➤ Feed ~orn~and
IL
Tool width
(without
L
I nfeed
the G71 command)
—
of
“Par.
2.8.25.4
(notes
and
remarks)
. Upgrade
(2)”
of
“Par.
2.8.25.5
(notes
and
remarks)
sign)
at the bottom
sign)
— Z-axis direction
(without
sign)
— X -axis
direction
(without
sign)
(4), (5)”
. Upgrade
(5)”
Clearance
(without
— C ooint Z-axis
(w’ith sign)
B Doint X-axis
(with sign)
—
sign)
steps
(without
When commanding
G41/G42 in the starting block of
the finishing form program, also command the GOO
or GO1 move command.
Commanding
in a single block is prohibited.
. Upgrade of Itparo 2 .8.25.2 (notes uPOn
commanding
1,118,
F(E) _(Rl);
TT
R compensation is enabled by the G41 or G42
command blocks in the rough finishing cycle and
finishing cycle.
Fig.
infeed
move
distance
coordinate
coordinate
STEPS
2.8.25
.10.2
The
T
code
command
can
also
be
NT
executed against the G70 to G73 cycles in the
finishing form program.
the F, S, T codes
commanded
This enables
finishing
form program
(G70)
and disables
during
outer
form rough
cutting,
. Upgrade
the G71
of l~par.
command)
2. 8.25.2
in the
them
(nOteS
Upon
giving
(notes
and
remarks)
(3)”
Mparm 2 .8.25.4
. Upgrade
(1)”
of
2.8. 25.10.3
start
point
commanded
A finishing
form program
in which
and end point
differ
can also be
against
the G70 to G72 cycles.
2 .8.25.2
(notes
‘n ‘he
. Upgrade
of !tpar.
(BA
does
finishing
form program)
(1) “ .
need
to be parallel
with the Z-axis.
)
.
Upgrade
finishing
parallel
WIDTH
of Mpar - 2 .8.25.3
(BA
form)
(2)”.
with the X-axis.
)
(notes
does
on
not
not
‘he
need
+2
(2)
G75 executes
a cycle
as shown
by the following
command.
in
(Upgrade
)
of
Par.
(l)”.
r
to be
G75X(U)_Z(W)_.1
_K_D_A_
B_
l--r—l——
— —
2.8. 25.10.4
When both
rough
and K are omitted
against
the
finishing
margin
U and W can
rough
finishing
margin.
2.8.25.7
is
enabled
by
related
parameter
1.119,
F(E) _(Rl);
L
finishing
margins
I
G70 to G73 cycles,
be executed
as the
L
Feed
command
Tool width
(without
sign)
L
Upgrading
D1 = 1.
Fig,
#6009
I nfeed steps
(without
sign)
Clearance
(without
at the
sign)
— Z-axis
direction
(without
sign)
2.8. 25.10.5
The A command
(infeed
steps)
and
the B command
(cutting
tool width)
are added
to
the G74 (end
face cutting
cycle)
and the G75
(outer
diameter
cutting
cycle)
functions
to allow
execution
of the groove
machining
canned
cycle.
— X-axis
direction
(without
sign)
B point Z-axis
(with sign)
—
c point
(with
X-axis
bottom
infeed
move
distance
coordinate
coordinate
sign)
115
2.8.25.10
Improved
Function
Multiple
Repetitive
Cycle
When A is commanded,
the return
amount
is
the #6208 setting
amount
(G74)
or #6209
setting
amount
(G75) ,
If the contents
are
lfo It, no pecking
is performed.
(Addition
to
(d)
(Cent’d)
TOOL
WIDTH
Par.
A
R
START
2.8.25.6
Notes
and
remarks)
.)
POINT
;
(e)
I
-r
Alarm
width
96 occurs
f B (tool
when
width)
the
.
command
is
groove
—+
1
~—”t
n
I
L
;TEPS
1’
A series
of
ally in four
block .
T
Y
II
I
I
1
There
-/-
---
---—
(1)
the
following
of the improvement
cycle
functions
of
Turning
Cycle
Straight
G90
+Z
“i
2.8.25 .10.6
Notes
multiple
repetitive
(G 90, G 92, G 94)
basic
lathe operations
specified
usublocks
, can be commanded
in one
are
2,8.26.1
x
!
-
CYCLES
three
canned
cycles
,
I
I
-+
CANNED
2,8.26
turning
X( U)...
The cycle
ecuted
by
the
A (G 90)
cycle
Z(W)
~
this
. . .
F(E)
. . .
to
‘~
shown
command.
;
below
is ex-
+ .x
(1) The following conditions are added to Pars.
2.8.25.10.1, 2,8.25.10.2, and 2.8.25.10.3.
(a)
The upgrading
#6011 D1 = 1.
(b)
This improvement expands the maximum
storage of the finishing form program to 39
blocks .
(Improvement
(2)
Notes on
G741G75
improvement
made
to Par.
commands
A and
G74/G75
movement
2.5
(b)
When B alone is commanded,
tool width
is performed
at the beginning
and end
G741G75.
Details
are as follows.
(c)
The final movement
is
positioning
location
of
before
G741G75 to the
and then to return
to
block
immediately
before
A
alone
is
116
B, the
is executed.
only
groove
without ex=cuting tool
the
cycle
operation
be continued
by specifying
the depth
of
in the X –axis
direction
in the following
blocks
as follows.
shift
of
to positioning
from the
the block
immediately
tool-width
shift
position
the position
of the
G74/ G75.
commanded,
machining is performed
width shift.
Fig.2.55
Since G 90 is modal,
The first
movement
is the shift
for the tool
width,
from the positioning
location
of the
block
immediately
before
G741G75
to the
X–axis
command
direction
(G74)
or Z-axis
command
direction
(G75 ) .
When
~
of Par. 2.8.25.1 (general) (2).)
Without
both
conventional
(ii)
Rapta traverse
Specjf, ed w
F code
effective by related parameter
(a)
(i)
z
x(u)
. . .
;
x(u)
. . .
;
EXAMPLE
will
cut
:
N1O
GOO
x94.
z62.
Nll
G90
X80,
W-42.
N12
X70.
:
N13
x6o.
;
N14
GOO. ..
;
FO.3
;
Cycle
start
~ G90 is executed with depth
II
cut changed .
;
+x
2.—
90.
40.
U 1A
60.
1)1.A
1
(2)
Taper
G90
cutting
cycle
X( U)...
The cycle
executed
z(w)
~
by
1
to
this
...
I“. .
F(E)”’.
~
shown
command.
below
—.
—.
is
Rap[d traverse
~pcecjf:d
—.
I
;
by
z
1&gt;
The sign of figure following the address I
is decided by the direction of position A’
viewed from position B.
Fig. 2.56
EXAMPLE
:
N20
GOO
X87.
N25
GOO. . .
z72.
;
~
;
-x
Lw
30.
8(1.D[.A
_— -------
[
+J
1(1.
2.
40
7(],DIA
87 DIA
tz
5(I 1)1.4
1
117
2.8.26.1
(3)
Turning Cycle A (G 90) ( Cent’d )
Cautions
in programming
Rapid threading pull-out :
G90
for G90 cycle
must be
T, S and M functions
specified
as a rule beforehand
in the preceding blocks.
T, S and M blocks
without
move
commands
are effective
in the effective
area
of G90.
a.
G90X.
..
x..
I..
.I.
. . F(E)
. . . ;
;
x..
h
Effective
area of
G90
;
x . . . T0505
M05
;—
E
If “rapid threading pull-out input (CDZ )“ is on
when G92 is specified, rapid threading pull–out
is performed.
Rapid threading pull-out value (Y)
of O
may be set to parameter ##6080, in the range
to 25. 5L and in increments
of 0. lL , where
L is
the lead of the specified
thread.
Generally,
it is
convenient
to create
and use the sequence
in
which
“rapid
threading
puil-out
(CDZ ) “ is turned
on/off
through
the use of a given
.M code.
Since
G92 is
be continued
the direction
‘
GOO X...;...;
G90X.
..
I..
.I.
.
F(E). .
modal,
the cycle
operation
will
by specifying
depth
of cut in
of X-axis
.
x(u).
.
;
x(u)
. . .
;
EXAMPLE:
;
x.. . ;
Effective
area of
G90
x;...
GOO X.. .
T0505 M05 ; —s
x . . . z.. . ;
N30
GOO x80.
N31
G92
N33
The
effective area of G91) is from the block
containing G 90 to the one before the block
in which the other G code of 01 group is
specified. This rule also applies to the G 92
and G94 described later.
;--M
x66.4
F6.
x62.64
I
;
~_..
(G 92)
G92
threading
X( U)...
T_ -
(
62.64‘DI.I
7Z
cycle
Z(W).
.
F(E)
. . .
7(I.
DIA
‘1
;
Lead
!
designation
Depth of cut
/
*
(L)
d
25.4
to
~!
shown
command.
below
is ex–
+ .x
z
START POSITION
.-
——
A
--Hap’d traverse
~
1-
.~
w
-&amp;I
1%
APPRGX
P
$.;
13
(N
Fig. 2.57
118
d
DetaIIs of Chamfering
for Thread (M 23)
F!rsl cycle
18rnm
Second
07mnOfi’nm
058mnl
cycle
Tn)fd cycle
762
~
this
cutting
times
-—
---V
I
The cycle
ecuted
by
cycle
four
k
I
Straight
Threading
II
—
(1)
pull-
ON
I
‘5.
Cycle
Rapid
N35 GOO X1 OO.Z1OO. M..-M LLLL
: Rapid
threading pullout OFF
Block
mode,
the execution
of G90
stops
after
the completion
of the cycle
Threading
out
I
;
x
2.8.26.2
;
;
x63.8
I N34
z25.4
b. In Single
cycle
~to@.
‘.,:
threading
N32 x65.
I
z76.2M.
/
I
Fojrlh
cycle
(2)
Straight
thread
cutting
cycle
with
EXAMPLE
angle
T
G92
X(U).
This
alon
command
permits
the thread
cutting
~
the angle
of thread
. The cycle
A
~
to
”
shown
z(w).
below
.
K“
F(E)
--”
;
‘x
I
!2
76
I
Angle of thread
~_6~”
Depth of Cut
d,=18mm
d,=25mrn
d,=lflmm
d. – 3.68 mm
T
is executed.
-x
DIA
I
F code
(or E code)
70.
111A
=’
I
-+?-
Calculation of K. ..
Fig.2.58
The sign of figure
following
decided
by the direction
of
ed from position
A.
ANGLE
address
position
K is
A’ view–
OF THREAD
K
= d.tan(60&deg;/2)
K1
= -1.8
x 0.57735
= -0.866
mm
K2
= -2.5
x 0.57735
= -1.443
mm
K3
= -3.1x
0.57735
K4
= -3.68
x 0.57735
N40
GOO
X80.
N41
G92
x66.4
N42
x65.
N43
x63.8
N44
x62.64
N45
GOO
=-1.
790mm
= -2.125
z76.2
MOO
mm
;
a
-----
Y .A
/(!
-;
1&gt;
f“:~
1,10
~
First cycle
Second
‘1’
~ .4~/
“1,
,,
DEPTH
z25.4
K-1.44
K- O.87
F6.
;
F(E)
. . .
;
K-1.79
;
K-2.13
;
OF CUT
x1OO.
z1OO.
MAA
;
cycle
CYc’e
+/’
(3)
k
K
-1+@
IK,, I=
K,
dn~n(;)
“a
Taper
G92
threading
X(U)-””
cycle
Z(w)””
The cycle @
to @
cuted by this command
Fig. 2.59
For the threading
along the angle
of thread,
the K for each cycle
obtained
from the above
formula
should
be programmed.
a
I
tan (s/2)
290
I
0.258618
30&deg;
I
0.267949
550
I
0.520567
60&deg;
I
0577350
60”
I
0.839100
1..
.
shown
below
;
is exe–
+ .x
~
Speclfled by F code
(or E code)
1
&amp;
~
+Z
!-L-’-3+
L
Fig.
2.60
Details of Rapid
TPfeadlng Pull-out
119
2.8.26.2
Threading Cycle (G 92) (Cent’d)
c.
~ .-—-. ——
x(u)
. . .
;
x(u)
. . .
;
EXAMPLE
OF
Fig. 2.62
GOO
N51
N52
N53
G92 x70.
x68.8
;
x67.8
;
N54
GOO X1OO.
X80.
Z80.8
MOO
w-50.8
;
1-1.5
Z1OO.
m,
F2.
MAA
For the threading
along
the angle of thread,
the K for each cycle
obtained
from the following
formula
should
be programmed.
1
I
dn. tan(a/2)
IKn{
=
It
~
.tan(a/2)
;
;
The
‘EAD20
!15
tz
Depth
of Cut
Second cycle
Th:,d cycle
a.
threading
the
G92
angle
X( U)...
cycle
with
angle
(Cutting
. . .
1..
.
.
K..
F(E)
...;
This command permits the threading along
the angle of thread in taper threading.
The
figure following the address K must be programmed with a sign.
.x
1
z
,
w
c
--.
g .
IJ
——___
,...
Rapid traverse
‘~
Specfed
by F code
(or E code)
2
denominator
~
11+11
&gt; 900
~
II _ 1!
depends
tz
Cautions
T,
in programming
S and
M functions
G 92
for
G92 cycle
must
be
b.
ln Single Block mode, the execution of G92
cycle is stopped after the completion of the
cycle @
to @ .
c.
Thread
cutting hold (option)
When this option is used, depressing the
FEED HOLD
during thread cutting causes the
tool to perform threading up immediately and
then return to start point A.
When parameter #6019D7 = 1, the tool stops
at position B where threading up terminated.
Depressing the CYCLE
START
at start point
A or B restarts the current processing from
the beginning.
THREADCUTTING
CYCLE
PATH WITHOUT HOLD
SWT
POINT
Fig. 2.61
FEED HCLC
120
on 0 ‘ :
specified
as a rule beforehand
in the precedT, S and M blocks
without
move
ing blocks.
commands
are effective
in the effective
area
of G92.
of thread)
Z(W)
the
::::
(5)
Taper
in
et &lt; 900
Note :
For the control
equipped
with Multiple Repetitive
Cycle~,
the above
troublesome calculation
can be omitted
by using
G76 (Automatic
Thread
Cutting
Cycle)
.
The control
performs
the above
calculation
automatically
by the G 76 command.
‘-r
@711
sign
e!
::
\
along
{’f I-7
i
:
N50
(4)
---+
The sign of figure following address I is de–
tided by the direction of position A’ viewed
from position B . Since G92 is modal, the
cycle operation is continued by specifying
threading depth in the X-axis direction in
the trailing blocks as follows.
Fig. 2.63
If the
threadcutting
hold option
is not sedepressing
of the FEED HOLD during
cutting
does not hold the operation,
stops
at point
C where
the retracting
lected,
thread
which
operation
d.
is
G92
Taper
G94
(threading
cycle)
is
cycle
X( U)...
Z(W)
. . .
K..
.
~
to
Q1
#.’
(1)
. . .
~
:
is exe-
,+
with
chamfering ON, thread pull-up value of O may
activate alarm “064.”
2,8,26,3
F(E)
+x
in Multi–
G92 comcan be
used
facing
The taper
facing
cycle
cuted
bv this command
completed.
Six angles
of thread
can be used
ple Repetitive
cycle
G76.
In the
mand,
arbitrary
angles
of thread
performed
for threading.
When
(2)
Rapid traVerSe
Facing Cycle B (G 94)
Straight
G94
facing
cycle
X(U).””
z(w)
;
F(E).
”-”
to
The straight facing cycle @
executed by this command.
Fig. 2.65
@
is
The sign
is decided
of
figure
by the
following
direction
the address
K
of position
A’
viewed from position B .
-x
“f?
A’ 3)
-.
A
I
l!u
a
2
EXAMPLE
START POINT A
;g,
__:
I
—
:
N70
GOO
X74.
z32.
;
N71
G94
X20.
Z30.
K-5.29
N72
z25.
;
N73
Z20.
;
N74
GOO. . .
Rap]a traverse
: Spec!fled
by F code
FO.3
;
,
~
B
2
r-l
I
I
+2
Fig. 2, 64
...
;
z(w)
...
;
EXAMPLE
N60
GOO
Three
by
Since
G94 is modal, the cycle operation will
be continued by specifying depth of cut in
the Z-axis direction in the following blocks
as follows.
z(w)
;
7.
cycles
G94 command
x
2.
:
x65.
Z42.
+2
;
I
c;:’::es
N64
GOO. . .
;
(3)
a.
-x
—-z
Cautions
in programming
G94
T, S and M functions for G 94 cycle must be
specified as a rule beforehand in the preceding blocks. T, S and M blocks without move
commands are effective in the effective area
of G94.
Block
mode, the execution of G94
b. In Single
CYC~ is stopped after the completion of :3
to &amp;l .
121
2. 8.26.3
Facing Cycle B (G94)
(Cent’d )
Table 2.23
Code
Canned Cycles
Straight Cycle
G90
X(U)...
Z(W)..
.
F(E). . .
Taper Cycle
G90
;
X(U)...
Z(W).
..
1.. .
F(E). . .
;
/
R
R
G 90
, F
Turning Cycle
11-
~,~
R( !
u/2
R
F
w
z
~!
x
a
1
x
.G92 X( U)...
Z(W)...
F(E)
;
G92 X( U)...
.,.
z(w)
F(E). . .
;
F
G 92
Threading
u,/2
R ‘
Cycle
z
1-
l--
THREAD
THREAD
PuLLOUT
Z(W).
G94
..
F(E). . .
7
G94
PULLOUT
X(U)...
Z(W).
z
G 94
Facing Cycle
u
x
122
I
..
K...
w
F(E),.,
I
;
2.8.27 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL
(G96, G 97)+
This feature may be installed when
specificationoption is selected.
The
c
the S4 digit
Before the block of G96 command,
the spindle maximum RPM should be specified by G !50.
This specificationprevents the spindle RPM
from getting abnormally high by the computation of surface speed when the X-axis
current
following G codes are used:
value
EXAMPLE
G 96
v
N1O
G50
Cancels
Nll
MAA
;
N12
G96
s150
~At
vialed.
the
time
These
group.
are
modal
(1)
a.
of
the constant surface speed control.
power-on,
G97
(cancel)
which
belong
to
G96
Using
speed
surface
S.. .
speed
(M03)
control
Constant
this command,
specify
the surface
of the work
in a numeral
of up to
unit
4
(3)
a.
When the surface speed is specified, the
equipment assumes the X-axis current value
(Note 1) to be the diameter of the work and
computes the spindle RPM every 100 msec
so that the specified surface speed is ob–
tained. The computation result is sent as
the analog voltage output or the binary 12bit signal output. In the subsequent blocks,
the surface speed may be varied by S speci–
fication.
.
(M03)
;
command,
directly
specify
the
How
for
to set
constant
coordinate
surface
system
speed
(See
control
Note)
to handle
tool
position
offset
amount
(i) When
per formi~g
the constant
surface
speed
control,
parameter
#6020D 1 is generally
set to “O. “ This
enables
the control to perform
the computation
for constant
surface
speed
control
without
adding the tool position
offset
amount
to the
specified
coordinate
value.
If a large
value
is used for the offset
amount,
the
tool position
offset
is normally
executed
and,
at the same time,
the constant
surface speed
control
is correctly
performed.
a machine
tool that allows
spindle
gear
change,
instruct
the M code for gear change
specification
before
the block
of G96 com–
For details,
refer
to the instruction
mand.
manual for that machine
tool.
:
(ii)
G96
surface speed control cancel (G97)
this
Cautions
b. How
b. For
N9
:
When performing
the constant
surface
speed
control,
make programming
by setting
G50
coordinate
system
or G 58 work coordinate
system
so that X-axis
coordinate
value
of
the spindle
rotational
center
become
“O. “
In other
words,
the coordinate
system
should
be set such that its X-axis
coordinate
value
correctly
represents
the diameter
of the
work
at its machining
point.
+=+-=
MAA
the upper
spindle
RPM.
spindle
RPM in a numeral
of up to 4 digits
The constant
surface
after
address
S.
speed
control
is cancelled
and the usual
spindle
feature
of S 4–digit
specification
is
resumed.
i
N8
M03
Specified
limit of
of the
Unit
EXAMPLE
S..
Using
(G96)
;
digits
after
address
S.
The
surface
speed
is as follows:
; —
02
G97
Constant
S2000
is FI ro
(2)
G codes
smaller.
:
Specifies the constant surface speed control.
I
G97
is
M code for spindle
gear change
( gear
No.
4 is specified)
;
S1OO
M03
;
ratio
.
When
#6020Dl
is set
to
“ 1, “ the
value
(Specified
coordinate
value
+ tool position
offset
amount)
is assumed
to be the work
diameter
to compute
the constant
surface
speed.
Hence , care should
be taken
not
to use a large
value
for the offset
amount
by performing
coordinate
system
setting
for each tool and using
the tool position
offset
for tool wear compensation.
123
2.8.27
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL
(G 96, G 97)+ ( Cent’d )
00/
(;
/
Note:
/
#6020DI
and #6020D7 are independent from each other.
O@-/
. . . The
= “o”
#6020D7
= “l”
. . . The position
the tool position
by not adding
amount
is shown
in the current
display
“POSITION
ABSOLUTE.
COMMAND
SPINDLE
SURFACE
FOR THIS
x,
Fig. 2.67
obtained
EXAMPLE:
offset
position
“
N4
#6020
G50 S1500
= O
Upper
limit of spindle
s~eed
clam~
(in r/rnin)
.
M code for gear change
;+
1
1N5 MAA
;
N6 G96
s150
M03
N7 GOO X40.
;
25.
;
N8 GO1 20 FO.15
;
N9 x80.
2-30.
4
w-lo.
Nll
G22
N12
GO1 U1O.
;
N13
G97
; -~
;
t
X120.
W-20.
R20.
S500
G50
S2000
Constant
surface
speed
control
;
J
Cancel
of
constant
L
4095
N14
I
;
Nlo
.,.
Constant
surface
speed
150 m/min
7
)
TO
T
SPEED
SPEED IS COMPUTED
MOTOR
4
OR
CONSTANT
~
The spindle
gear may be changed
in the
for
maximum
of 4 steps . The parameters
the gear change
are as shown
below.
For
details,
see the Parameter
List.
10 ‘h’
END
POINT SURFACE
AT THE TIME OF GOO
.4
Thus , the switching of the computation
for constant surface speed control and
the switching of the computation for cur–
rent position display on CRT are performed separately.
c.
THIS PROVIDES
AT START OF GOO
/
position obtained
by adding the tool position offset amount
and the tool nose radius compensation
amount is shown in the current position
display “POSITION
ABSOLUTE.
“
#6020D7
“Y
surface speed
control
;
+x
5.
!
DIA
120.
SPINDLE SPEED
,-, ..
+Z
20.10. 30
2.8.28
FEED/MINUTE
SWITCHOVER
AND
FEED/REVOLUTION
These G codes are used to switch between the
designation of feed per minute and the designation of feed per revolution, before specifying
F(E) code (feed) command.
Fig. 2.66
When parameter
#6020D0 = “ 1, “ the constant
surface
speed
control
is performed
on all
positioning
blocks
( GOO, G06) also.
For
positioning
, however,
the constant
surface
speed
is computed
for the end coordinate
of
the positioning
block.
The constant
sur-
d.
face
speed
is at every
moment
computed
for
only
the cutting
block .
Jvhen #D6020D0
= “O, “ the constant
surface
speed
control
is performed
only on the cut–
ting block
and the positioning
block
immediately
before
it.
For the positioning
block,
the constant
surface
speed
is computed
for
its end coordinate.
124
(1)
G98
;
command,
By this
after
is executed
G 98
the F(E)
on a feed
code specified
per minute
basis
I
Meaning
‘e”iCd-— -–
mmlmin designation
Inch input
I
inlmin designation
.
(2)
G99
;
By
this
after
basis.
b. T designation for tool lifecontrol
the
command,
is executed
F(E)
on a feed
code
per
specified
For the T designation in the part program,
the special T designation for tool lifecon–
trol must be used.
revolution
c.
Input/output
. Tool
signals for tool life control.
lifecontrol I/0 signal.
“ Tool skip input.
=
. Tool
Notes :
. Tool
replacement
input.
1.
G 98 and G99 are modal G codes,
which
valid
until the designation
is changed.
2.
When switching
between
G 98 and G99 is performed,
F (E) code designated
before
is canSo, it must be designated
again.
celled.
an error
is caused
at the next
Otherwise,
cutting
block.
completion input.
completion group number
remain
The above inputs are provided to implement
the highly efficienttool lifecontrol feature.
The following describe these three steps
in detail:
(2)
The initial
G code at power-on
may be switched between
G98 and G99 by the use of the
following
parameter:
3.
replacement
a.
Registration of tool information
The
part program
for tool information
registration
1
G code for tool information
registration
start
Command
for group
number
and life
Address
P : Tool group
number
[ Address
L: Life
per tool
2.8.29
TOOL LIFE CONTROL (G 122, G 123)+
The tool numbers of the
group designated by
address P, and offset
memory number
This feature allows a long, unattended operation
by replacing the tools each time the designated
number of pieces or the designated use hour is
reached.
(1)
:~1 : Tool number (1 to 50)
_:: Compensation memory
[
number (1 to 50)
1
The tool lifecontrol consists of the following
three steps:
G123
a. Registration of tool information
(i)
1
;
Registration of tool group number.
The tool numbers of the tools of the same
type are registered as one group .
Group No.
(ii) Registration of
The number of
by a tool to be
group and the
istered.
life of each tool group.
pieces that can be machined
registered in each tool
usable hours of it are reg-
(iii) Registration of use offset number
tool.
Number of
pieces
Life
per
of each
These must be registered from the part program in the memory of the equipment before
starting machining.
1
Tool
G code for
registration
19 groups, 1 to 19, may be used.
For groups 1 to 9, life is
designated
by the number
of works (1 to 9999 works)
1-”””
For groups
Use hours
tool information
completion.
designated
(1 to 9999
10 to 19, life is
by use hours
minutes).
125
2.8.29
b.
TOOL
When
LIFE CONTROL
the
part
program
(G 122, G 123)+ (Cont’d)
for
tool
(3)
T designation for tool lifecontrol
information
is executed,
the following
screen
registration
on
is shown
in the COM function
display
The screen
enables
the confirmation
CRT.
of the registered
information.
(Depress
PAGE
key to display
the following
screen.
)
Using the following special T commands ,
create the part program for machining :
a. Use the following T commands
:
The tool of the group specified
EXAMPLE
The
:
is given as T command.
display
of the
by executing
shown.
the
information
following
registered
program
is
—
—
TC091
time, the content of the registered offset
number is applied as offset.
;
L7890
TO1O1
in “TE2”
is given as T command and, at the same
0... ;
P1
tool
position offset is cancelled.
The tool of the group specified
G122
in “Z=”
However,
;
Note:
;
When two or mme compensation
memories are used
for a single tool, refer to the description in subparagraph
T0303
;
T0606
;
T0909
;
Tllll
;
T1313
;
P12
(5), a.
b. When
L7890
T0404
;
T0808
;
T101O
;
T1212
;
T1414
ber of
number
;
;
c.
01234 N,1234
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
TOOL GROUP
1 (LIFE7890 COUNT)
COUNTER
Display
“TUD 91”
the
num-
command
at the
for
confirmation
of the contents of
command.
EXAMPLE:
When the
executed
following
after
the
part program
tool information
tion described in subparagraph
c)...
RD Y
Fig. 2.68 Tool Life Data On Tool Life Control
by No. of Pieces to be Machined
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
01234 N1234
TOOL GROUP 12 (LIFE7890MIN.)
TIMER
O MIN.
T0404 ;
T0808 ;
T101O ;
T1212 ;
T1414 ;
GOO T0191 ;
@
)
T0190 ;
)
0’
TOO T1291 ;
(3
)
T1290 ;
Q’
)
T0199 ;
M99
RDY
TOOI Life Data
on TOOI Life Gontrol
by Operating Time
126
by
o
TO1O1 ;
T0303 ;
T0606 ;
T0909 ;
Tllll ;
T1313 ;
2.69
registered
single tool, the control automatically counts
the-feed time as operating time. T-command
need not be programmed
for time counting on
part program.
—
Fig.
number
machinable
per tool of group
9 is specified,
give
“TE T99&deg;
deWhen the group
numbers
10 to 19 which
operating time of a
signate
the maximum
;
M30
pieces
1 to
(C Zis the group
number)
for the
for counting
the number
of pieces,
completion
of machining .
;
G123
a group
—
has been
registra–
(2) :
At
the
execution
of
the
part
program
speci–
(4)
fied with tool life control,
the tool number
in the current
group
and the offset
number
beiniz
used by “TG 791”
command
may be
shown
in COM display
on CRT
screen.
In the above
program,
“T0191”
specifies
the
~
shows
that
machining
by “T0606”
(LIFE 7890
1234
1
signals
for
tool
input /output
control:
life
control
signals
are
pro-
Table 2.24
Signal Name
01234 N1234
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
COUNTER
/output
The following
vialed
for the
in the registered tool information.
( ~’ shows that “T0190” becomes “T0600.” )
TOOL GROUP
Input
COUNT)
TO1O1 ; END
T0303 ; END
T0606 ; CUTTING
T0909 ;
Tllll ;
T1313 ;
Description
TLSKP
Tool skp input.
TLCH
Tool replacement
request output.
Tool replacement
completion input.
Tool replacement
completion
TLAII
TLA12
TLA 14
group
number input (BCD code),
TLA 18
TLA21
RD Y
Fig. 2.70
Example A of Display of Tool No. and
Offset No. of Current Execution
The
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
TOOL GROUP
TIMER
12
operation
for each input /output
depends
operation
panel
and external
sequences
provided
by the machine
builder.
For details,
refer
to the instruction
manual offered by the machine
builder.
The following
describes
the control
function
in response
to the input /output
signals
to facilitate
the
understanding
of the tool life control
feature.
on the
01234 N1234
[HFE 7890 MIN.J
1234 MIN.
T0404 ; END
T0808 ; CUTTING
T101O ;
T1212 ;
T1414 ;
a.
TLSKP
:
Tool
skip
input
RD Y
~
shows
that “T1291”
command
the machining
by “T0808”
in the
tool information.
(~’
shows
that 11T129011 becomes
command.
)
Fig. 2.71
Example
Offset
B of Display
No. of Current
of Tool
‘An
~,,,,
* ,
specifies
registered
!1T0800&deg;
This is the input signal for replacing the
tool before the registered lifeof it expires.
When TLSKP
input is “closed” during the
time from the output of the tool registered
by group number “1 to 19” as T command to
the output of another T command, the con–
trol outputs the T command of the next
tool registered in the group at the time of
the next T command output.
No. and
Execution
b.
TLCH
:
Tool replacement request output
YASNAC
I
I
P-a-
127
2 8,29
TOOL LIFE CONTROL (G 122, G 123)+(Cont’d)
All tools
in each
group
the registered
life
(the
TLCH
hours)
expires.
.
Tool
life
when
expires
number
in
of
o Tool
life expires
number
is given
use hours.
(iii)
number
number
output
is
specified.
and T command
of its group
when
tool life is determined
completion
When the tool replacement
signal
goes on, alarm number
the CRT
screen.
TLCH2:
Tool
d.
when
or use
when:
T ❑ C 99 commands
executing
workplaces
T command
for life
ber was executed.
c.
TLCH1,
output
are given
of pieces
turns
ON
group
num-
request
output
157 is displayed
replacement
by
on
Tool replacement completion input (TLRST)
and tool replacement completion group number inputs (TLA1l through TLA21).
These signals are used to indicate the re–
placement completion to the control after the
tool replacement request output (TLCH1,
TLCH2)
goes on and the tools whose life has
expired are replaced with new ones.
When the tool replacement operation is
completed, set the group number to “tool
replacement completion group number in )Ut
(TLAII, TLA12, TLA14, TLA18, TLA21
and put the tool replacement completion input (TLRST)
in the “closed” state.
request
After
all machining
life of registered
tool
with either
tool group
No. expires,
TLCH1
and 2 are closed
by performing
program
end
When main input
is
or reset
operation.
check
for the tool No. of machining
closed,
life expired
and replace
it.
I
1; I
0
0
0
0
0
0
L
;
0
When tool replacement
request
inputs
Note:
TLCH1
and 2 are closed;
automatic
start
is
mode.
prohibited
in automatic
operation
k
0
0
0
0
0
When the tool replacement request output
signal goes on, look at the CRT screen, namely ,
the tool life control display screen of COM func–
tion, make confirmation of the number of the
erouD in which all tools have come to the expie.
ration of useful life, and replace them.
0
0
0
0
[
E
L
% G-I
EXAMPLE
:
Shown below is a display example in which the
life of the tools belonging to g-roup r,umber
II
11(has been completed.
TM. 18
T1.A21
1
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
01234
N1234
TOOL GROUP 1 (LIFE7890COUNT)
CO CNTER
7890
TO1O1 ;
T0303 ;
T0606 ;
T0909 ;
Tllll ;
T1313 ;
END
END
END
END
END
END
‘#/henthe tool replacement oDeration has
been completed with ‘the tool re~lacement com–
II look
at the tool life
pletion input II closed,
control display screen of COM function on
CRT and c-heck to see if the control internal
memory is accepting the completion of the replacement operation. When this operation is
found accepted, perform a reset operation
(depress RESET
key on MDI &amp; CRT panel or
“close external reset input ERS) , and the tool
replacement request output goes off and the
displayed alarm code disappears.
EXAMPLE
(i)
:
Shown
below
is a display
example
in which
!! 12!! tools has expired.
the life of the group
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
TOOL GROUP
TIMER
T0404 ;
T0808 ;
T101O ;
T1212 ;
T1414;
01234
Make specification
as follows
of the part program
for tool
registration:
by the use
information
N1234
12 (LIFE7890MIN.)
7890 MIN.
END
END
END
END
END
Elm:
Tool
number
A A :
Tool offset
memory
number
RD Y
Shown
below
is a display
example
in which
“ 12” is
set as the tool replacement
completion
group
number
‘“i”
in–
put and the tool replacement completion
input
is
“closed”
after
replace–
ment of all tools .
G123
As
shown above, consecutively specify
to be used and the offthe tool numbers
set
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
TOOL GROUP
TIMER
01234
N1234
12 (LIFE 7890MIN.)
OMIN. )
specified
memories
numbers
in the group
to be
Up to 5 offset
by address
p.
may be -used for one tool.
EXAMPLE
:
G122
P1
RD Y
Supplementary
control
memory
—
T0404 ;
T0808 ;
T101O ;
T1212 ;
T1414 ;
(5)
;
explanation
for tool life
a. The tool lifecontrol in which multiple tool
offset memories are used by a single tool
is performed as follows:
;
L7890
TO1O1
;
TO1ll
;
T0121
;
T0131
;
T0141
;
T0202
;
T0212
;
T0222
;
T0232
;
T0242
P..
.
;
;
L..
.
;
)
G123
;
—
This is the display of tool lifecontrol
group No. 1 of COM function on CRT
screen at registration of tool information
by the execution of the above program.
129
2.8.29
TOOL
LIFE CONTROL
(G 122, G 123)+ (Cent’d)
--l
01234 N1234
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
TOOL GROUP 1 (LIFE 7890 COUNT:
o
COUNTER
I
T0192
T0232
T0242
TO1O1 : END
TO1ll
T0121
T0131
T0141
T0202 ; CUTTING
T0212
T0222
Becomes
“T0202”
command
;-t-
Becomes
“T0212”
command
;
Becomes
“T0222”
command
!
T0193
L
[
T0194
IU3Y
; L
Becomes
“T0232”
command
; L
Becomes
“T0242”
command
i
2.72
Fig.
ii)
The
Use
Display of Tool Offset Memories
Used for One Tool
part program
the following
T0195
(
T
commands
-1
T0190
:
;
Ccxnpensation
is “00.”
Compensation
is the compen-
by tool “02.;’
Becomes
“T0200”
command
(
Table 2.25
When tool “ 01” of
group
number
1
has been
reDlaced
The display
of tool life control
group
No.
of COM function
on CRT
screen
at execu–
tion of the above
program
is as follows:
sation memory number
registerd
first.
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
Compensation
The tool of
the group
specified
in “OU”
is
given as
T command.
is the compen-
01234 N1234
TooL GROUp I (HFE 7890cOuNT)
COUNTER
o
sation memory number
registered second.
Compensation
sation memory number
registard
third.
~ Compensation
T0232
T0242
TO1O1 ;
TO1ll ;
T0121 ;
T0131 ;
T0141 ;
T0202 ;
T0212 ;’
T0222 ;
is the compen-
is the compen-
sation memory number
registered fourth.
RD Y
Compensation
is the compenFig, 2,73
sation memory number
registered fifth.
b.
The
T
commands
following
program
of tool information
are as follows:
in the
execution
of
after
the registration
shown
in EXAMPLE
the
Tool
life
control
in which
system setting (G50
(i)
work
coordinate
T ...) is used.
Use of work coordinate system setting
does not require to modify the program
for tool information registration.
(ii) The work coordinate system setting command to be used in the part program
should be as follows:
G50
TOZ90
_
130
;
Group
number
( 1 to
19)
1
There
are
following
. The
tool
number
IIRegistration
of tool information
not
Note:
from the part program
but by the writing
of settings”
and “the presetting
of the number of tools by settings”
are provided
for
However,
these
operspecial
operations.
ations
should
n~t be performed
in principle.
restrictions:
used
is
01 to
30.
. The tool coordinate
memory
number
be used for each tool is as follows:
to
Table 2.26
(6)
Tool Coordinate
Tool No.
List
of
Settings
for
Tool
Life
Control
Memory No.
01
51
02
52
03
53
Registration
a.
of
group
number
for
each
tool
Table 2.27
Setting
I
Contents
No.
I
Remarks
I
The group number of tcol
w
30
*86r)l
to be selected
by
“T 01 * ~k” command.
(iii)
When the command
“G50 T 3C 90” is
executed
in the following
programs,
the
control
operates
as shown
in the table
below.
The group number of tool
ti8602
to be selected
Tool groups are
by
“1 to 19.”
“T 02 * *” command.
The tool whose
life has expired
Program
for
Tool
Information
Registration
value.
The group number of tcol
o . . .
G122
;
P1 L1OO
TO1O1
;
T0303
;
T0606
;
to be selected
$8650
* * indicates
compensation
Registration
of
‘“””
;
;
number,
life
of
each
tool
group
Table 2.28
Setting
Remarks
Contents
No.
Part
by
“T 50 * *” command.
;
b.
‘1”
G123
M30
has a minus
\
\
Program
I
The life of group number
I
“l.” (The number of
machinable
pieces)
The setting range
of the number of
IL(
T0190
;
G~O T0190
machinable
; -1-1
J
Tool no, of
GrouD no. 01
The life of group number
n6169
I
!
01
03
–u+
I
“9.”
(The
pieces)
Operation
by “G 50 T 0190
.
$6170
“G50 T 5300’
The life of group number
“1O.” (Machinable
hours)
The setting range
“G 50 T 5600
C6
~ (units),
number of
machinable
“G50 T5100
I
pieces
is 1 to 9999
of the number of
\
machinable
hours
is 1 to 9999
c.
Tool
life
control
and
(minutes).
setting
The registration
of tool information
and the
monitoring
of the currently
used tools are
performed
using
below
is the list
life control.
the setting
of settings
area.
used
z
—
Shown
for tool
131
2.8.29
TOOL
LIFE CONTROL
Registration
number
c.
of
tool
e.
(G 122, G 123)+ (Cent’d)
offset
memory
and
tool
Table
Table 2.29
Remarks
Setting
Contents
TOFN 01
The tool number which uses
Monitoring of the currently used tool in
each group
2.31
Setting
Contents
TG 1 CNT
The number of pieces
being machined by the
tiemarks
currentlyusad tool of
group number “t.”
(*6181)
The number of
offset memory 01 (T * * 01).
(X8651)
machinable
+---- -.
–!
pieces is set in
I
TOFN 02
The tool number which uses
(~8652)
Of fSet
MemOry
$6161
(T * * 02).
02
-1
.!---
Tool number is
to C6179.
The number of pieces
“1 to 50.”
TG9CNT
being machined
(n6 189)
currently used tool of
by the
group number “9.”
““
‘t
TOFN 50
The tool number which uses
TG IOCNT
(:6700)
offset memory 50 (T * * 50).
(F6 190)
The use time of the
currently used tool of
group number “1O.”
—
The machinable
hour is set in
d.
Registration
when
memories
are used
multiple
tool offset
by a single
tool
The use time of the
TG 19 CNT
Table
Notes
offset designation
number in
The number not
the tool life control program
used in tool Iife
of offset memory 01
control is “O.”
(T*
1.
2.
* 01).
(~8702)
The registration of the
in tool life con-
offset designation
trol program is
number in
the tool life control program
of offset memory 02
(T*
W to 95
91 designation
* 02).
:
To use
the “ T
memory
The number useb
TOFO 02
group number “19.”
Remarks
The registration of the
TOFO 01
(2!8701)
currently used tool of
(76 199)
2.30
Contents
Setting
$6180 to ?6189.
—
is
the tool lifecontrol feature. select
4-digit
designation”
and the “offset
addition”
options.
When “ 90” through
“ 95,
in the low-order
2 digits
( 4-digit
designation)
in
the
control
executes
A T- command
feature.
” or
of
the
the
other
“ 99” is specified
the T command
part program,
tool life control
than above
does not cause
the execution
of this feature
and is processed
as an ordinary
T command.
Hence,
it is possible
to specify
the T command for tool life control
and an ordinary
T command
in a single
part program.
is “l.”
92 designation
is “2.”
93 designation
is “3.”
TOFO 50
(~8750)
The registration of the
94 designation
offset designation
is “4.”
the tool life control program
95 designation
of offset memory 50
is “5.”
(T*
When
number in
the
* 50).
part
paragraph
(5)
one of 1 to 5,
program
, a,
and
shown
in
sub-
(i) is registered,
O is stored
here.
any
3.
The maximum
number
of “ tool number
+ offset memory
number”
pairs
which
can be
registered
in a single
tool group
is 16.
4.
G 122 and G 123 commands
should
specified
on a single
block
basis.
5.
Between
only the
Group
L:
Life
T:
Tool number
number.
132
other
be
G 122 command
and G 123 command,
following
should
be specified:
P:
Any
always
number.
for
each
tool.
and
addresses
compensation
cannot
be
memory
specified.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
The tool replacement
completion
input is accepted also when the tool replacement
request
out–
put is not on (the
usable
tool is still left)
if
the automatic
operation
is in the hold state.
Care should
be used in the handling
of this
feature.
Tool life control
is applied
mand in the part program.
by the manual intervention
affected
by this control.
only to the T comThe tool operation
during
run
is
At the start
of the tool information
registration by G122 command,
the
control
cancels
all the registered
contents
before
starting
new registration.
Hence,
the registration
partial
tool information
is not allowed.
Always
register
the entire
tool information.
TLd91il
to
!IG50
TC~95&deg;
may
be
of
[7)
152
A value other than 1 S compensation memory
number S 50 is designated for the compensation memory number.
153
The tool information of the same group number is registered twice.
154
It was attempted to register more than 16 pairs
of “tool number+ cnmpansation memory number” in a single group number.
150
155
tool
life
group number is not
registerad.
TH~93,
TU~94,
o+ TU095is
specified but the correspond ng compensation
memory number is not registered.
in (group number) of T 90 through T 95, or
Some registered tool in the tool group desig-
156
by
The tool of the specified
T 9?3.
if T– command
is given
for
In this case,
changing
tool offset
values
after
tool life
expectancy
has been reached,
the tool will
be exchanged
for a new one causing
an
unexpected
impact
on the machine.
given
memory
Zero or a value greater than 20 is designated
152
Im
to be
More than 6 pairs of companastion
numbers are registered for a single tool.
TCIE192,
speci–’
For tool life control
during
use ( group
No.
10 to 19) , do not use multiple
tool offset
memories
for a single
tool.
(Refer
to ( 5)
Supplementary
Explanation
in 9.)
of alarms
An address other than P, L, and T is designated in the tool information registration
program.
155
List
Cause
No.
159
fied for the work
coordinate
system
setting
command
to set the work
coordinate
system
added
with the contents
of offset
memory.
In this case,
however,
the deviation
of
machining
start
position
or the like
This
specification
should
may be caused.
not be performed,
in principle.
11.
Al~m
not
The count
time of the tool life control
by use
hour is held after
the power-off.
Precisely,
however,
the maximum
of one minute
of count
time may be discarded
between
power-off
and
This
is because
the count
time is
power-on.
held in units of a minute.
IIG50
Table 2.32 (Cent’d)
nated in ~ 3 of work coordinate system
setting (G 50 T ~
greater than
❑
90) has a tool number
“31.“
Tool life control is designated
in the control
having no “T 4-digit designation
and” offset
memory addition” options.
157
The tool replacement
request output is on.
control
Table 2.32
EXAMPLE
Alarm No.
Cause
150
G 121 or G 122 command is not specified on a
single block basis.
The designation
151
vialed.
Setting
Tool
Semn~TOO1
d
+
E
EOL
of group number P is not pro-
Or a value other than 1 S P S 19 is
designated.
.—
The designation
151
vialed.
of life per tool L is not pro-
Or a value other than 1 S L S 9999
is
designated.
152
A value other than 1 S tool number S 50 is
designated
for the tool number.
133
2.8.29
TOOL
LIFE CONTROL
(G 122, G 123)+ (Cent’d)
No. of
Block shown
Tool
No.
Offset Memory
TO1
01
T 02
02
T 03
03
T 04
04
Type of Cutting
I
Rough cutting
Programs
for
Tool
I GOOTOIOI
GOO TOlOO
11-20
times
I
G 00 T0202
G 00 T0200
21-30
times
I
GOO T0303
G 00 T 0300
I
Tool change
Registration
The
;
PO1
L1O
TO1O1
;
T0303
;
G123
;
(i)
Set “ 1“ as the
number
input
(ii)
Turn
input
(iii)
Perform
;
M30
after
the
completion
of
tool
control:
When the machining
of TO1, G02, and T03
has been
completed
and the tool replacement
request
output
is turned
on, input
the
value
of compensation
memory
for the new
tool then perform
the following
operations:
;
T0202
processing
life
0.. . ;
G122
reauest
Finish cutting
Information
by z
1–10 times
31 ST time
I
Blcwk shown
by $
Executions
;
the above
program
is executed,
TO1O1,
T 0202, and T030-3 a~e registered
as group
number
1 and with the number
of machin–
able pieces
per tool being
10,
tool
(see
replacement
(4) , d.)
completion
on the tool replacement
(see
(4),
d.)
the
RESET
completion
operation.
When
Part
MULTIPLE CORNERING (G 111,G 112)+
2.8.30
These
commands
are
and rounding
on the
tions of a work.
Program
used
taper
to perform
beveling
and circular
arc por–
0.. . :
Meaning
G code
NOOO1 G50
X..
GOO T0191
;
.
Z..
;
Multiple cornering on taper portion.
Gill
GI12
These
I
Multiple cornering on circular arc portion.
commands
enable
the
control
to perform
beveling
and rounding
on taper
and
arc portions
without
making
complex
circular
computation.
NO02 G50 X.. . 2 ...
GOO T0404
)
M99
2. 8.30.1
Taper
Multiple
The following
four
in a single
block:
(;;:%:)
GOO T0400
T0199
;
;
Taper
+
Beveling
Rounding
;
Cornering
operations
+
Taper
(G 111)
may
+
be
specified
Beveling
Rounding
;
The typical contours for which taper multiple cornering is specified are shown in Figs.
2.8.30.1 to 2.8.30.5 on pages 102 and 103.
When the above
of
~
and
~
mands:
134
program
provide
is executed,
the following
blocks
com -
b.
END
POINT
IMAGINARY
CROSS POINT
2ND
STRAIGHT
LINE
1 ST
P
POINT
END
POINT
L
.4’”;
z
START
POINT
Fig. 2.74
(1)
Command
format
multiple
cornering
for
configurations
Gill
Z(W)
. ..
IA. .A.
..
Gill
Z(W)
. ..
O. A. OCBCP.
Gill
Z(W)
.. I..
.KB”.
B.”.
B.
PO. “Q””’
..P.
..Q*”.
C”p O.
“Q””.
;
;
;
for
Fig. 2.76
c.
a.
D
Q
*X
SECONO
BEVELING
2 ND STRAIGHT
LINE
2 NO STRAIGHT
x
LINE
\
B
u 12
IMAGINARY
CROSS
I
POIT
\! L
5’
ST ‘OuND’NG
k
L1
IMAGINARY
CROSS POINT
;
I 1ST STRAIGHT
i
I ~’NE
1 ST STRAIGHT
LINE
A
~
I
u.~~~
Glllx(U)
. ..
I” A” B..
.B.
Glllx(U)
. ..
A..
.”
Glllx(U)
. ..”
.A.
K. B”-.
Fig. 2.75
..p”
B..
.B”.
““Q..”;
.p
- ““Q”
.p”
““Q.
G1llx(U)
.-;
”.;
’””l.
”A..
Gill
X( U).
..
A”.
Gill
X( U).
..
OA. ,B.
”B”””
.AC”.
B..
.,
B---
C.”
.C”
“D””.
;
““D.”.
C“-”DO””
;
;
Fig. 2.77
135
2.8.30.
1 Taper
Multiple
Cornering
Table
(G 111) (Cent’d)
Address
d.
2.33
Contents
Word
Virtual intersection
2 ND
BEvELING
K
—K
distance from start point.
1 = 0.001 mm or
1–0.0001 in.
The second rounding radius
(without sign).
The first beveling amount (with-
c
out sign).
]
The second beveling amount
D
(withoul sign).
A
k
first
out sign),
Q
I
between
The first rounding radius (with-
P
I ST
STRAIGHT
LINE
Al
Unit
and second straight hnes.
Z-axis
IMAGINARY
CROSS POINT
(Cent’d)
START
POINT
i
I
(3)
—z
Designation of contours
a.
Gill Z(W) ... A.. .C. .. B.. .C. J-D...
Gill Z(W) ... A.. .C. .. B.. .C. D...
Gill Z(W) ... A.. .C. .. B.. .C. .. D...
Designate
the contour as shown
below:
;
Table
;
;
A:
2.34
First straight line
move angle
Fig.
2.78
First
1:
(Z.
)
Meaning
of addresses
Line
The following
address
words
may be specified for the taper
multiple
cornering
command.
Simply
specifying
the contour
determining
address
words
permits
the required operation.
K:
First
Specify
C:
distance
point
start
First beveling
amount
D:
First
~Specify either
rounding
radius
B:
J
Contents
Second
straighetiine
move angle.
Unit
X (U):
X-axis
end point
coordinate
x (u)
z (w)
end point coordinate
Increment from start point)
X-axis
(U:
Z-axis end point coordinate
(W:
Second
1 = 0.001 m or
1 = 0.0001 in.
Straight
Line
[(U):
[
Z (W):
Increment from start point)
Specify two.
combinations
end
not permitted:
point)
Z-axis
]
end point
Move angle of the first straight
L
X and U
Z and W
Increment from’
Z-axis
line
start or
end point)
j
1 = 0,001 deg
B
Move angle of the second
Second
D:
straight line
Beveling or
Q:
Rounding
I
Virtual intersection between first
and second straight lines. X-
1 = 0.001 mm or
axis distance from start point
1 = O.CQO1in.
(radius value).
How-
ever, the following
Increment from 1
X-axis start or I
coordinate
(W):
A
two.
intersection
2.33
Address
Word
Virtual
Z-axis
Bevel ing of
distance
from start point
from
Rounding
Table
Virtual intersection
X-axis
Straight
Second beveling value
Randius for second rounding
Either D or Q should be commanded
are
b.
The first
rounding
touches
second
straight
lines.
the
first
and
c.
The second
beveling
and rounding
depend
on the designation
of second
straight
line
as shown
below:
Table 2.35
B command
(i)
The second
B and X(U).
straight
line
is specified
value for second straight Iine
Directions of Second Beveling
Beveling
direction
Other
+x
move angle
conditions
-z
L
Beveling in X, Z
with
First straight
line moves in X
positive direction.
positive direction
. ..------/
B=o
= –360.000
Beveling in X neg-
= 360.000
ative direction,
Z
First straight line
positive direction
moves in X negative direction.
ROUNOING
STRAIGHT
TO ZAXIS
TOUCHING
THE
LINE PARALLEL
Beveling
in X, Z posi-
tive birection
0 &lt;6,
B &lt;90.000
(ii)
The second
B and Z(W).
straight
line
is specified
with
–S60.003
&lt;B,
B c –270.000
—
d
Q
Beveling
in X, Z pcsi-
tive direction
B
First straight line
moves in Z posi tive direction.
&amp;
z ( w’)
B = 90.000
= –270.003
ROUNDING
TOUCHING
THE
STRAIGHT LINE PARALLEL
TO XAXIS
d.
Beveling in X positive, Z negative
direction
‘)
The
second
beveling
and rounding
are preformed
in the direction
in which
the second
For details,
refer
straight
line advances.
to
Table
First straight line
moves in Z negative direction.
‘\
2.35.
Beveling in X posi90.000&lt;
B,
B &lt;180.000
tive, Z negative
direct ion
–270.000&lt; B,
B &lt; –180.000
/
Beveling in X positive, Z negative
direction
First straight line
moves in X positive direction.
B = 180.000,
—
– –180.000
.
....
Beveling in X negative, Z negative
direction
First straight line
moves in X negative direction.
/--------
137
2.8,30.
lTaper Multiple Cornering (Gill) (Cent’d)
Table 2.35
Directions of Second Beveling
Table 2.36
Direction of Second Runding
(Cent’d)
B command
B command
Beveling
value for second straight Iine
.x
direction
Other
i
value for sec-
conditions
ond straight line
+-z
move angle
180.000&lt;
B,
B &lt; 270.OCO
–18CI.000
(Cent’d)
Rounding
+x
direction
Other conditions
}Z
L
move angle
Beveling in X, Z posi-
Rounding
tive direction
tive direction
in X,
Z
posi-
&lt; B,
Second straight
line is specified
B &lt; –90.000
)
with B, Z (W).
CI &lt;B,
.)
Bevelig in X, Z nega-
Rounding
B &lt;90.000
tive direction
B = 270.OCO
—
— –90.000
Beveling
straight
First straight line
–360.000
c B,
moves in Z nega-
B &lt; –270.OCKl
touching
line
parallel
the
to
X-~is
tive direction.
Second straight
line is specified
in X negative,
Rounding touching the
Z positive direction
with B, X (U).
straight iine parallel to
Z-wis
First straight line
moves in Z pa3i tive direction
Rounding in X, Z
First
positive direction
straight
..Beveling in X negative,
270.OCO &lt; B,
B = 90.000
—
— –270.000
B &lt;360,000
–90.000
J
/’
Z positive directjon
&lt; B,
/
positive
direction.
Z nega-
tive direction
--Table
2.36
Directions
of Second
(
Rounding
Rounding
B command
command
may not be
First
used.
straight
Iine moves
in Z-axis
negative
direction.
Z negative direction
Other
-x
ond straight Iine
z (w)
Rounding in X positive,
direction
value for sec-
line moves
in Z-axis
Rounding in X
positive,
6&lt;0
r
conditions
Second straight
move angle
-z
L
line is specified
with B, X (U).
Rounding in X
negative,
Z posi -
tive direction
= 360.000
—
— –360.000
z
als
in X-axis
negative
Rounding in X, Z
First
may not
positive, direction
straight
be used.
line moves
in X-axis
positive
direction
Second straight
x (u)
command
7--”-
straight line parallel to
–270.OCO &lt; B,
B &lt; –180.000
straight
direction
6=0
Rounding touching the
B &lt;180.000
First
Iine moves
~.----
90.000&lt; B,
line is spwified
Rounding touching the
straight Iine parallel to
X axis
with B, Z (W).
Table 2.36
Table 2.36
Direction of Second Rounding
Direction of Second Rounding
(Cent’d)
(Cent’d)
B command
value for second straight Iim
B command
Rounding
direction
move angle
Rounding
+x
value for sec-
I
+-z
ond straight line
conditions
&amp;.z
move angle
i
Other
-x
I
direction
-.
Rounding in X
positive, Z nagative direction
Rounding in X negative,
First
Z positive direction
straight
line moves
Second straight
in X-axis
.
....
B = 180.000
—
— –180.000
positive
direction
line is specified
x (u)
with B, X (U).
command
may not
First
negative direction
straight
Rounding touching the
B &lt;360.000
straight line parallel to Z
axis
be used.
Rounding in X, Z
270.OCQ&lt; B,
–90.000
&lt;
B,
B&lt;O
line moves
in X-axis
Second straight
negative
~-----
line is specified
direction
with B, Z (W).
Rounding touching the
Rounding in X, Z nega-
straight Iine paral Iel to
tive direction
X axis
Second straight
line is specified
e.
Supplementary
description
with B, Z (W).
180.000&lt; B,
B &lt;270.000
–180.000&lt; B,
B ~ –90.000
(i) When
all B, X(U)
straight
line are
line may provide
commands.
Rounding touching the
straight line parallel to
X axis
, and Z (W) of the second
specified,
the first
straight
one of the A, 1, and K
(ii) The
Second straight
line is specified
with B, X (U).
Rounding touching the
straight line parallel to
Z axis
Rounding in X, Z
First
negative direction
straight
taper
multiple
cornering
command
specifies
the first
and second
and straight
lines
by selecting
addresses
X, Z, 1, K,
A, and B.
Hence,
unlike
the other
G commands,
X, Z, I, K, and B do not allow the
The speci–
omission
of “ 0“ specification.
fication
of “ O“ have
different
meaning
for
IIo!! should
always
be
X, Z, I, K, and B.
specified.
line moves
omission
in Z-axis
B = 270.OCCI
negative
z (w)
direction
command
may not be
used.
= –90.000
Rounding X negative, Z positive
direction
--
1
First
taper
of
multiple
in
“ O“ specification
cornering
of
command.
Table 2.37
straight
line moves
address
Address
“O” specification may be
omittechot omitted
Z-axrs
positive
x
direction
z
I
K
May not be omitted
A
B
P
Q
May be omitted.
c
(Cornering amount is “O)
D
139
2.8.30.1
Taper Multiple Cornering (G 111)
(i)
(Cent’D)
the second straight line is designated by X(U) and Z (hJ) commands,
the
second beveling and rounding are disabled. If this designation is attempted,
an error is caused.
Outside the rectangle enclosed by the
start and end points .
(iii) When
‘“[’
1
I
L—— —_ —— ___ 1
The combination of the first beveling and
the second rounding or the first round-
(iv)
ing
ble.
and
the
second
beveling
is also
availa
(v)
When the first straight line designation
addresses A, I, and K are allspecified,
A is ignored. The first straight line is
created by I and K commands
alone.
(vi)
When the second straight line designation
addresses B, X(U) , and Z(W) are “all
(vii) How to specify straight line move
Aand
B:
(ii) Between
point to
straight
point at
END
PCllNT
45’
:
A225
:
G 111
the
nonmodal
G code
is
specified
block.
and
is
valid
only
?
ti.
Addresses
hi, S, and
in the block
specified
T cannot
be
with Gill.
specified
3.
If the first
beveling
portion
to be
by address
C of the block
specified
G 111 has the contour
shown
below,
specification
is disabled:
specified
with
the
140
\\
\
in
\
\\
\
\
1
\
START
POINT
The end point in the above diagram is the
end point of the second straight line with no
second beveling and rounding .
angles
4--+*
1.
\\\ \\\
h
I
\
\
A1350r
SrAf7T
POINT
the straight line going from start
end point at angle of 45&deg; and the
line going from end point to start
angle of 45&deg;.
~i.
Specify a positive value for the counterclockwise rotational angle from Z–axis
positive direction, and a negative value
for the clockwise rotational angle from
Z-axis positive direction.
(Specification range:
-360.000
S A, B ~
360. 000)
EXAMPLE
1
-
specified and two of the first straight
line designation addresses A, 1, and K
are further specified, B is ignored.
The second straight line is created by
X(U) and Z(W) commands.
Notes
+--,
PO;N-
4
When Gill
basis,
the
performed
blocks .
5
Writing
G 111 block in the buffer,
the control
unit performs
all computations
for the first
and second
straight
lines
and the first
and
second
beveling
and rounding.
For some
contours,
the computation
time requires
more
than 500 msec.
If the move time in the pre–
ceding
block
is shorter
than the computation
time,
the movement
stops,
sometimes
causing
undesirable
effects
on the cutting
surface
.
To prevent
the stop of movement
due to the
block
is
movement
assuming
executed
on a single
block
up to the end point
is
the maximum
of four
computation time, ii is recommended
to pro–
vide the buffering state (M93 command)
be–
fore the four blocks before specifying G 111
block command.
6.
Some commands which assume that the 45de~ree straight line, going from start point
to end point; is the fi~st line or second line
may cause an error.
Example
Gill
7,
List of alarms caused by incorrect G 111 command
Table
Alarm
Code
1:
Z-1OO.
B180.
I-25.
C5.
140
A225,
D5. ;
will result in error.
3
B, X (U), Z (W)
two addresses
of addresses
second straight line.
B, X (U),
In addition to
among addresses
A, 1, K specifying first straight line.
140
Address C specifying first beveling and address P spec-
140
Address D specifying second beveling and address
Q specifying s=ond rounding commanded.
141
Angle for angle programmingA, B by G 111out of range
–380 S A, B S 380,
ifying first rounding commanded.
[ 25
START
POINT
.4225.
+2
L
Commanding
Z (W) specifyhg
C5
8180
L)5.
one address of addresses
second straight line.
this, one or no address commanded
z-loo
1-
–x
Commanding
specifying
140
This command
L-
2.39
142
Ist beveling part outside the rectangle composec
by
start and end Wints.
142
Ist beveling portion between 45” straight lines of start
to end points and end to start points.
Example
143
2
No intersection between Ist and 2nd straight lines
START
POINT
Gill
Z-1OO.
B270.
1-25,
C5.
This command
-E
.nf
A225.
D5. ;
‘------
~
143
Ist straight line and second straight line on the same
144
M, S, T commanded in G 111block.
143
Command values fof addresses A, 1, K swifying
straight Iine are determinad as follows, and programmed shape cannot be formed.
will not cause an error.
z-loo
D5
&amp;
line.
Command value for A
A-l-
“’;”%
–380,000,
180.000,
I
–180.Cf30,
O,
360. COO
–27.000,
Address I commanded
for
, specifying first straight line.
–90.OCKI,
Address K commanded
90.0CX3, 270.030
143
first
specifying
Command values for addresses
for–
first straight line.
B, X (U), Z (W) spec-
ifying first straight Iine are determined
as follows,
and
programmed shape cannot be formed.
A 225
Command value fw B
–380.003,
–180.000,
I
Address X (U) commanded
for second straight line,
380.o@3
–270.OCKI,
90.000,
0,
–90.000,
270.000
—
Address Z (W) commanded
for specifying
second
straight line.
141
2. 8,30.1
Taper Multiple Cornering (G 111)(Cent’d)
b.
Taper
combined
rounding
- -2q
Table 2.39
I(JIJ
(Cent’d)
Alarm
Cede
1,
#?oo
Cause
i5R
I
143
Command values for addresses
C and D for beveling
too large for the programmed shape.
;
Operation
cannot be made according to the command.
ENO
POINT
‘-----1
\
‘ START
POi NT
c
b
143
Command values fof addresses
P and Q specifying
radius for rounding tco large for the programmed shape.
d50 command
Operation cannot be made according to the command.
broken
---- -1
?
Gill W-1OO. 115. A90. B165. P3. Q5.
‘b START
P
I
or
POINT
Gill w–1OO.
Command
14C
Commanding
addresses
115.
KO B165.
shown
by
(G12)
second beveling
and rounding.
solid
X200.
K-2.
EXAMPLE
combined
-----\,
!)c
T
beveling
100.
I
\$ zoo,
I
I
I
.x
1
,50
\
!
‘z
+
(GOI
W...
;)—
d50 command
broken
or
w-1OO.
115.
A90.
Gill
w–1OO.
115.
KO B165.
shown
shown
line
G1ll
Command
P3.
Q5.
;
;
line
; )—Command
shown
by
broken
line after
the
command
shown
by solid
line
Taper
by
X and Z specifying second
straight line and Q and D specifying
a.
shown
line
B165.
by
C3.
D5.
C3.
D5.
solid
line
;
3C
c.
Circular Arc Multiple Cornering (G112)
2.8.30,2
Arc
combined
rounding
in
facing
START
G 112 be able to specify the following four operations in a single block:
Straight ~
line
Beveling
Rounding
~
Circular ~ Beveling
Rounding
arc
Depending on the direction of arc combined
beveling /rounding or taper in turning combined
beveling /rounding in facing may be executed.
(1)
a.
Cutting configurations and command
Arc
combined
rounding
format
in turning
K
}
G112
d.
1,
CIRCULAR
G112X(U)
b.
Arc
. .. K..
combined
Arc
Z(W)
. .. K..
combined
LINE
. .
beveling
P..
beveling
P..
.Q.
in
..R.
.;;
facing
Q“.R...
;
STRAIGHT
LINE
\
c
K
N’
in turning
I
K
1
.
..
START
POINT
ARC
.K.
.Q.
i
CIRCUI -AR
ARc
~
ARC
CENTER
z
CIRCULAR
G112X(U)
. ..
I”””
/
ARC
K”””
C”””
D” ““R”””
2 ND
BEVELING
;
143
2.8,30.2
(2)
Arc Multiple Cornering (G 112) (Cent’d)
Circular
Meaning
of
Table 2.41
The rounding which is performed in the radius
First
The
word
(Cent’d)
addresses
addresses
for
cornering command
circular
arc
are as shown
multiple
designated
Rounding
by P command in contact with straight
line and circular arc.
below :
The beveling which is performed
Table
Address
between
Second
Beveling
Unit
in the dimensions
by D commarid at the intersection
the circular arc and the straight line par-
allel to Z-wis
designated
by X (U) command
(circular arc in turning) or the straight line parallel
X-axis
to X-axis
facing).
end point coordinates
for arc combined rounding in
turning
(U:
Increment
Z-axis
z (w)
designated
Contents
Word
x (u)
2.40
by Z (W) command
The rounding which is performed
from start point)
designated
end point coordinates
for arc combined rounding in
by Q command
(arc in
in the radius
in contact with the
Second
circular =C and the straight line parallel to Z-ais
Rounding
designated
by X (U) command
(circular arc in
turning) or the straight line parallel to X-axis
facing
(W:
designated
nated by Z (W) command
Increment from start point)
I
X-axis distance from arc center
start point
K
Z-%is distance from arc center
start point
1 = 0.0001 in,
Circular arc radius
ter~d)
desig-
(arc in facing).
1 = 0.001 mm or
CENTER OF
CIRCULAR
CENTER OF
CIRCULAR
ARC
(decimal point
mav be en-
R
a;,
P
Q
c
D
sign)
Second rounding radius (without i
sign)
-4
First beveling amount (without
m
a.
‘fm
CENTER
sign)
Second beveling amount
OF ~
1
(without sign)
L’:AR\
(3)
;-
First rounding radius (without
Designation
of
;
contours
The contours
of the portions
to be
ed to circular
arc multiple
cornering
shown
below :
subjectare as
‘~
~ POINT
n
Table
Straight
Line
Circular
Arc
First
Beveling
144
2,41
The straight line which is parallel to Z-axis
in turning) or X-axis
(arc
(arc in facing) from the start
point,
The point from which the arc is circulated
designated
by I and K commands
is
from the start
point.
The beveling which is performed
designated
in the dimensions
by C command at the intersection
straight line and circular arc.
of
“:’’”
r-----l
(-----l
R
R
STA~l
POINT
~
n
c.
Table
2.43
To supplement the above description, the
following discriminants for determination
of the circular arc cutting directions in the
control unit are provided:
Address
Word
I
“1O command
Table 2.42
K
“K O command is provided.
R
“R O“ command and alarm are provided.
Circular Arc Rotational Direction
Values of
I and K
Circular =c
turning
Commands
120.
in
Counterclosk
wise (CCW)
(Equivalent to
K20
1
Circular arc in
P
facing
Q
c
D
Result
is provided.
“0 command is provided.
Beveling and
rounding are not performed.
Clwkwise (CW)
(Equivalent to
Notes :
~~r;;~
120,
K&lt;0
—
1&lt;0,
K20
I&lt;o,
K&lt;O
CINkwise ‘Cw) ‘ wise (CCW)
(Equivalent to
(Equivalent to
G 02)
G 03)
Counterclock
wise (CCW)
(Equivalent to
G 03)
Clockwise (CW)
(Equivalent to
G 02)
When a negative
value
is specified
for the
circular
arc R, the circular
arc cutting
direction
mentioned
above
may be inverted
as follows:
1.
G 112.is a nonmodal G code and is valid onlv
-,
for the specified block.
2.
The block specified with G112 does not allow
the specificationof M, S , and T .
3.
When G 112 block is executed on a single
block basis, the movement up to the end
point is performed assuming the maximum
four blocks.
4.
When G 112 is used for the finishing shape
blocks G71 (stock removal cycle in turning) ,
G72 (Stock removal cycle in facing) , and G73
(pattern repeating) of multiple repetitive
cycles the block specified with G112 is equivalent to five blocks.
5.
Do not specify other codes to the G 112’block;
otherwise, an error willbe caused.
6.
After wiring G 112 block to the buffer, the
control unit performs allcomputations for the
straight line, the circular arc, and the first
and second beveling and rounding.
For some
contours, the computation time becomes more
than 500 msec. If the move time in the preceding block is shorter than the computation
undesirable effects on the cutting surface.
To prevent the stop of movement due to the
computation time, provide the buffering state
(M93 command) before the four blocks before
CIRCULAR ARC ROTATIONA1
OIRECTION WITH POSITIVE
VALUE SPECIFIED FOR R
J
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
WHEN I&lt;
O,K&lt;O
CLOCKWISE
I&lt;
O,K&lt;O
,L
WHEN
-x
J---
CIRCULAR ARC ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
WITH NEGATIVE
VALUE SPECIFIED FOR R
+Z
d.
Address
words
X(U)
and Z(W)
are used to
make discrimination
between
radius
measur–
in g circular
arc and front
circular
arc .
They
cannot
be omitted
if the end point
and
the start
point
are on the same coordinates
(“UO”
or “WO” should
be specified)
. When
the address
words
other
than X (U)
and
Z (W) are omitted,
the following
results
are
obtained:
of
specifying B 112 block command.
7.
List of alarms to be given by G112 command
error
Alarm
Code
Cause
I
145
I X(U)
145
I
145
14.5
-k
or.Z(W)
not specified
Both X(U) and Z(W)
R not specified.
specified.
Or “O” specified.
I and K not specified.
Or “O” specified for both.
145
2.8, 30.2
Circular Arc Multiple Cornering (G 112) (Cent’d)
EXAMPLE
Table 2,44
a.
Arc
:
combined
rounding
Alarm
50.
Code
145
/r--r
Both P and C specified.
145
Both Q and D specified
144
M, S, or T specified.
—
+x
‘---’-’”-’
+-
—–z
Tool moves in the direction reverse to the center of
circular arc from the start point.
(GO1 X1OO. Z-50.
CENTER OF
CIRCULAR
146
;) “ “ “ Shown
line
arc
~
A.&amp;
by
before
broken
circular
&amp;
G112
(GOl
START
POINT
There is no intersection
between
b.
circular arc and
Arc
uOI1O.
X-150.
K-50.
P5.
;) . . .
Shown
by broken
after
circular
arc
combined
Q5.
R30.
;
line
beveling
straight line.
CENTER OF
CIRCULAR
ARC
K
146
R
I
Q1.— -—____
START
POINT
100.L)l.4
—
There is no intersection
between
L-
circular arc and end
point command.
146
Bweling
specified
(GO1
x1OO.
Z-50.
G112
UO11O.
K-50.
(GO1
Z-150.
;)
by C command cannot be per-
;) .
C5.
Shown
by
line before
arc
broken
circular
D5.
;
R30.
by broken
. . . Shown
after
circular
arc
line
formed.
2.8.31
146
ABSOLUTE/lNCREMENTAL
PROGRAMMING
(G 90, G 91)
Beveling specified
by D command cannot be per-
foimed.
*
G91
14B
‘G’
.\
For
lute
I
Incramental
designation
the details
of the G codes,
and Incremental
Inputs
.“
see
2.3.5, “ Abso-
2.8.32
GROOVE
(G150,
G 151)”
WIDTH
A control point is the tool nose point used in the
automatic nose R function, which is indicated by
1!
CT! on the right corner of the offset screen.
COMPENSATION
Groove
width
compensation
is to shift
the
coordinate
for the groove
tool width
and to change
the tool nose point
by the G151 command,
according
to the tool width
and control
point
set
This
function
allows
groove
via the offset
screen.
machining
without
considering g the tool width
in the
program.
G150
G151
. . . Groove
... Groove
width compensation
width compensation
When it is a diameter designation, the X-value end
face groove is shifted by two times the tool width.
Commanding
shift on both X and Z axes can be set
in the parameter to trigger an alarm.
fPM6018
DO
OFF
ON
1:
Alarm occurs upon Xl Z axes
shift in groove compensation.
o:
Alarm
does not occur
axes
shift
in groove
compensation.
\
upon
~
X/Z ‘
)
Notes :
Contrl
The compensation
point
as follows.
the G150 command
point
by
The program cannot be started under the
G151 status. Always cancel G151 once before
starting the program,
2.
Commanding
G151 without commanding the
control point will cause an alarm, as the
direction of the shift cannot be determined.
3.
G150, G151 are members
diagram
4.
command
shifts
the tool nose
The compensation
is canceled
or
1.
the
T
by
command.
outer
diameter
groove
End
face
groove
Set the tool width
OF S31,
as
in
of
coordinate
groove
GOO XO:
G151 ;’ . . . . . .
Zo;
X-20;
L1
GO1 Z1O;
GOO XO;
G150;
.. . . ..
Zo;
the
offset
numbers
13.
This G code cannot be used unless the new
optional
provided.
( Example
Inner,
of group
system
width
Enable
function
compensation
is
program)
compensation
Shift
the
width.
The shift
number.
Cancel
setting
coordinate
amount
is
for
the
set
as
tool
offset
compensation
from
follows.
(Example)
Offset
Tool width
Tool
fdo.
4
OFS04X,
Z, R, C
OFS34X,
Z
Tool
No.
5
OFS05X,
Z, R, C
OFS35X,
Z
TOOI
No. 6
OFS06X,
Z, R, C
OFS36X,
Z
147
3.1 TAPE CODE
3.2
3.1.1 LIST OF TAPE CODE
(1)
Both EIA
punching
code and ISO
a paper
tape.
EIA
1S0
(EIA
(1S0
code
code
Punching
shown
Rs-244-A)
R840) .
patterns
in
code
Table
are
available
2 GENERAL
PROGRAM
will be generally made
A part program
the following form.
&lt;EIA Code&gt;
.
&lt;
according
to
these
codings
I
&lt;ISO Code ) i
,,
are
&lt;
EIA/lSO
select
the code
cannot
be punched
to be used
mixedly
AUTO
(
%OG_~~PART
PROG
M30
LF~NL ‘k
I
I_-[OR
!
M(32}
L These are called EOB o, END of BLOCK
character
. !hls ‘nanual
!
L . – TF.e~e are ~a]led E(JR Or REWIND STOP
(2)
Any LABEL
can be written
at the beginning
of tape to classify
easily
the tapes.
In label
skip function
the control
ignores
the data
from LABEL
to the first
EOB code.
Therefore,
the undesignated
address
or function
characters
can be used
as LABEL.
Iq addition,
the modified
code which
disregards
parity
is also available.
(3)
EOR
point
(4)
e
code next
to LABEL
of tape rewinding.
means
the
stop
Where
storing
NC tape data into memory,
with the label
skipped,
the memory
stores
the data between
the first
EOB code and
the next
EOR code.
Therefore,
EOR code
at the end of tape must not be omitted.
PRECAUTION
IN
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
PROCESS
example
of
(1)
ends with EOB
(End-of-Block) character. EOB character is represented by CR
in EIA code and LF/NL in 1S0 code. In this
manual, mark ; is substituted for them to
read easily this manual.
(2)
A part program ends with the block including
M02 (End-of-Program) , M30 (End-of-Tape)
or.M99 (End-of-Program) .
the
process
(3)
When M02 or M30 is commanded,
automatic
operation2 is stopped. In most cases, the
control is reset, or rewinds the tape (or
memory) automatically . As the details are
determined by the machine, refer to the
machine tool builder’s manual.
sheet.
I
I
PROGRAM
LABEL
NO
1
2
Fig.
3.1
A block
SHEET
I
148
Cq ER
I
RECOGNITION
The programming
is performed with the process
that the process sheet
sheet, It is recommended
to match final specifications should be made by
users, considering the readily perceived form
and convenience for rewriting. Fig. 3.1 shows
an
M30
cha, acler ,n t. s manual
Note :
The setting #6002D
can specify the
code when NC Internal data7is output (punched
out) , and does not affect the tape reading
operation.
3.2.
PART PROG
I
i
~,4BEE~?ALF:NL
.
The control performs automatic recognition of
EIA/ISO code. It recognizes
the code punched
EOB code in Label
on tape by reading
the first
Skip state, and automatically adjusts the followon data to read by the recognized code. RESET
operation 1 activates Label Skip state and cancels
this function,
3.2
‘_F~’4Q
LA_8~L jER CR
I
3.1.2
in
for
3.1.
Before
programming,
KIA and 1S0 codes
through
a tape.
FORM
An
Example
of
the
Process
Sheet
RESET
operation means resetting the control by
depressing the RESET
key on the operator’s
control station or remotely.
“Automatic operation” means operation in TAPE ,
YIDI, or LMEM mode.
Table 3.1 Tape Code
1
1
1-1
[u]
Iulul”
ICI
I
1 -Inlln
1
.
I
r
I ,-In
Ir-1 o
Notes:
1. For the hole pattern of EIA code of the
characters
*
*
with an asterisk,
the pattern
shown in the table is standard.
How-
ever, other patterns may be specified
by parameters.
2. EIA cwie of character
# can be desig-
nated by the parametef ##6017,
*
*
*
*
149
3. 2.2
GENERAL
PROGRAM
FORM
(Cent’d)
specified
on 2. 1.2
Address
Characters
should
be used for
, but others
should
not.
NC TAPE PUNCH
3.3.2
NC tape must be punched
out with the
er for EIA code or 1S0 code according
of process
sheet.
tape punchto conten’ts
(4)
The character
and Function
programming
(5)
Where
the tape vertical
parity
check
(TV
number
of characters
in a
check)
is made,
block
must be even.
If odd,
it should
be
made even
by using
“ SP” character.
When punching
the tape,
at the beginning
and
the end of the tape,
provide
the feed
holes
part
needed
for the tape feeding
. Where
the punched
tape is wound
on the reel+
of tape reader,
the
feed holes
part will be 70 cm in length.
(6)
The disregarded characters such as “BS,
Tab , SP, UC , LC and Del” should be avoided from the significant data area, if unnec–
essary.
3. 3.3
The maximum
in a block
is
ters such as
eluded
in
allowable
number
of characters
The disregarded
charac128.
BS and Tab”
are not in–
“Del,
them.
NC TAPE CHECK
NC tape
function.
. Machine
of Cnaraclers
e,ec
,gr W Check
N12 G 00 X40000Z200000S?
\
L
(Space)
3.3
used
using
the
following
lock
lock
t
o Single
block
operation
\
character
SP character
is usually
disregarded
when
However,
in the followtape data is read in.
ing cases,
SP is read and its function
for
providing
space
on the CRT
screen
is effective.
“SP”
by
run
3.4
NC TAPE HANDLING
3.4.1
SP
checked
f
~20
CHARACTEQS~
(EVEN NUMBER’
(Odd number causes taoe ~e,.lcal car ly error 1
mumAllowable N~mbef c, Characters lr, a Block.
TTe rnax!
(7)
be
M function
“ Dry
Mak, PQ [he Ndmber
can
SPLICING
NC TAPES
To splice
NC tapes, stick a joining tape (O.08 mm
thickness) with sprocket holes , or fully perforated joining tape on the one side of the spliced
NC tape,
make
NC tape. Before using the spliced
sure that the sprocket
holes are in position.
The
joining
part of tapes
should
not be extremely
thick,
and do not use the rigid
adhesive
agent
without
flexibility.
in parentheses.
(NBC
NC TAPE
SPLICE
J===’’”NG
FULLY
PERFORATED
1SILVEP
3. 3.1 PAPER TAPE
Eight-channel paper tape for computers complyThe diing with JIS1 -6243 is used as standard.
mensions are 25.4 *O. 08 mm (1 inch) width and
O. 108 mm (O.0042 inch) thickness.
It is recommended
that the color of the tape is
black or gray, but not that of high transparency.
If the tape with high transparency is used, the
tape reader may misread it.
TAPE
8-CHANNEL
Nc
iApE
Splicing
3. 4.2
KEEPING
For life
handling
of NC Tape
OF NC TAPE
expectancy
of NC
is recommended.
tape,
the
following
When keeping NC tape, avoid moisture and oil.
Do not handle the tape with oil-stained gloves.
Properly
reading
1 Japanese
150
Industrial Standard
kept tapes
will
and rewinding.
permit
300 times
of
4. STANDARD NC OPERATOR’S STATION WITH
CRT CHARACTER DISPLAY
4.1 PUSHBUTTONS, KEYS, AND LAMPS
Fig.
4.1 shows
an overall
view
of NC operator’s
station
with
9“ CRT
display
with keyboard
on
The names
and functions
of
right
side of CRT.
operator
devices
are
as
follows.
&gt;
[(
&gt;
-
)
~
n
‘
R--’“D
‘
~-R-’FI
Pm
m
~
—
n
~
;+
Cziz@
.,
&gt;
FuNCTION
D
[diaia
Eal
[F=I=%=l
AOORESS
OATA
mEl[Ewl[mBl[mmal
EMEEl[El[nl[Kl
PII!HI!H1
[DWWEI][EIITEIIEI
[WzE1.]
El[mml[mlliizl[Fi!!mm]
~ [Zl[m[izlm [Q][~][@
+,
+
Fig. 4.1 Standard NC Operator’s Station with 9 CRT Character Display
(Keyboard on Right Side of CRT)
NC overator’s
station
with 9“ CRT
display
(kevboar&amp;
below
CRT)
is also available.
Operation
is the same with both
types.
Instructions
given
in this manual are for operator’s
panel
with keyboard
on right
side of CRT.
151
4. 1.1 POWER
POWER
ON/OFF
ON
4.1.3
PUSHBUTTONS
The
pushbutton
FUNCTION
key
KEYS
selects
for
the
of the display
~nd MDI.
pushing
makes it effective
and light
up.
one
of
eight
functions
~
operation
To turn on the power
for the control:
Depress
the pushbutton
first
to turn on the controi
power
and depress
it again
to turn on the
Push this button
to recover
the
servo
power.
servo
power
after
an emergency
stop.
key
f—
FUNCTION
~
POWER
OFF
pushbutton
To turn off the power
for the control:
Depress
it to turn off both the servo and control
powers.
\
t
B
[~[%hB
EIRRR
!ll~/All
I
Fig. 4.4
(Alarm)
,11.11
key
:
Select
this key for display
of alarm and status
The
function
becomes
effective
when
codes.
the power
is turned
on or an alarm occurs.
I)(;X
(Diagnosis) key :
Fig. 4.2
signal
select this
key
status.
for
1’1{11
(Parameter)
display
of input
/output
4. 1.2 CRT CHARACTER DISPLAY
According to each operation, this display indi–
data in a regular
size,
cates the alpha-numerical
double-size
size.
and
quadruple–size
13raun
size:
9 inches
tube
Maximum
number
Indicating
Numerals
of characters:
32 characters
512 characters
characters
-
Alphabetic
of
~j
regular
x 16 lines
=
(at regular
size)
Select
this
parameters.
, 5FT
(Setting
Select
setting
this key
data.
,Lf~~ll
code
-
~
for
display
or
writing-in
of
display
or
writing-in
of
) key:
for
(Command)
–,
.~) ,
–
.i
–—~
.:,
through
—
.
,
L
~
Select
this key
of the command
,——
,
i]~(lj ~
Special
key
key:
:
through
characters
the
key:
(EOB)
,
~
(Program)
key:
(slash) , etc.
Select this key
part
,
for display
or writing-in
(MDI )
data for automatic
operation.
l’(1&gt;~
for
display
or
writing-in
of
a
program.
(Position)
key:
Select
this key for display of various current
positions.
,..,
*
OF% I (Offset) key:
Select
this key for display or writing-in of tool
offset values.
Fig. 4.3
152
Braun
Tube
4. 1.4
ADDRESS
KEYS
,CAX I (Cancellation) key:
For cancellation of the numeric
data erroneously keyed.
These keys are to designate an address character when writing in various data.
~~
~k=iJ-c==3
---
key:
For storing address data by address keys and
data keys into buffer storage.
OATA
AOORCSS
(write)
value or address
Elma)m[mm [Pl!!l=ml
~S1lIFT (shift)
key:
——
ISHIFT key after depressing ~
Depressing
——
key makes the display
to~,
~
or ~
turn into ~
to i? , 7 , R
which are
EllEmml[mKl Emflm
mmiiimllma (Fl!mf=l
El[=l[mm[mal (Fl!m!!nl
[q[~]cq)
[EI]IEIIE][FI
written
These
macro.
on the upper
left
special
characters
corner—of
are used
the keys.
in user
Fig. 4.5
4.1.6
KEY
NEXT
Note: Special characters
n
L
(Slash) key: For an optional block skip
command.
The NEXT
expanding
~J~
(EOB) key: For the block end command.
On the CRT display, “ ;“ is displayed instead
of “EOB. “
. Display of specified number
4.1.5
. Writing
key is used for special purpose and
function in display or writing data.
of additional
. For other
function.
special
tape
purpose
in EDIT
in DGN
and
mode.
function.
expanding
DATA KEYS
4+
These
keys consist of 15 keys in total, such as
~~mthrough
~,
U
(minus) “-]WI
-]
and can be used for writing-in of such
all numeral values as tool offset value setting
data, parameter data, and so on, in addition to
command
value.
Fig. 4.7
mm
4.1.7
PAGE KEYS
The PAGE key is used to display the next page
the previous page when CRT display is r-e–”
garded as page.
For example, when a bundle of tool offset values
are displayed by OFS key, this key is pushed to
display the next bundle of tool offset values,
which just looks like opening the pages of a book.
or
Fig. 4.6
(1)
,:0
:in~) ::;,
F
or
input of numerical data
(2)
~
~]
~~A[~
L.4
key displays the next
~~3’G~
key displays the pre-
page.
Notes:
r.
Depressing
Depressing
vious page.
(decimal
point)
key:
For
input of decimal
point
(3)
Keeping the PAGE key depressed makes the
page step automatically forward or backward.
153
4.1.8
CURSOR
KEYS
control
key is used to move the
example, when a page of parameter
The CURSOR
cursor
. For
data
are
displayed
(1)
Depressing
sor
(2)
by
PRM
key.
key
‘Y9
moves
the
cur-
4.1.10
EDIT KEYS
These
keys are for editing a stored part program.
ERASE
key:
Used
for
INSRT
key:
Used
for insertion of data in memory.
ALTER
key:
Used
for alteration
erasure of data in storage.
of
data
in
memory.
backward.
Depressing
~~uRTSOR ~
.
key moves
the cur-
sor forward.
MEM
(3)
Keeping
the cursor
control
key depressed
makes the cursor
move automatically
forward
or backward.
OATA
EiEE
i~~
EOIT
d
RES
I[E33] [Fw=kql
I
Fig. 4.9
4.1.11 MEM
—
.
DATA (MEMORY
TAPE KEYs are to start the tape operation except
They are effecin the automatic operation mode.
tive
only in the EDT mode.
(1)
Fig. 4.8
OUT
key
This key
in memory
(2)
4,1.9
ORG (ORIGIN)
position
ORG key is used to set the current
of the machine
tool as the Zero point
of
coordinate
system.
The origin
setting
can be made for each axis.
The reference
coordinate
system
means the coordinate
system
which
is set by G92 command
or
system setting.
the automatic
coordinate
key is used
for
Reset of current
the
position
Absolute)
- Reset of operation
154
is to start outputting various data
through data I/0 interface.
IN key
KEYS
This key is to start storing various data
into memory through tape reader or data
1/0 interface.
The
ORG
DATA) KEYS
time
following
(Position
operation.
External/
(3)
VER
key
This key is to start verifying between
ory data and punched tape data.
mem-
RESET KEY
4.1.12
This
key
resets
4.2
the
control.
POWER ON1OFF OPERATION
4. 2.1 TURNING
ON POWER
Check
the machine
before
turning
on power,
referring
to the machine
tool builder’s
manual for
details.
Operations
after
completion
of inspections
are as follows.
POWER
POWER
ON
ON
!
APPROX
! 2 SECONDS
~
CONTROL
I
POWER
~
NRD
(NC REAOY)
Fig. 4.10
SERVO POWER
I
NRD
Operations
Move
to be
command
Buffer
executed
code
this
RESET
key
I
I
1
I
I
MACHINE
clear
release
MRD
if
the
cause
is
I
eliminated
offset
cancel
Auxiliary
Label
function
skip
ALARM
cancel
function
CODE
pointer
Sequence
RST
Resetting
READY
1
. Current
reset
(1)
~ ‘310,
I
j ‘280,1
!
I
BLANK
of Turning on Operation
“ List
of
G Codes
not
position
be
values
and
affected
of
each
Groups
by
.“
operating
Depressing
the
POWER
ON
pushbutton
to
turn on the control
power.
The internal
timer will be read in about two seconds.
Then
the servo
power
is ready
for turning
on, which
is shown
by alarm code “ 310. ”
G codes
The following
will
the RESET
key.
LAMP
ON
transmission
Refer to 2.8.1,
READY)
rewind
number
signal
(MACHINE
,
t
Fig. 4.12 Sequence
Memory
POWER
II
1
Tool
(NC READY)
I
are:
cancel
register
Alarm
by
(2)
Depress
the POWER
ON pushbutton
again
to turn on the servo
power.
The NRD
(NC
READY ) signal
is sent out when the NC
power
is normally
supplied.
(3)
When the NRD signal
turns
on the machine
power,
and the MRD (MACHINE
READY)
signal
returns
back to the control,
the
READY
lamp will be lit.
axis.
. F commands
. S , T and
“ Tool
offset
B commands
values,
setting
data,
parameter
data
Depressing
the RESET
key or the reNote :
mote reset
pushbutton
is defined
as “ Reset
operation”
in this manual.
155
4.. 2.2
TURNING
OFF POWER
Depressing the POWER
OFF pushbutton causes
both the servo and control powers to be turned
off simultaneously. However, for more stable
operation, use the following procedure .
(1)
DISPLAY AND WRITING
4.3
First depress the EMERGENCY
STOP pushbutton to cut off the servo power.
The
NRD
(NC READY)
signal is interrupted,
which usually results-in turning the machine
power, too.
4.3.1 CONSTANT
DISPLAY
The following display is made on both the top
and bottom on the displayed picture of CRT ,
irrespective of the FUNCTION
key currently
selected.
.... .... .
f.+LARM
PRO GRAL! SU!VIBER
COMMAND
(2)
Depress the POWER
OFF
off the control power ,
pushbutton
Ek4ERGENcY
STOP
IllDIAGNOSIS
to cut
POWER OFF
OPERATION
I
~
LIGHT ERROR
—.
CONTROL
POWER
CONTROL
READY
{
I
I
I
I
lALREADY
I
L-
:*
NRD (NC READY)
F
BUFFER
LABEL
SKIP
DISPLAY
BCF]
[ LSK;
KEYING EDITING
IN D.4T.4 DISPLAY
MACH IKE POWER
READY
LAMP
ALARM
CODE
=d
‘P LSK AL! RDY
SERVO POWER
:BLINKING)
(IN 1
I
I
BL.4NK !
IN
J
BLINKING
I
‘READY
STATE DISPLAYED
WHEN SYSTEM 1S READY
RD Y
-ALARM
DISPLAY
ALARM OR BATTERY
FAILURE 1S
DISPLAYED (BLINK
IXG)
ALM1
BAT
.4/B
[J
1
r330JI
~IX D\tELL, FEED
DISPLAY (BLINKING)
M,S, T, FAXDP’
[.DWELL
\4sl
Fig. 4.13
Sequence
of Turning off Operation
Fig. 4.15
(1)
Function message
Any one of the following eight function
messages corresponding to the function key
is displayed at the top of CRT display,
ALARM
DIAGNOSIS
PARAMETER
SETTING
(2)
Program
COMMAND
PROGRAM
POSITION
OFFSET
No.
O and 4 digits of program No. under execution is constantly displayed at the top of
CRT display irrespectively of function key.
(3)
Sequence
No ,
execu N and 4 digits of program No. under
tion is constantly displayed at the top of
key.
CRT display irrespectively of function
156
(4)
(9)
Display of keying data
Up to 32 characters of keyed in data can be
displayed at one time. The data is processed by using ERASE
key, INSRT key, ALTER
key, etc.
(5)
llRDyll ... indicates the system is normal
and the control is operable.
( 10) Dispay
of light errors (flickering)
The messages shown below indicate light
errors which occur in keying or searching
operation. Differing from the alarm codes,
Display of 1/0 and editing (blinking)
The following messages are flickerlingly
displayed during loading of punched tape,
address search or edition.
‘INI1
Display of ready state
these
pres:jing
error
messages
some key.
111
NpUT
... loading tape
ERROR!
...
punching
lIASII
...
searching address
“ALREADY
tape out
“EDIT
..- inserting data in EDIT
“ERS”
o.. erasing data in EDIT
..
waiting for FIN signal of
1~
11s11
. . .
waiting for
FIN
signal
of
S command
FIN
signal
of
T
. . .
waiting
for
. . .
feeding
1!R!! is
displayed
lip},
. . .
loading
rapid
at
. . The
same
number
of
been
ON! “ ...Editing operation is
made with Edit Lock
on
mode
“M”
11~11
LOCK
mode
“MEMORY
signal waiting, dwelling
IITII
IN ! “
mode
“INS”
Display of MST–FIN
and feeding
dekey)
part program
has
stored
already.
“.ALT “ “4“ altering data in EDIT
(6)
by
CAN
“ .“.Format error of keyedin data
IIvER! ... verifying tape
“oUT”
are cleared
(Generally
command
OVER!
“PROGRAM
“ “ ‘ “Part
program
to be
stored
is beyond
memory
capacity
OVER!
“
. . . Registered
number
part program
99 (basic)
or
(option)
command
traVerse
“NO’ I
FOUND!
“
. . . D esired
been
tape
of
is beyond
199
data
has
not
located.
“DWELL”
... dwelling
M, S, T, F and
ly each other.
(7)
Display
skip
IIBUF II
“LSK”
(8)
Display
of
the
. . .
. . .
of
P are
displayed
independent4. 3.2
state
of
buffer
full
displayed
advance
at completion
reading
displayed
at label
alarm
and
label
(1)
COMMAND
Depress
COM
Any One of
of
a. Command
skip
on
(blinking)
DATA DISPLAY
key.
the
following
data
b. Repetition
three
digits
appears.
( COMMAND)
number
of subprogram
NESTING)
(SUB
PROG.
c. State
of tool
life
control
(TOOL
LIFE
CON-
TROL)
Alarm
continues
until the cause
tion is made.
to be displayed
is removed
and
flickeringly
RESET
opera–
(2)
The
ward
IIALMII
. . .
indicates
alarm
ltBA-pl
...
indicates
ing
battery
state
above
by
display
depressing
steps
forward
‘PAm
or
or
back-
- :
PAGE ]
occuring
one b y one.
llA/BLl ... indicates
battery
alarm
both of alarm
alarm occuring
occur–
and
157
4. 3.2.1
Command
Data
4. 3.2.2
Display
Display
of Subprogram
Run Status
(SUB F’ROG. NESTING)
The display shows the block data under execution or just prior to execution in which compensa–
tion calculations have been completed. The conditions of the data to be displayed is as follows.
When the program being executed is in the subprogram called by M98 (subprogram
call command)
the following information is displayed :
(1)
The data shows the contents of the active
register during an automatic operation or a
feed hold.
CALL
(2)
While the control is stopped at a block end,
the contents of the buffer regiter are displayed. If the buffer register blank (BUF
is not displayed) , the contents of the just
executed block are displayed.
r
—G
CODES
OF
~NON-MODAL
01
TO
14
:
START
GROUPS
LOOP :
The remaining number of repetitions of
the subprogram by L ---- ‘(subprogram
repeat command,
❑ = L1, indicates the
number of repetitions)
NEST:
The order in which subprogram
call commands
are called.
Example
3-AXIS
SPEED
Fig. 4.16
010000
MAX
OF
Command
SPEED
DESIGNATION
3-AXIS
IN
of Subprogram
iol
Run
__J
Subprogram
Remalmng
Number
Fig.4.17
030000
;
;
&gt;40000
NO130
10
No120
NO1OI
P2000QO11O
L1O ;
M98
!0200P3000QO120M98
La ;
/
NO21OP4000QO130M98
L6 ;
\
M30
‘,M99
M99
M99
“1”
CRT screen displays that the subprogram
has executed the 3rd
level one time and entered into the execution of 3rd time of
the 3rd level
158
multiple
Status Display
-
Display
)20000
;
OPERATION
The program number (O to NO) and
sequence number
(N to NO) specified
with M98 (subprogram
call command)
: The program number
(O to NO) and
number
(N to NO) of the subprogram
called by M98
G CODE
,
,
;
of R’epeiitlons
4. 3.2.3
Display of Tool Life Control
(TOOL LIFE CONTROL)
Use Status
The following
information
is displayed
use ) of each
status
(e. g. condition,
tool group
under
the tool life control
LIFE
:
The life of
the screen
the
tool
Groups
1 to 9:
Groups
10 to
group
for the
tool in each
feature
:
displayed
The number
operations.
19:
of
Machining
1
on
machining
time.
The number
of machining
operations
/machine
time
the currently
used tool.
COUNTER/TIMER:
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
I
TOOL GROUP
TIMER
T04** ;
T08$* ;
TIO** ;
T12** ;
T14** ;
T18** ;
T20** ;
T22** ;
01234
U1234
12 (LIFE7890MIN.)
1234 MIN.
T24+*; END
T28** . CUTTING
T30**:
T32** ;
T36** ;
T38** ;
T40**;
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
of
Fig. 4,19 Example B of Tool Life
Cent rol Status
T codes
correspond–
ing to the
tools registered
in
the group
displayed
on screen
are all
shown.
T ❑ V**;
END
T o ~**;
END
T El~**;
}
The tool whose
life has expired.
4.3.3
CUTTING—The
tool
currently
TOO**;
.
used
4. 3.3.1
(1)
1
The
tool
1
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
END
END
CUTTING
AND DISPLAYING
Multi-block
Multi-block
Writing
writing
and Operation
in MDI
in MDI Mode
mode
By tt, e following
10 lines of data
operations,
a maximum of
may be written
in MDI mode.
a.
Select
b.
Depress
the PROG
function
key.
. . . PROGRAM
(MDI)
is displayed
screen.
MDI
mode.
on the
01234 N1234
TOOL GROUP 1 (LIFE7890COUNT)
1234
COUNTER
TO1**
T03**
T06**
T09**
T1l**
T13**
T16**
T19**
IN BLOCKS
to be
used.
TOOL LIFE CONTROL
WRITING
CONTENTS BY MDI
T21**
T26*$
T29**
T31**
c.
Depress
the RESET
The buffer
for MDI
d.
The part program
is written
by the use of
the address
key and data key.
As shown
below,
the keyed
data is written
to the
bottom
line on CRT screen
from left to
right.
The maximum number
of characters
that can be written
at a time is 32.
If the
data is comprised
of 32 characters
or less,
it may be keyed
in over
multiple
words
or
when the 10th character
blocks . However,
is keyed
in, the normal display
at the right
Fig. 4.18 Example A of Tool Life
Control Use Status
of this
e.
f.
line
key,
is emptied.
is blanked.
Depress
the WR key.
The keyed
data is stored
in the
The blanked
display
is restored
Up to 10 lines
operation
may
operations
MDI buffer.
to normal.
of the part program
for
be written
by repeating
in d.
and
e.
MDI
the
above.
159
4, 3. 3.1
Multi-block
Writing and Operation
in MD I Mode (Cent’d)
(3)
Operation in \lDI mode
a,
the CYCLE
START
button
in
Depressing
MD I mode can automat ic~liyexecute thr
part programs stored in the MD I buffer.
When the PROG
function is active, the cursor is displayed at the head of the block
currently executed . \\Thenthe execution of
allpart programs is completed, the part
programs and the CRT displays are erased
b
If “M99” is written at the end of a part program , this program is executed repeatedly.
The repetition may be stopped by depressing the FEED
HOLD then RESET .
1
c. While a program is being run, the PROG
function need not be active. Depressing
POS can display the current values on the
CRT.
has,
to as tithe data which
(32 characters
maximum)
.
Referred
entered”
Note:
II
:.
The depression of the EOB
just
been
4
key displays
II
Fig.4.20
(2)
Editing
MDI
data
INSRT , and ALTER
keys permit editing
multi-block data written in. Address rword)
pointed to by the cursor willbe edited.
~CURSOR
keys
and i ~U~S~
The
1
move the cursor forward and backward.
a. ERASE key: When this key has been depressed, the whole word designated is
erased.
REPEATED
NI coo U-40. ;
4. 3.3.2
N2
CO1
N8
M99:
Display
W-20.
FO.
in Memory
IN
3;
Run Mode
The part program being executed in memory
mode (MEM mode) may be displayed by the
following operations:
160
run
(1)
Select the MEM
mode,
(2)
Depress the PROG
function key.
On the CRT screen, the cursor is positioned at the head of the block currently execut–
ed. The cursor moves to the next block
when its execution is started.
CURSOR
d. WR key: This key appends the data which
has just been entered at the end of the
program displayed.
In MD I mode, only one screen currently
displayed may be edited. Unlike EDIT mode
and MEM mode, the display and edit of
multiple screens cannot be performed ,
When the RESET key is depressed, the
stored programs are allerased.
RUN
MODE.
(PROGRAM [MEMI )
b. INSRT key: This key inserts the data
which has just been entered next to the
word the cursor points to.
c. ALTER
key : This key replaces the word
which the cursor points to with the data
which has just been entered .
MD I
Fig. 4.21 Display of Part Program
in Memory Operation
Up to 10 lines may be displayed at a time.
When execution of the ninth has been completed, the next page appears with the
tenth line of the last screen appearing at
the top.
(2)
Completion of search
a. When
the
disappear.
search
is completed,
“AS”
will
(i) In
4.3.3,
See
in EDIT Mode
3 Display
4.6
4. 3.3.4
MEM or EDIT
mode,
the pointer
of the
part program
memory
points
to the data
of block
found
(indicated
by the cursor)
.
In all cases,
only
search
will be performed
but neither
BUF display
nor advance
reading
will be performed.
EDIT.
Address
Search
Search continues until a data (character string)
held on tape or in the memory which coincides
with the data (character string) entered through
The contents
the NC operator’s station.
of tape willbe searched in TAPE mode and those
of the part program memory in MEM or EDIT mode.
(1)
operation
(MEM,
EDIT
~.
MEMORY
POINTER
t
mode)
DATA
a.
Select
b.
Depress
the
c,
Depress
and the
program
the RESET
key.
“LSK”
appears
pointer
returns
to the top of the
number
in MEM mode.
d.
Search
is performed
three
methods:
MEM,
or
EDIT
PROG
FOUND
mode.
function
key.
in one
of the
b
following
(3)
(i) Key-in the word (an address data) to be
searched. If the leading zero of the data
is omitted, the search operation is still
possible.
(ii) Key-in only a single character without
data. This permits searching the character read first.
“AS” disappears and “NOT FOUND !“ appears
on the CRT if the desired data is not found.
This message willdisappear when you depress a key (CAN normally) of the control
station.
Remarks
a.
Commands
encountered during search will
be ignored even if they are modal commands.
b
On Cycle
Start
after
search,
the
data
of a
block which the pointer points to willbe
read in and executed.
(iii)Depress the NEXT key then key in any
data (less than 32 characters) to be
searched. In this case, the search operation is performed exactly according to
the keyed data (character string or nu–
meral string) , thus disabling the omission
of leading zero.
.—
e.
CURSOR
.
key.
Search
Depress
the
starts.
“AS” blinks during search.
f. When the NEXT key is depressed, depqess
it again to cancel the pattern search func–
tion
161
bearcn
4. a d. 4 Haaress
(4)
Search
of program
i~ontctj
h, ERROR
number
The address
search
function
also permits
search
a part program
out of those
stored
the memory.
a.
Select
b.
Depress
the
PROG
c.
Depress
the
RESET
d.
Enter
the program
Leading
zero can
e.
Depress
MEM or
the
EDIT
to
in
key.
number
1’0 ~ D c ❑ . “
be omitted.
(1)
(2)
POSITION
Depress
POS
DISPLAY
will
b. POSITION
ABSOLUTE
c. POSITION
INCREMENT
d. POSITION
f. DISTANCE
g. PULSE
162
be dispro-
The current
value
to be displayed
in EXTERNAL is the accumulated
value of the tool
movement
from the position
reset
to “ Oil by
the ORG key.
be
HOW to reset POSITION
[EXTERNAL]
displayed
1,
When parameter
POSEXT
( #6005D5)
is set to
“ 1, “ the value
displayed
in POSITION
EXTERNAL
becomes
the same value
as dis–
played
in POSITION
ABSOLUTE
.
2.
Regardless
of the state of parameter
POSEXT
,
the value
displayed
in the external
current
value
display
(option)
is the same as displayed in POSITION
[EXTERNAL]
. Hence,
resetting the external
current
value
display
auto–
matically
causes
the reset
of POSITION
EXTERNAL
.
3.
The
“value
in the current
value
display
of
the
equipment”
described
in 2.8.22,
Work
Coordinate
Multi-Shift
G50T
and
5.2,3,
Measured
Workpiece
Value
Direct
Input
refers
to
this
value
in
POSITION
EXTERNAL.
4.
The display
lock feature
TION
[ EXTERNAL].
on the
RETURN
TO
[EXTERNAL]
Display the POSITION
[EXTERNAL]
screen
on the CRT , select the axis by the address
key, and depress the ORG key. The display of the selected axis becomes “O.“ This
display reset operation is always valid
even during time when the movement is being
made by the automatic run of part program .
EXTERNAL
e. PROGRAM
keys to select
Notes :
key.
One of the. following
CRT screen.
a. POSITION
PAGE
key.
‘rhe current
position
of X-,
or z -axis
can
played
at any time in all modes.
Operating
cedure
is as follows.
(1)
--PAGE
the page including any of the above .
The designated
program
number
will be
searched.
The result
of search
is as de–
scribed
in ( 2). In MEM mode,
you may de–
press
the CYCLE
START
button
immediate
y
after
completion
of search
to start
automatic
operation
from the beginning
of the program.
CURRENT
Depress
.,
1
4. 3.4
PULSE
4.3.4.1 Position
key.
m
i. COMMAND
Note :
Page including error pulse or command
pulse willse displaye~ when SYSTEM
No. switch
is set at 4.
mode.
function
(2)
PULSE
LIMIT
COUNTER
is valid
for
POSI-
Fig. 4.23
Fig. 4.22 Display of POSITION
4.3
(1)
a.
4.2
Position
4. 3.4.3
[ABSOLUTE]
The current value displayed in POSITION
indicates the tool position on
ABSOLUTE
the coordinate system provided by coordinate system settings. Coordinate system
setting is performed in the following cases:
The execution of G ’50coordinate system
setting.
b.
The operation of automatic coordinate system setting (option) .
c.
The
ORG
d.
The execution of G 50T work
system setting .
(2)
How
Display of POSITION
[ABSOLUTEl
[EXTERNAL]
Position
[INCREMENT]
Displayed in this mode are:
. In automatic mode, distance to the end point
of the block at every moment.
. In mzmaal mode, distance to the position where
manual operation is to start.
. The increment display in manual mode willbe
cancelled in automatic operation mode.
current value reset operation by the
key (see (2) below) .
to reset POSITION
coordinate
[ABSOLUTE]
The reset operation by the ORG
scribed above is as follows:
key de-
~creen
ABSOLUTE
Display the POSITION
on CRT , select the axis by the address key,
and depress the ORG key. The display of
the selected axis becomes “0.“ However,
this display reset operation is valid only in
the manual operation modes (RAPID, JOG,
and STEP (or HANDLE)
). Depressing of
the ORG key is invalid during operation or
in the buffer full state.
Note : If the display lock is on, the display of
POSITION
[ABSOLUTE]
is not locked.
Fig. 4.24
4, 3. 4.4
(1)
Display of POSITION
INCREMENT
Position
In POSITION,
all positions
are
collectively
displayed.
(2)
POSITION
MACHINE
displays the tool current position on the coordinate system with
the reference point returned by the refer–
ence point return feature being “O.“ The
data on the following features are defined
on this coordinate system:
163
4. 3.4.4
a.
Position
(Cent’d)
Stored stroke limit.
b . Stored stroke limitas arranged
c.
Leadscrew
by tool.
error compensation .
Fig.4.26 DisDlay of PROGRAM
=ETURN
4.6
Fig. 4.25
(3)
Clear
The
~
“ ~
“ key
Limit
t
can be operated
in the position screen , to display “O” as the
external current positions. The external current
pc)sitioncan be displayed as “O” by the following
operation.
. . . . Change
the
X-axis value
of the external
current value
display to “O.”
1
Stroke
STORED
STROKE
LI.MIT displays the remaining number of PuLses in the four directions of
X-axis pluslminus and Z-axis pluslminus
from the tool current position to each boundary of the first,second, and third limit
areas.
Display of POSITION
position
@
Stored
The setting of S“~ORED STROKE
the display of rem~ining number
STORED
STROKE
LI!vIIT
X-axis plus direction
boundary value
STORED
STROKE
LIMIT
X-axis minus direction
boundary value
. . . . Change
the
Z–axis value
of the external
current position
display to “O.“
2
STORED
the X
and Z axes
values of the
external current
position display
to ,!O.
!!
STROKE
LIL41T
~
~ Set by
~ parameter
Z-axis plus direction
boundary value
STORED
. . . . Chance
3
LILMIT and
of puIses:
STROKE
LIMIT
Z-axis minus direction
boundary value
)
The value of X-axis plus remaining number
of pulses
The value other than the external current
positions does not change.
The value of X-axis minus remaining number
of pulses
The same operation can be performed
external current position screen.
The value of Z–axis plus remaining number
of pulses
4, 3.4.5
Program
on the
Return
PROGRAM
RETURN
displays the information necessary for program restart. For details, see
6.2.6,“ program Restart .“
164
The value of Z-axis minus remaining number
of pulses
01234 N1234
SPINDLE COUNTER
CURRENT
POSITION
PULSE COUNTER
FOE SPINDLE
PULSE
FOR EXTERNAL
LIMIT AREA
~RENCE
‘~
aENcE
‘“ “’”
o
—
. ..
G
\,jj
.x
@
—f
c.
.?
@
@4
RD Y
I
FOR INTERNAL
‘.@
CURRENT
POSITION
12345
!~&gt;
POINT
LIMIT AREA
‘:Z
L
tz
*
Fig. 4.29
Display of No. of Spindle
PG Pulses
Fig. 4.27
No. of Servo Lag Pulses
4. 3.4.8
Display
(ERROR PULSE)
ERROR
PULSE displays
the difference
between the momentarily
changing
command
position and the tool current
position.
The display
is performed
on a “ 1“ = 1 pulse basis
(the minimum move unit) .
I
ERROR
PULSE
04000
520
x
1.
z
Fig. 4.28 Display of Remaining No. of
Pulses in First Stored Stroke Limit
(2)
NOOOO
027
LS K
RDY
The display shown above will correspon
to 1st, 2nd, and 3rd prohibited area.
Fig. 4.30 Display of No. of
Servo Lag Pulses
4.3.4,
7 Spindle
SPINDLE
Counter
COUNTER
displays
the number
of spinindexing
origin”
dle P G pulses
from the “spindle
during
the execution
of the spindle
indexing
feaThe display
is performed
on a “ l“ = 1 pulse
ture.
basis.
4. 3.4.9 Command Pulse Accumulation Register Display
(COMMAND wLsE)
COMMAND
PULSE
displays
the contents
of the
command pulse integration
register
(SMC register)
in the control
unit.
This screen
is displayed
only when the system
number
switch
is “ 4. “
The SMC register is set to “O” when the
power is turned on and keeps adding command
pulses until the power is turned off.
Note :
When a value is set to parameter XSMCB
(#6658: for X-axis) or ZSMCB
(#6659: for Zaxis), the value obtained by subtracting the
value set above from the content of the command
pulse integrating register is displayed.
43.
4.9
Command
Pulse Accumulation
Dis~ JIay (COMMAND
PULSE)
Register
(Cent’d)
Fig. 4.32
Display of TOOI Offset Amount
d. The screen of the following or preceding
five pairs of tool offset amounts
—— ~ ——.may be
displayed by depressing
Fig. 4.31
; PAGE :
,j
PA(;E , ‘r
In this case, the cursor is
key.
positioned to the firstof the displayed tool
offset numbers.
4.3
5 DISPLAYING
AND WRITING
TOOL OFFSET DATA+
e.
The tool offset amount is stored in the offset memOry in the unit. Regardless of modes, the tool
offset amount may be displayed and written any
time: including the automatic operation time.
When the options shown below are selected ,
designating the corresponding offset mem r-—
ory number
~
‘A~E
I
a.
Select the OFS
b.
Key-in a two-digit tool offset
—
——number like
CURSOR
~ or
O, 1, and then depress
,
-—.
I
-—1*
CURSOR
PATG~
‘r
can
clisplay each
data.
(i)
Work coordinate system shift option:
Work coordinate system shift amount.
(ii) Work measuring value direct input option:
Tool coordinate data.
function key.
I+
The tool offset amount and the tool nose
radius are displayed in five pairs including
the tool offset number of the keyed value.
The cursor is positioned to the designated
tool offset number .
The preceding tool offset number may be
CURSOR—
or
designated by depressing
1
.—.
I
CLRS~
“ If the operation is performed
.—
outside the range of the tool offset numbers
displayed on one screen, the following or
preceding five pairs of tool offset amounts
are displayed.
(iii) TOO1 wear compensation option:
Tool wear amount.
1
* ‘wORK COORDINATE
s*lFT
MEMoPy
IGQOUP’,
.\”c1
,,
\
1&lt;
z
T 3DIGIT
BASIC
t&gt;iE$.lORY 150
GROL!PS MAX 1
OFFSE r M:MOP,Y
Supplement
* TCC.
COORDINATE
~,1E~,lOF\’ (30
_
GF?OLIPS MAX )
I
* rOOL WEAP
V=MORY(19—
S~OUPS
ihlAX I {
*TOOl
RADIUS
;,~EklORY
_
-, I
.,
‘1
~
‘1
I
“
-rFig. 4.33
166
IL_
Display of tool offset amount
The display of tool offset amount and other
offset memory contents is performed by the
following operations :
c.
~
key or by two-digit value key-in
operation
(1)
by depressing
(2)
Notes :
Writing of tool offset amount
The writing of the offset amount and other
offset memory contents is performed by the
following operations:
a.
Depress
b.
By the operation of PAGE key and CURSOR
key or keying in two digits designate the
tool offset number to be written.
c.
Using
the address
key and the data key,
key in the address
data to be written.
In
this case,
the meaning
depends
on the address
as shown below:
the OFS
1. The contents of offset memory
2.
Regardless
of modes,
the writing
by the
above
operations
is always
possible
including
automatic
run time.
3.
The tool offset amount rewritten in automatic
run is made valid from reading of the com mand of the next block. For the tool offset
amount of the currently executed block or
the block stored in the prefetch buffer, the
value before change is used.
4.
When the data shown below is rewritten, the
timing in which the data value is made
is as follows:
function key,
(i)
Table 4.1
ii)
Write to X
z
axis
Writing of an absolute value.
Namely, the value is written to
Write to Z
memory without change.
Write to X
Writing of an increment.
axis
the current value is added to the
Write to Z
6.
The contents of offset memory
by the following operations:
Writing of an absolute value.
radius
Depress
the WR
Tool coordinate data:
The time when G 50T is specified next.
The writing operation of the above tool coordinate data is performed when the PST INPUT
button is not depressed. If this button is
depressed, the data to be written is completely different from the above data. For
details, see 6.2.3 Work Measuring Value
Direct Input.
written to memory.
Tool nose
amount:
5%
axis
R
shift
Namely,
preceding value and the result is
w
s~stem
iii) Tool wear compensation amount:
The tl,newhen T 99A A is specified next.
axis
u
coordinate
The time when G56, G50T , or other
coordinate system setting is performed
next.
Designation
x
d.
Work
Axis
Address
are retained
after the power is turned off.
key.
The address data keyed in is written to the
tool offset memory according to the meaning
of the data.
e. Repeat the operations of c. and d. and b.
through d. to write allnecessary tool offset
amounts.
are allerased
(i)
Depress the OFS
function kev.
.
(ii)
Key-in
O - 9 9 9 9 , and depress
the ORG key.
The contents in offset
memory are all erased,
f. When the options shown below are selected,
if the corresponding offset memory number
is designated at the operation of d. , the
data may be written to memory.
However,
address R has no significance and therefore
should not be designated.
(i)
Work
Work
( ii)
Work measuring
Tool coordinate
(iii)
Tool
Tool
coordinate
coordinate
wear
wear
system
system
value
data.
compensation
amount.
shift
shift
direct
option:
amount.
input
option:
option:
167
4.3.6
DISPLAYING
AND WRITING
SETTING
DATA
(SETTING)
With this unit, the setting data is stored in the
internal memory.
According to the contents of
this memory, a particular function is turned on/
off. These contents are also used for the con–
trol constants of functions . For details, refer
to Appendix 1, List of Setting Numbers.
The
display and write of setting data are always enabled including the time when automatic run is
being performed.
The setting data is of the following two types:
(1)
Setting data of bit display format.
(2)
Setting
data
of decimal
display
format,
DEC;MAL
4. 3.6.1
Setting
Data of Bit Display
Fig. 4, 34 Display of Setting Data
Shown In Bit Display
Format
#6000 through #6004&deg; have the
Setting numbers II
setting data of bit display format. Each number
has 8-bit information of “D7 through DO, ” each
bit displaying on /off of the corresponding function.
Note: When #6000 is designated, the screen
dedicated to the display of on/off state of
the “internal toggle switch” is provided.
For details, see 4.3.6.2.
(2)
(1)
a. Select the SET
Key-in
depress
The writing of the setting data of bit display format is performed by the following
operations:
4-digit
function key.
numeric
~lJ~~SO~~
..—
or
setting
number
‘.
L CURSOR
__
and
The setting number
a.
Depress
b.
By the operation of PAGE key and CURSOR
or keying
in 4 digits, designate the
setting number to be written.
~ ‘ey”
Depress the INSRT key. The cursor moves
to the bit data from a setting number.
Designate the data of D7.
d.
DeDress
the
cL’RsOl&lt;”-
key
Each time
the key is depressed , the cursor moves by
one bit toward DO. Locate the cursor at a
desired bit position
key,
e.
Depress the WR key, The designated bit
data reverses (0 to 1 or 1 to O) . If you
depress the WR key again, the bit data
will reverse again
Normally , ‘)
1“ designates on state and “O” off state,
f.
To write data in decimal mode, locate the
cursor at the right most column (decimal
data)
key.
168
function key.
c.
designation may be up-
CURS6R
Or
dated by
1
CURSOR
and the screen may be updated by
the SET
key
“]
“#’:need not be keyed in. Up to four pairs
of setting data including the keyed setting
number are displayed . To the right of bit
display,the decimal value indicating the sum
of the data on that line is shown.
The cursor is positioned to the designated setting
number.
c.
Writing of setting data (bit display format)
Display of setting data (bit display format)
Setting data is displayed by the following
operations :
b,
INDICATION
EXAMPLE
Writing
:
Entered
1
1111111
Repeat
data.
steps
If
7
, CL RTSOR
When
data
b,
you
through
keep
key
move column
matically.
h.
1.
The internal toggle switch is an optional function. Hence, which internal toggle switch is
available depends on the controlled machine.
The display for unused tog gle switches is
blank. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of the machine in question.
2.
When the machine
control
station
is provided
with the switches
that turn on and off the
above
functions,
the state of the switch
on
the machine
control
station
is ORed with that
of the operator’s
panel to determine
the final
ON/OFF
state.
000000000
255WR~
g.
Notes :
mode
43210
765
data
WRA
0
in decimal
the
f.
m
the
depressed,
by
has
column
been
to write
in the
written,
255
required
‘r
cursor
screen
depress
will
auto-
Data
Cursor
returns
to the position
INSRT
key.
of setting
number
normally,
this sequence
of operations
begins
and ends both with
the depression
of the INSRT
key.
4.3,
(1)
(2)
6.2
Internal
Toggle
4. 3.6.3
ONIOFF
the
the
function
function
is turned
is turned
on.
off.
Setting Data of Decimal Display Format
The following setting numbers have the setting
data of decimal number display format:
The setting
numbers
are #6000D7 through
D o of bit display
format.
By the operation
of the writing
of bit display
format
setting
described
above,
turn on /off each function.
“ 1“ is set,
“O” is set,
Resultant
I
Switches+
When the eight
basic
function
switches
shown
below
are omitted
from the machine
operator’s
station,
each function
may easily
be turned
onioff
by the setting
operation
from the NC operator
panel.
When
When
Switches
on
Mac~iiomtrol
Setting
the
#6160 through
#6219
?#6500 through
#6579
#8600 through
#8750
These setting numbers are used for the control constants of tool lifecontrol and multiple
repetitive cycles.
(1) Display of setting data (decimal display
format )
The setting data is displayed by the following operations:
a.
b,
Depress the SET
Key
in the
4–digit
p:ti~
press
function key.
settine
or
number
and
de-
~~L~so~’]
key.
The maximum of 10 lines of setting data including the keyed setting number are displayed. The cursor is p~sitioned to the
designated setting number.
c.
Display shows that Single Block and Display Lock are on.
The setting number designation may be upCLJRS~R
or ~“
dated by
key,
~CLJRTSOR
E.
_.
I
and the screen may be updated by
ml
Fig. 4.35
Display of Internal Toggle
.
or
[,x
keY
Switch Status
169
4, 3, 6.3
Setting
Data of Decimal
Display
Format
“4” :
TEST
(0)
(Cent’d)
Normal operation is similar to the case of ‘1
O1!
SYSTEM.
Self-diagnostics of the memory contents
and checking of reference zero return point are
omitted,
Notes :
1.
Setting values other than those described
above will prevent correct operation.
2.
Setting can be effective only when the system
number switch provided on the upper part of
the unit is set at “O.“
Alarm Display of System
Fig. 4.36
Display of Setting
inDecimalMode
When setting #6219 is set at ‘11“or “4,“ Cycle
Start is prohibited or self-diagnostics are over
looked, causing unexpected errors.
Data
To prevent
(2)
#6219
Writing of setting data (decimal display
format)
is
set
at
this,
alarm status
a value
other
than
v;
The writing of the setting data of decimal
display format is performed by the following
operations:
SYSTEM
a.
Depress
b.
By the operation of PAGE key and CURSOR
key or keying in 4-digit value, designate the
setting number to be written.
c.
d,
the SET
function key.
Key-in the value by the data key and deThe keyed value is
press the WR key.
written as the data of the setting number
designated by the cursor.
Repeat operations of b. and c. to write the
necessary setting data.
REMARKS
System
&gt;
No.
Set system
ber.
value
setting
No.
System
number
of #6219 through
parameter
can be set by
the operator’s
num-
setting
panel.
the
Setting of #6219
llO1!: SYSTEM
!ll!l:
if
(#6219):[11
I
MESSAGE
I
I
System
number
#6219
for writing
parameters,
should
be
set
at
“O”
except
. System number can also be set by the rotary
switch on the main printed circuit board.
For
details, refer to Maintenance Manual.
Writing parameters
is pre-
4.3.7 DISPLAYING
AND WRITING
PARAMETERS
In this system, varying parameters are stored in
the memory and they determine operating conditions such as tape code and feedrate. For details,see Appendix 2, “LIST OF PARAMETER
NUMBERS
.“ The parameters may be displayed at
any time even during automatic operation.
The parameters
are of the following two types:
(1)
The parameters of bit display format.
(2)
The parameters of decimal display format.
PARAMETER
To write parameters.
start is prevented,
170
NO. SETTING
is displayed
“O. “
(#6219)
at II111 to write
For normal operation.
vented.
No. Setting (#6219)
At this position, Cycle
4. 3.7.1
Parameters
of Bit Display
Format
Parameter
numbers
#6oO5 through
#6049 indicate
the parameters of bit display format. Each num–
4. 3.7.3
(1)
Displaying
Operations
and Writing
for
Parameters
parameter
display
The operations for parameter display are
the same as those for setting display except
key is depressed
inthat the PRM function
ber has 8-bit information of D 7 through DO.
stead of the
see 4.3.6.
(2)
SET
function
key.
For
details,
Operations for parameter writing
a. The parameter values are preset according
to the performance of the machine and applications.Therefore, you should consult the
machine tool builder if you want to change
parameter settings.
Fig. 4.37
Display of Parameters
in Binary Mode
4.3.7.2 Parametersof Decimal Display Format
The following parameter numbers indicate the
parameters of decimal display format:
#6050 through
#6149
#6160 through
#6349
#6500 through
#6659
#8000 through
#8225
b. The parameters are protected with a system No. switch provided on the tape reader
so that they should not be destroyed by
wrong operation. Normally system No. O is
selected and, at this time, the parameters
cannot be rewritten by any operation.
c. The operations for parameter writing are
the same as those for setting display except for the following:
(i)
First, set the system No. switch to “1.“
(ii) Depress
key instead
of
the PRM function
the SET function
key.
Then,
the parameter data may be written
by the same
operations
as those
for the writing
of
setting
data of bit display
format
(4. 3.
6.1,
(2))
or for the writing
of setting
data of decimal
display
format
(4. 3.6.3,
(2)).
(iii)
d.
After
ation,
the completion
set the system
of the writing
operNo. switch
to “ O. “
When parameters have been changed, be sure
to reset the control by depressing the RESET
key.
Some of the parameters cannot be effective until power is turned off and then
turned on again. For setting, refer to
APPENDIX
2, “LIST OF PARAMETERS
.“
Fig. 4.38 Display of Parameters
in Decimal Mode
171
4.3,
8 DISPLAYING
STATUS
iNPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNALS
(1)
Depress
the
ALM
key.
Then up to four pairs of alarm code and message willbe displayed, with more serious one
on a higher line.
Depress the DGN function key, and the state of
every input loutput signal willbe displayed on
the CRT.
This is possible at any time even dur–
ing automatic operation.
The alarm screen willappear during an
Note :
alarm state and, therefore, it is not needed to
170rmore detailof this operation, see
IIyASpJAC
Lx3 Maintenance hfanu~. “
The state of the input /output signal is also
given in the hexadecimal notation at the rightmost column for the ease of maintenance work.
operate the
1’AGE
+
Fig.
4.40
key.
Display
of Alarms
Fig. 4.39
(2)
TO reset the alarm status and screen, re-
4,3.9 ALARM CODE (ALM) DISPLAY
move the cause of alarm then depress the
RESET key.
Alarm codes and other data are displayed by the
following operations :
For the detail of alarm code, refer to Appen–
dix 5 List of Alarm Codes .
(,1)
Depress the ALM function key.
following screens is displayed:
a. Display of the alarm number
message.
(ALARM)
b. Display of operating time.
4, 3. 9.2
and the
(TIMER)
c. Display of registered program
(PROGRAM
No, TABLE
)
d. Display of maintenance
One of the
number.
(ALARM)’
This feature can display messages on the CRT
screen by the instruction of PC when the
machine sequence control option (PC system) is
built in the unit. Normally, this feature is used
to display the cause of the alarm detected by the
When the message display instruction (macro
instruction) is executed in the PC, “ALM” or
“A /B” flashes at the bottom of the CRT screen
regardless of mode and function.
history.
The above screens may be selected
by depressing
PAGE
.
or
——t
-1
.PAG~
key.
In this case, the message
by the following operation:
(1)
4.3.9.1 Alarm Code Display
If an alarm status has happened, “ALM” or “AI
B” (on battery alarm) blinks on the bottom line
of the screen regardless of working mode and
function. If this happens, the detailed informa–
tion of the alarm status may be displayed by the
following operation.
172
Display
Pc .
(MAINTEFJANCE)
(2)
Message
may
be displayed
Depress the ALM function key. The message is displayed at the bottom of the screen
along with the sequence error code. The
message to be displayed depends on the
machine.
For details, refer to the instruc–
tion manual of the machine in question.
l-.._
Fig. 4.41
MESSAGE
Example
DISPLAY
AREA
of Message
Display
REMAINING
NUMBER
IN PART PROGRAM
(2)
When the RESET
key is depressed
after
removing
the cause of the alarm which
dis–
played
the message,
the message
display
and alarm state
may be cleared.
only the
Note: In some cases,
is provided
without
displaying
ERROR.
“
4.3.9.3
Display
(PROGRAM
NO.
and
Deleting
TABLE
message
display
“ 400:
of Registered
Program
Number
I
of Programs
Table
I
01 to 02
~ Basic
199
—i
Option 1
999
Option
—
01 to 04
+——-
3’
(2)
All
program
displayed.
T—
:_PAGEj
numbers
By
in the
in
part
lower
Fig. 4,42
already
depressing
key, the
page
2
01
to 19
registered
~I)AC,E
a 1
shown
below
The program directory screen used to be displayed
in the alarm functions, but is now improved to be
displayed in the program functions.
Therefore, the program directory screen is no
longer displayed in the alarm function.
In the program function, the program directly
screen and program screen are displayed
alternately regardless of the mode, each time the
m
II
1!screen is depressed.
When it is under
@
the edit mode, program 1/0 verification,and
deletion can be made on the program directly
screen.
Program No.
Type
1
99
——
2
characters
Number
1
1
——. —
of
~r)’
.W
Max
number
This
screen
displays
only the registerNote:
A program
number
is
ed program
numbers.
registered
by depressing
the PROG
function
key in EDIT
mode.
The number of program numbers that can
be registered depends on options.
No.
remaining
program
memory
is displayed
left corner
of the screen.
SEQ
This screen displays allregistered program numbers and the number of remaining characters in
the part program memory.
(1)
The
OF CHARACTERS
MEMORY
are
or
may
be
obtained.
(3)
Depress
ERASE
the PROG
key
and then
key to delete
part program.
depress
173
4.3.9,
4 Operation
Time
Display
e.
Three
played
kinds
of operation
in hours,
minutes,
time will be disand seconds.
s.
POWER
ON:
b .
CYCLE
START:
c.
FEED
d.
EXTERNAL
INPUT
‘f: Total
while external
input
signal
4. 3.9.5
(1)
:
Total
Total
operating
POWER
ON
time
Total
operating
CYCLE
START
operating
time
after
time
of
“1,”
112,”“3,”
depressed,
all the
reset
at a time.
The system counts the duration of automatic operation and it may be displayed. This function
permits the display of the time it has taken for a
single piece of work or the total operational time
of the system.
(1)
When
Maintenance
‘14,!!
IORGI! kev~
times
History
shown
Display
above
~re
are
(MAINTENANCE)
This
screen
displays
the maintenance
information
on the control
unit.
This
display
is independent
of the control
unit functions.
of
FEED
operating
time
is ON (optional)
Fig. 4.44
LOADING PART PROGRAMS
INTO MEMORY (IN)
4.4
Fig. 4.43
operation
This
paragraph
describes
the operations
for
ing the following
data into the corresponding
ternal
memory
of the NC :
Display
Time
AND NC DATA
storin–
. Part program
(2)
Reset
of operating
time display
. Tool offset amount
The above operating time displays may be
reset separately by the following operations.
In the state where the operating time is displayed;
a.
Depress ‘1
lrlthen
The
b.
c.
time
of
“POWER
Depress
112!! then
The
of
time
Depress ‘1
311 then
Depress
keys.
ON”
ORG
“CYCLE
The time of “FEED
d.
ORG
is reset.
keys
.
START”
ORG
keys
CUTTING”
“4” then ORG
The time of “EXTERNAL
is reset.
.
is reset.
keys.
INPUT”
is reset.
Unless this display reset operation is performed, then operating time display is
retained when the power is turned off.
174
. Setting data and parameters
If these data are to be stored in the form of
a punched tape, enter them through the tape
reader or the data input/output interface (option).
For the methods of setting the input/output
equipment (setting #6003) and the baud rate
(parameters #6026 and #6027), refer to “yASNACLX3 Maintenance Manual” Date Input/Output
Interface. The following description is made
assuming that this option is installed.
4.4.1
g.
LOADING PART PROGRAM TAPE INTO MEMORY
When the tape reader has read “M02. ;,“
!!M30 ;,!!or I!M99 ;,11it stops and “IN” disfrom the CRT
appears
(1)
Loading
a part
gram number.
program
which
has
gram
a pro–
has
been
. NOW
the
in memory.
stored
part
pro-
Notes :
a.
Select
b.
Depress
c.
Load
EDIT
mode.
the
the
PROG
key.
tape
to the
NC
equivalent
Program
number
“00000”
is always
in the
registered
state,
so it cannot
be erased.
This
program
number
should
not be used
general.
1.
external
tape
reader
or
an
device.
2.
The
be
0/.,01234;
PROGRAM
1
NUMBER
HOLD
d.
Depress
the
RESET
e.
Depress
the
IN
HERE
key.
key,
Then
the system
starts
to read the tape and
enlists
the program
number
punched
on the
tape as the first
record.
The system
checks
for duplicator
of program
number
as in 1.
Operation
ends with error
if the designated
program
number
is not found
on the tape.
(2)
no program
before.
number
may
However,
3.
Consequently,
when a tape having
no program number
has been
stored,
write
the
program
number
to the head of part program
by the EDIT
operation.
Loading
a part
gram number.
4.
The stop position
of tape can be changed
by
parameter
#6021Do, with parameter
setting
“1”, program
completes
by M02, M30, or M99,
However,
with parameter
setting
“O ‘t, program
does not stop till %.
Select
b.
Depress
Load
EDIT
the
“
“h
program
PROG
keys.
tape
to the
NC
external
N1 G50
which
has
no pro-
mode.
the
equivalent
\
has
as described
When the tape reader
has read
“M02 ; ,”
IIM30; ,11 or “M99; , “ it stops
and “IN”
disNow the part proappears
from the CRT.
gram has been
stored
in memory.
a.
c.
which
write
a program
number
to the head of the
tape,
in principle.
The operation
of “ Oxxxx
IN” described
before
causes
only program
It does not cause
the
number
registration.
storing
of information
of “00000”
into the
part program
memory.
only
the program
number
on tape is stored
into the memory.
Assume
that a tape having
no program
number is stored
and then all part programs
are
punched
out by depressing
“ O,” “-, ”
“ 9,”
keys.
Since
this
“ 9,” “ 9,” “9, “ and “OUT”
tape contains
programs
with no program
number,
the correct
restoring
of all part programs
may not be performed
by depressing
IIo
“9,” “9,” “9,” “9,” and “IN” keys.
,“ “-, ”
M30, %
G50, XOYO
tape
stored
in
XO—
--
tape
reader
or
EXAMPLE
an
device.
—-
N1
—M02
(
I
the
RESET
e.
Depress
program
the address
number.
Storing
changed
f.
Depress
the
IN
key.
O key
then
ZO
;
is in the first
block,
position
the
N and key in as follows
(in EDIT
modes)
:
; N1 ALTER
Oxxxx
(3)
Depress
XO
when load!ng
E comoleled
d.
G50
When this
cursor
to
and PROG
O/.
The tape slops al ‘m? Iocatmn
:
enter
a program
I
with
program numbers
To register
a program
with a program
number different
from the one punched
on tape,
perform
the following
operations:
the
key.
The system
starts
keyed-in
program
registered
program
to read the tape.
If the
numb er coincides
with the
number,
“ALREADY
IN”
If this happens,
screen.
blinks
on the CRT
delete
the program
number,
f. while the tape
a. through
“IN”
blin-ks on the CRT.
a.
Select
b.
Depress
the
EDIT
the
mode.
PROG
key.
then repeat
steps
is being
read,
175
4. 4.1 LOADING
PART PROGRAM
TAPE INTO
MEMORY
The tape reader stops each time it has read
“M02 ;,” “M30 ;,“ or “M99 ;.”
(Cent’d)
c.
Set
the
NC
tape
to the
tape
reader
or
the
f
Depress
the IN key again.
external equivalent equipment.
The tape reader resumes to read the tape,
Repeat this operation until allprograms
are loaded.
M 30
%,01234 G50, XOY0
?(O
(5)
)
\
I
PROGHAM
d.
Depress
e.
Key
f.
Depress
in
HOLD
RESET
“O”
and
the
IN
When “O” key is depressed and program
number is keyed in before depressing IN key
in proas described in (4) above, the keyed
key.
PROGRAM
gram number
the program
NUMBER.
operation
(6)
I,_
a.
Select
b.
Depress
EDIT
programs
from
PROG
,,
,,9, ,,
MAKING
Perform
part
continuously
,19,
,,
,Ig,ll
ADDITION
and “ 9“ before
the first
key.
The tape reader
of “%. “
TO A PART PROGRAM
the followine oDeration to add data to a
program
which
~s &amp;eady
a.
Select
b.
Depress
the
PRGG
key
c.
Depress
the
O key
then
EDIT
d. Load
key.
the
tape
loaded.
mode.
gram number
and depress
key.
The system
searches
the
a tape
mode.
the
programs
depression
of the IN
stops
at the position
is completed.
part
Loading
l?rograms
existing on a tape as shown
in (4)
may be loaded
continuously
without
inter–
ruption.
For this purpose,
depress
“O, “
4. 4.2
Loading
is registered
in preference
to
number
punched
on the NC tape
key.
Note :
If a program
is stored
with a changed
program
number
as described
above,
the program
number
punched
on the tape is stored
in the part
Consequently,
program
memory
without
change,
to avoid
the confusion
in the later
handling,
re–
place
the program
number
in the part
program
memory
with changed
program
number
by the
EDIT
operation.
(4)
numbers
HERE
The program
number
entered
from the key
is registered
in preference
to the program
number
punched
on the tape.
At this time,
the program
number
on the tape is written
to the part program
memory
simply
as a
label.
and the stor–
M02 ;, M30 ; or M99 ; is read
ing
with program
1
NuMBE7
the
Storing a program
changed II
of
adding
enter
the
part
C[’KSOI{
the
designated
data
pro–
to the
program
tape
reader.
c.
Load the
equivalent
NC tape to the tape
exte-rnal
device
~
reader
or
an
(
e.
M30, 0500
M99,O/.
,
1
I
I
T1e .aoe stops
1
The tape
!
slops
The tape stops
to Iravel
here
to t,a.e
to travel here
“1.,01000,
M02 0200
$
d.
e.
Depress
the
RESET
Depress
the
IN
here
key.
f. “Depress
order.
the RESET
the NEXT
key.
and IN keys in this
The data will be read from the tape into the
memory.
Notes :
key.
Then
the system
starts
and enlists
the program
on the tape as the first
tem checks
for duplication
ber as described
in (2)
176
\
Depress
to read the tape
number
punched
The sysrecord.
of program
num.
You cannot add data to the middle of a pro1.
If necessary, delete the last part of the
gram.
program by editing operation and add the data.
2. Continuous storing operation of NEXT
IN needs reset key operation every time.
and
4.4,3
LOADING
PART PROGRAMS
Part
programs
may
tape reader
but by
following.
a. Select
EDIT
4.4.4
BY MDI
be loaded
not
MDI operation.
through
the
Perform
the
PROG
c. Depress
the
RESET
the
number
OFFSET
DATA INTO
MEMORY
Normally, the tool offset data is written to the
tool offset memory by MDI operation. This data
may also be entered in the form of a punched
tape.
(1)
the
gram
TOOL
mode.
b. Depress
d. Depress
INPUTTING
key
The
format of the tool offset data tape is
as shown
below:
key.
O key then enter
and depress
the
the part
WR key.
pfoE
The designated
program
number
will be regIf this number
already
exists,
istered.
IN!I blinks and, in this case, it
flALREADy
T03X ....Z....R.... ;
T99X ....Z.....
%
is required to delete the registered program
number.
e. Write the part program by operating the
address key and the data key. As shown
in the figure below, the keyed in data is
displayed on the bottom line from left to
right sequentially. The maximum number
of characters that can be written at a time
is 32. Within this limit,data may be keyed
in over multiple words or blocks. However,
when the 10th character is keyed in, the
normal display shown to the right of the
line is blanked.
(2)
The storing
is performed
of the data by the above
tape
by the following
operations:
a.
Select
mode.
b.
Depress
c.
Set the
reader.
key.
d.
Depress
the
RESET
The keyed in data is stored in the part program memory.
e.
Depress
the
IN
f. Depress
the INSRT
ALTER
k~ys
operation.
during
this
pro-
OFS
tool
key.
offset
data
tape
onto
the
tape
key.
key.
The tape reader
starts
to read the tape.
!!lN 1! blinks
on the CRT
while the data
g. Repeat the operations of e. and f. above to
The program edit
write the part program.
oDeration is enabled bv the use of ERASE,
IfiSRT,
and
gram storing
EDIT
are
f,
(3)
read.
The
tape reader
stops
when it has read
NIN II disappears from the
“%” (or “ER”).
CRT . Now the tool offset
data has been
read into memory.
Remarks
G1O:
In the case of the tool offset
data tape of
the format
by tool offset
data designation,
performing
the cycle
start
in TAPE
mode
causes
to store
the data into the tool offset
memory.
1
Fig. 4.45
h.
Key in M02 ; , M30 ; , or M99 ; and depress
This
completes
the storing
of
INSRT
key.
the part program.
177
4. 4.5
DATA
INPUTTING
SETTING
DATA AND PARAMETER
Through setting data and parameter data are input in their memories by MDI operation normally,
they may also be entered by means of paper tape,
Setting data and parameter data may be input
tape.
from a single
4.5
TAPE VERIFYING
The punched tape of the data shown below may
be compared to the contents of the NC internal
memory to check if they match.
~ Part program
. Tool offset data
. Setting data and parameter
The
(1)
tape
format
is
as follows.
r
The punched tape is entered through the NC
tape reader or the data input/output interface
(option). For the methods of setting the input /
output equipment (setting #6003) and the baud
rate (parameters #6o26 through #6029) , refer to
“YASNAC1LX3
Maintenance Manual. “ The
following description is made assuming that this
—
“~
LABEL % ;
N6000 X128;
I
N6002
X
I
option
O;
is installed .
4. 5.1 VERIFYING
N8750
X
O;
(1)
%
-.
(2)
The
input
a.
Set
the
b.
Select
c.
Depress
operation
SYSTEM
EDIT
the
d.
Depress
the
e.
Depress
IN
switch
at
~
1.
mode.
PRM
key.
RESET
Select
b.
Depress
c.
Set
d.
Depress
the
RESET
e.
Depress
g.
Turn
the
the
VER
key.
key.
the
system
power
off
No.
then
switch
to
on.
At the end of operation
e. , the op–
erations
on the NC operat~]r’s
panel
are all
the power
must be
Hence,
invalidated.
turned
on again.
the
the
pro-
EDIT
the
part
mode.
PROG
function
program
tape
key.
to the
tape
reader.
key.
key.
By the operation
of “RESET
, VER, “
Note:
the verifying
feature
verifies
the data from
the tape head to % code.
(2)
Verifying
program
a part
number
Select
b.
Depress
c.
Set
d.
Depress
the
RESET
e+
Depress
the
“()”
the
the
EDIT
program
a.
number.
178
having
O.
The NC operation by the newly stored setting data and parameter may be performed.
Note:
tape
started
to compare
the con–
The tape
is
tents
of the part program
memory
to the
During
contents
of the part program
tape.
IIVER )! keeps
flashing.
If
this operation,
a mismatch
is found , “INPUT
ERROR”
is
displayed
flashing
.
When a match is found
and this operation
is
completed,
the tape reader
stops,
upon
which
“VER”
display
is erased.
The tape reader
stops
when it has read
“ %“
(or “ER”)
. !!lN!! disappears from the CRT .
Now the setting
lparameter
data have
been
read into memory.
Return
program
a.
The tape reader
starts
to read the tape.
“IN”
blinks
on the CRT
while the data are
being
read.
f.
Verifying
a part
gram number
TAPE
J
is as follows
No.
PART PROGRAM
the
part
tape
having
no
mode.
PROG
function
program
key
key.
to the
tape
reader
key.
an[{
key
in program
Depress
f.
VER
key.
4. 5.2
The tape starts to compare the contents of
the part program memory to the contents of
the part program tape. During this operation, !!VERI!keeps flashing. If a mismatch is
ERORII is displayed
flashing.
found, lllNpUT
VERIFYING
TOOL
The contents
of
compared
to the
by the following
( 1)
Select
When a match is found
and this operation
is
completed,
the tape reader
stops,
upon which
!!VER!!
display
is erased.
If the keyed-in
(2)
Depress
program
number
is not found
in the
!!NOT
FOUND!
u is displayed
flashing.
(3)
Set the tool
case,
depress
the
operation
of d.
CAN
key
and
memory,
In this
start
with
the
OFFSET
VALUE TAPE
the tool offset
value
tape are
contents
of the offset
memory
operations:
EDIT
the
mode.
OFS
function
offset
value
key.
tape
to the
tape
reader.
the
(4)
Depress
the
RESET
(5)
Depress
the
VER
key.
Notes :
1.
The
operations
for
number
different
gram
ber
punched
on
of (2) above.
is
processed
program
2,
regards
keyed
the
are
on
the
same
to
the
numas
program
keyed-in
b. Depress
the
“OXXXX
no
as
program
a tape
the
VEf7&deg;
in–
number.
containing
program
number
which
should
‘IVER”
display
is erased.
in.
a tape
containing
Multiple
part programs
tape are continuously
ing operations:
a. Select
of
key.
The
tape starts
to compare
the contents
of
the tape
to the contents
of the tool offset
During
this operation
, “VER”
memory .
keeps
flashing.
If a mismatch
is found,
“INPUT
ERROR”
is displayed
flashing.
When a match is found
and this operation
is
completed,
the tape reader
stops,
upon
those
number
punched
information
verifying
numbers,
Verifying
programs
c. Set
a pro-
program
the
operation
punched
. when
program
be
tape
the
keyed–in
preference
by
the
formation
(3)
in
with
from
number
Verification
Hence
the
The
verification
the
EDIT
the
part
multiple
part
punched
in a single
verified
by the follow-
mode.
PROG
function
program
tape
tape
read-
(2)
er.
d. Depress
the
RESET
e. Depress
the
VEX
SETTING
AND PARAMETER
Select
Depress
the
EDIT
key.
(3)
When M02, M30, or M99 is read,
reader
does not stop but all the
grams
are continuously
verified
the tape
part pro–
up to %
is completed,
position
of %
TAPES
the
mode.
PRM
function
key.
For the tape punched
only with
depressing
the SET key causes
effect.
key.
code.
When the verification
the tape reader
stops
at the
code.
VERIFYING
The setting
data tape or the parameter
tape is
compared
to the respective
contents
of the memory.
It is possible
to punch
the setting
data
and parameter
on a single
tape and store
them at
a time by the following
operations:
(1)
key.
to the
4. 5.3
Set
the
setting
to the tape
data
data,
setting
the same
and /or parameter
tape
reader.
(4)
Depress
the
RESET
(5)
Depress
the
VER
key.
key.
The tape
starts
to compare
the con–
tents
of the tape of the contents
of setting
or parameter.
During
this operation,
“VER”
If a mismatch
is found,
keeps
flashing.
“INPUT
ERROR”
is displayed
flashing.
When a match is found
and this operations
completed,
the tape reader
stops,
upon
which
“VER”
display
is erased.
is
1 7s
4.6
EDIT
(5)
4. 6.1 CHECKING
NUMBER
REGISTERED
PART PROGRAM
Depress
the PROG
(2)
Depress
the
function key.
_ ~.R~cjR
or
key to select
the screen
TABLEDD
) of registered
display.
(6)
:_~J1{,sO1l
(PROGRAM
program
NO.
number
CURSOR
.
the
key.
The designated program number is searched.
One screen of data (for 10 lines) from the
head of the searched program is displayed
If the program number has
on the CRT.
is displayed
not been found , “NOT FOUND”
flashing. This display may be reset by
depressing CAN key in general.
part programs, make confirmation
13efore
editing
of the registered program numbers and the re–
maining number of characters in the part pro–
gram memory by the following operations:
(1)
Depress
The preceding or following screen may be
displayed on the CRT by depressing the
-–. =
I’.k(;E key.
I’.%(;E ‘r
-
(7)
—
,—— —
is depressed,
preceding
the cursor is moved to the
or following word on a word basis.
The above operations make the word (address and data) designated by the cursor ready
for such edit operations as modification, insertion, and deletion.
The search for a program number may be
Note :
performed also in the MEM mode.
But the cursor
IPAGE
or
key is
movement by the
PA’GE
disabled.
4,6.3 MODIFYING
tJUMBER
OF REMAINING
REGISTERED
PROGRAM
Fig. 4.46
DISPLAYING
AND CHECKING
STORED
Modification
of part programs
is all performed
in
the EDIT
mode and the PROG
function
by the
operations
which
follow
the operations
described
in the preceding
paragraph
4. 6.2
Displaying
And
C~ecking
(1)
Depress the page key and the cursor key to
designate the word to be modified.
(2)
Depress the address key and the data key
to enter the word to be modified. As shown
in the figure below, the keyed–in data is
displayed in the bottom line on the CRT
screen from ieft to right sequentially. The
maximum
number of characters that may be
written at a time is 32. Within this limit,
data may be keyed-in over multiple words
or blocks .
(3)
Depress
may be displayed on the
Stored
part programs
CRT screen to check their contents by the following operations:
Select the EDIT
(2)
Depress
the
(3)
Depress
the RESET
(4)
180
Key-in
mode .
PROG
O PROGRAM
function
key.
NUMBER.
&lt;tired ~art Programs.
PART
PROGRAMS
(1)
BLOCKS
CHARACTERS
NUMBER
This screen only displays information but
also deletes program No, and therefore cannot
be used to register program numbers.
4, 6.2
PART PROGRAM
key.
the ALTER
key.
The word designated by the cursor is deleted and the newly keyed-in data is displayed in that place. After modification,
the altered word is in the designated state.
(4)
Repeat the operations of (1) through
modify any number of words .
PROGRAM
I
03;
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
00003
(EDIT)
NOO03
(3) to
4. 6.4
(1) Depress
the page
key and the
designate
the word
immediately
portion
to be added.
G50 X1OO. ZIOO. ;
GOO TO1O1;
G96 S150 M03;
X20.3
21.5;
20.5:
z-10.5
F5;
11
G01Z0,5F20
1
*Keylin
8
PROGRAM
I
L
I
03;
N1
N2
N3
~5
N6
PART PROGRAMS
A part
program
is added
in the EDIT
the PROG
function
by the operations
which
follow
the operations
of 4. 6.2
And Checking
Stored
Part Programs.
(EDIT)
cursor
before
key to
the
Depress
the address
key and data key to
key in the word
to be added.
Within
the
limit of 32 characters,
the data may extend
over
multiple
words
or blocks.
(3)
Depress
the
INSRT
key.
The keyed-in
data is added
to the portion
immediately
after
the word
designated
by
the cursor.
After
the addition,
the added
word
is in the designated
state.
After insertion
00003 NOO03
(4)
050 X1OO, Z1OO,;
GOO TO1O1;
G96 S150 M03;
GO1 ZO.5 F20;
Z-10.5 F5;
mode and
shown
below
Displaying
(2)
i
I
ADDING
Repeat
to ~dd
the
any
operations
n-umber of
of (1)
words.
through
(3)
I
IS K
RDY
~.
Fig. 4.47
—
L1
After !nsertlon
I
Fig. 4.48
181
4. 6.5
DELETING
Part
and
program
the PROG
(1)
Deleting
PART PROGRAM
blocks
are
function.
BLOCKS
deleted
(Before deleting)
in the
EDIT
mode
words
Perform
the operations
the operations
of 4.6.2
Checking
Stored
Part
below
which
Displaying
—
Programs:
a.
Depress
designate
the page
key and the cursor
the word to be deleted.
b.
Depress
the
ERASE
follow
And
key
to
key.
EOB
The word
designated
by the cursor
is deleted.
After
the deletion,
the word
subsequent
to the deleted
word
is in the designated
state.
c.
(2)
Repeat
the
any number
Deleting
b.
one block
may
operations:
Depress
the page key
to position
the cursor
block
Depress
of
a.
and
b.
1
1
to delete
f
blocks
Data of
following
a.
operations
of words.
ERASE
to be
be
deleted
by
and the cursor
to the head of
the
key
the
(After deleting)
deleted.
EOB
All data of the
sor are deleted.
then
block
Note :
If the cursor
is
of the block
to be deleted
the
key are depressed,
position
to “; “ code are
also deleted,
the words
ed in the next
block.
Fig. 4.49
ERASE.
designated
by
the
cur-
positioned
to the middle
and EOB key and ERASE
data from the cursor
deleted.
Since
1’; “ is
left undeleted
are includ-
(3)
The data from the word where the cursor is
located, to the block pointed by the sequence
number specified by ~**** can be erased as
follows.
a. Enter address .N followed by the destination
sequence number, in the program screen.
b. Then,
depress the
a
MS=
key, and the block
The cursor will be
to hi**** are erased.
displayed at the head of the block next to the
erased block.
When N**** is at the end of the program, the
cursor will be displayed at the last address of
the block immediately before the erased block.
If N**** cannot be found, a !INOT FOI.JND1l
alarm will appear on the original screen.
182
(4)
Deleting
program
A program
4. 7.1
number
number
is deleted
by
the
following
(1)
Select
the
EDIT
PROG
the
registered
function
or ALM
program
function.
No.
of
C. Depress
the PROG
do Depress
number.
“O” key and key-in the program
e. Depress
the ERASE
key.
Deleting all program
numbers
the
operation.
EDIT
are
deleted
by
Power
d.
Select the EDIT
e.
Depress
the
the
key.
function
c.
Keyin
d.
Depress
PROG
function
key
or
to see
if
function key.
the
external
equipment
is
Depress
the
RESET
key.
“O” key and key in program
number
key.
PART PROGRAM AND NC DATA OUTPUT
OPERATIONS
4.7
The following data, which are stored in the NC
internal memory, may be sent to the external
equipment through the data input /output iter–
face (option) :
the
OUT
key.
The part program of the keyed-in program
number is output to the external equipment.
If it is a tape puncher, tape punch is perWhen the output of the part proformed.
gram is completed, the tape puncher stops
automatically. During the output of data,
!!
OUT” is flashing.
All registered
program
numbers
and part
programs
are deleted.
However,
only proregistered
with
g“ram number
“ O“ is newly
EOB not deleted.
. Part
mode.
the PROG
i. Depress
ERASE
for
ALM
O, -9999.
the
relay
on the NC.
h. Depress
b. Depress
equipment
ready.
g.
mode.
external
c.
f. Check
All program
numbers
following
operations:
the
such as
the data
function key.
The keyed–in program number and the corresponding part program are deleted.
a. Select
the designated
program
out by the following
Connect
the external
equipment
the tape puncher
to the NC via
input /output
interface.
b. Make
(5)
of
TO PAPER TAPE
mode.
a.
b. Display
PART PROGRAM
The part program
number
is punched
operations
:
operations:
a.
OUTPUTTING
j. To discontinue
the punch
out operation,
depress
the RESET
key.
However,
the
discontinued
operation
cannot
be resumed.
Go back to f. and repeat
the operations
all
over
again.
Note :
When
RESET,
OUT
are
operated
keying
in the program
number,
the
of the currently
displayed
program
outputted.
without
part program
number
is
program
. Tool offset value
. Setting data and parameter
When the external
equipment
has the tape
punch
feature,
the data may be punched
out;
when it has the print
feature,
the data may be
For the methods
of setting
the
printed
out.
input /output
equipment
(setting
#6003) and the
baud rate
(parameters
#6026 through
#6029)
through
this data input /output interface,
refer
to “YASNAC-LX
3 Maintenance
Manual. “
(2)
Punch
out
of
all part
programs
AH registered
to the external
part programs
may be output
equipment
by the above
O-9999
mustbe
operations
except
that
keyed
in the operation
of h.
AH part programs
stored
in the memory
are
output
(punched
out,
etc. ) consecutively.
183
.
4. 7.1
OUTPUTTING
A PART PROGRAM
TO PAPER
4.7.3 OUTPUTTING
“TAPE (Cent’d)
SETTING/PARAMETER
DATA TO
PAPER TAPE
j~~te :
The contents of program number
are outputted only when #6231D 3 = 1.
00000
Setting/parameter
data may
the following operations.
be punched
out by
(1)
Connect the external equipment such as the
tape puncher to the NC via the data inputl
output interface.
Tool offsets may be output to paper tape by the
following operations:
(2)
Make the external equipment
operation.
( 1)
Connect the external equipment such as the
tape puncher to the NC via the data input/
output interface.
(3)
Power
(4)
Select the EDIT
(2)
Make the external equipment
operation.
(5)
{ 3)
Power
Depress the PRM function key if the output
of both setting data and parameter is de–
sired. If the output of only setting data is
desired, depress the SET function key.
(4)
Select the EDIT
(6)
Check to see if the external equipment
ready.
( 5)
~Jepress the OF S function key.
(7)
Depress
the RESET
(6)
Check to see if the external equipment
ready.
(8)
Depress
the OUT
47, 2 OUTPUTTING
TOOL
OFFSETS
TO PAPER TAPE
ready for
on the NC.
mode.
(7)
Depress
the RESET
(8)
Depress
the OUT
key.
key.
To discontinue the punch out operation,
depress the RESET
key. However, the discontinued operation cannot be resued.
Go
back to (6) and repeat the operations all
over again. The format of the punched out
tape is the same as that of the tape described
in-4.4.4,
184
(l).
on the NC .
mode.
is
key.
is
All contents of the offset memory such as
tool offsets and tool coordinate data are outputted to the external equipment.
If the
external equipment is a tape puncher, tape
punch out is performed.
When the output
of the data is completed, the external equipment stops automatically.
(9)
ready for
key .
All setting data and parameters are output
to the external equipment,
If it is a tape
puncher, tape punch out operation is performed.
When the output oi the data is
completed, the external equipment stops
automatically.
(9)
all over
out tape
described
To discontinue
the punch
out operation,
depress
the RESET
key.
However,
the discontinued
Go back
operation
and
cannot
repeat
to (6)
a
OUT
be resumed.
the operations
again.
The format
of the punched
is the same as that of the tape
in 4.4.5,
(1),
KEY
3 FEET
3 FEET
J
FEED
HOLES
FEED
HOLES
P
( -.
—-----
H 01 X
%
(SETTING
O/., O 01234,
Y
OUT
KEY (To PUNCH
G92
ANDIOR
TOOL OFFSET
PARAMETER
DATA
“’” ---------—
DATA)
XO—
Note
OUT ALL PART PROGRAMS)
1 FOOT
k
3 FEET
4
SPACE
CODE
‘SP
3 Feel = 36o characters
1 FOOT
PuNCHED
,
FEED
HOLES
FEED
HOLES
p--------
M02,
“/.0100
SP
M 30
0200
SP
M 30,
0500,
‘h ----------
[
I
DEPRESS
THE CAN KEY
IMMEDIATELY
WHICH
3 FEET
w
BEGIN
BEGINS
AND THE PAPER TAPE PUNCH
TO PUNCH
WITH “’O/.
“
SIGNIFICANT
DATA
DEPRESS
PUNCH
THE CAN KEY
STOPS TO PUNCH
AND THE PAPER TAPE
SPROCKET
PERFORATION
Fig. 4.50 Data and Program Formats
on Paper Tape
185
4.8
SUMMARY
OF STORING AND EDITING OPERATIONS
System I
0p3fation
Stwi ng frm
I I%k
NC operatm’s
I
~1
keyboard
panel
‘0’
i ‘ae:
Switch
/
L---
Matchingwith
tape
)(*2)
5
~-”--
Parameter number -
1
II
( * 1 )
1.
,Stcf!ngfrcm NC oparatw’s
~ Stcring
Procadure
CU_R~R
Data -, .WR
+
~ 1 StmimgfrOm tape (*l
s,
,?
Func- !
tion
RESET ~ IN
I
I
panel
keyboard
~
from @e
J&amp;
I EDIT
]
Matching
I
~
Stwiw from NC operatm’s panel keyboard
with tape
I
,/
——-––F
~ Stcring
f
from tape
—~-----
EDIT
~
Punch Oti
!
I
I
Matching with tape
r
Clear of al} offsets
I
I
-“--”T-TL
SWing from NC opefatm’s panel keybcard
I
OFF
~ ““~ ~ Program number ~ ~.
~dditim of addr=~ data4!
Repeat of edit opeatico
L–
“r%tK
F+--:”
All pert Wcgrams m’ tape
1
OFF
@@r”
-A---
Addition to registewd part
prcgram
L
E”--5999”
J!k
_—
Designated pat Wogrsm
i
P(mch
i
oti
with
----+-+-All part wogrems
,
:,s~t=-l---ETpRmRm
‘s--m
r—
~ numbar
O(*4)
~
~
;RESET
,——
— _ ~ -+ Prcgram number .—
r ,-_
,_RES~ - ~
~—-–-
----
m
Ali pert wograms
on tape
—–
~.
,~ -.
,.–-4,
,.y.
Add of address data ( * 5 )
Edit
_..
Delete of one address
.-
~ OFF
– t -+–data
Delete of one blcck ( *5)
CURSO~ (Set to address data to bs modified) -. Address
~ —_______
data - A1-~lER_;
~. ..——
.. -——
‘ CURSOR
(Set to———
address data just before addition)
~ - Address data _ ~R_T,
OFF
Mcdify of address data ( * 5 )
ii
i OFF
I
L—
—
~UEJ
,
,,
I
~OFF!
~
I
.V_Efl
(Set to
address data to be deleted) + ~“R&amp;
~ ‘@~C&amp;
(Set to address data at head of bkwk to be
~ deleted) _ ~
- [&lt;.MX
System
No.
Switch
Edit
Operation
Lc’ck
Address
1
search
Specified
Cleal
~ ode
MEM
EDIT
-–ems
I
~
search
EDIT
i
+
ALM
I
——
CURSO~
+
to be cleared
—
-—
be
searched
LERASE ~
-
‘“
ERASE
S data
to
+
“program
-–
9999-’
number
-
~“U~S-ORl
.—. —
to be searched
+
~RAS~
~:-.,
I ?-,
,
address
number
– 9999-
Addres
PROG
OFF
on tape
program
~ ~0-+
~F1
OFF
part program
All part programs
Data of the searched
MEM
EDIT
Cleal
,=
Procedure
I
I
ALM
1
—
Designated
;
~+
OFF
Address
r
m .—
n
I
tion
OddEDIT
‘p%---
part program
——————
k
Func -
Lx!@
I
Notes.
*1
If the tape contains
matched
*2
When
setting information,
at the same
data has been
it is also stored
and
stored
Within the limit of 32 characters,
addition of multiple address
data and the change to one address data are permitted,
from
a parameter
tape,
turn the
power
on and off.
*3
Setting
is punched
*4
Storing of a part program having a program number different from
~ogram
*5
time.
out at the same
*6
When the cursor
to the address
data in the middle
block and EOB and ERASE
keys are depressed,
following
is deleted,
the cursor
position
of a
the data
time.
number O on tape is performed by the same operation as
for “tape without Wogram number ‘J.”
5. MACHINE
5.1 SWITCHING
STATION
CONTROL
(3)
UNITS ON THE CONTROL
STATION
TAPE
Fig.
5.1 shows
a typical
layout
on the machine
control
station.
fer to the machine
tool builder’s
of switching
For details,
units
re-
SELECT
This
switch
system
and
DLE,
TAPE,
selects
operation
mode of the NC
consists
of 6 positions
(JOG,
HAN–
MDI,
MEM, EDT) .
operating
the
JOG
PUSHBUTTON
the
NC
(6)
the part
program
EDT : To store
.ory and edit the part progra-m.
the
system
into
mem-
FEED
HOLE
7. D=
L
!-!
b
To feed
the tool by opera–
HANDLE/STEP:
ting the manual
pulse
generator’f.
Where
the control
is not provided
with a manual
pulse
generator,
the tool is fed by step
manually
control
tape.
control
MEM : ‘To automatically
with the stored
part program.
CYCLE
(2)
NC
(5)
START
by
by
automatically
the block
of data through
MDI : To enter
the DATA
keyboard
and control
the system
automatically
with the data.
SWITCH
To feed the tool continuously
JOG:
Feedrate
is set
manual operation.
FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE
switch.
with
(4)
manual.
5. 1.1 MODE
(1)
To
:
sY5tem
la
MDI
MEM
HANDLEI
@)
STEP
0
EDT
JOG
RAPID
(S),
187
5.1, 1 MODE SELECT SWITCH
CYCLE
FEED
START
HOLD
o
( Cent’d )
MODE
SELECT
MOI
TAPE
bJIQ
g
HANOLE/
STEPt
MEM
EOT
g
JOG
133~
DISpLAY
G50
g
‘OcK@&amp;N(~RN
MANUAL
INTERRUPTION
POINT RETURN
POINT
Q
OFF
X-AXIS
AuT
FUNCTION
LOCK
●
@
OPTIONAL
BLOCK
SKIP
SINGLE
BLOCK
MANUAL
ABSOLUTE
EOIT
LOCK
OvERRIOE
CANCEL
PROGRAM
RESTART
MIRROR
lMAGEt
OFF
Q@
OFF
@@l
‘E%
AUTO MODE
HAN DLE
OFF SETt
OFF
FEEDRATE
HANDLEt
+
o
0
DI
HANDLE
AXISt
RATE OVERRIDE
x 100
x 10
xl
v
RAPID TRAVERSE
MANUAL
PULSE MULTIPLY
.
m
50
x 1000
25
x 10.000
x 100.000
o@
100
c’~
REFERNCE
,
STOP
RAPID
RESET
❑
\
o
ml
POIN1
X2
Oa
u
+2
ma
REFERENCE
RETuRN
–z
o
0
●
●
JOG
EMERGENCY
OVERRIDE
&amp;JOG
FEEDRATE
@
OFF
SPINOLE
SPEED
OVERRIDEt
90
120
0,6
50 @
CUTTING
OEPTH
OVERRIDE FOR
G?] AND G72t
●
POSITION
STOREt
POINT
❑
m
o
% 200
Fig. 5, 1
5. 1.2 CYCLE START PUSHBUll_ON AND LAMP
Depress this pushbutton to start the system in
the automatic operation mode (TAPE, MDI and
MEM)
The CYCLE
START
indicating lamp lights
when automatic operation starts. Depress it
again to start the operation after temporary stop
by operating FEED HOLD
pushbutton or MODE
SELECT
switch.
5. 1.3 FEED HOLD PUSHBU~ON
AND LAMP
Depress this pushbutton to temporarily stop autoSTART
lamp goes
matic operation. The CYCLE
off and the FEED HOLD
lamp remains illuminated
during temporary stop .
When the FEED HOLD
pushbutton
is depressed during
feed operation,
the feedrate
is de–
creased
immediately
and the motion
is stopped.
Feedhold
is not active
during
threadcutting
by
G32, G92, or G76 or dwell by G04.
Rapid
thread
pull-up
and retracting
motion
at G 92 and G 76
commands
cannot
be interrupted.
However,
when
the NC is provided
with a
“THREADING
FEED HOLD “ (option)
, the tool
feed
can be stopped
temporarily
even
during
thread
cutting
by the G 92 or G76 command.
If it is depressed
while M-, S-,
tion without
move command
is being
the FEED HOLD
lamp will light,
but
tions
will be executed
continuously.
tion of the function,
the lamp
chine
operation
is stopped.
goes
or T-funcexecuted,
these
funcOn compleoff
and
ma-
Depress the CYCLE
START
pushbutton to
restart the operation after temporary stop by
operating FEED HOLD
pushbutton.
188
5,1.4
EMERGENCY
STOP
5.1.6
PUSHBU~ON
Depress
this pushbutton
to emergency-stop
the
machine.
The servo
power
is turned
off and
the machine
is stopped
immediately
by dynamic
brake.
The RDY indication
will disappear
NC
ALARM
lamp lights
and alarm code
“ 330” is
displayed.
To restart
the system
after
take the following
procedure.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Turn
the
clockwise
emergency
stop,
EMERGENCY
STOP
pushbutton
to release
the locking.
Depress the RESET
replaces “330. “
This
switch
is used
ated.
For operation
“ Handle
Dial t .“
5.1.7
switch
is
(1)
Select
the
sponding
HANDLE
(2)
Turn on the servo power again by depressing POWER
ON pushbutton.
NC ALARM
LAMP is extinguished and READY
lamp
lights up.
to select
an axis to be operof the switch,
see
5.1.5,
MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY SELECT SWITCH +
This
key . Alarm code “31O”
The operation is effective in the reverse order
of steps (2) and (3) . Use this switch also for
turning off the system.
HANDLE AXIS SELECT SWITCH ‘
used
value
from
to a single
dial in the
Select
the move
6.2 corresponding
JOG
to:
pushbutton
Table
6. 1.7.1
corre-
graduation
of
HANDLE
mode.
the
amount
( 1 step)
from
to each depression
in the
STEP
Table
of
mode.
5.1.8 HANDLE DIALS FOR SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL
OF UP TO TWO AXES+
When a manual pulse
generator
is connected
each axis,
the tool can be manually
moved
selected
two axes simultaneously.
for
along
EMERGENCY
STOP
(1)
The tool move distance
per graduation
of the
HANDLE
dial for the manual pulse
generator
is determined
by the MANUAL
PULSE
MULTIPLY
switch
(Table
6.1) .
This
switch
is effective
on all the three
axes,
(2)
Set the mode select
switch
to HANDLE,
turn the HANDLE
dials for the desired
in the positive
or negative
direction.
RESET
o
5. I. 5 HANDLE DIAL+ (MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR)
The dial used as a manual pulse generator to
feed the tool manually with the MODE
SELECT
HANDLE
operation
switch set to the HANDLE.
is effective for an axis. Procedure of HANDLE
operation is as follows:
.
Q
and
axes
HANDLEt
(1)
Set the
MODE
SELECT
switch
to the
HAN-
DLE .
(2)
Select
AXIS
the axis to be operated
select
switch.
(3)
Set the
dial by
switch.
(4)
Rotate
with
HANDLE
move amount
per graduation
of the
setting
MANUAL
PULSE
MULTIPLY
(See Table
6.1. )
the
dial
to move
the
selected
0
HANDLE
AXISt
MANUAL
PULSE MULTIPLY
x I 00
x 1(J
xl
v
@
.
x
1000
x 10.000
x 100000
axis.
Turning
it clockwise
causes
the axis to move
The axis moves
in the
in the plus direc~ion.
minus direction
by turning
it counterclock–
wise.
189
~
,s HANDLE
1,
DIALS
SIMULTANEOUS
FOR
CONTROL
5.1 .8.1
Handle
Interpolation
5.1 .8.2
General
Function
OF UP TO TWO AXES+ ( Cent’d )
Table
5. I
Selection of Move Amount in the
HANDLE Mode+
&gt;1
Inch
Metric
xl
x
10
x
x
100
x
x
Icooo
Icclooo
0.001 mmlgraduation
0.0001
0.01
0.001
mmfgraduation
When the handle interpolation mode is commanded
while executing the program under memory mode,
tape mode, or MD I mode, the handle can be turned
to the plus direction to control the cutting speed
of the GO1, G02, or G03 commands.
in.lgraduation
in./graduation
5.1 .8.3
(1)
1000
0.01 in.igraduation
0.1 mmtgraduation
Operation
Select the handle interpolation mode.
The mode can be set by the setting parameter
or 1/0 input.
Setting #6001 D4:
Table
5 2 Selection
of Move
Mode
in the STEP
\\
xl
Amount
Metric
Inch
0.001 mmjstep
-.
----0.01 mmlstep
0.0001 in.jstep
1/0
=-4=----x 10
0.1 mmlstep
—..
0.01 in.istep
x 103O
1.0 mmlstep
0.1 inlstep
10000
10.0 mmlstep
;
1.0 in.lstep
;
10.0 in.lstep
—------~
x
+
ICOOOO
--
100.0 mmfstep
(2)
(3)
X HANDLE+
1 = Enable handle
interpolation mode
O = Disable handle
interpolation mode
Depress
ItF!t blinks
the cycle start button.
to
stop the machine before
executing the GO1
(4)
Z HANDLEt
#13066:
0.001 in.lstep
x 100
x
signal
1 = Enable handIe
interpolation mode
O = Disable handle
interpolation mode
(or G02, G03) program.
Turn the handle to the plus side, to perform
cutting interpolation for as long as the handle
The F command is overridden in
is turned,
proportion to the handle rotation speed.
The relation between the handle rotation
speed and the override is set in parameter
#6349.
mm
~\J
For Z-ax,s
Far Xax, S
MANUAL
PULSE MULTIPLv
x 1O(I
x il)oo
x 10
xl
4$)
.
(Example)
Jihen the relation between the rotation speed of
the handle and the override is “1 rotation/second =
100%” , the rate becomes as follows.
x 10000
x 100 00(1
Parameter
#6009 D4 can permit
setting
any
multiplication
factor
when MANUAL
PULSE
MULTIPLY
switch
is set at X1OO.
Multiplication
factor
is set by parameter
#6223.
Parameter #6349 = 100 (pulses/second)
1 rotationlsecond or more
0.5 rotations/second
0.01
Less
rotations/second
than O.001 rotations/second
100%
’50%
1%
stop
(5)
The move stops when the ‘nandle is stopped
or when turned to the minus side.
(6)
Turn off the handle interpolation mode
the cutting ends.
When 50 is set for #6223, Xl, X1O,
Example:
x50, can be set.
when
Notes :
1.
190
The move has no disconnection if the handle
is turned faster than O.2 rotationlsecond, ‘out
the move is disconnected if the handle is
turned slower than O.2 rotationlsecond.
2,
When the handle
interpolation
off during
handle
interpolation,
move distance
is executed
by
mode is turned
the remaining
the F command.
3.
When there
are two handles
(2-handle
specification)
, the 1st handle
alone is enabled.
4.
Handle
cutting.
interpolation
5,
There
handle
is no need
interpolation.
6.
The handle
interpolation
during
automatic
mode
7.
The override
is normally
regardless
of the setting
selection
switch.
5.1.10 JOG FEEDRATE SWITCH AND FEEDRATE OVERRIDE SWITCH
In
8.
is
to
disabled
select
during
the
handle
thread
axis
for
mode is disregarded
handle
offset.
commanded
on the feed
override
automatic
operation
mode
(TAPE,
MEM,
The JOG FEEDRATE
switch
is used to select
the
of
Up to 32 steps
jog feedrate
in the JOG mode.
feedrate
can be specified.
Jog feedrate
depends
For definite
values,
refer
on the machine
tool.
See Table
to the machine
tool builder’s
manual.
5.1.10.
The JOG feedrate
can be preset
by
parameters
#6233 to 6264.
dry run,
During
dry r&lt;n
according
selection
feedrate.
the override
changes
by the
Thus,
-the override
varies
speed.
to the setting
on the feed
override
switch
and the setting
of the rapid
the
MDI) , this switch
is used to adjust
the feedrate
by 10% from O to 200% of the programmed
feedrate
specified
with an F function
at whatever
position
the switch
may be set.
Feed during
tapping
by
G 32, G92, and G76 follows
F command.
Where
OVERRIDE
CANCEL
switch
is set on, the tool will
be moved
at the programmed
feedrate
by F code
regardless
of switch
setting.
5.1.9
JOG PUSHBUTTONS AND RAPID Pushbutton
This
pushbutton
(1)
With any of pushbuttons
+X, -X,
+Z, or -Z
with RAPID
button
depressed,
the axis can
be moved
rapidly
until the button
is released.
(2)
These
pushbuttons
speed
set by JOG
JOG mode.
(3)
Each time the pushbutton
is depressed
in
the STEP
mode,
the tool is moved
by the
value
per step set by MANUAL
PULSE
MULMaximum
feedrate
per
TIPLY
select
switch.
step is determined
by parameter
# “ 6222. ”
is
used
to feed
the
move the
FEEDRATE
tool
manually.
FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE
o
&amp; JOG FEEDRATE
0
?3
tool at the
switch
in the
Notes :
1.
JOG pushbuttons
ously .
work
on two
axes
simultane-
JOG
RAPID
2.
Parameter
#6009 D 3 can provide JOG command
instead of RAPID command until reference
point return for each axis is completed after
the power is turned on. In the reference
point return mode, usual RAPID operation is
executed in both negative and positive directions.
191
5.1.10 JOG FEEDRATE SWITCH AND FEEDRATE OVERIRIDE SWITCH ( Cent’d )
Tab Ie 5.3 Jog Speed and Feedrate Override
Feedrate
Step
Override
0“/0
t
1’
2
--1
3
4
5
—.
t
I
t
6
7
I
+
I
Jcg Feedrate
—.—
-.–—
mm\min
Parameter No.
,
1
0
=6233
10“/0
fi6234
20%
?6235
———
i __
g6236
40%
+6237
—
RAPID TRAvERSE
2
~ATE OVERRIDE
---,7:
_
50%
: 60”/0
Parameter #6018 D2 can provide six steps of traverse rates of “1OO%, 50%, 25%, 10%, 5%, and FO. “
::+&amp;
I
+
z
5.1.12
i~--100%
+
11
I
+
12
i
I
I
26243
120”/0
130%
=+=
x6246
140%
D6247
~
60
150”/0
116248
~
al
160&deg;1.
36249
I
18
-“+
19
~
190”/0
:~
20
–+
;
200%
21
I
22
;
—t
—–
170%
33
24
———$
:
26
———
0%
100%.
5.1.13
SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE SWITCH +
“1~
~
150
——–
---200
=6252
-~
--—
250
?6253
——+.-—––.
36254
300
——
;. -...___
400
z6255
!
–—~—.
.–—
z 6256
500
—————
:6257
600
:6259
CAh CEL
-—
“J;*
x6251
OVERRIDE
@
ICX3
12C0
28
29
26262
2000
30
z 6263
2500
31
26264
3000
With this switch, the current spindle speed can
be changed to an override speed which is set at
10% intervals between 50 and 120% of the current
spindle speed.
SPINDLE
SPEED
OVERRIDEt
w
50
12[1
“,,
@
Is
Parameter
#6018 D1 can provide
override
function
in increments
of 10% between
10% and 200%.
800
. . ..—
1000
~6260
———
16261
27
at
50
‘---
+
26258
25
FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE
CANCEL
the function
of FEED RATE
OVER-
40
~
1 &amp;lo/o
on the
prevents
RIDE switch.
Feedrate
is fixed
“62M+...=
=6245
~
t
;
‘-
Turning
switch
25
—~--
+
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CANCEL SWITCH
:*
110”/0
t
17
This switch is used to adjust the traverse rate
by FO, 25, 50 and 100%. 100% Rate is the rapid
traverse rate set by parameter #6280 and #6281.
The switch is effective both in automatic operation including G 00 command
and in manual operation (RAPID m~de) . FO is set by parameter
#6231.
1
3=
300/o
5.1.11RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE SWITCH
..
5.1.14 MANUAL
REFERENCE
POINT
RETURN
SWITCH
‘
1500
Note:
JOG feedrate depends on the machine tool
For definite values, refer to the machine tool
builder’s manual.
This switch is for bringing the tool back to the
reference point manually.
For its operation method, refer to 6.2.1
Return To Reference Point.
Manual
5.1.15
REFERENCE POINT
LAMPS
These
lamps indicate
that the tool is positioned
They
light
when the tool
on the reference
point.
is brought
to the reference
point
through
the
manual or automatic
return
to reference
point
( G28) , or by the reference
point
return
check
(G 27) , and goes out as the tool moves
away from
the reference
point
by a subsequent
operation.
REFERENCE
POINT
5.1.18 DRY RUN SWITCH
Turning on the DRY RUN switch in the TAPE,
MDI or MEM mode causes the tool to move at the
speed selected by the JOG FEED RATE switch,
ignoring
all programmed
F–functions.
F commands can be displayed
as they
are programmed.
This
switch
may be used to check
the program.
:a
Q
REFERENCE
2. With the control provided with the optional
block skip B function~, 8 independent blocks
can be skipped with the switching of the
switches corresponding to “/2“ through “/9.“
POINT
RETURN
Rapid
traverse
can be set by
@
( GOO)
setting
rate for dry run operation
parameter
# “6006D2. “
oFF
Rapid
Parameter
5.1.16
SINGLE BLOCK SWITCH
#“6006
With this switch
turned
on, individual
block-byblock
operation
is obtained.
A block
of data is
executed
each time the CYCLE
START
pushbut–
In the automatic
operation
ton is activated.
mode,
the machine
stops
by turping
on this
switch
after
finishing
the current
block.
Traverse
at
Dry Run Operation
Dz”
O
I
Rapid
traverse
rate
i
Notes :
1.
SINGLE
BLOCK
Switching
the
matic operation
current
block.
becomes
2.
DRY RUN switch
during
autobecomes
effective
on the
Switching
it in mm/rev
mode
effective
on the next
block.
Rapid
traverse
rate override
tive
during
dry run operation.
is kept
effec-
5.1,17 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP SWITCH
DRY
This
switch
including
selects
a “/”
whether
is disregarded
the
data
or
RUN
in blocks
not.
OFF
(1)
(2)
While the switch
is on, all the commands
in
a block
programmed
after
a “ /” are neglected. However,
block
data appearing
before
the “ /” remains
effective.
While this switch
is off,
blocks
including
a
“/” are executed
along
with other
blocks.
This
switch
is ineffective
on the block
under
execution
and blocks
stored
in the advance–
When this switch
is turned
reading
buffer.
on during
an automatic
operation
cycle,
it
works
on the block
read
after
the switching
on has occured.
OPTIONAL
5.1.19
DISPLAY LOCKIMACHINE
LOCK SWITCH
This switch functions to stop updating the
position EXTERNAL
display, or to stop move
command pulses to the servos . Stop the
machine to operate the switch.
“OFF”
Usual operation
is made at “OFF”
position
in both
manual and automatic
operation.
The machine
and position
EXTERNAL
display
operate
according
to the command by CYCLE
START
operation
or
manual operation
.
BLOCK
SKIP
“DISPLAY
OFF
Notes :
1. The two commands
lent.
LOCK”
This position
is used to exclude
the tool movement value
from the display.
Universal
display
is not updated,
though
the machine
moves.
“/” and “/1“ are equiva-
193
5.1.19
DISPLAY LOCKIMACHINE
“MACHINE
LOCK
SWITCH
( Cent’d
When the command
of the next block is GOO
or GO1, the tool moves automatically to the
coordinate specified by the program.
)
LOCK”
With the switch
at MACHINE
LOCK,
axis movement including
Zero Return
is inhibited.
The
position
display
is updated.
M-, S-,
and TThis position
is selectfunctions
are executed.
ed to preset
the display
or to check
the tape data.
Then the operation is performed
to block of data.
When the command
of the next
block
is G02
or G 03 (circular
interpolation)
, the interpolation
is performed
in parallel
with program command.
The tool automatically
returns
to the target
coordinate
when
GOO or
GO1 is commanded
after
the interpolation.
OFF
DISPLAY
LOCK
/@l
MACHINE
LOCK
e
according
REST OF
ACTUAL
TRAVEL COMMAND
MOVEMENT
TAPE COMMAND
/’
4
TRAVEL TO TARGET
5.1.20
M-FUNCTION LOCK SWITCH
FUNCTION LOCK)
(AUXILIARY
(1)
When the M–FUNCTION
LOCK
switch
is on,
it ignores
the M, S, and T commands.
To
check
the tape data,
the operation
by the
switch
is used in combination
with MACHINE
LOCK
function.
STOP
(FEED HOLD)
Fig. 5.2
Tool Movement
ABSOLUTE
with MANUAL
Switch On
M-FUNCTION
LOCK
(2)
O-FF
(2)
The following
the switch
is
M codes
set on.
are
executed
even
When
MANUAL
After
the
MOO, MO1,
M02,
automatic
if
b.
BCD
(3)
(4)
decoded
signals
and
out to the machine.
M90 to M109
code
in parallel
(Internal
is not
processing
sent
(1)
MANUAL
When
ABSOLUTE
MANUAL
not
.
BCD
codes
with
ACTJAL
TRAVEL cOMMAND
M code)
program
command,
/
MOVEMENT
TAPE COMMAND
‘;::&amp;@yfl=RGOICOAMA.D
affect
CIRGJLAR
/’
TEMPORARY
LOCK
switch
becomes
effecnext block
of
STOP
‘-
(FEED HOLD)
MANUAL
S 4-digit
@
oFF
pro-
Tool Movement
ABSOLUTE
SWITCH
ABSOLUTE
“1..
INTERPOLATION
ABSOLUTZ
switch
with MANUAL
Switch Off
is on.
5.1.22
When automatic
operation
is restarted
after
interrupted
by manual operation,
the tool
performs
the rest of the command
in the
interrupted
block
from the end point
of
The tool moves
in paralmanual operation.
lel with the path specified
by the program.
194
is interrupted
out.
Turning
on the M-FUNCTION
during
automatic
operation
tive on the block
after
the
the current
block.
This
switch
does
gramming
(option)
its
Fig. 5.3
5.1.21
operation
is off
M30
REST OF
Both its
are sent
switch
by manual operation,
the coordinate
system
is shifted.
Therefore
the tool performs
the
reset
of the travel
command
and continues
OperatiOn
a.
ABSOLUTE
When
EDIT LOCK SWITCH
EDIT
operations
)!
EDIT
LOCK
switch
cannot
work,
the
is ON,
If operation
following
is made,
LOCKII blinks,
(1)
ERASE,
(2)
Storing
INSERT,
of
NC
AND
tape
ALTER
keys
5.1.23
INTERLOCK
INPUT
(INTERLOCK)
INTERLOCK
INPUT
is used for stopping
the axis
Turning
movement
during
automatic
operation.
on the interlock
(closed)
during
axis movement
in automatic
operation
mode stops
the axis with
automatic
operation
activation
lamp ( STL ) lightTurning
off the interlock
resumes
the axis
ing.
motion.
The interlock
input
does not affect
the
movement
by manual operation.
5.1.27
This
X-AXIS
switch
MIRROR
is
for
IMAGE
SWITCH
turning
on the
+
MIRROR
IMAGE
function with respect to the Z axis. When this
switch is turned on, the sign of allthe X–coor–
dinate command values is reversed.
The mirror
image function
is effective
on all the X–coordinate
values
including
those
by G50.
This
switch
is
effective
ordv , while the offset
function
is can–
celled
on X–coordinate
values.
.x
YASiVA C LX3
B (ORIGINAL
c+=---
/
v
\,------\
&gt;
B’ (WHEN
‘\
\\
I
I
“G50
Point
Return
.“
G50
RETURN
OFF
S IS IN INCREMENTAL
MOVEMENT
\\\
VALUE)
AFTFR SWITCHING
ON AT A
MIX
\.
‘1)
w
G 50 POINT RETURN SWITCH +
Fig. 5.4
This switch is for returning the tool to the coordinate system setup point (where G50 has been
Droerammed)
manuallv. For its usage, refer to
~.2.~,
POINT)
z
\
5, 1.24
PROGRAMMED
A
(WHEN
B IS IN
ABSOLUTE
VALUE)
OFF
Motion with the Switch
Turned on at Point A
5.1.28
AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET SWITCH+
This is a switch for enabling tool motion through
the use of manual pulse generator. For the
usage, refer to Paragraph, 5.2.7,“Auto Mode
Handle Offset.”
AUTO
MODE
HANDLE
OFF
5, 1.25
SETt
MANUAL INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN SWITCH
Q
oFF
This
switch
is for manually
returning
the tool to
where
the NC was switched
over
from the AUTO
mode to the MANUAL
mode in order
to make intervention
with manual
control.
For the usage,
refer
to 5.2.5, “ Manual Interruption
Point
Return .“
CPRN
Q’
OFF
5.1.26
This
from
refer
5.1.29
CUTTING DEPTH
FOR G 71 AND G 72
OVERRIDE
SWITCH+
This
switch
is for effective
cutting
depth
override on the specified
depth
of cut command
D in
outside
rough
turning
cycle
(G71)
and face
rough
turning
cycle
(G72)
between
10 and 200%
at 10% increments.
However,
to make this switch
effective,
Parameter
#6023D 2 should
be set to 1
in advance.
PROGRAM RESTART SWITCH +
switch
is for restarting
the part program
any desired
sequence
No.
For the usage,
to 5.2.6, “Program
Restart
.“
PRS1
OFF
195
5.1.30
POSITION STORE PUSHBU~ON
+
(2)
FSCE
(#12184)
. . . End
of FS memory
alteration
This button switch is for directly inputting measured workpiece values.
This signal closes when the FSCH closes and
the data are reflected in the NC part
program, and opens ag~in when the FSCH
opens.
When this button is pushed, the current tool
values (position or external display values) are
stored temporarily in the register ,the MEASURED
WORKPIECE
VALUE
DIRECT
INPUT
mode is turned on, and the LED of the OF S function key
flickers. At the same time, the CRT displays
the tool offset value diagram.
(3)
5.1 .31.1
The
AUTOMATIC
EDITING
(#12233) ... End
of FS data clear
This signal closes when the FSCLR
closes and
the stored FS data are cleared, and opens
again when the FSCLR
opens.
For detailed procedure, refer to 5.2.3,“ Measured Workpiece Value Direct Inputt .“
5.1.31 FS
FSCLRE
5.1.31.3 Functions
Rough FS data can be programmed
in the NC part
program, to allow optimization of the feed override
and spindle override after actual cutting.
FUNCTION
General
The optimization data and position in the actual
cutting program can be stored in the internal
memory of the NC, and reflected in the part
program by closing the FS memory alteration
input.
effective values of the feedrate and spindle
speed during automatic operation are stored and
feed back to the NC part program to create the
The feedrate (F code) and
optimized program.
spindle speed (S code) will hereafter be referred
to as FS.
5.1 .31.4 Operation
Procedure
5.1.31.2 Input/Output
The following 1/0 signals are required for the FS
editing.
5.1.31.2.1
(1)
FSCM
Close
store
(2)
FSMEM
Input
(#13134)
editing
this signal
for FS
the FS and change
(#13135)
Close
this
to call up
(3)
. . . FS
. . . FS
signal
during
the operating
speed
data
into
FSCH
(#13136)
the
to prepare
memory.
to
FSCLR
(#13126)
. . . FS
automatic
feedrate
operation,
or spindle
(1)
FSMD
memory
Close FSCM.
(4)
Check that FSMD is output, and start the
memory operation .
(5)
Change the feedrate and spindle speed for
optimization,
(6)
Close FSMEM
completed.
(7)
Repeat
(8)
Hold the operation (label skip) .
(9)
Close FSCH.
,. .
(10)
Open
FSCH.
. . . FSCE
(11)
Open
FSCM.
. . . The
data
clear
Output
(#12183) ... During
for operation.
under
the
when
FS editing mode
When this signal is switched from “closed” to
“open” , the feeclrateand spindle speed data
are canceled.
the optimization is
(5), (6) in sequence.
change
This signal indicates that FSCM is closed, and
it is ready for FS storage and FS memory
editing.
196
(3)
ready
memory.
Close this signal to clear the stored FS data.
5.1,31.2.2
Search the operation program
memory mode.
storage
Close
this signal
while
holding
automatic
to reflect
the data called
up during
operation,
automatic
operation
in the NC part program.
(4)
Be
(2)
mode
editing,
the FS
internal
. . . FS
(1)
The execution value stored
by FSMEM
is stored in the
part program.
opens.
data stored in (5), (6)
is canceled.
5.1 ,31.5
Timing
(b)
Chart
FSCM
(PC-NC)
\N
FSMD
IN C-PC)
/
Cancel
i
FSMEM
(PC-NC)
11
+
200ms
or
data
n
H
n
Internal
more
FSCH
(PC-NC)
‘“A
Change
(NC-PC)
NC
part
A
/-
(a)
FSCLRE
(NC-PC)
5.1 .31.6
Clear
Example
of
FS
data
The following two editing pat ems are available,
by switching parameter #6008 D6 .
Edit F and S each time
(a)
(Before editing)
#6008 D6 = o)
01000;
N1 G28 UO WO;
N2 G50 TS1OO;
N3 TO1O3:
N4 G40 G’97 G99 S1500 M08;
N5 GOO X43.236
Z1O. M03;
N6 Z1. ;
N7 GO1 X39.216
Z-6.5
F.15;
-F override
80%, S override
110% FSMEM closed
N8 X38,864;
N9 G03 X18.
Z-20.142
R19.85;
-F override
60%, S override
100% FSMEM closed
N1O GO1 Z-20.5;
Nll
X12.
Z-22.232;
-F override
50%, S override
80% FSMEM closed
N12 G40 X1 O. F1. ;
Edit
F and S backward
(#6008 D6 = 1)
(Before editing)
01000;
N1 G28 UO WO;
N2 G50 TS1OO;
N3 TO1O3;
N4 G40 G97 G99 S1500 M08;
N5 GOO X43.236
Z1O. M03;
N6 Z1.;
N7 GO1 X39.216
Z-6.5
F. 15;
Editing
(1)
S1500;
The F and S are edited back to the block
where the FSMEM
closed the last time.
FSCLR
,,,,
editing)
program
(2)
(PC-NC)
(After
01000;
N1 G28 UO WO;
N2 G50 TS1OO;
N3 TO1O3;
N4 G40 G97 G99 S1500 M08;
N5 GOO X43.236
Z1O. M03;
N6 Z1. ;
N7 GO1 X39.216
Z-6.5
F.12
S1650;
-F override
80%,
S override
110%
N8 X38.864;
N9 G03 X18.
Z-20,142
R19.85
F.09
-F override
60%,
S override
100%
N1O GO1 Z-20.5;
Nll
X12.
Z-22.232
F,08
S1200;
-F override
50%,
S override
80%
N12 G40 X1O, F1. ;
-F override 80%, S override
110% FSMEM
closed
N8 X38.864;
N9 G03 X18. Z-20.142 R19.85;
-F override 60%, S override
100% FSMEM
closed
N1O GO1 Z-20.5;
Nll X12. Z-22.232;
-F override 50%, S override
80% FSMEM
closed
N12 G40 X1O. F1. ;
(b)
(After editing)
01000;
N1 G28 UO WO;
N2 G50 TS100;
N3 TO1O3;
N4 G40 G97 G99 S1200 M08;
-S override 80% is reflected
N5 GOO X43.236
N6 Z1. ;
N7
Z1O. M03;
GO1 X39.216
Z-6.5
F.08;
-F override
50% is reflected
N8 X38.864;
N9 G03 X18. Z-20.142 R19.85;
N1O GO1 Z-20.5;
Nll X12. Z-22.232;
N12 G40 X1O. F1. ;
197
5.1
31.7
Conditions
of the Specifications
to Perform
11.
FS Editing
Warning occurs if editing is performed with
the FSMD closed, after the FS editing is
completed.
(1)
Conditions for the FS data to be stored in the
internal memory
(a)
FSMD
(b)
It is during automatic operation (STL
closed) .
(c)
The execution values of the feedrate and
spindle speed are stored at the rise of the
FSMEM.
(cl)
All the data stored in (3) are canceled at the
fallof the FSCM.
(1)
Set
(e)
The maximum
count of storage (count of the
FSMEM)
is 128 times.
(2)
Manually
5.2
is being output
is
5. 2.1
MANUAL
PROCEDURE
RETURN
Conditions for the FS data to be reflected in
the part program
(a)
FSMD
(b)
Automatic operation is being held.
skip. )
(Label
the mode
move
When the FSMEM
is closed in the subprogram,
the FS data are inserted in the subprogram
itself. This needs special attention, as the
subprogram may also “be called from other
programs.
3.
The FS editing of the multiple repetitive cycle
can be performed in the outer form rough
cutting cycle alone.
4.
When the FSMEM
is closed during constant
surface speed control, the F of the “closed”
block is changed but not the S.
5.
The cycle start button is disabled while the
FSCH is closed.
6.
The F and S data are stored if the FSMEM
closed during cutting.
The S data are stored if the FSMEM
during rapid feed.
is closed
8.
Warning is given if the FSMEM
is closed for
No more data are stored
128 times or more.
by closing the FSMEM.
9.
Closing the FSCM during automatic operation
does n-etclose the F S MD-.
10,
Cycle start cannot be enabled while the
FSMEh4 is closed.
some
Keep
the JOG button
for the return
direction depressed.
The tool starts
to move as
in the normal
manual
control,
but the speed
is decelerated
at the deceleration
point,
and
stops
POINT
automatically
RETURN
at the
Then, the REFERENCE
relevant axis lights.
(6)
After
the second
reference
point
return,
the
operation
will be the same as positioning.
Parameter
#601 O (M ZRNHS)
permits
the same
operation
as that when
the power
was first
turned
on.
DECELERATION
POINT
refer-
(5)
lamp for the
POINT
I
\
PATIO TRA\; ERSE RATE
ADp RGAc H spE~D
::6280
= 626’ ]
---APEA A
7.
to a position
(4)
-i
is
tool
Turn on the REFERENCE
switch,
the motion
ence point.
2.
the
or JOG.
(3)
Notes :
When the FSMEM
is closed two or more times
in a single block, the newer feedrate and
spindle speed become effective. The FSMEM
count is not counted up.
select switch to RAPID
distance
away from the reference
point.
When the tool is within
the range
A shown
below,
it can be brought
back to the reference point
in the normal
way,
as described
below.
is being output.
When the FSCH turns open + close under the
above conditions, the FS data are inserted in
each block, according to the stored data.
198
POINr
TO REFERENCE
With this function, the tool is returned to the
reference point manually. The procedure is as
follows.
(2)
1.
OPERATION
IJl
i
I
ZERO
ARE4 B
,
PO IN’
SIGN
5.2.2
Notes :
1,
As long as the power
is turned
on, either
the manual or the automatic
return
to reference point
can be initiated,
regardless
of the
tool position,
but the tool will not return
to
the reference
point
accurately
if the tool is
Be sure
started
from a point
in the area B.
to bring
the tool into the area A before
initiating
a manual or automatic
return
mo–
tion.
2.
Once the tool is returned
to the reference
point,
the point
C is stored,
and if the reference return
motion
is initiated
from a point
in
as an error.
the area B , this is regarded
Start
the reference
return
motion
from a position in the area A.
3.
once
the tool is returni?d
to the reference
point,
it can not be further
moved
in the
same direction
unless
the REFERENCE
POINT
RETURN
switch
is turned
off.
4.
While the
reference
5.
Do not return
the tool to the reference
point
by the manual
reference
point
return
function,
while
the buffer
is loaded
with blocks
read in advance
of execution,
because
the
stored
motion
data will be erased
by the
reference
point
return
motion.
AUTOMATIC COORDINATE SYSTEM SEITING
+
With this function,
a new coordinate
system
is
set up automatically
upon the return
of the tool
to the reference
point
by the manual reference
point
return
function.
The coordinates
of the
new origin
are preset
eters.
The coordinate
function
is equivalent
(1)
Parameters
with the following
param–
system
set up by this
to the ones set up by G 50.
for
metric
for
inch
system
=
(2)
Parameters
system
MACHINE
LOCK
switch
is on, the
point
return
function
is ineffective.
Parameter
(3)
~.
h
Axis
both
Meaning
#6630
X-axis
cmrdinate
#6631
Z-~is
coordinate
can be selected
metric
and inch
by parameter
systems.
#6015
for
RAPID TRAVERSE
c
.
u
%
m
5,2,3
MEASURED
WORKPIECE
VALUE
DIRECT
INPUT+
POSITIONING
JOG
f
\
(1)
Writing
into
tool
coordinate
memory
SPEED SEOUENCE
REFERENCE
With this function,
coordinate
data for the
respective
tools required
for setting
G50T
work coordinate
systems
can be written
into the TOOL
COORDINATE
MEMORY
by
The required
processes
simple
processes.
POINT
Xz
c2tY
u
REFERENCE
POINT
are
as follows.
RETuRN
Q
a.
Bring
the
tool
slide
to the
START
point.
OFF
b. Set
the current
coordinate
displayed
values
as (O, O).
The
“ current
coordinate
displayed
values”
as meant here are values
displayed
as POSIon the CRT.
To reset
TION
EXTERNAL
these
values,
push the address
key for the
desired
axes,
and then,
push the ORG key,
while the data are being
displayed
on the
With this keying,
the coordinate
CRT.
values
become
(O, O) .
199
5.2.3
MEASURED
WORKPIECE
VALUE
DIRECT
In the example shown above, the -x value
is temporarily stored in the register ,
INPUT ‘
(Cont$d)
c.
Push
the OFS
h. Measure
function key.
workpiece
the outer
diamter
of
and read the value
the turned
“xm. “
i.
the desired tool coordinate memory
Select
No. (one among offset Nos. 51 through 80) .
For example, if the tool coordinate memory
No. 51 is desired, key-in
5 , 1 and
depress the CURSOR
~ keY.
j.
Then, proceed to key-in x , measure value
(xm)
and
WR.
--– The NC makes the calculation to obtain
the tool coordinate data expressed by the
following equation, and stores them into the
specified tool coordinate memory X-axis.
The writing of the required X–axis data has
been completed.
Fig. 5.5
Tool
The tool offset values will be displayed as
shown above. However, the POSITION
values in the lower part of
EXTERNAL
the CRT will have been changed to O for
both axes, by the keying under the operation shown in b.
d.
Select the HANDLE/STEP
e.
Select
are
to be
for
tool
coordinate
the spindle,
and test-turn
piece
circumference
(surface
A)
tool in the MANUAL
mode.
the
data
in.
f. Start
g. Push
CURRENT
.
Keyed-in
measured
value
1
.JOG mode.
which
written
1[
--- Equation A
k.
a tool
coordinate
data
VALUE
Repeat the same processes on the Z-axis
by test turning the end face (surface B) of
the workpiece with the tool.
the work–
with that
STORE
SURFACE
B
button
(PST
input)
on the machine
control
station
first,
and then,
retract
the tool and stop
the spindle.
--- When the CURRENT
VALUE
STORE
button
is pushed,
the displayed
POSITION
values
are temporarily
stored
EXTERNAL
“RP,C-ION
in the
register,
and at the same time,
the
LED for t-he OFS function key starts to
INPUT mode is
flicker,
and the DIRECT
turned
on.
TOOL
wHEN
POSITION
CURRENT
POSITION
-Y
m
DISPLAY
!NDICATES
RETRACTION
I
Fig.
10, 0)
[D
TEST CUTTING
x nl
f
-1
–z
b-l--+
WORK~lECE
Fig. 5.6
200
5.7
VALUE
STORE
button
L, Push the CURRENT
again, and then, retract the tool and stop
the spindle.
--- The current values at the time of the
button pushing are stored again in the
reeister temDorarilv.
m.
n.
Measure the distance “Zm” between the
desired work coordinate origin to the test
cut surface (surface B).
3.
When Parameter
#6020D2 is “ O,” tool offset
memory
(offset
Nos.
01 through
50) can be
When
written
in the same way as above.
II1, u the fOllowing
cal–
parameter
#6020D
is
culation
equation
is used only
for tool offset
memory
(offset
Nos.
01 through
50).
Key-in
Z , measured
value
(Zm),
and
WR
in this sequence.
-–– The NC performs
the same calculation
as
before
with respect
to Z-axis,
and stores
the
results
in the Z-axis
of the tool coordinate memory.
[S:y]
.
[ Current
value
stored
Keyed-in
value
-(
-x
temporarily
in the
register
)
1
---
Equation
B
Ztn
&lt;
- ~;z
TOOL SLIOE
As
OCCURED
AT
POSITION
(O O)
versed
91SPLAYED
—z
Xtn2
Zm
COORDINATE’
I
4.
When
POSITION
i
5.
Fig. 5.8
all the data
into the tool
0.
Repeat
the processes
e. through
the tools to write
their
data into
coordinate
memory.
P.
After
writing
all the
RESET
key to cancel
mode.
tool
the
in Equation
that
B , sign
in Equation
parameters
are
not
A
used,
is re-
given
and
before.
the
o.
the
for
co–
(2)
data,
push the
DIRECT
INPUT
a.
The reason
for this is that the
calculations
have been performed.
following
Xtn=Xm-(-x)=Xm+x
A
the
for
MEMORY
SYS-
Automatic
writing
into
tool
offset
memory
When Parameter
#6020D 2 is set to “ 1,” tool
offset
values
are automatically
written
into
the tool offset
memory
by the following
processes.
The tool offset
values
written
in
this case are distance
between
the position
of the reference
tool and the tool under
consideration.
for all
tool
With the above
processes,
Xtn and Ztn values
for all the tools
as shown
below
are stored
in the tool coordinate
memory.
CUR-
When the CURRENT
VALUE
STORE
button
is
pushed,
the OF S function
is automatically
turned
on, its LED blinks,
and the tool offset value
is displayed.
‘EROpO’NT
t-With the above
processes,
one tool has been written
ordinate
memory.
seen,
from
writing
into the TOOL
COORDINATE
(51 - 81) and the WORK
COORDINATE
TEM SHIFT
MEMORY
(00) .
+Z
I
be
RENT
VALUE
STORE
button
is pushed,
data are always
calculated
by Equation
Xm
/- ~
wORK
CURRENT
o, SPLAy
BY
can
Bring
the
reference
reference
point
by
tool to any desired
manual control.
+x
=t!z
REFERENCE
TOOL
REFERENCE
Ztn=Zm-(-z)-Zm+z
POINT
+Z
Notes :
1.
The above
example
The method
using
known
dimensions
is based
on test cutting.
a gauge
or a workpiece
of
is also convenient.
2.
When tool positions
for test
are on the minus coordinate
measured
values
in negative.
cutting
of contact
area,
key-in
the
Fig. 5. g
b. Reset the current
POSITION
displayed
to (o,
0)&lt;
coordinate
values
(the
EXTERNAL
values
)
201
+x
5.2.3 MEASURED WORKPIECE VALUE DIRECT INPUT +
(Cent’d)
c,
Push
the
OFS
function
--- The displayed
POSITION
values
in the lower
area of
been changed
to (O, O) .
d.
e.
Retract
tool by
replaced
f.
the reference
manual control
conveniently.
Select
be
a tool
written
h.
EXTERNAL
CRT
have
the
tool,
and
to where
which
offset
bring
the
it can be
value
current
values
are temporarily
at the
stored
Fig,
time of button
in the reg-
go on keying
O,
and
WR
Z ,
0 , and
WR
[S:gd]
. . . (for
tion
. . . (for
tion
.
[
Current
~,
Keyed-in
value
temporarily~
J
in register
1
However,
since
no value
is keyed
in the
above
process,
the “current
values
tempo–
rarily
stored
in register”
only are stored
as tool offset
values .
By
repeating
the
processes
i.
through
g.
with all the tools,
their
tool offset
values
can be automatically
written.
After
com–
pleting
the processes,
push the RESET
key.
The values
written
by the above
processes
are all differential
distances
between
the reference
tool and the actual
tools in
consideration.
Notes :
For tools with which
tool nose directions
are different
from that of the reference
tool,
pre–
pare
a 2nd reference
point
as shown
below,
and
bring
the tool to that point
manually.
202
VALUE
retract
STORE
button
the tool.
keying,
in place
measured
value
(Xm’)
,
m
~ measured
value
(Zm’ )
,
m
at that
of
the
where
Xmt and Zm’ are distances
with
signs
from
the
1st reference
point
to the 2nd reference
point.
In the example
shown
above,
these
values
have
minus signs.
With the above
processes,
the distances
between
the reference
tool and a
tool having
different
point
direction
are stored
in the specified
tool offset
memory.
X axis calculaand storing
)
Z axis calculaand storing
)
values
stored
i.
CURRENT
and then,
El
No,
~
.
--Now,
the control
performs
the following
calculation
separately
for X and Z axes,
and
stores
the results
to the specified
tool off–
set memory.
-[
Push
the
position,
(one
as follows.
x,
REFERENCE
TOOL
5.10
Then,
make the following
ones given
in g. above.
Select
a ‘itool offset
No, “ for writing
among
01 through
50) .
For example,
to write
into tool offset
I1oz,!! key-in
O , 2 , and
CURSOR
Then,
r7-
W“’”c’
\
i-J
should
in.
Bring
the selected
tool manually
to the reference
point,
push the CURRENT
VALUE
STORE
button,
and retract
the tool.
--The
pushing
ister.
g.
with
k
key.
5.2.3,1
Tool Setter
Automatic
is enabled
and letting
by manual
Function
writing
into the tool
simply
by equipping
the tool nose touch
operation.
coordinate
the tactile
the tactile
memory
sensor
sensor
This function simplifiesthe preparatory
changing the tool.
work
Writing
memory
shift
This
with
into the work
coordinate
is also done automatically.
function
various
system
can be used to simplify
operation
machining
methods
and workplaces.
when
5.2.3,2
(3)
Parameters
When using
the tool setter
must be set in the NC for
Set the distance
sensor
from the
(1)
Setting
#661[1
,..
#6619
.. .
#6620
...
#662;.
,..
Itl!!
,: 0.001
of each
projected
function,
automatic
contact
of the tactile
zero point,
with sign.
input)
‘P
WORK
COORDINATE
-gill
zP–
+
WORK
SYSTEM
‘46618
SETTING
x–
U6619
$6620
~
COORDINATE
AMOUNT
xP–
‘+
1-
0
~
PROJECTED
ZERO
(PARAMETER
PROGRAM
(6)
POINT
86621
=
“O”)
ZERO
Fig.
Automatic
5.
10A
Writing
Tool
into
setter
the
Tool
Coordinate
manual
on
point
the
the
measurement
switches
m
O,S
a
lamp,
mode
to
to
measured.
or
II XP–11
by
operation.
the
blink.
[Tool
#6618
value
coordinate
or #66191
when the
memory
value ] = [Parameter
- [POSITION
(MACHINE)
tactile
sensor
turned
ON]
The value
of the offset
memory
“X1! of
coordinate
memory
number
–50 is then
“O. 1’
This
occurs
only when both
D3 and D6 of
parameter
#6020 are “ 1.”
Contact
manual
the tool
operation.
nose
on
!’ ZP+l!
I!zp-11 by
or
~tch.
~
n
coordinate
or #66211
when the
memory
value ] = [Parameter
- [POSITION
(MACHINE)
tactile
sensor
turned
ON]
The value
of the offset
memory
“ Zif of
coordinate
memory
number
–50 is then
!!O. 1!
This occurs
only when both
D3 and D6 of
parameter
#6020 are “ 1.’!
return.
(ABSOLUTE)
, POSITION
becomes
“O. “
automatically
cause
zero
to be
Contact the tool nose on “XP+”
[Tool
#6620
value
The setting
amount
of the work
coordinate
system
is automatically
written
into the tool coordinate
memcmy,
by the following
operation,
POSITION
(MACHINE)
tool
As in (4) , the value
operated
by the
following
expression
is automatically
written
into the tool coordinate
memory
1!Z!J where
the
cursor
is set,
Memory
Perform
the
Note :
When the sensor
touches
the tool nose,
axis interlock
is applied
on the corresponding
direction,
to prohibit
the move.
POINT
to
made
The fesd
stops
and the buzzer
sounds
when
the tool nose touches
the sensor,
to
automatically
write
the value
operated
by the
following
expression
into the tool coordinate
IIx!! where
the cursor
iS Set.
memory
COORDINATE
SHIFT
Select
manual
Xp +
It
be
Note :
When parameter #6020 D3 is “1“ and the
tool coordinate memory number is automatically
selected, manual memory number selection using
the cursor key and page key is prohibited.
‘“v’k~’NEzERO
Turn
selec~ion
cannot
D3 is ‘IO. II
tool
If the tool coordinate memory
number is not
automatically selected, move the cursor to the
desired tool coordinate “memory number using
the cursor key and page key.
input)
(inch
in.
(4)
MAFGIN
.—
(2)
down.
Note that automatic
if parameter
#6020
(5)
sensor.
mm (metric
SYSTEM
(1)
presetter
The tool coordinate
memory
number
corresponding
to the currently
selected
number
is automatically
selected
and
displayed.
parameters
operation.
Position
where
contact
point
“ XP +“
turns
on. (diameter
value )
Position
where
contact
point
“ XP -“
turns
on (diameter
value)
Position
where
contact
point
“ ZP +“
turns
on.
ZP-!’
with sign.
Set the distance
from 11
Position
where
contact
point
“ ZP-”
turns
on.
Set “O” so that this point
becomes
the
of the tactile
temporary
Z “ 01’ point
WORK
5,2.3.3
the
parameters
0.0001
t)
Move
(7)
Perform
(8)
Return
the in–machine
point
position.
(9)
Turn
(4) ,
(5) , and
(6)
on
all
presetter
tools
to
the
used.
zero
function,
The
off
the
blinking
measurement
of
the
~
n
mode
lamp
switch.
stops.
203
5.2.3.4
Automatic
Writing
into
the
Work
(6)
Coordinate
Depress
the “PST”
switch.
System Shift Memory
The buzzer sounds, and the value operated
by the following expression is automatically
written in the work coordinate system shift
memory “Z.”
The Z-axis work coordinate system shift amount
can automatically be written by the following
operation.
[Work coordinate system shift amount ‘t
Z“ ] =
-[value of tool coordinate memory “Z” selected
by the cursor] - [Value of POSITION
(MACHINE)
when “PST’r is depressed]
This operation is to be performed after writing
into the tool coordinate memory is completed.
(1)
Turn
The
on the measurement
m
~
lamp blinks,
n
mode
switch.
(7)
Release the tool.
(8)
Turn
off the measurement
mode
switch.
When doing this immediately after writing into
the tool coordinate memory, perform the
following process, after Par. 4.2. 3.3 (3) to
(8).
The
(2)
Check that the offset screen displays the
OFFSET
(WORK
- SHIFT) screen.
Performing work coordinate system setting B
by the above operation sets coordinate system
where the end face of the workpiece is the
zero point.
(3)
Select
cutting
the tool
on the
that can
workpiece.
perform
end
After setting the cursor, depress the n~
function key once more.
The offset screen
will display the OFFSET
(WORK
- SHIFT)
screen.
Note :
offset screen changes
each time the ~
OFFSET
Cursor
.
Enter the distance from the program zero
point to be shifted to the end face of the
workpiece (margin) with sign, following W.
The entered numeral is added to the work
The sign is
coordinate system shift memory.
determined by #6018 D6.
#6018 D6 = O
Workpiece
sign)
=1
Workpiece
sign)
shift + h4argin (W with
shift - Margin
(W with
“—
00”
The value of the work coordinate system shift
‘Iu
1! in
the same
x!! is rewritten by
memory !!
manner.
Cursor
position
“—
01”
When
(TOOL
Cursor
The
blinking
Rewrite the value of “Z“ in the work
coordinate system shift memory, using 11
w. 11
When
(WEAR)
I
OFFSET
position
stops
Shifting the program zero point from the end
face of the workpiece can be performed as
follows.
- SHIFT)
I
OFFSET
in the following cycle,
function key is depressed.
(WORK
lamp
face
When manual cursor selection (parameter #6020
D3 = “0’1
) is selected, move the cursor to the
tool coordinate memory number corresponding
to the selected tool.
~
The
~
~
c1
-
SHIFT)
position
“—
51”
cursor position is as shown
above.
This function cannot be used when the tool
setter writing mode is selected in the
automatic cursor selection specification.
(4)
Chuck
the
workpiece
(5)
Cut the end face
manual operation.
of
to be
the
machined,
workpiece
a little
by
#6018
D6 = O
Workpiece
sign)
=1
Workpiece
sign)
shift
+ Margin
(U
with
shift
-
(U
with
Margin
WHEN
t
WHEN
#601 O DO = 1
x–
I
I
#6018
#6010
DO = O
Normally,
coordinate
x+
D6
REVERSED
$6018
‘1
–u
I
,
REVERSED
0
,
+U
I+
–u
I
Command
system
U’”t-.
+U
–u
D6
O
‘~-~
w
—–~
1
Fig.
5.10
5.2.3.5
the
work
follows,
is
if
not
to
work
coordinate
performed,
00;
T
LCommand
–w
the
be
zero
Offset
amounts
of Nos.
41 to 50 are used
for
the work
coordinate
system
offset,
but the
offset
can be made by Nos.
01 to 50.
REvERSED
MARGIN
R&amp;HO DO X-axis
point return
zero
B Example
coordinate
T ❑
_U
G50
–-A-———
U
as
offset
11
1
#6018
for
D6
1:
+U
there
is no need
system
offset.
system
of automatic
shift
Coordinate
direction
writing
into
5.2.3.8
1 : Negative
O : Positive
the
Offset Screen
Display
The offset
screens
as shown in Figs. 5. 10C, 5. 10D
and 5. 10E are displayed
by adding
the tool setter
function,
work
memory
System Setting (G 50 X
Z
.)
Parameter setting can be made to determine
whether to add the work coordinate system shift
when setting the coordinate system by G50.
When;#6018
D7 = O
The work
added,
D7 = 1
The work
not added.
When#6018
coordinate
system
shift
is
coordinate
system
shift
is
588-355
5.2.3.6
Position (EXTERNAL)
The POSITION
the first
upon
:Supplying
;~et
II ] II
(EXTERNAL)
manual
zero
the
in
Fig. 5.10 C 1 st screen
“O” Settin9
can
point
memory
be set
return
(1)
coordinate
system
shift
screen )
to “O”
after
POWer”
parameter
#6005
D4 to
used
this
The
“O” setting
is also performed
:functi,~n.
commanding
M53 for G51 return
point
setting
Always
command
M53 alone.
the program.
5.2.3.7
display
(work
Work Coordinate
System
by
in
Setting B
Command
G50
TCICI
588-356
XX;
T
Fig.
Work coordinate
number
system
offset
Work coordinate
number
system
setting
5.10
screen
D 2nd
screen
(tool
offset
shift
memory
display
)
T
L
The
system
following
by
value
giving
is
this
set
in
the
coordinate
command.
[Coordinate
system
setting
value]
=
[POSITION
(MACHINE)
value]
+
[Tool
coordinate
memory
value]
+
[Work
coordinate
system
offset
value]
[Work
coordinate
system
shift
amount]
+
588-357
Offset
memory
number
.. ... .. .. ... ..
Fig. 5.10 E 3 rd screen
display
(tool
coordinate
system
memory
screen)
205
5.2.3.9
New Tool Setter
5.2.3.10
However, this function is effective only when
parameter #6020 D3 is “1.“
Function
General
When the tool coordinate memory is
automatically selected, memory number
selection using the cursor or page key is
prohibited.
The
offsets and work coordinate system shifts can
also be written automatically into the memory in
machines without the tactilesensor, by manual
operation.
This
function allows easy preparatory
upon tool exchange.
In this function, the contents of the tool
coordinate memory and the work coordinate system
shift differ from those of the conventional I!tool
setter function” with tactilesensor.
The contents of the conventional tool coordinate
memory are changed from the differentialdistance
from the tactilesensor to the selected tool nose, to
the differentialdistance from the workpiece end
face to the tool nose. The work coordinate system
shift amount is changed from the shift from the
projected zero point to the shift from the workpiece end face.
However,
the theory
This
not changed.
setter
function.
”
of the
function
coordinate
is called
When the tool coordinate
memory
automatically
selected,
move the
tool coordinate
memory
number,
cursor
key
and page
key.
operation
system
has
the ‘Inew tool
(5)
Cut the surface
(6)
To stop
X-axis,
the spindle,
do nothing
while
releasing
only
the
(7)
Measure
the
(8)
If the
❑
T
of
the
diameter
above
**
of
the
tool
is
Writing
into the Tool Coordinate
tool coordinate
memory
amount
written
is the differential
distance
from
end face to the tool nose.
occasion,
workpiece
5.2,3.12
Writing
on
the
this
Then
(9)
II
,
Mount
( 3)
Set “ 1“ in the tool coordinate
memory
writing
mode setting
(6001 D6) .
This
enables
the
The screen
then automatically
writing
mode.
~
switches
to the “
o~s “ function OFFSET
a
(4)
!’
“ workpiece
M
operation,
diameter
“X“” by the following
(Tool
coordinate
memory
“ X“ ) =
diameter) - (Position machine
10)
Cut
11)
To stop
Z-axis,
12)
Then
zero point return.
the
end
face
of
the
(Workpiece
‘!
X IIvalue)
workpiece
the spindle,
do nothing
while
releasing
only the
enter
“
once.
with the
X–axis.
E“E’’m”to
write
the tool coordinate
following
calculation.
(Tool
coordinate
memory
machine
‘! Z!f value)
“ Z“ ) = -
memory
(Position
workpiece.
SHIFT)
B
screen
cause
the
“
~~ lamp
Select
the
cutting tool.
(Fig.
to
blink
( 13)
Perform
the above
the X and Z axes
( 14)
Set ‘101’ in the tool coordinate
memory
writing
mode setting
(#6001 D6) .
The writing
mode
~,s ~nc;l;d,
to end the blinking
of the
amp ,
.
(4) through
(12)
of all the tools.
on
both
0!=s
5.1 OF) , to
The tool coordinate
memory
corresponding
to
the currently
selected
tool post number
(tool
post number
entered
in #1317) is automatically
selected.
206
screen
to automatically write the tool
automatically
T!z f! by the
(2)
-
memory
the
—
enter
II ~~
a
Procedure
Perform manual
(TOOL
select
calculation.
(1)
the
on,
the ‘} O,S )1function by manual
Memory
The amount in the tool coordinate memory can be
written by the following manual operation, with or
without the measuring tool for the in-machine
setter.
The
not
workpiece,
coordinate
coordinate memory
5,2,3.11
the
with the
Z–axis.
~
El
the
workpiece.
of
setting
is not
cursor
to
using
the
a
Note :
writing
return
The
setting
mode is not
is performed
of the tool coordinate
memory
effective
if no zero point
after
the power
is supplied.
of
5,2.3,13
Writing
the Z-axis
Work Coordinate
(8)
System
Shift Amount
5.2.3.14
Writing
a.
Procedure
(1)
Perform manual
(2)
Mount
(3)
Set “1“ in the workpiece
shift writing mode setting
zero point return.
the workpiece.
coordinate system
key
function,
“ B
,, lamp
to
cause
to
blink
the
“
❑
“
or
u
❑
W
“
“ key,
and
The sign for the addition is determined by
#6018 D6.
It automatically switches to TOO of the
IIoFFSET (WORK
- SHIFT’) “ screen
of the
I
the
input the numeral, to add the entered value
to the currently displayed value.
mode) .
~~ B
coordinate system
When the program zero point needs further
shifting (for example, when there is clearance
from the workpiece end face), the work
coordinate system shift memory of both the X
and Z axes can be rewritten by MDI
operation. Calculate the shift amount,
depress
(#6001 D5) .
“measurement
2 “ key in compact
mode,
to enable
the writing
(Turn
on the
conversational
Changing the Z-axis work
shift amount
When
#6018 D6 = O
Workpiece
sign )
#6018 D6 = 1
Workpiece
function
When
shift + Margin
(W with
shift - Margin
(W with
sign)
The
value
~emory
IIx!!
same
manner.
when
#6018
When
coordinate
(4)
Cut
(5)
Do nothing
with
only the X–axis.
the
(6)
jMeasure
(7)
‘Then
end
face
the
enter
the
the
shift
recaps
Z-axis,
display
u
while
of
““
the
❑
releasing
workpiece.
“ ‘a’gin
“
❑
wR
n
w
more
“&gt;
(9)
coordinate
rewritten
“ key
and
by
“
system
u
U
“ in
shift
the
shift
+ Margin
(U
with
shift
-
(U
with
numeral
Margin
keys
are
be
u
❑
made
“ or
by
II keYs, or entering the margin once
with
“
m
Set “ O“ in the
memory
writing
““
❑
“ ‘argin
work
coordinate
mode setting
“ E
system
“o
shift
(#6C101 D5) (turn
off the “measurement 2“ key in conversational
mode) , to cancel the writing mode and to end
write
the tool coordinate
the following
calculation.
to
“
is
work
normally
effective.
Fine adjustment
of the margin
can
adding
or subtracting
with the “
once.
offset
memory
corresponds
number
entered
in #1317.
(Work
coordinate
(Margin)
- (Tool
(Position
machine
b. The
screen
,!
❑
.:o automatically
memory
“Z” by
‘THe tool
:001 post
of
margin
“
system
the
D6 = O
Workpiece
sign)
D6 = 1
Workpiece
sign)
#6018
588 355
Fig. 5.10 F Work
of
the
system
shift
memory
“ Z“ ) =
coordinate
memory
“ Z“ ) “ Z“ value)
the blinking of the “ ~
m
(lo)
“ lamp.
Perform manual zero point return after
changing the work coordinate system shift
memory, to automatically set the work
coordinate system.
Note that the work coordinate setting by
manual zero point return is not performed
when parameter #6011 DO = 1. (When the tool
coordinate memory number follows the lower
order two digits of T**$$, refer to the
&lt;Instruction manual for coordinate system
setting&gt;.)
207
52.3.14
Writing
Procedure
The operation procedure
follows .
(Cent’d )
Note:
The work coordinate system shift memory
value writing mode setting is invalid if a single
zero point return is not performed after power
SU@Y
WORK
COORDINATE
SHIFT
Z-AXIS
pushing
the
the
automatic
operation
emergency
stop
cycle
by
button.
SYSTEM
AMOUNT
COORDINATE
VALUE
MEMORY
Turn
(3)
Retract
1
l–
X-AXIS
TOOL
COORDINATE
“/
MEMORY
AMOUNT
5. 2.4
5.1OG
Coordinate
system
With this function, the tool can be brought back
to the start point of the program (where coor–
dinate system was set up) , from any position
along the automatic operation tool locus. This
is convenient when an automatic machining cycle
is interrupted due to tool breakage, etc. and,
after replacing the tool, etc ., the automatic
machining cycle is to be started from the begin–
:ning.
(EMERGENCY
(5)
Turn
the G50 POINT
(6)
Turn
on
(7)
Push one or two JOG keys that correspond
to the required return motion direction
among the four (+X, -X, +Z, –Z) .
The tool moves at a preset speed towards
the G 50 point, and stops at the G 50) point.
(8)
Turn
(9)
Turn
on the AUTO
mode,
RESET
key on the MDI
(In the TAPE
mode,
reset
leading
end. )
( 10)
push the
automatic
208
off
the
the
RETURN
MANUAL
G50
JOG
point
switch on.
mode.
RETURN
switch.
and push the
&amp; CRT
panel.
the tape to the
CYCLE
START
key
machinihg
cycle.
to restart
the
Notes :
1.
When the tool is at the G50 point,
control
is not effective
unless
the
RETURN
switch
is turned
off.
2.
The point where a coordinate system setup
process has been executed latest is regarded
as the G50 point. Therefore, in the following
cases, the tool will not return to the start
point of the machining cycle by this function.
JOG motion
G50 POINT
The respective tools are set for different
coordinate systems.
b. When the
ORG
key is pushed after the
interruption of the automatic cycles.
c.
STOP1
tool motion
the cause of the machining
proand make the machine
cess interruption,
and workpiece
ready
for operation.
a.
Fig. 5.11
the tool by the manual
Eliminate
G 50 POINT RETURN ‘
OF FAULT
mode.
(4)
B
Fig.
on the MANUAL
control.
I
D-
‘1
(2)
TOOL
-i
1
Interrupt
.
Z-AXIS
I
(1)
for this return is as
When a coordinate
automatically
.
system
has
been
set
up
5.2.5
MANUAL Interruption
Notes :
pOINTRETLJRN+
With this function,
automatic
machining
cycles
can be interrupted
and the tools
can be retract–
ed for workpiece
measurement,
chip removal,
etc. , and then,
the tools
can be brought
back
to the interruption
point.
RETURN
MOTION
INTERRuPTION
1’
When the tool is at the interruption
point,
the JOG keys
are ineffective,
unless
the
MANUAL
INTERRUPTION
POINT
RETURN
switch
is turned
off.
2,
When the RESET
key on the MDI &amp; CRT panel is pushed
or an external
reset
input
is
received
after
the switching
from the AUTO
to MANUAL
Mode,
the MANUAL
INTERRUPTION
POINT
RETURN
function
becomes
ineffective
thereafter.
3.
When the tool has been
manually
retracted
after
a switching
from the AUTO
to MANUAL
mode,
then,
the switch
is returned
to AUTO
again,
and thereafter,
the switch
is set again
to MANUAL
for manual tool motion,
the point
where
the mode switch
has been
switched
from AUTO
to MANUAL
last is regarded
as
the INTERRUPTION
point.
TO
POINT
L
~
L,
‘\
MANUAL P
RETRACTION
~--
AUTO-MANUAL
SWITCH
The
(1)
procedure
for
this
function
is
as follows.
Interrupt
the automatic
machining
i~ny
of the following
methods.
(i)
Turning
on the
(ii)
Pushing
the
(2)
Turn
(3)
Retract
(4)
Measure
perform
on
the
the
the
any
When
Note:
to MANUAL,
]may change.
the operation
prepared
by
(5)
POINT
SINGLE
FEED
HOLD
MANUAL
tool
by
BLOCK
5. 2.6
cycle
With this function,
when automatic
machining
cycles are interrupted
due to tool breakage,
chip
entanglement,
etc. , by the EMERGENCY
STOP
button,
the automatic
machining
cycles
can be
restarted,
not from the beginning
of the program,
switch
key
but
mode.
manual
or
the mode is switched
from AUTO
the spindle
conditions,
etc.
For these
details,
refer
to
manual of the machine
the machine
builder.
Turn
on the MANUAL
RETURN
switch.
INTERRUPTION
(7)
l?ush the relevant
one or two of the JOG
keys
(+X,
-X,
+Z, -Z) . The tool moves
~owards
the interruption
point
at the pre–
Set speed,
and stops
upon arrival
at the
interruption
point.
MANUAL
JOG
a.
beginning
of
the
interrupted
block.
PROCEDURE
Interrupt
the automatic
machining
one of the following
two functions.
(i)
Emergency
(ii)
Resetting
cycle
by
stop
When the machine
has been
stopped
by the
emergency
stop function,
turn on the servo
power
supply
and reset
the ALARM
code to
make further
machine
motion
possible.
POINT
Turn
the
OPERATION
tool
(6)
on the
from
(1)
control.
workpiece,
remove
chips,
other
required
operations.
PROGRAM RESTART+
by
b,
Turn
tool .
c.
Replace
the broken
tool,
remove
chips,
etc.
to prepare
the machine
for further
operation.
mode.
on the
When the
may have
MANUAL
mode
tool is replaced,
to be corrected.
and
the
retract
offset
the
values
(8)
Turn
off the MANUAL
INTERRUPTION
I?OINT
RETURN
switch.
Move the tool by manual
to the start
point of the
However,
with a program
(9)
Turn
the AUTO
mode,
START
key to restart
ing cycle.
❑ H 3 ❑ is used,
the tool need not be returned
to the start
point,
and may be left
at the position
where
chip removal,
etc.
has
been made.
d.
and push the CYCLE
the automatic
machin-
control
to return
part program.
in which
G 50T
it
209
5. 2.6
PROGRAM RESTART + (Cent’d)
e.
Turn
on the AUTOMATIC
f.
Turn
on the PROGRAM
.g.
Push the PROG
MDI panel.
Display of allthe M codes and the number
of M code commands
programmed
between
the leading end of the restart program to
the block specified by
Q -22
“ .
However, if there are more than 28 M
codes , those 28 M codes immediately next
Q T] .. L . in
to the block specified by
the program are displayed.
(iv)
Display of the last programmed
T command
and the one before preceding the block
,—.———
specified by
Q _ _ _ ..
(v)
Display of the last programmed
up to the block specified by
mode.
RESTART
switch.
function key on the CRT
&amp;
h . Where the automatic operation is under the
control of a tape, set the leading end of
the tape to the tape reader.
Make the following keying on the CRT
panel.
i.
(iii)
&amp; MDI
Note : M and
T commands
are displayed
sequence.
Therefore,
the
programmed
The NC starts the preparation from the
starting end of the program to the block
specifi~d by Q . Up~n ~he completion of the
preparation, the CRT display changes to
~:he-’’PROGRAM
RETURN’’
-page
function
to display
the program
of the “POS”
restart
data.
displayed
one
ly
the
before
off
S command
Q [~--;;
is the
one
block
the
programmed
specified
by
PROGRAM
immediate-
Q ‘cl c [~ ~
j
Turn
k.
Command
required
M, S, and T obtained
them from the displayed
program
restart
data as follows.
Turn
(ii)
Push
the PROG
function
&amp; MDI panel,
and input
S and T commands.
(iii)
Push the CYCLE
the M, S and T
Push
on the
the
POS
MDI
RESTART
(i)
(iv)
switch.
mode.
key on the
the required
START
key,
commands.
function
key
and
on the
MDI panel
to revert
the CRT
to the
gram restart
data display
.
Check
the conditions
of the machine
1.
m.
Fig. 5.12
Display of program
restart data
(i)
(ABSOLUTE)
position
(ii)
(INCREMENT)
: Display of the distance
from the current tool position to the end
-=—— .
point of the block specified by Q L L,[..
: Display of current tool
Turn
on the
AUTOMATIC
mode
CRT
M,
execute
CRT
&amp;
proagain.
again.
Push
the CYCLE
START
key.
The tool
moves
to the PROGRAM
RESTART
position
displayed
in the (INCREMENT)
column,
by
moving
at JOG speed
first
along
the X -axis,
and then along
the Z-axis,
and then,
re start
the machining
cycle
from the block
immediately
following
the block
specified
by
nmmr
7-—QLJLJLI
.. .
Supplementary
210
in the
last
If the same
explanation
sequence
Q::_..
to be input
by
times in the program,
In the following
form.
No.
as for the block
_ C is used
several
input
the
command
Notes :
1.
3.
Before
letting
the tool move to the PROGRAM
RESTART
position
by motion
along
the X and
Z axes in succession,
be sure to check
the
tc,ol for freedom
from interference
with the
workpiece.
If there
is a possibility
of
ference
with
the workpiece,
Fcr
the
manual
tool
motion,
first,
move
the
turn on the
Turn
( ii)
Push
tool
(iii)
Check
on the
the
along
the
SINGLE
CYCLE
the
BLOCK
START
Check
the
RESTART
(vi) Turn
to
move
the
key
to
move
the
tool position
position.
for
the
tool
offset
values
the new
position
are
tool,
is,
changed
to
etc. , the PROneedless
to say,
accordingly.
If the PROGRAM
RESTART
switch
is on,
the CYCLE
START
key is ineffective.
6.
In principle,
do not move the machine
with
the MACHINE
LOCK
switch
turned
on, before
and after
pushing
the PROGRAM
RESTART
switch.
7.
If the block
SOR
~
is
displayed,
8.
Only those
M and T commands
which
are output to the outside
are displayed
as PROGRAM
RESTART
data.
Those
M commands
(M90 - M109) and T commands which
are internally
processed
are
not displayed.
9,
Although
not common with lathe
operation,
sometimes
the power
supply
is turned
off
after
interrupting
the automatic
cycle,
and
is turned
on again before
restarting
the
In this case,
be sure to
automatic
cycle.
return
the tool to the reference
point
once,
before
starting
the PROGRAM
RESTART
process.
In this case,
be sure to start
the PROGRAM
RESTART
process
even
with those
programs
in which
work
coordinate
system
is used.
specified
by Q, ❑ ❑ 3 ❑ , CURnot found,
alarm code” 120” is
10.
During
the time after
the display
of the
PROGRAM
RESTART
data till the start
of the
return
motion
to the PROGRAM
RESTART
position,
the machine
cannot
be moved
in the
If the machine
is returned
to the
MDI mode.
reference
position,
alarm code
“ 124” will be
displayed.
11.
Blocks
finish
PROGRAM
switch,
and
restart
to
If a reset process
is executed
after
the display of the PROGRAM
RESTART
data by the
keying of Q, u rlZ ~ , CURSOR
~ the data
is cancelled. When this happens, make the
PROGRAM
RESTART
data display keying
ag ain.
the
5.
position.
off the SINGLE
BLOCK
push the CYCLE
START
key
the machining
cycle.
?
‘..
shifted
switch.
key
When
compensate
for
GRAM
RESTART
X-axis.
(iv) Push the CYCLE
START
tool along the Y-axis.
(v)
4,
MAN-
UAL ABSOLUTE
switch.
If this switch
is not
turned
on, the PROGRAM
RESTART
position
will be shifted
by the distance
covered
by the
For the manual
motion
remanual motion.
on the workpiece
auired
to avoid
tool coflision
- described
above,
the following
proced~re
as
is recommended.
(i)
Q,~.3C,
CURSOR
~
, do not push
the
FEED HOLD key,
turn the MODE switch,
or
make other
manipulations,
If these
manipulations
are made,
make the PROGRAM
RESTART
data display
keying
again.
a tool inter-
tc,ol in the MANUAL
mode to a position
from
where
it can move without
interference,
be–
fen-e bringing
the tool to the PROGRAM
RESTART
position
in the AUTOMATIC
MODE.
While the NC is making the preparation for
PROGRAM
RESTART
after the keying of
Q,[~rTl~,
12,
in complex
canned
cycle
shapes
cannot
be specified
CURSOR
~
.
programs
by
for
When the block
in tool nose radius
compensation
is specified
by Q, four
digits,
and
key,
the machine
cannot
be
CURSOR
moved
in the MDI mode after
the display
of
the PROGRAM
START
data,
restart
from the block
before
In this case,
making
tool radius
compensation.
211
5,2. ‘7 AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET
5.
With this function, the handwheel for the manual
pulse generator can be turned during an automatic operation cycle under the control of a tape,
LMD1 or memory,
to superimpose
certain
feed
distances
to the programmed
feed
distances
, With
workpiece
mounting
errors
, etc .
this function,
can be compensated.
For this function,
ations
are as follows
.
the
required
manual
... --.,
Turn on the AUTO
switch.
(2)
MODE
HANDLE
Parameter
.
No.
oper-
OFFSET
Z-axis
(3)
Select the movement distance per graduation
of the handwheel with the MANUAL
PULSE
MULTIPLY
switch. With this switch, the
move distance per graduation can be select–
ed among 1, 10 and 100 pulses.
(4)
When the handwheel is turned, the tool mo–
tion along the axis selected in process (2)
is superimposed on the programmed
feed
distance .
—
.
(o
[a
CW:
CCW:
in plus direction
in minus direction
HAN DLEt
MANUAL
HANDLE
PULSE
AXISt
x
(0
y
MULTIPLY
?, I(JL
x !111)0
x 10
xl
@
x lU 000
Y 10{1Uoo
AUTO
MODE
HANDLE
OFF SETt
t?
oFF
Fig. 5 13
Notes
1.
:
During
traverse,
motion
during
the
time the
the AUTO
is ineffective.
interpolation
tml is moving
in rapid
MODE HANDLE
OFFSET
It is effective
only
motion.
2.
In the alarm state,
the AUTO
OFFSET
motion
is ineffective.
3.
While an interrupt
input
(STLK)
is on, the
AUTO
MODE HANDLE
OFFSET
motion
is
ineffective
.
4.
The move distance
by the
HANDLE
OFFSET
function
the display
of POSITION
POSITION
ABSOLUTE.
MODE
HANDLE
AUTO
MODE
is superimposed
EXTERNAL
on
and
6“
Setting
1’
~6022 Do
X-axis
Select the axis along which motion is desired by the HANDLE
AXIS SELECT
switch.
--- If the control is provided with the
SIMULTANEOUS
2 AXES CONTROL
MANUAL
PULSE GENERATOR
, the manual motion can
be made along the two axes simultaneously.
Turning
Turning
., ---------
Axis
(HOFSX)
1
(1)
------
morlon
-’lne Au Lu kluu~ H4iLvuLk uh kbk,l
along
the respective
axes can be made in–
effective
by parameter
settings
.
0
Effective
‘–—
x6022 D,
(HOFSZ)
‘
Ineffectivc
I
-------—1
“o—-
Effective
“— ‘-”
Ineffective
When parameter
#6022D7
(HOFSMV)
is set to
1, the motion
by the AUTO
MODE HANDLE
OFFSET
function
is limited
to the interpolation
motion in automatic
operation
or temporary
stop of interpolation
.
6. OPERATION
6.1
INSPECTION
BEFORE TURNING
ON POWER
PROCEDURE
6.3
MANUAL OPERATION1
Make sure that the front
and rear
doors
of the
control
are firmly
closed.
The control
employs
a
totally-enclosed,
dustproof
enclosure
to shut out
If the door is open,
lock it by
surrounding
air.
turning
two door locks.
In addition,
inspect
the
When the MODE SELECT
switch
control
station
is set to RAPID,
machme
manual.
Operation
6.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
referring
to the
machine
tool
builder’s
or HANDLE
position,
ated manually.
the
main
power
is
(2)
Select
RATE
the speed
OVERRIDE
Speed
setting
supplied
(3)
the POWER
ON pushbutton
on the
power
is
operator’s
panel ~ and the control
supplied
and then the cooling
fans will start
running.
Make sure that air blows
out from
the exhaust
ports” of the upper
side of the
control.
the POWER
ON pushbutton
again to
the servo
power
supply.
When the
is ready
to op~rate,
READY
lamp
If READY
lamp does not light,
detect
and
eliminate
the cause
according
to the alarm
Refer
to 4. 3.9
DISPLAYcode displayed.
ING ALARM
CODE.
MODE
machine
can
be oper-
Mode
Set
Depress
Depress
turn on
machine
lights .
in RAPID
(1)
‘TURNING ON POWER
Check
to see that
for the control.
the
on the machine
JOG,
STEP
SELECT
switch
to RAPID.
using
RAPID
switch.
range:
TRAVERSE
100% - 50% -
25% - FO
Push JOG button
to select
the axis and
direction
of movement.
The machine moves
at the specified speed while the JOG
kept pressed.
button
1 Manual operation is defined as the operation
in RAPID, JOG, STEP, or HANDLE.
Operations in JOG
Mode
(1)
Set MODE
SELECT
(2)
Adjust the feedrate to the desired setting
with JOG FEEDRATE
switch (Up to 32 steps) .
(3)
Push JOG button to select the axis and direcThe machine moves at the
tion of movement.
specified speed while the JOG button de–
pressed.
Operation in STEP
Mode
(1)
Set
(2)
Select
the move
MANUAL
PULSE
MODE
(Move
Metric:
SELECT
amount
switch
(3)
to STEP.
amount
per
MULTIPLY
setting
~.ool-o.
100.0
Inch:
switch to JOG.
0.0001-
step using
switch.
range)
ol-o.l
- 1.0-
lo.o-
mm/step
0.001- 0.0110.0 in/step
0.1-
l.o-
Depress JOG button to select the axis and
direction of movement.
The machine moves
by the move amount per step each time the
button is depressed.
213
6.3
Checking
MANUAL OPERATION1 ( Cent’d )
Operation
in HANDLE
Mode
The control
with HANDLE
operation
described
below.
(1)
Set
MODE
(2)
Select
(3)
Select
the
responding
using
SELECT
the
axis
Metric:
Inch:
0.001-
can
AXIS
MULTIPLY
0,01-
the
switch.
of the machine
corof HANDLE
dial
switch.
0.1
(mm per
graduation)
0.0001-
0.001 - 0.01
per
permit
to HANDLE.
HANDLE
PULSE
(inch
Note :
dial+
move amount
to one scale
MANUAL
6.5 PREPARATIONS
OPERATION
Rotate
MX1OOOJ! or
HANDLE
FOR AUTOMATIC
graduation)
IIXI()()()O1!
is regarded
as
“X1OO.”
(4)
#6006D 1, D 0
the control
is equipped
with leadscrew
compensation
function
or the stored
limit function,
set this parameter
to
!ll .11
With the parameter
#6006Dl,
DO set to
!11 II a return
to the reference
point
is required
before
starting
cycles,
alarm codes
( 001 - 002 “reference
point
return
incomplete” ) are displayed,
if the CYCLE
START
key is pushed
without
making
a reference
point
return
immediately
after
turning
on the
Be sure to perform
the manpower
supply.
ual operation
for return
to reference
point.
t
switch
with
Parameter
When
error
stroke
dial
Turning
the
The machine
dial clockwise:
moves
in the
Turning
the
The machine
tion.
dial counterclockwise:
moves
in the negative
positive
direction.
To start
to operate
the machine
in the automatic
mode,
the machine
must be brought
to the start
point,
after
the application
of the power
supply.
The panel operation
required
for this varies
with programs
as shown
below.
For details,
refer
to the operation
manual of the machine
tool builder.
(1)
direc-
When G28
RETURN)
(AUTOMATIC
is used
REFERENCE
POINT
6.4 PREPARATION FOR STORED LEADSCREW
ERROR COMPENSATION AND STORED STROKE
LIMITt
Where
G 28 is written
in the beginning
of
the program,
move the tool manually
to a
point
a short
distance
away from the reference point.
If the start
point
is on the side of the reference point
from the traverse
speed
reducing
(1)
point,
CYCLE
Return
to Reference
Point
With an NC equipped
with the stored
leadscrew
error
compensation
or the stored
either
of the following
stroke
limit functions,
two reference
point
return
motions
must be
performed
after
switching
on the power
supply
and before
starting
automatic
opera–
tion.
the NC
START
EXAMPLE
(2)
;
NOO1
G28
UO
NO02
G50
X..
When
Manual
return
b.
Execute
G28
to reference
UO
WO
;
point
in the
(See
MDI
the
MANUAL
WO
Z..
;
.
RETURN
function
;
TO
REFERENCE
is used
5.2.1)
mode.
This
procedure
is to teach
the reference
since
doing
so is nec–
point
to the control,
essary
because
both leadscrew
error
com–
pensation
and stored
stroke
check
are performed
with reference
to the reference
point
214
when
:
EOR
POINT
a.
causes
overtravel
key is pushed.
Where
G28 is not programmed,
and the coordinate
set up point
is the reference
point,
bring
the tool manually
to the reference
point
before
starting
the automatic
cycle
operation.
Refer
to 5.2.1, “Manual Return
to Reference Point. ”
EXAMPLE
:
EOR
;
NOO1
G50
X..
.
2..
.
;
(3)
When automatic
and
ence point
functions
To
set
up
the
manual return
are not used
programmed
work
to refer–
coordinate
6.6
OPERATION IN TAPE AND MEMORY MODE
(1)
Make sure that NC ALARM
lamp is not illuIf illuminated,
detect
and eliminate
minated.
the cause
by the indication
of alarm code.
Refer
to 4.3.9, “AIARM CODE DISPLAY.”
(2)
Check
and correct
and then put the
start
point.
(3)
Set the
machine
system
with workpiece
as a basis
without
using
the reference
point,
proceed
as
follows :
a.
Select
the
workpiece.
b
Position
(reference
c,
Reset
the current
position
Then
Z-axis
is determined
nate point.
reference
the
Z-axis
surface)
tool
and
set
the
test
at the workpiece
face
by manual operation.
display
of Z-axis.
as Z–axis
coordi–
switches
on the control
to the proper
positions.
MODE
SELECT
SINGLE
RAPID
d.
e.
Position
the X-axis
at the outer
surface
the workpiece
by manual operation.
Then
the control
executes
cutting
outer
surface
if necessary.
of
Turn
off
MACHINE
g.
Move the tool
axis,
checking
display.
LOCK.
to the setup
point
for each
against
the current
position
When the operations
proceeded
correctly,
amount
for the tool
mentioned
above
are
tool position
offset
will be zero.
station
of
switch
BLOCK
toggle
TRAVERSE
switch
RATE
OVERRIDE
switch
MANUAL
Turn
on MACHINE
LOCK
and set the dimensions of the work
outer
surface
as the current position
display
of the X–axis.
Then
the center
is determined
as X-axis
coordinate
point.
f.
the stored
offset
values,
machine
in the correct
ABSOLUTE
OPTIONAL
BLOCK
OPTIONAL
STOP
DRY
RUN
FEEDRATE
switch
toggle
toggle
SKIP
switch
toggle
(MO1)
switch
toggle
switch
switch
OVERRIDE
&amp; JOG
FEEDRATE
(4)
Set the punched
tape onto the tape
In MEM mode,
this operation
is not
(5)
Depress
RESET
key on the
Then
LSK will be illuminated
will be rewound.
(6)
Depress
CYCLE
START
button
Cycle
Start
to the system.
(7)
When
chine
FEED
(8)
If the unexpected
event
occurs in the system,
immediately
depress
EMERGENCY
STOP
pushbutton.
reader.
required.
control
station.
and the memory
to
the Feed
Hold is required
for
during
the system
operation,
HOLD button.
give
a
the madepress
215
6.7 MANUAL OPERATION INTERRUPTING
MATIC OPERATION
(1)
(2)
(3)
AUTO-
Stop the automatic operation temporarily by
depressing FEED HOLD
pushbutton or by
setting SINGLE
BLOCK
switch to ON position.
Record the current positions of each axis
on a paper using the current position dis–
play operation.
Set MODE
SELECT
switch to manual opera–
tion mode (HANDLE,
JOG or RAPID) , and
the machine can be manually operated.
(4)
Return the machine
ed positions.
(5)
Set MODE
SELECT
switch to the interrupted
automatic-mode (TAPE, MD I or MEM) .
(6)
Depress
machine
manually to the record-
6.8
AUTOMATIC
(1)
Set
(2)
Write
tion,
Refer
(3)
MODE
6.9 MDI OPERATION
OPERATION
a. When
MEM)
DLE,
slows
the automatic-mode (TAPE, MDI or
is changed to the manual-mode
(HANJOG or RAPID) , the machine rapidly
down and stops .
b . When the automatic-modes are changed
machine is stopped at the block end.
2.
216
on
SINGLE
START
button,
and auto–
in MD I
INTERRUPTING
AUTOMATIC
BLOCK
switch,
and
the
(2)
Display
the data on CRT
DISPLAY
ing to 4. 3.3 WRITING
IN BLOCKS
DISPLAYING
CONTENTS
BY MDI
it,
(3)
Write the data referring
to 4.3.3.1
Multiblock
Writing
and Operation
in MDI Mode.
the CYCLE
Execute
the data by depressing
START
button.
(4)
Set back
MODE
rupted
automatic
SELECT
switch
to the intermode
(TAPE
or MEM) .
(5)
Return
tion.
BLOCK
(6)
Depress
CYCLE
or MEM operation
SINGLE
switch
to
accord–
AND
and check
OFF
START
button,
and
can be continued,
posi-
TAPE
Notes :
1.
Writing
data by MDI cannot
be
tool radius
compensation
modes
because
two-three
,
of data by MD I opera~ressine
CYCLE
START
‘
-
operation
is interrupted
after
the completion of the block
being
executed.
At the
same time,
the next
blocks
of data may be
read in advance,
the
Where the machine is restarted by depressing
CYCLE
START
button , the tool path shifted
due to manual operation willbe changed by
ON-OFF
operation of MANUAL
ABSOLUTE
switch. Refer to 6.1.21 MANUAL
ABSOLUTE
In manual operation mode, when
SWITCH.
the CYCLE
START
button is depressed after
writing F, M, S, T or B+ code by use of the
same procedure as that of ,MDI operation, the
command
becomes effective and is executed
as soon as written. T his procedure is used
to add new data to an active buffer , How–
ever, MOO, MO1, M02, M30 and M90 to M99
cannot be written.
switch to MD I operation
To modify
the block
data after
interrupting
oP eration
in TAPE
or MEM mode,
the following
operation
should
be done after
interrupting
the
operation.
Notes :
switch is changed withHOLD
pushbutton.
CYCLE
IN M131MODE
ma~ic operation can be executed
mode.
CYCLE
START
pushbutton , and the
will resume the automatic operation.
Where MODE
SELECT
out depressing FEED
SELECT
up to 10 blocks
and execute
bv
to 4.3.3.1.
‘
Depress
(1) Turn
1.
OPERATION
blocks
are
executed
in
( G41 - G44)
read
ahead.
2.
Writing
data by MDI cannot
be performed
in
canned
cycle
modes
(G70 - G76) . The ma–
chine
may not operate
properly.
3.
Excepting
in tool radius
compensation
and
canned
cycle
modes,
MDI opeation
is possible.
.
6.10
PREPARATION FOR TURNING
(1)
Make sure
and CYCLE
(2)
Check
to see that NC
If alarm
ed on CRT.
the causes
of displayed
Refer
eliminate
them.
DISPLAY.”
(3)
Inspect
the
tool builder’s
6.11 TURNING
that the
START
machine
lamp is
OFF POWER
is at standby
extinguished.
ALARM
is not indicatis displayed,
detect
alarm code and
to 4.3.9, “ ALARM
CODE
machine
referring
manual.
to the
machine
OFF POWER
(1)
Depress
turn off
(2)
Depress
POWER
OFF pushbutton
on the operator’s
panel
to turn off the control
power
supply .
(3)
Cut
trol.
off
EMERGENCY
STOP
pushbutton
the servo
power
supply.
the
main
power
supply
from
to
the
con-
217
6.11 TURNING
OFF POWER
(Cent’d )
. Check
of
closing of NC
PREPARATION
~.......
. Inspection
machine
door
q
,’&lt;,’
.,
of
1—.
SETTING OF
S\+’I
T CHES ON
MACHINE
CONTROL STATION
r
$-
Check
of READY
lamp
I
‘tc”
on
Q-RESET
.
s
.
.
CHECK OF 7
MANUAL
OPERATIOS
—
RAPID
JOG
STEP
HANDLE
~
,
CYCLE
RETURN
TO
CE
START
on
FEED HOLD or
SINGLE BLOCK
. lvlanual
REFEREii
on
T
+-––----–-
F
! : ;loNDGEL~EBL;;~K
on
f-
operation
or G28
J
Leadscrew
‘-
compensation ~
stored, stroke
limit ON /OFF
-——————
———-——
—————.
PREPARATION
-FOR AUTOL4AT-’
IC OPERATION
i
I
I
L
Positioning to
starting position
;&lt;,
NC
BLOCK
INTERVENTION
MDI
on
—.—
OF
!
J
tape setting
CYCLE
1
““”
+
SINGLE
START
on
+-
STORING AND
]
EDITING NC
!
TAPE, PROGRAMI
!NO. SEARCH
i
—
+-
—’
Check
if NC
ALARM
~
is indicated.
REk
I TION OFFSET
I
FOR POWER
SUPPLY OFF
:p::E’~TART
off
“ Nc alarm Off
~
I
t
‘POWER
OFF
Fig. 6.1
218
.
Operating
1
SUPPLY
Procedure
_l
. EIvIERGENCY STOP
and
.
then
POWER
OFF on
on
APPENDIX 1 LIST OF SETTING
Parameter
following
numbers
are
four
groups.
Parameter
numbers
classified
in
NUMBERS
the
=L4’v!=ELoN
I
Toggle switch
Group
I
on mschi ne
#6005 to #6029
Parameter
(Setting by
bit)
#6056 to
Parameter
(Setting by
bite)
#6220 to #6344—
Parameter
(Setting by word)
#6600 to #6643
Parameter
(Setting by double word)
#6134
“:a=m
Respective
value
—
INHEDTT
Turns
Turns
1:
o:
of Leadscrew
1:
~ Da
D3
D&gt;
, D,
1
~
m
O:
Turns
Turns
on Edit
off Edit
Lock
Lock
1:
function.
function
o:
.
1:
o:
on Auxiliary
off Auxiliary
Function
Function
1:
Lock .
Lock.
o:
Turns
Turns
Absolute
Absolute
1:
function.
function.
o:
1:
1:
o:
Turns
Turns
o:
Turns
Turns
1:
function.
function.
on
off
Block
Block
Delete
Delete
function
function.
Turns
Turns
1:
Turns
Turns
on Display
off Display
Lock
Lock
function.
function.
1:
o:
o:
on Machine
off Machine
Lock
Lock
function.
function
Turns
Turns
buzzer.
:
D4
Enable
Disable
handle
handle
interpolation
interpolation
function.
function.
D3
CMOS
CMOS
spare
spare
area
area
check
check
function.
function.
D2
Effective
Ineffective
on
the third
Stored
Stroke
Limit.
on the third
Stored
Stroke
Limit.
2:
Effective
Ineffective
INCHMM
on Single
off Single
Block
Block
function
function.
1:
.
o:
by
G38
D1
on the second
Stored
Stroke
Limit,
on the second
Stored
Stroke
Limit.
The value
of limit automatically
changes
or G37 command
in part program.
.
on oper-
With PST2
mode designation
No PST2
mode is designation
3:
SLT
Do
SBKT
switch
D5
SLT
1:
o:
(key
The value
of limit automatically
changes
or G39 command
in part program.
D1
MLKT
:
Enable
Disable
o:
buzzer
D6
o:
1:
.
D2
DLKT
o:
Run
Run
D3
BDTT
1:
on Dry
off Dry
—.
D6 ~
on touch
panel)
.
off touch
CMCHK:
D4
DRNT
1
With PST1
mode is designation
No PST1
mode is designation
HINTPM
on Manual
off Manual
ON
. ___L
:
PSTMD2
D5
ABST
Turns
ator’s
Turns
PSTMD1
D7
I
I
D7
BUZON
D6
AFLT
o:
D5
De
ON
—_——
D7
—
1:
D7
OFF
OFF
1
#&amp;301 ~
Error Compensation
(Setting by bite)
#8000 to #8255
I
Selects
Selects
by
G36
Do
inch input
increment.
metric
input
increment.
Notes:
1.
settings
These
switches.
2.
When
each
are
switch
control
station,
tings
and toggle
function
on /off
for
setting
is provided
the logical
switch
state.
internal
toggle
with machine
sum of these
set-
setting
determines
A–1
APPENDIX 1 LIST OF SEITING
r
,.——
I D,
––L
I
I
D1
._—
\
-l—
—
COV 16 I
1: Punches
out tape
out tape
Punches
TVCHK
COV 8 I ~ COV41
0100
~-
D7
ISOEIA
0:
D5
06
code
code
with
with
code.
code.
1S0
EIA
o
I
o
~
o
o
0
D6
Executes
TV check.
Does
not execute
TV
o:
0101
UM09000E
1:
UMO18000E
on
the edit interlock
on the edit
interlock
in
1
1
I
o
-—
Oit
.
100%
—
-——
‘L-
‘-——
1
30%
40%
50%
.2
L.
0’1
Oil
on
the edit interlock
on the edit
interlock
.—
~eoo3
1 o%
20%
0
0’0
0’1
—+
.. —
. ..—
1
l~o
60&deg;10
Ill
70%
—4
.——..
09000!s.
in 09000’s.
D4
Effective
Ineffective
o:
0
Override
80%
+0
1:
0
Cut Depth
D5
Effective
Ineffective
o:
.
Covll
0
*O
0
—-–..—.
u-
check.
COV21
.-—---0,0
0
1:
(Cent’d)
NUMBERS
r.l
–—.–-...——
in
.——
1
t
L
0
0
-
- -~
1;1
11o%
0!0
120”/0
—
011101
08000’s
in 08000’s.
o
130”10
I
1
140%
150%
—
D5
1Oo%
o
.-L.
1
-—-——
900/o
--—+
Dd
[-D,
DO
-L–-..
1600/0
170”/0
1&gt;5, D4
ODvCE
ODVCD
1800/0
1 Selects
RS232C
O 1/0 interface.
Dl,
D()
IDVCE
1 Selects
IDVCE
0: port.
RS232C
interface
for
output
port.
o~o_J1’1
-.——
1
1
+interface
for
Note:
input
(COVP)
Oil
I
0--
These settings are effective
0
190%
—.
200%
when parameter *6023
Dz
is “O.”
—
Input/Output
Setting
Code
Port
I
1
o
~
1
0,
Parameter
No.
requiring
Baud
Rate
Setting
RS232C
# 6026
No. 1
#6028
RS 232 C
# 6027
No.1
UM08000
1:
0:
# 6029
1:
‘:{04
icEE&amp;-DmEE
COV161(D7),
COV11(D3)
COV81(D6),
O:
COV21(D4),
of cut depth
for Stock
Removal
and Stock
Removal
in Facing
1:
Do
Executes
signal
is
movement
the next
not given
of block
block
when the skip
before
completion
of
including
Skip Function
(G31)
or if the touch switch
does not trip
beyond
the limit position
in the direction
of motion
for tool set error
compensation
(G35).
o:
opera–
Makes
Single
Block
Stop effective
for the
programs
in user macro
when single
block
input
is on.
Does not permit
Single
Block
Stop for the
user macro
blocks
commanding
operation
and
control.
SKIPIN
cycles.
opera8000 to
D1
:
Sets the override
in ‘Turning
(G71)
(G72)
COV41(D5)&gt;
Inhibits
editing
and display
and punchout
tions of the part program
of program
NO.
8999.
Permits
editing
and display
and punchout
tions.
UMSBK
I
D2
Alarm
“ 087”
is
displayed.
I
I
I
:6161
I
TG 1 LF
~6181
‘–
I
IL
I
!
L
TG 1 CNT
]
—–
1
I +6182
—.
A
TG 2 LF
.-J
I
TG 2 CNT
I
TG18CNT
I
\
TG 3 LF
J
#6164
#6165
.—
/J6167
I
I
TG 4 LF
I
TG 5 LF
I
TG 6 LF
I
TG 7 LF
TGICNT
I
No.
-.
I
“‘1
Setting
Setting:
I
TG19CNT:
of times
dicated
used
and
individually
Writing
Ez
TG9LF
is
not
operating
times
are in1 to 19.
for tools in groups
permitted
in this
setting.
G71 OFL
E_-
7
G71OFL:
to TG9LF
Individual
1 to 9 is
TG 19 CNT
TG 8 LF
z6169
TGILF
L------
to
Note:
P6166
I
#6199
I
Sets retraction
cutting
cycle
:
life expectancy
for
set by part program.
range:
“l”
O -
9999
(Tool
tools
in
value
after
completion
of each
Stock
Removal
in Turning
(G71)
.
groups
Setting
Setting
life
in
range:
:
O - 65536
Least
input
increment
control)
= 1
G 72 OFL
#6203
r
I
TG 10 LF
r-;=LF
d
I
TG12LF
I
TG13LF
I
G720FL
:
Sets retraction
cutting
cycle
value
after
completion
of
in Stock
Removal
in Facing
Setting
Setting
:
range
:
Least
increment
I
EEIEl
TG 14LF
G740FL
I
TG15LF
TG16LF
I
.
0 - 65536
input
I1
I
each
(G72)
:
Sets retraction
Z-axis
(G74) .
Setting
Setting:
7
G 74 OFL
range:
Least
value
(6)
in Peck
Drilling
in
O - 65536
input
increment
TG 17 LF
I
TG 18 LF
I
II
TG19LF
I
b6205
G750FL:
I
Sets
retraction
(G75)
TG1OLF
to TG19LF
Individual
10 to
Setting
Setting
life
19 is set
:
G 75 OFL
r
:
expectancy
by
part
for
tools
in
groups
Setting
Setting:
value
(6)
n Grooving
in X–axis
.
range:
Least
O - 65536
input
increment
program.
O - 9999
range:
“ 1“ = 1 minute
( Tool
life
control)
A–3
APPENDIX 1 LIST OF SETTING
,... -——
I
;
~6206
~
(Cent’d)
NUMBERS
G 76 OFL
r
v6502
‘-
i -–—
G763FL
:
J16503
1- ---J
depth
l“hreadcutting
Sets;
cut
Setting
Setting
range:
:
(in X-axis)
(G76) ,
“a”
input
._
ZSL 2 M
~-
XSL2M,
ZSL2M:
Sets the boundary
area in minus direction
Stored
Stroke
Limit
second
prohibit
area
increment
axis
and
Setting
Setting:
:6207
Z–axis,
X-
respectively.
range:
Least
o to
f99999999
output
increment
is
stored,
36504
i
~
:
I
[___
,---
zSL3 P
ZSL 3 P
26505
1
O,
Setting:
XSL3P,
1,
or
4 of
system
No.
operation.
Writing
parameters
ZSL3P:
Sets the boundary
area in positive
Stored
Stroke
Limit
third
prohibit
and Z–axis,
respectively.
switch
SYSTEM
For usual
pre\,ented.
.-
SNSW
$6219
~r
—––—
L-
“o”:
of
on
TINON
When the tape without
program
no.
program
no. is set for the tape.
—
XSL 2 M
in Automatic
O - 65536
Least
_—
Setting
Setting:
is
range:
Least
direction
area on
of
X–axis
O to *99999999
output
increment
~——
!!lll:
PARAMETER
At
To write
parameters.
Cyc.e
Start
is prevented.
“4” :
TEST
this
position,
T
the
, –-–-:
XSL3M
:::-
“-v_
;6507
XSL3M,
(0)
L_–
____
and
Setting the values other than described
cannot permit the correct operation.
2.
Setting can be effective
number
switch provided
the unit is set at 11O.‘1
Z–axis,
Setting
Setting:
area
third
in minus
prohibit
respectively.
range:
Least
O to *99999999
output
increment
above
only when
the system
on the upper
part of
,—
x651 1
.—
,—————
–1
x6512
ZSL 2 P
:6501
s6513
XSL2P,
:6514
ZSL2P:
Sets the boundary
area
n positive
Stored
Stroke
Limit secor d prohibit
axis and Z–axis,
respectively.
Setting
Setting
A--4
range:
: Least
O to ?99999999
output
increment
direction
area on
of
X-
=6515
s6516
‘—
_-
:
1.
‘“--:_
ZSL3M:
Sets the boundary
Stored
Stroke
Limit
“ O“
::___
ZSL 3 M
—1
The usual operation
is similar
to case of
SYSTEM .
Self-diagnostics
of the memory
contents
and checking
of reference
zero
return
point
are omitted.
Notes
IL
?6506
;
T 3 XSLP
direction
area on
of
X-axis
~6517
I
$6543
I
I
I
%544
S6518
T 9 ZSLM
——
—-.
-1
I
$6545
___
.- ——
.
T 10 XSLP
L....
—. –—
-
L
T 10 ZSLP
___
.,
~6546
[
TIOXSLM
.._
T 10 ZSLM
;~
r‘1i6548
I _________
$3549
I
“’xsLp_
----
.__.
T 1lZSLP
[
-1
1
#6550
T 11XSLM
1 ___—
T 11ZSLM
L::
‘-—
T 12 XSLP
——
~=”z__
I
~6553
—-
—
T6554
T 12 XSLM
._l
“~
$6555
L—
I
--;
T12ZSLP
-d
–-
I
L—
] -–—L~..
___
._.
.=
.__—
-
___
~6556
T 12 ZSLM
______
_-!
——
T 13 XSLP
I
L—
~–
I
I,——
~
!_
T 13 ZSLP
T 13 XSLM
—
__
~
T 13 ZSLM
!.
T 14 XSLP
—-1
L.
T
14 ZSLP
T 14 XSLM
T 14 ZSLM
——
,—
1
I
T
8 XSLM
..~
.,
T8 ZSLM
T9
XSLP
T 9 ZSLP
——
L—
-–-
.,
T9 XSLM
A–5
APPENDIX 1 LIST OF SEITING
Sets
the
reference
Setting
Setting
distance
point.
range:
:
Least
of
O to
Stores
Stroke
X-axis
detected.
(Cent’d)
from
i99999999
output
increment
[E??].–.-.-–
IndlCateS
signal
is
Limit
NUMBERS
coordinate
TOFNO1
Part
program
sets tool number
using
offset
of offset
memory
numbers
01 to 50 orderly.
XSKIP
value
to TOFN50:
when
the
Setting
range:
O to
(Tool
life control)
skip
—
a8701
50
.—
.1
TOFO 01
~—.
~..—
‘J8702
‘T
~
Indicates
signal
Z-axis
is
coordinate
value
when
the
skip
1. __—
value
___
----
\
EE02__
____
\
detected.
$8749
L-
l’
I
---
__—.
TGPNO1
__—-
_—
TOF050
.n~
TGPN 02
I
‘~F~4g
I
;
TOFOO1
to
TOF050:
Part program
sets the order
of using
offset
values
in offset
memories
“ 01” to “ 50, ‘l sequentially.
Setting
I
TGPNO1
to
I
TGPN 50
I’GPN50:
Part program
determines
including
tools
(number
Setting
range:
O to
(Tool
life control)
20
the number
01 to 50) .
of
groups
range
( TOOI life
:
control)
0 to
5
__
APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER NUMBERS
Setting
numbers
four
groups.
Setting
#6000
are
classified
in
Setting
following
Setting
#6004
by
bit
#6161
to
#6219
Setting
by
word
#6500
to
#6569
Setting
by
double
#8601
to
#8750
Setting
of
tool
life
control
I
o
1
1
0
1:
o:
special
G code I as G code*.
standard
G code as G code.
RSTGO1
1:
o:
D6
Determines
resetting.
Determines
resetting.
POSEXT
1:
O:
of
01 group
as GO1 when
G code
of
01 group
as GOO when
Sets
Sets
ten
the
setting
display
by
1:
o:
o:
G code
applied.
G code
applied.
in
the
05 group
to G99 when
in
the
05 group
to G98 when
in the
03 group
to G91 when
in the
03 Erouw
to G90 when
* Where
the control
is provided
determination
code
II option,
changed
as follows.
1:
Uses
Uses
;
SD ASGN2,
with
special
G
of setting
is
special
G code E.
standard
G code.
1:
increment.
if the spindle
speed
is off upon transition
block
to a cutting
on the
spindle
match
from
feed block.
speed
match
D2
Enables
traverse
Disables
traverse
o:
Dry
Run
command.
dry
Run
commana.
in
response
to
the
rapid
in
response
to
the
rapid
D1
1: Causes
an alarm (” 002”)
upon Cycle
Start
when Reference
Point
Return
on Z–axis
is
not made manually
after
power
is applied.
Causes no alarm.
o:
DO
Causes
an alarm (” 001”)
upon Cycle
Start
when Reference
Point
Return
on X-axis
is
not made manually
after
power
is applied.
Causes
no alarm.
o:
Lq-
SD ASGN1:
D7 , D6
Set
II111when
Stored
Lead
Compensation
or Stored
provided,
set ZZRNILK
at
ED TSTLK
Screw
Error
Stroke
Limit is
at 1, XZRNILK
1.
D7
1: Does
O:
m
——
$W06
the least input
input
increment.
Radius
designation.
Diameter
designation.
DI)
Sets the G code
power
is applied.
Sets the G code
power
is applied.
o:
Plus
D3
Note :
PONG03
1:
Minus
I
Dl
Sets the
power
is
Sets the
power
is
o:
times
least
Provides
no check
signal
(,sAGR).
1:
1:
Minus
Minus
o:
XZRNILK
PONG04
Plus
Plus
Checks
to see
signal
( SAGR)
a rapid
traverse
ZZRNILK
D4
Resets
the value
at POSITION
EXTERNAL
display
to “O. ‘1
Does not reset
the value
at POSITION
EXTERNAL
display
to “O. “
o:
I
1:
RPDDRN
by
I
Minus
D4
XRAD
D5
EXTSET
1:
G code
Presets
position
external
display
coordinate
system.
Does not preset
position
external
setting
coordinate
system.
output.
D5
SAGRCH
D7
output)
Plus
Ill
10IN
o:
GCDSP
Uses
Uses
(analog
words
.mD~:-~
&lt;mo5
—J
S4-digit
1
1:
:7
of
—%.1&gt;
Group
numbers
to
the
not cause
an alarm upon
Cycle Start
without
reset operation
after part program
edit operation.
Causes
an alarm 005.
STUD
1:
o:
D6
Effective
on Cycle
Start
when
signal
“l” changes
to “O. “
Effective
on Cycle
Start
when
11011changes to “1.“
signal
cycle
start
cycle
start
A–7
APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER
HSPDM
M30RWD2
Enable
high–speed
Disable high-speed
1:
o:
RWDOUT
:1:
0:
NUMBERS
M function.
M function.
1.
..
D4
o:
Provides
Rewinding
Activate
Signal
when NC
program
is rewound
by RESET
&amp; REWIND
signal.
Provides
no Rewinding
Activate
Signal
when
NC program
is rewound
by RESET
&amp; REWIND
signal.
OUTPUT
D3
operates
Rewinding:
YASNAC
tape
reader
second
RS232C.
No rewinding
.
M30RWDl
1:
o:
D2
operates
Rewinding:
Y.ASNAC
tape reader
RS232C.
NO rewinding.
CVSAVE
Sets
the least output
increment
at O. 0001
o:
Sets the least output
increment
at O. 001 mm.
1:
o:
1:
O:
1:
O:
override
D1
Does
0:
#100 thru
#149 by reset.
Clears
user
macro common
variables
thru #140 by reset
operation
.
not
ZRNOFS
Spindle
override
100%
~:
D]
Stored
0:
Cancels
reference
Do not clear
Clear
OFSOO
OFSOO X, Z by
X, Z by O-9999
ZMOVILK
1:
O-9999
ORG.
Tool
following
iNose
the
Radius
Com–
commanded
D7
by G2S is executed
to reference
point
if move
command
returning
without
manually
or auto-
matically, alarm “001” will be caused.
iloes not cause alarm in the same condition
above.
FS editing.
FS editing.
o:
D6
After
turning
on power,
if move command
except
by G28 is ~xecuted
without
returning
X-axis
to reference
point manually
or automatically, alarm “001” will be caused.
Does not cause alarm .
D5
OTALILK
A--8
blocks
or
After turning on power,
YQ.JOVILD
ORG.
M97 command
(calculation
of intersection)
selected
at power-on.
M96 command
(circular
arc)
is selected
power-on.
0:
Offset
Stored
D6
Edit FS backward upon
Edit FS each time upon
1:
#100
Stored
1:
FEEDCUT:
variable
D7
FSA40DCH:
o:
command
the commanded
block
when
the second
point
“by G 30 is commanded
during
TOO1 Position
pensation.
&lt;Cancels the
block .
shown
OF SOCLR:
1:
macro
Do
o:
PONM97
user
D()
except
~-axis
1:
o:
ciear
Stored
Establishes
the prohibited
area of the
Stroke
Limit
2 outside
the boundary.
Establishes
the prohibited
area of the
Stroke
Limit
2 inside
the boundary.
1:
o:
the standarcl
to the first
~:
100% during
Establishes
the prohibited
area of the
Stroke
Limit
3 outside
the boundary.
Establishes
the prohibited
area of the
Stroke
Limit
3 inside
the boundary.
SL”r 210
with M30 if
is connected
inch
D2
Makes the Spindle
tapping.
Does not make the
during
tapping.
SLT31O
with M30 if the stand arcl
is connected
to the
D3
1:
SC:R.SOV
(Cent’d)
is
at
D4
With feed when upon tape output from the
NC.
Without feed when upon tape output from the
NC.
D5
1: Does not cause an alarm at overtravel.
o: Causes an alarm at overtravel.
HPMUL
1:
o:
D4
Sets the value set by #6223 when MANUAL
PULSE
MULTIPLY
switch
is set at x1OO.
Regards
multiplication
factor
as x 100 when
MANUAL
PULSE
MULTIPLY
switch
is set
at x1OO.
ZRNRPD
1:
o:
D2
Enable
Disable
1:
o:
j
L-~~
S4SF:
1:
o:
offset
offset
function.
function.
1:
o:
G711KUW:
D1
U, W are the rough
no K in G71 to G73
rough
cutting.
cut margin
when
(multiple
repetitive
there
is
cycle)
o:
D,
–DJ6::-:=.
TLCNT:
1:
o:
o:
1:
the
first
reference
point
return
(deceleration
limit switch)
and the subsequent
automatic
reference
point
returns
in the same
way when power
is applied.
o:
Executes
(position
MZRNHS
1:
o:
o:
reference
point).
point
return
1:
o:
signal
command
when
S4-digit
in
in
system
variable
system
variable
3rd stored
function.
3rd stored
function.
stroke
tool setter
tool setter
high-speed
high-speed
stroke
limit
limit
Z-axis
barrier
Z-axis
barrier
D3
Enable
Disable
signal
signal
function.
function,
D2
Enable
automatic
nose
R function
and cancel
tool coordinate
system
setting
function.
Disable
automatic
nose R function
and tool
coordinate
system
setting
function
cancellation
D1
Enable
T code command
and G41,
commands
in the multiple
repetitive
Disable
T code command
and G41,
commands
in the multiple
repetitive
G42
cycle.
G42
cycle.
DO
The tool coordinate
memory
numbers
are
lower
2 digits
of the T**$$
command.
The tool coordinate
memory
numbers
are
higher
2 digits
of the T**$$
command.
the
the
._r.—
.—
I
SF
S4–digit
#6014
.
~ D,
~_.,__
‘6
IDS
.._
bti
D4
Executes
Specify
tion on
1:
o:
high-speed
at reference
Executes
the first
reference
point
the subsequent
automatic
reference
turns
in the same way when power
ZRNDRZ,
~:
when
D4
Enable
setting
Disable
setting
TCOMEM:
D5
Executes
o:
.1
D5
G71LVL:
D6
Alarm
occurs
when
the life of a single
tool
has expired
in tool life management.
Alarm
does not occur
when the life of a single
tool has expired
in tool life management.
AZRNHS
~:
D,--] ””D:~
1..
Look-ahead
is enabled
#looo
to #3001.
Look-ahead
is disabled
#looo
to #3001.
NOTGCAN:
D7
Control
the number
in all tool groups
in tool
life management.
Does not control
the number
in all tool groups
in tool life management.
TLERR:
1:
~ DO
---–
D,
D6
PSOPH:
1:
o:
D4
.L
Output
the SF signal
is given.
Does not output
the
command
is given,
SLT3S:
1:
U, W are not the rough
cut margin
when
there
is no K in G71 to G73 (multiple
repetitive
cycle)
rough
cutting.
.:!’Q
ID61D,
I
NSRCHG:
multiple
multiple
.T-.–.
—
.——
I
I
I F6011
Provides
JOG command
instead
of RAPID
command
until reference
point
return
for
each axis is completed
after
the power
is
In the reference
point return
turned
on.
mode,
usual RAPID
operation
is executed
in both negative
and positive
directions.
Provides
usual RAPID
TRAVERSE
rate.
FKGHOS:
1:
o:
[
D3
high–speed
ZRNDRX
Dl~
reference
point
PCMEM:
D7
Stores
PC
parameter)
unit
malfunction.
( Maintenance
return.
SVMEM
DO
the start
direction
Qf Backlash
Z- , and X–axis,
respectively.
Minus direction
Plus direction
return
and
point
re–
is applied.
Compensa-
D6
Stores
Servo
parameter)
ACGCMEM:
1:
unit
malfunction
(Lfaintenance
D5
Stores the operation error of ACGC120.
A–9
APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER
_
...
.—
AT SUPZ,
ATSUPX
Dl,
Automatic
on the Z-
Coordinate
and X-axis,
Effective
Ineffective
0:
1:
o:
1:
#6631,
#6637,
Inch
system:
Metric
system:
is
o:
#6630
#6636
1:
1:
~—
I
D711
,—.
.—
D2
D,
-——.
I
o:
L—.
D7
Output
of the
DID0
Does not add workpiece shift value at G50 coordinate system setting or resetting by ORG key.
Adds workpiece shift value at G50 coordinate
system setting or resetting by ORG key.
Reverses U and W input code for work coordinate system shift value.
Does not reverse U and W input code for work
coordinate system s“hiftvalue.
Displays cyclicallyby pressing offset function.
Does not display cyclicallyby pressing offset
function.
G32ALM
Output the leading O also when
are
order digits of the variable
DPRINT
0:
–——.
.—
D2,
OFSCYC
.——— ——
DPR.lNT:
—
WSSGN
Note :
The Automatic
Coordinate
System
established
with the following
parameters:
Z 6016
—— .—
jD7D6D5DdD3
,. __
__
:6018
G50WST
DO
or not the
is effective
(Co~fd)
~
I).
,
-L—..
.—
Specify
whether
System
Setting
respectively.
].:
~“~
‘~
,6,15;
~“r
NUMBERS
the higher
O in the
function.
nothing
variable
1:
o:
when
the higher
order
digits
are ‘0 in the DPRINT
function .
Activates alarm due to too short cutting time
of 1 block for continuous ihreadcutting.
Executes without waiting for cycle start if
cutting time is too short for continuous
threadcutiing.
MAX UW
NO SEFF:
1:
o:
D2
1:
Disable interference
Enable
interference
MR’VDRN:
check.
check,
o:
D1
Enable
switching
to dry run during
under
the MM/REV
mode.
Disable
switching
to dry run during
under
the MM IREV
mode.
1:
o:
Warning if U or w input exceeds parameter
#6626
Regards U or W input to offset data as usual
input.
RPDOV
move
1:
move
o:
Provides six steps of rapid over~ide (FO, 25,
50, 100%)
Provides four steps of rapid override (FO,
25, 50, 100%)
~—=6017
D71DGDS’DAD3D2
D,
——.
—_L
SPDOV
~ Do
.
.
1:
EIA~#B7-BO
D7
- D()
Specify
whether
or not a hole is to be made on
channels
8-1, respectively,
in a code correspond“#“ (used
with user macro)
in the
ing to symbol
EIA code.
1:
o:
The
code
o:
EIA#B7-Bo
with
holes
‘
01001001
on channels
7,
4, and
1 is
considered equivalent to symbol “ #’iin the EIA
code . No code for use by the unit can be set.
Note :
A--1O
The specification of EIA#B7-BO
= 00000000
assumes that symbol “#“ is not used in
the EIA code.
spindle speed override range of 10 to
(10% increments)
spindle speed override range of 50 to
(10% override increments) .
G150XZ:
L:
Hole
N o hole
Example:
o:
Sets
200%
Sets
120%
X, Z
G150,
X, Z
alarm
DO
axes simultaneous shift causes alarm in
G151 groove width shift.
axes simultaneous shift does not cause
in G150, G151 groove width shift.
m
G92FHP
o:
D4
Da
Dz
1:
o:
Effective
Effective
with
with
feedrate override signal
feedrate override signal
“ O. “
“ 1. “
D7
Specifies the
cutting.
1:
D5
FOVAB
D5
D7
position
of
temporary
stop
of
thread-
SSTPAB
1:
Stops at the position B where Threading-up
is completed.
Returns to start point A and stops after
Threading-up
is completed.
o:
D4
Analog
output
zero with spindle S command
zero input signal SSTP “O:“
Analog output zero with spindle S command
zero input signal SSTP “1.“
AU TSET:
m
TOOL
PATH DURING
THREAD
CUTTING
TEMPORARY
1:
INTERRuPT
-— ----
~----––
-
A
o:
I
Q.,
[Gw, (;76)
D3
Automatically set the tool coordinate memory
by external input.
Does not automatically set the tool coordinate
memory by external input.
PSTSGN
D2
Shown in the calculationformula of storing data
during MDI of measured work point into tool offset memories 01 to 50.
t
FEED HOLD
SCRDRN
1:
O:
D5
‘:
(;:;:::’)
=
Enables Dry Run at threadcutting.
Disables Dry Run at threadcutting.
SKPFED
~s~~~~
D4
‘~~~~~~ementj
1: Employs
o:
the feedrate set in parameter #6232
(G31F) for the Skip Function command
(G31).
Employs the F code command
as the feedrate
for the Skip Function command
(G31) .
ESPRST
1:
o:
0:
(:~:i::::’)
~~~~~ement~
D3
OESG96
o:
D2
Inputs the specified value to macro system
variables #5001, 5002 during G31 execution.
Inputs the current value to macro system
variables #5001, 5002 during G31 execution.
1:
0:
DI
Specifies the surface speed calculated by the
X-axis coordinate value modified by tool position offset value in Constant Surface Speed
Control.
Specifies the surface speed calculated by the
programmed
X–axis coordinate value in Con~tan–t Surface
POSG96
OFSDSP
1:
o:
o:
D7
Displays programmed
position in current
position display (POSITION
ABSOLUTE).
Displays programmed
position modified with
tool position offset in current position dis–
play (POSITION
ABsoLuTE).
OFSZRO:
1:
‘(=)~~~
Does not turn on RST output with ESP input
ON.
Turns on RST output with ESP input ON.
G31SKP
1:
‘
1:
0:
Speed
Control.
DO
Surface
Speed
Control
functions
on the block
including
Rapid
Traverse
(GOO) .
Surface
Speed
Control
functions
on the block
including
Rapid
Traverse
(GOO) , if programmed before
the Cutting
Feed block.
D6
Automatically clear the tool wear offset by
external input.
Does not automatically clear the tool wear
offset by external input.
A–II
APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER
-r—
-,
:6021
0:
O:
1 D,
Ds
DA ~ Da
__~
WX322–
r “--~– —
-1 -_
‘ “LD’--!!
D~Do
.
opera9000
to 9999.
Permits
editing
tions.
opera-
and
punchout
program
is already
ALARM.
with a new
stored.
1:
one
0:
():
RS
(RS232C
signal)
by.
CHKDR
1:
on
until
reading-in
is
D4
1:
O:
Recognizes
Does not
DR.
recognize
O -
9999o
D3
1:
Punches
9, 9, 9,
00 when tape is punched
9 keyed
in and ~Tkey
o:
Does not punch 00 when tape is punched with
o, -, 9, 9, 9, and 9 keyed in and !=
key
depressed.
DR.
Effective
amount
Effective
amount
1:
with O,
depressed.
-,
o:
1:
0:
0:
1:
o:
o:
when
offset
when
offset
D5
D4
Specifies
movement
for
D3
outOUT
‘2
HOFSX
D~,
when
outputting
key
(in the EDIT
1S0 tape
data in
DO
whether
automatic
mode
is effective
or ineffective.
handle
offset
DO
Considers M02, M30 and M99 as the program
end when part program is stored into memory.
At punchout with O-9999 depressed, add
EOB in front of O number.
Does not consider M02, M30 and M99 as the
program end when part program is stored
At punchout with O-9999
into memory.
depressed, do not add EOB in front of O
number.
A-12
block
Ignores
parity
bit
( 8th bit)
1S0 codes
by operating
IN
mode)
and when
reading-in
the TAPE
mode.
Performs
parity
check.
HOFSZ,
1:
1:
code
Does not output
parity
bit (8th bit)when
putting
1S0 codes
from NC by operating
key
(in the EDIT
mode) .
Outputs
parity
bit.
ISOPI
D1
Employs the value following address O or N
as the program number (specifiable in one
block) .
Employs the value following address O as the
program number.
M02M99
T
Ignores
manual
absolute
function
for
incremental
command
by U and W.
Does not ignore
manual
absolute
function
incremental
command
by U and W.
ISOPO
D2
Does not clear program No. on power application.
(Program number is stored at power supply
shut off.)
Clears program No. on power application.
PRGNO
on the next
changed.
on the next
is changed.
is
Executes
the block
next
to the block
specifying thread,
and stops
at single
block
oper–
ation
or feedhold
during
thread
cutting.
Stops
on completion
of the block
specifying
thread
at single
block
operation
or feedhold
during
thread
cutting.
MABIN
1.
L.
o:
mode haninterpolation.
mode hanof rapid
“ %“
o:
1:
-3 .-&gt;. -E: 3 __Do
_
D5
Sets on and off
character.
Keeps
RS signal
finished.
PO:NON
-——
D6
TRDFH
1:
.——-——
Enables
the movement
of automatic
dle offset
during
cutting
feed by
Enables
the movement
of automatic
dle offset
except
during
execution
traverse.
TLCC
Dt5
Replaces
the stored
when part program
Displays
ALREADY
RSC)NOF
display
———
D7
HOFSMV
D7
and
(Cent’d)
—.
Inhibits
editing
and display
and punchout
tions of the part program
of program
No.
MERSIN
1:
,–_r
~
-
_D_7
UM09000
1:
—7—
NUMBERS
o:
Effective
ment.
Ineffective
ment.
automatic
automatic
mode
handle
mode
handle
offset
offset
movemove-
X!E ‘71
D’D51 D31D2D11D01
D7
PERIAB
1:
Incremental
o:
Leadscrew
Absolute
Leadscrew
PERST
1:
o:
setting
Error
setting
Error
aiton.
Ignores
M3 O in
ONOCHG
IT%(1 code
TAPE
if
commanded
or MEM mode
SIFIBID
before
‘--—
=6026
SIFICI
bits.
bit.
for
RS232C
SIFI BIC
interface
SIFI BIB
No.
1
I SIF1 BIA
o
0
010
1101
0
0
1
150
0
0
1
0
1
o~o
300
0
1
0
600--}
0
1
‘1
l“----
-.
D3
I
o
1
1
0
-}
Ill
1200101
2400
\
1
0
0
4800
I
1
0
011
9600
I
1
0
110
lo
Output for RS232 C No. 2
depth
input
value
override
with
cut depth
in Stroke
Removal
in Turning
SIF2CI
Do
speed
in high-
at high
speed
in
RS232C
control
sent or
1:
o:
code.
Does not send
Sends
control
SIFISO
D4
Determines
No. 2 as
output
two bits
1: Determines
~D,
~ D,
~
D,
I
Do
Sets output
No. 2.
control
code.
stop bit for
or one bit.
stop
stop
Determines
SIF2BID-SIF2B1A
No.1
~~D.
D5
Determines
whether
output
RS232C
No.
2 interface
is
o:
~
I
‘-200
are forced
to reset
when
manual
mode is selected
during
automatic
Automatically
starts
at high
speed
rewinding.
Does not start automatically
high-speed
rewinding.
for
as two
as one
Imloooll
D1
Input
rate
I SIFI BID
50
operation.
oilby inputting ‘t
:11and OUtplltS
outputs It
11in 1S0 code.
“:“ by inputting 110,
Does not perform the conversion above.
HSRWD
bit
bit
D3 - Do
baud
Baud Rate
M02 or
(G71)
and stock
removal
in facing
(G72) .
Sets cut depth
value
override
with setting
#6004.
CLNO
stop
stop
- SIFIBIA
input
D5
Sets
cut
override
0:
baud
bit
bit
as two
as one
D3 rate
code
not.
RS232C
for
interface
bits.
bit.
Do
for
RS232C
interface
D5
Determines
whether
RS232C
interface
is
1:
o:
Determines
D et ermines
Stored
D2
1:
o:
1:
o:
Changes No. O by pressing O, program number, and ALT keys.
Does not change No. O by pressing O, program number, and ALT keys.
COVP
1:
for
Stored
Sets
commands
operation
operation.
o:
Compensation.
of offset
value
Compensation.
for
Lights
feedhold
lamp and stores
M, S, and T
commands
when
manual
operation
mode is
selected
during
automatic
operation.
Does not light
feedhold
lamp and M, S, and T
o:
1:
value
Regards “%“ code as M30, if “%“ is commanded
before M02 or M30 in TAPE
or MEM mode oper-
1:
o:
offset
D6
MCI-IMST
1:
of
stop bit for RS232C
the input
No.
1 as two bits or one bit.
Determines
interface
Does not send
Sends
control
the input
given
or
control
code.
control
not.
code
for
code.
A–13
APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER
Baud
Rate lSl F2BlDl
SlF2BlC,
SlF2Bl
5010’0
F2BlA
4
Output
for RS232
010
I
Im
o~o
.
110
150
BISl
NUMBERS
0
I
Oil,
o
0;
O-l+”
300
–-+
i
”po”
0
I
+--
SIF2C0
o
1
-
i
.——
T
D,
110
]1;0
for RS232C
Does not send
Sends
control
Determines
output
No.
2 as two bits
1:
o:
No. 1
Determines
Determines
Baud
.
Does
not send control code,
Sends control code.
SIFI. SO
D,
DO
control
code.
code.
stop bit for
or one bit.
stop
stop
bit
bit
D3 -
as two
as one
RS232C
interface
bits.
bit.
Do
rate for RS232C
interface.
5
Determines whether output control code for current loop and RS232C interface is sent or not.
o:
i
D4
Sets output baud
1:
D2
—
SIF2BOD-SIF2BOA
D
I
D3
D5
SIF2S0
SIFICO
D.
Determines whether output control code for
RS232C interface
No.
2“is sent or not,
1:
o:
Output
—v .—
0
200
9600
C No. 2
.
s6029
~ -:..+:
(Cent’d)
Rat[
;IF2BOD
SIF2BOC
SIF2
BOB
SIF2
50
o
0
100
0
0
1
110
0
0
0
150
0
0
i
200
0
1
0
0
—
D4
Determines output stop bit for current loop and
RS232C interface as two bits or one bit,
1:
Determines
o:
Determines
stop
bit as two
stop bit as one
SIFIBOD-SIFIBOA
bits.
bit.
—.
D3 - DO
o
300
1
600
0
1
0
1200
0
1
1
2400
1
0
0
4800
1
.
Sets output baud rate for current loop and
RS23ZC interface,
E;aud Rate IS IF IBOD
A–14
BOA
SIFI
BCC
SIF1
BOB:
SIFI
9600
BOA
1
0
.
0
I
XPSET
=
r—
I
#6057
I
#6058
XPSET
ZPSET
I
I
SPSET
——
I
IF~
I
XPERML,
XPERML
F
ZPERML
Sets position error range for
spindle (at indexing) .
X-,
Z-axis
ZPERML:
error
compensation
and Z-axis.
multiplication
Outputs
the result
of the preset
compensation
value
multiplied
by the multiplication
factor
the error
compensation
value.
and
Setting
(Setting
Setting range:
““--”-T
7
Sets leadscrew
factor
for X-
, ZPSET , SPSET :
Setting:
r:
range:
O will
O - 255
not execute
compensation.
as
)
O - 255
Least
output
increment
~
XSVER
I
I
#6063
I
1..-~
,—.—.—
I
I
BSX
~——–.——.—
——~
I
BS Z
I
I
BSS
D/A
conversion
(at
indexing
#6062
#6063
bit
for
X-,
Z-axis,
5
!
I
XSVER,
ZSVER,
SSVER:
Bit
Setting
range:
O - 255
Standard
setting:
16
1/16 x (D/A
saturation
Setting:
~
Max No. of
Error
Pulses
---1----12 bit
2047
13 bit
4095
8191
6
I
14 bit
7
I
15 bit
16383
8
I
16 bit
32765
and
the preset
and
1.
#6064
4
SSVER
Sets servo
error
limit for X-,
Z-axis,
spindle.
Position
deviation
exceeding
value
activates
an alarm ‘134A. 11
Bsx, Bsz, BSS:
Sets
r
—
.1
spindle
ZSVER
1
r————-
1—–——.
L
ZiE!zl
r
Rapid
threading
cutting
Setting
Setting:
pull-out
value)
CUPRD
width
during
thread-
range:
O - 255
O. 1 lead
SIDSER
E’1
Max
No.
of
Error Pulses
=
Max Feedrate (pulse/s)
Position Loop Gain (l/s)
Setting range:
O - 255
Setting: Least output increment
Spindle stop check timer at spindle index start.
Setting range:
O - 225
Setting: l=8ms
APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER
(Cent’d)
NUMBERS
.
~6120
—.
–.
x6122
I
—
16123
—
,.
x6124
,–—z6113
I
:6125
UM;EIAS :
~6126
Specify the punching pattern in EIA for special
characters employed in user macro; [ , ] , *, =,
(, ), used in turn, beginning with #6108.
I,
,——_—
—. —— —,
~6127
i
Setting range:
O - 255
Se~ting: Sets the punching pattern using the
decimal value converted from the binary value
which defines the pattern.
“0“ is set for each character,
Note: men
punching pattern willbe as listed below.
IJMG1
Sets
No.
-
10:
G codes
to
for
09001
Setting
calling
user
macro
range
:
(
–..
program
of
program
0- 255
UMM
*_.J._i ---
of
09004,
1
,.
. ..
-.———
“
UMM 2
UMM3
)
UMM4
:6114
NBUFM
:6115
NBUFM
UMMI,
UMM3,
UMM2,
Sets M codes
for calling
No. 09001 to 09004.
2
Setting
range:
NBUFM
UMT
5
1.
1.
NBUFM 6
=6119
0:
Note:
user
2, 3, 4, 5, 6:
Sets up to 6 M codes for stopping
ing function
(buffering)
.
/4-16
macro
UMT
:6118
Setting
user
O - 255
=6134
iNBIJFMl,
CMM4 :
range:
O - 255
advance
read–
Regards
T-code
command
as macro
mand calling
the macro of program
Regards
T-code
command
as basic
This
macro
selection
option.
is effective
only
call comNo. 09000.
T-code.
for
the
.—— ——
EEEIL
MD7 High-speed
is set.
Setting
range:
—,
G740F1
Set
O to
M function
decode
Setting
groove
canned
O to
cycle
1!
retract
amount.
G74/G75
unit
G750FI
G75
Setting
groove
range:
canned
O to
#6210
—
I
—.
L
cycle
retract
amount.
unit
1
G74CLR
Setting
O to
clearance
the
G75
Setting
Unit:
o to
cycle clearance amount.
-,
I
canned
Setting
range:
Unit:
from the time M,
until the time MF,
Setting
O - 65536
range:
I!lll
S, and T codes
SF, and TF
msec
O to
= 100% (is
L–._..
HPMAX
- -—
:
m
E-
G745FED
approach
‘..
HPMUL
FEED
11111= x
8.
it
is
O)
Setting
J
MULTIPLY
1 time
m~–
SAGRT
PULSE
,
S,4GRT~
:
Specifies
the delay
time for checking
speed
reaching
signal
(SAGR)
.
100% when
of
is
:
Setting:
I
-J
127
also
which
11111= 125 pulses/see
unit
groove
J
–.-
Sets the value when MANUAL
switch
is set at x1OO.
..—.
cycle
–1
““-”----
—-–1
HPMUL
G745FED:
Groove
override.
.
65535
‘
.-
—,
MSTF
——
——
~
65535
= 1 ms
~
Setting
G 75CLR
canned
!!1‘1 = 1 input
$6212
time.
Specifies
the maximum
handle
feedrate,
commom to the all axes.
This
parameter
setting
is in multiples
unit
.—
groove
range:
O to
dwell
HPMAX:
G75CLR:
Set
hole
amount.
65535
ir-j L.-—
s6211
.—.
cycle
canned
‘111’ = 1 input
Unit:
of
.-- —..
groove
range:
—,
. . . .._..___
Sets the interval
are transmitted
are transmitted.
L
G74
-.__
———
m
the
G 74 DWL
.—.
MSTF:
G74CLR:
Set
.
]
65535
“ 1” = 1 input
Unit:
1
i_
range:
“l”
p=q
the
l—’
bottom
Setting
G750F1:
Set
L–-.
G74DWL:
65535
~
~
99
r---”
—,
Unit:
———
I
46209
L
o to
override.
J
L—
1!11! = 1 input
Unit:
range:
reduction
1!1!! = l%
b==
range:
OVR
~
:
Setting
Infeed
Unit:
G740FI
.-
G74
G71
1
G71/G72
255
i
L
the
IL
G71OVR:
output
—
~L-# 6208
I
1
MDO to
holding
~
‘ti6213
MD O-MD7
range:
O - 65536
the
spindle
msec
A–17
APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMErER
NUMBERS
(Cent’d)
.——
#6225
i
‘..~
KPX
r
The
“7
corner
arc
setting
is ignored
when:
L
—––-
.
—
#6226
KPZ
I
&lt;’
~–_
KPX,
-.I
S
NEGNR
AY
S
NEGNR
Standard
KPZ:
Set the P-loop
gain
respectively.
Z-axis
AX
Setting:
of
Standard
command
set:
units
for
X-
setting
= 5
AZ
and
1024
KPS :
Set the P-loop
‘The relations
fo]lows
gain of spindle
at indexing.
between
KPS and BSS
(#6064)
as
;
:
Max. Set
Of # 6227
#8084
i No. of Bit
I No. of Max.
offset pulse
4096
4
12
2047
2048
5
13
4095
1024
6
14
8191
512
7
15
16383
256
8
16
32765
‘623’I
ROVFO
~
.—
G98MAX
G 98 MAX
.=
Specifies
Override.
Specifies
the maximum
feedrate
at G 98 command
( feed per minute)
common
to all axes.
Setting
range:
“ 1“
Setting:
Setting
Setting
:
Setting range:
O - 65536
Setting : Least input increment
Setting
speed
for
Rapid
Traverse
= 125 pulses/see
‘=-
‘---–-::
the
feedrate
in the
skip
function
( G31)
.
range:
III!!
Setting:
setting
(SKPFED)
= 1000 pulses/rein
is effective
when
parameter
#6019D 4
= 1.
E-”=G~---–”-I
~q
JOG O-JOG
\~
___
JOG 31
—-’–-—–-”-”,
~
31:
Specify the feedrates for the respective positions
on the jog feedrate select switch.
Setting range:
Setting:
A--18
----
G31F:
:
When a circular
path is drawn
in Tool Radius
Compensation
o,utside
a corner
approaching
180&deg;, the
movement
follows
describing
a very
small circular
This
parameter
is used to set the critical
arc.
arc value,
if this arc movement
is considered
to
affect
the workpiece
surface
machining.
FO
range:
“ I“
3
NEGNR
._..!!!vF~..
[:-:
This
= 1000 puLses/min
L..—
the
Specifies
:
✍ ✿✿✿
:
Ea
[ --;=
➤✍
!!
l!!= ().5 mm /rein (metric OUtpUt)
Ill!!
= 0.05 im/min (inch output)
Switch
Position
~ Feedrate
~ ‘v~~~de
~umber
~ *ning
o
0
#6233
o
0
10
#t6234
1
1
2
20–
*6235
2
2
3
30
+6236
4
4
4
——
40
#6237
6
6
—— 5 —
6
7170
50
60
#6238
#6239
#6240
8
10
8
10
12
12
8’80
#6241
15
15
9i90
#6242
20
20
100
#6243
25
10
11
12
13 —
--
!
~
110
I #6244
I
120
$6245
I__..
40
~
130_
#6246
50
~
60
~
I
-+..140
I
#6247
__*_
;=
16
~
40
,:
120
#6250
120
#6251
150
i
150
—. 19 ‘20
190
# 6252
200
[
200
200
# 6253
250
[
250
21-
0
i # 6254
300
300
22
0
“-” #6255
400
400
o
#6256
500
500
600
600
i
+“:{
:
27~
29
30
31
setting
~ ;~8
$6259
IQ
o
#6260
0
7
I“—”~6261
0 ~ #6262
0
I #6263
0
#6264
is
for
gear
speed
is
1,
2,
3,
(r/rnin)
at O, the
+6270
L-.
not
clamped.
GRSREV
7[
GRSREV
:
Sets the speed
command
output
to spindle
when
gear shift
input
(GRS)
is given.
i
Setting value:
motor
Gear shift spindle motor speed
Spindle motor max speed
(Command
x
I
180
28
the
limit
O - 6000
range:
60
,:
170
26
I
50
18
23
When
upper
30
17
k+
Setting
25
30
:
Sets spindle
speed
and 4 orderly.
:,;;Fee”rate
?
..—
MACGR1-MACGR4
Continuous
Parameter
x 32512
Setting
800
—
1OCX3
—
1200
1500
2000
2500
3300
2000
2500
3000
_
‘–
range:
output
spindle
motor
speed
motor
max speed
(Command
:
1OCO
1200
= 10 v;
12–bit
Gear shift
Spindle
800
1500
2047 -––
-––
= 10 V)
Analog
output
O - 6000
1.
I
E
F
GR2REV
.
“––-—’
m
E“”
GR3REV
––~
r—-
‘R4REV
~6271
GR IREV
-1
c
——
–——
z6266
-—-
l---.—
_____
116267
_ ‘*3’..
Specify
tively,
--A
~---- ---------MACGFI 3
l.-—------—
::7
~—
~6269
——————
GRIREV-GR4REV:
3
MACGR 2
~6268
L.-
M,4CGR 4
.—J
the maximum
speed
of the spindle,
respecfor gears
1, 2, 3 and 4 each selected
by
Set the spindle
speed
applicaan input
signal.
ble when the speed
command
voltage
is 10 V.
Setting
range:
O - 6000
(r/rein)
“~
GSCREV
G SC REV
Specifies
a spindle
Setting
I
I
L—
I
_
E
e
36276
:
the spindle
motor
speed
in effect
operation
( GSC ) input
is entered.
range:
O - 6000
(r/rein)
I
1
MICGR1
I
MICGR2
I
MICGR 3
I
when
I
1
1
MICGR4
A–19
APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAMETER
speed
1, 2,
Specify
the minimum
spectively
for gears
by an input
signal.
SPIN(ILE
\
of the spindle,
re–
3 and 4 each selected
O - 6000 [r/rein)
Setting range:
NUMBERS
(Cent’d)
➤ _..
—
$6286
I ___
L
L--—_—_
ACCX 1
_
[
~
ACCZ 1
#,*El,]
I
MOTOR
ACCX1&gt;
SPEED COMMANO
ACCZ1:
Set the time constant for Linear Accel /Decel for
X- and Z-axis, respectively.
.—.
‘
“v
j/J/J~q
Setting range:
Setting:
i,
Ii
,,
lli
I
II
,,
,,
“l” = 125/8 x 103 p/see Z
(P: least output increment)
?6304
~XREFP
~
L.
.—
(r{tin)
~ 6271
(GRIREW
# 6274
(GR 4 REVI
# 6273
(GR 3REV)
$6272
(GR 2 REV)
‘#6266
(MACGR1)
‘#
—
* 6267
[MACGR21
6268
(MACGR 3)
—
L
L
# 6279
(MICGR41
# 6278
(MICGR 3)
# 6277
(M ICGR21
d 6276
(MICGR1)
# 6269
(MACGR4)
-—
---.1
t6280
RPDX
$6281
RPDZ
RPDX
, RPDZ
:
range:
tIllI
XREFP
=
traverse
rate
for
X-
and
:
traverse
distance
respectively,
on
Setting
range:
Setting:
“ 1“
O -
1
I
SCRXACC
L.—
— —
——J
r—-”—”——-
Z-
‘-
1
—
SC RZACC
—1
3200
125 pulses/see
SCRXACG,
--:!28d
c_:Lp
.....
s6283
.—— _ ..—, ~ c:’”
SCRZACC:
Setting:
Always
---
time
131,070/time
read
the
notes
constant
at threadcutting
constant
for
on
(ins)
#6314,
#6315.
..~
ZBLP:
#6308
Sets amount
—.–—
~—
I
-8192 - 8191 P
SCRX ‘AS
I
of backlash for X-, and Z-axis.
Setting range:
P:
32767
= 1 pulse
Sets accel [ decel
X-,
and Z-axis.
XB’LP,
for Reference
Point
the X– and Z–axis.
r
#6306
‘7 $6307
O -
.
, ZREFP
Sets the
Return,
—
Specify
the rapid
axis,
respectively.
Setting
Setting:
E
,—
:1
ZREFP
#6305
s6309
i
L
SCRZBAS
—,
Least output increment
Note :
“ Setting
When negative
value
value “ is indicated.
is
set,
65536
+
SCRZBAS:
SCRXBAS,
Sets accelldecel bias at threadcutting on X-, and
Z- axis.
Setting:
Always
1 = 500 pulses/s
read the notes for #6314, #6315.
I
-“”~
*631O
[
Xu-
~
XREFV 2
::—–..
~6317
[:4
&amp;’;L?:?
XREFV1,
—
XREFV2,
ZREFV1:
Specify
Return,
the approach
respectively,
Setting
range:
O -
speed
1 for Reference
on the X- and Z-axes.
Point
200
ttllt = 125 pulses/see
Setting:
ZREFV 2
7’
ZREFV2:
Specify
Return,
the approach
respectively,
Setting
range:
Setting:
!!l!I
speed
2 for Reference
on the X- and Z-axes.
O-
200
= 125 pdses/sec
DECELERATION
[.EE
r_..cuTxAcc--..1
,–––
–~
Jr
I
L.
CUTXACC,
CUTZACC:
CUTZACC
f16313
Point
RATIO TRAvERSE
POINT
RATE
‘-1
-
‘_ii:NcE
Sets accel/decel
threadcutting
time
on X-,
WIDTH 1
constant
at normal
and Z-axis.
OECEL LS SIGN
,:
---ZERO POINT SIGN
Setting:
Always
131,070/time constant
read the notes for
AREAA
ms
#6314,
/
AREA B
;
#6315.
Reference
#6010
CUTXBAS
point
(ZRNDRX,
return
direction:
ZRNDRZ)
I
—..J
—.
CUTZBAS
I
——
.
——
RPDX 2
.
*L
$6319
CUTXBAS,
Sets accelldecel bias at usual threadcutting on
X–, and Z-axis.
Setting:
RPDX2,
.—.
..’
RPDZ2:
Set change speed for linear accel/decel of X- and
Z-axis, respectively.
Setting:
2.
r...
1 = 500 p/s
Notes for Setting Accel/Decel Time Constant and
Bias at Normal Threadcutting (#6306 - #6309,
#6312 - #6315)
1.
RPDZ2
1
CUTZBAS:
Set the same values for X- and Z-axis as a
rule to ensure motion path accuracy.
“l” = 125 pulses/s
—-–~
,-—
;6320
.—. J‘ L.
~—
L.:!z
,
ACCX 2
-——.,
I
‘“Z 2
r
——
1
When accel/decel time constant or bias is
set under the different conditions between
threadcutting and normal threadcutting,
direct changing these two types cutting may
influence speed factor at selected point. Be
sure to program dwell or positioning code
between these two types.
A–21
APPENDIX 2 LIST OF PARAM=ER
Set 2nd step constant
for
respectively.
X– i~nd Z–axis,
111!! = 125/8
Setting:
linear
accelldecel
NUMBERS
of
X 103 p/S2
Sets
Parameter setting for linear 2nd step
Note :
accel/decel must be set under the following
conditions:
the
spindle
Setting
range
c2nd step accel/
decel
change
speed
.#6318/#6319
=
J
1[
Rapid
decel
accel/
constant
#6286 /#6287
conditions
are not
may not perform
1
spindle
indexing.
32767
per
second
x N
satisfied,
correctly,
the
spindle
Setting
indexing
O -
range:
Setting
XPERED,
0 -
:
for
J
Sets
zfi323
speed
1 = 500 pulse
Setting:
If the above
the positioning
(Ccmt’d)
t! ltl
:
creep
speed.
32767
= 5(IO pulse
per
second
ZPERED
!
ZPERED:
# 6347
of the end point for Leadscrew
Specify
the number
respectively, on the X- and
Error Compensation,
Z-axes.
Setting range:
O - 255
BSBON
X (X-AXIS)
BSBON
Y (Y-AXIS)
—
$6348
Setting time from ESP to SVOFF
Z-AXIS in order:
“1“ = 8 ms (unit)
O - 32767 (setting unit)
in X-AXIS
and
= 6349
L
XPERED,
‘-
EmT;p
:—-–-:
ZPERED:
HINTPP:
Spec:ify the number of the start point for Leadscrew Error Compensation, respectively, on X–
and Z–axes.
Sett:.ng
range:
Set the handle interpolation reference pulse count.
Setting range:
O - 65535
O - 255
–m=
.,
~_.
—.
..—
-—-
____
_
XSL 1 P
.—
-“”;
~--
T6601
L
XSLIP,
Specify
the
compensation,
a.xes.
reference
point
respectively,
Setting range:
for Leadscrew
Error
on the X– and Z-
O - 255
Setting range:
Setting:
A–22
O - 4095
“1“ = 1 pulse (= 360/4096 deg. )
.._
ZSL1 P
____
ZSLIP:
Specify the plus direction boundary value for
Stored Stroke Limit 1, respectively, on the X-,
and Z–axes.
Setting range : 0 - 99999999
Setting:
Sets the reference point for spindle indexing.
___
“ 1“ =
1 pulse
—–
;66061
~_
__
XSLI M
EiEIiIl
E“
‘-~j
i___
, —-~
+6607
XSLIM,
Specify
Stored
Z-axes.
Setting
ZSLIM:
the minus direction
boundary
Stroke
Limit
1, respectively,
range:
for
X-,
Unit:
O - 99999999
~“---”
P6613
[ -—--.:
~
I
t!l!!
-99999999
= Least
-
command
ml
XZP 2L
~-.
~—..
tool
nose
99999999
increment
Workpiece
measurement
value
direct
parameter
(3)
Set the distance
from the reference
position
to the Z1 contact
surface.
ZZP 2L
‘“7
ZZP2L:
the distance
between
the first
reference
point,
respectively,
range:
-99999999-
and the
on the X-,
99999999
Setting
Unit:
range:
-99999999
-
11111
= Least command
inp-ut
tool
nose
99999999
increment
I
Ez!EIcl
E
“ 1“ = 1 pulse
Setting:
DFSZ1
DFSZ1:
.-.=
—
Z-axes.
Setting
range:
input
“ 1“ = 1 pulse
,——
—
I
m6612
.
i _..
,.—
Specify
second
value
on the
:
Workpiece
measurement
value
direct
parameter
(2)
Set the distance
from the reference
position
to the X2 contact
surface.
Setting
Setting:
XZP2L,
DFSX2
--—I
ZSL 1 M
]
DFSX 2
DFSZ2
A
DFSZ2:
Workpiece
measurement
value
direct
parameter
(4)
Set the distance
from the reference
position
to the Z2 contact
surface.
WKSHTX
ml
WKSHTX:
Set
the
X-axis
workpiece
shift
Unit:
range:
II11! = Least
Unit:
command
Unit:
increment
shift
amount
-99999999
-
II111 = Least
command
measurement
99999999
-
command
99999999
increment
1
DFSXC
tool
Workpiece
measurement
parameter
(5)
Set the X dimension
of
Setting
increment
Unit:
range:
value
the
-99999999
11111= Least
m
DFSX 1
DFSX1:
gauge
-
command
E.
direct
input
workpiece.
99999999
increment
7J
DFSZC
DFSZC:
Workpiece
measurement
value
direct
parameter
(1)
Set the distance
from the reference
position
to the Xl contact
surface.
Unit:
nose
DFSXC:
ml
Setting
-99999999
11111= Least
EE!!m
:
range:
range:
99999999
WKSHTW
Set the workpiece
offset
amount.
Setting
-
I
[m
WKSHTW
-99999999
tool
offset.
Setting
Setting
input
range:
-99999999
11111= Least
command
-
input
tool
99999999
increment
nose
Workpiece
measurement
parameter
(6)
Set the Z dimension
of
Setting
Unit:
range:
ill!!
value
the
-99999999
= Least
command
direct
gauge
-
input
workpiece.
99999999
increment
A–23
APPENDIX 2 UST Of PARAMETER
–—
~.
,
:z6626
—-—-
-—
(Cent’d)
__
MAXDUW
.——
—
MA XDUW:
Sets
NUMBERS
HSDM1:
limit
upper
of U and
W for
offset
The
data.
Set
1.
input of the value exceeding the limitwill cause
an alarm.
Parameter
Note:
rameter
setting
#6018 D3 is set
is effective.
to “1 , “ the
the
high–speed
M function
decode
output
set
paL=
[._-c
... XDX..-.
_
,—
~6630
~
XSETI
~
ZSETI
I
,—
T16631
- ..J
{
Set
2.
..—
XSETI,
ZSETI:
Specify
the
the
high-speed
for
Automatic
decode
output
set
decode
output
reset
decode
output
reset
—-
(
value
M function
I
–—J
L—..
HSDM2:
Lu!f-1
L—
Coordinate
System
Setting
at the time of inch input,
respectively,
on the X-,
and Z-axes.
A desired
value
should
be set in inches
for the distance
between
the first
reference
point
and the reference
point
of the coordinate
system
to be established.
HSDM
3
—
HSDM3:
Set
1.
the
high-speed
M
function
!
Setting
-99999999-
range:
“l”
Setting:
= 0.0001
99999999
HSDM4
! # 6647
-d
in.
!.—
HSDM4:
—.
f16636
—1
;T:::T-”--”—--
a6637
Specify
System
---
, ZSETM
—
-.—.
the value
for Automatic
Coordinate
Setting
at the time of metric
input,
~.—–
!
-99999999-
:
“1”
= 0.001
Set
for
—
ZPEINT
—,
~i
*8000
, ZPEINT
Setting:
A–,24
range:
“l”
_—
r“”-
z8255
—
-J1
L
-99999999= 1 pulse
_
segment
value
‘::”.
—
-—
Specify
the respective
Error
Compensation.
range:
:
Specify
the compensation
inverval
Errc, r Compensation,
respectively,
Z-axes
.
Setting
code
PEMN O
- A
Setting
XPEINT
value
I
PEMN 255
-——.
—-
---
-—
PEMNO-PEMN255:
1
I
point
\
XPEINT
;
~
-— —— .7
—-1
-]
,w3643
the instruction
division
error.
99999999
mm
; 6642
T
.
DIVERR:
re-
I
Setting
function
EEEEcl
~“’
:
range:
M
high-speed
~
A desired
on the X-,
and Z–axes,
spectively,
value
should
be set in millimeters
for the distance
between
the first
reference
point
and the
reference
point
of the coordinate
system
to be
established.
Setting
the
ZSETM
‘
L___
.4
XSETM
Set
2.
XSETM
~ ~
in Leadscrew
on the X- and
Setting:
Incremental
parameter
“ 1“
values
of
Leadscrew
O - 315 (Incremental
O - f128 (Absolute
= Output
designation)
designation)
increment
/absolute
designation
#6023D7
(pERIAB)
.
is
selected
by
99999999
Axis
for compensation
is specified
#6322,
6323, 6328, and 6329.
by
parameters
APPENDIX 3 STORED LEADSCREW
ERROR COMPENSATION
This function automatically compensate for leadscrew error on each axis according to the compensation data set by parameter and is effective
after completion of reference point return. The
compensation data are made on the distances be–
tween the reference point on each axis and
specified points.
Compensation
axes:
No. of correction points:
256 Max.
base point:
Reference
Compensation
interval:
5
=
/
X-AXIS
&lt;
point
6000 Pulses or more
Absolute /incremental
(Set by Parameter #6023D7
PERIAB
)
Data setting system:
Minimum
COMPENSATION
X, Z axes
Compensation
Compensation
PARAMETER OF
COMPENSATION
AMOUNT ON
EACH POINT
\
value:
compensation
Compensation
unit:
1 pulse (least output increment)
multiplication factor:
One-time-compensation
value:
(Compensation multiplication)
3X max.
15 pulses max.
Notes:
Table 3.1
1.
Regardless
of absolute/incremental
the difference
between
neighboring
sation
values
should
be ( 15 pulses
sation
multiplication)
and below.
2. Maximum
set value
in case of
is f127 pulses . Compensation
is taken
on this value.
3.
No. of correction
arbitrary
as far
points
are within
setting,
compenx compen–
absolute
setting
multiplication
points
on each axis can
as the total compensation
256.
be
~xis
Comfx3nsation
Interval
x
36642
(XPEINT)
z
~6642
(ZPEINT)
Absolutellncre-
q6023 D,
mental Setting
(PERIAB)
Switchable
No.
Compensation
COMPENSATION
QEFERENCE
6000
PULSES
~OINT
!
INTERVAL
I
(10
1 1)
()
/
z.2-
-1+1-1.1.
+1
i)
()
o
i
I
I
I
(1
-1
II
!
I
-
4
1’1’1
= w(m) 8(X)18(1(Y2
8003 nou4KIWI W!+ X(107Xuw 8009
4
Compensation
Min Point
“O’ = incremental setting
“1” = Absolute
setting
$6335
(ZPEROR)
Value of param-
x
$6322
(XpERED)
sation on each
z
point minus
(ZPERED)
8000 will be
$6328
(XPERST)
z
$6329
(ZPERST)
Compensation
Value on Each
INCREMENTAL
SET AMOUNT
Point
z
Compensation
x
eter i? of compen-
$6323
x
SET AMOUNT
18000–
q8255
*6068
written.
——
0 to *7 (lncremental setting)
0 to +127 (Absol ute setting)
“1” = 1 pulse -——
! oto3
.
Multiplication
Factor
“1” = 1 Pulse
z
x
COMPENSATION
PARAMETERS
WOO OR MORE
$6334
(XPEROR)
A
,U:E:
1 [)
Max Point
fimrr;
Functions
x
Compenastion
Reference
Parameter
s
z
i6069
(ZPERML)
A–25
APPENDIX 4 LIST OF STANDARD
Table 4-1 shows the listof diagnostic numbers
and signal names of standard input/output signals
and monitor signals.
Diagnostic
Number
lNPUT/OUTPUT
Notes:
1.
Monitor
signals
are used to check
nal condition
of the control.
2.
The functions
- #1157
Refer
to machine
Display
MOOO-k1096
I Input signals from machine
PI lCK1-fH 157
I Output signals to machine
Output signals to machine
‘*---
D7
interface
Input signals from machine interface
SIGNALS
D6
D5
D4
of
tool
D3
signals
builder’s
D2
D1
#1000
#1096,
inter-
#1100
manual.
DO
(PC)
-
00001111
(PC)
T--
Contact
opened
Contact
Fig. 4.1 Status Display of Input/Output
A–2!6
-
the
closed
Signals
Table
4 –1 List of Standard
Input/Output
Signals
Input Signals
#1300
D7
D6
EDT
MEtd
EDIT
MEMORY
15-L+I%+I-+--+
MDI
ROV 2
Rovl~~Fv8
TAPE
HANDLEJ
STEP
MANUAL
JOG
FV4
FV2
MANUAL
RAPID
-MP 1
#1301
:
FEEDRATE
RAPID SPEED OVERRIDE
——HZ
#1302
HX
MANUAL
~
PG AXIS
M303
AFL
ABS
M. S, T
LOCK
MANUAL
ABS.
ZRN
CDZ
RETURN
TO
REFERENCE
THREAD
CUT UP
:
–x+x
MANUAL TRAVERSE
INHIBIT
EDIT
~ INHEDT
~
JOG SPEED
DRN
I
MANUAL PG
MULTIPLY SELECT
AXIS
BDT
~
DLK
MLK
SBK
MACHINE
LOCK
SINGLE
BLOCK
~
DISPLAY
LOCK
BLOCK
DELETE
- DRY
RUN
MP2
MP 4
;1
DIRECTION SELECT
SELECT
Fvl
——
+Z,
–Z
OVERRIDEJMANUAL
i
--- .-.—
#1304
~
ERROR
DETECT
HIGH-SPEED
REWIND
H30’L:R*..@_l..RwD
E~AL
INPUT
I
SAGR
L___
lNTERRUPT
HINTP
*DCZ
AGREEMENT
GRS
1..
sCOMMAND
CONSTANT
REWIND
———
I
.’
~~E~
?1307
I ‘Op
ERROR
-T
l—
ti1306
I
DEC~lNpUT
REFERENCE
GSC
SSTP
SPINDLE
SPEED
CONSTANT
SCOMMAND
“O
*SP
ST
FEED
HOLD
CYCLE
START
‘RS—..;E.EXTERNAL
RESET
END OF
PROGRAM
.—
*DCX
-–—1-——
HANDLE
I NT E RPOLA”ri ON
MODE
PST
SRN
——----——
POSITION
SET UP
POINT
SET
RETURN
~RWD~
~
‘RD
MACHINE
READY
FIN
–——————I
FOR
*–LZ
I
‘—
I
*-LX
..L—
—.
OVERTRAVEL INPUT
~
●+LX
—.
GR3
~
——— ——
~
GRI
“+LZ
..
pOINT
I
–—
SINV
sCOMMAND
INVERT
I
GR4
._
GR2
I
SPINDLE GEAR RANGE SELECT
A–27
Table
4-1
List of Standard
Input/Output
Signals
(Cent ‘d)
Input Signals
D7
D6
D5
Dd
D3
D2
D,
SAT
SMN
DO
—
21308
EOUT
EVER
NC
PROGRAM
PUNCH
OUT
NC
PROGRAM
VERIFY
EIN
4C
‘ROGRAM
INPUT
,———
“309
[-
‘DT 9
DRSZ
DRSX
—..
— .
DISPLAY RESET
BDT7
–-BET&gt;
—=—
BDT 6
AD~lTtONAL
;rwN16
$1310
.wi7..
-
-—.
.——
WN 4
EXTERNAL
WORK
‘sCOMMAND
AUTO
._.
~ BDT5
L—. .—
%MMAND
MANUAL
BDT4
———
BDT 3
BDT 2
—
~
SPB
SPA
I
Ovc
I
——
WN1
‘r=
~
SEARCH
SPINDLE OVERRIDE
CUTTING
INTERRUPT
POINT
RETURN
TOOL WEAR-OUT
ADJUST INPUT
——-—-#1312
–—-
I SETREO
FSCLR
COORDI NATE
SYSTEM
SETTING
REQUEST
INPUT
FSCH
FS
MEMORY
ALT E RATION
——
—————
SID7
SID 8
r ——
~
Tpfj
. ___
i
.. ——
—.
TP4
COV8
—
I
COV 4
PROGRAM
RESTART
OVERRIDE
CANCEL
–—
Cov 2
Cov 1
I
G 711G 72 CUTT~NG OVERRIDE
F“SMEM
‘--
FS
MEMORY
‘--”1
I
SID6
.———.
FSCM
-
c
—r
r—–
I
,
SID 5
——
~
.-.=4
——
TP 1
. .
TOOL NO. SET FOR STORED
STROKE LIMIT
SID~
._
L:-XS7J
INDEX POSITION
———.
~
TP 2
1.——
1
“-
FS
EDITING
MODE
SPINDLE
#13,7
X AXIS
MIRROR
IMAGE
—.-—
COV16
FS DATA
CLEAR
#1313
x1316
AUTO
MODE
HANDLE
OFFSET
–—-—
I
i
-
.
_~
1
——
EXTC
TIME
COUNT
BLOCK DELETE
WN 2
NUMBER
T
SID12
. ..~..
SET
-
,
I
SID 11
.—
SID1O
SID9
I
-!
Input Signals
D7
D3
D6
:1318
D2
SIDXI
i_~T&amp;
TOOL
SKIP
~ SIDXING
SPINDLE
INDEX
RESTART
TOOL
RESET
SIGNAL FOR TOOL
MENTAL
LIFE CONTROL
~1319
1
ROV 4
RAPID
OVERRIDE
!
SPD
SPE
i
Do
TPS~=~
——
TOOL NO SPINDLE
INDEXING
CHANGE
FOR S.S.
LIMIT
DESIGNATION
TLA12
TLA 14
TLA 18
TLA 21
CHANGE
SPINDLE
OVERRIDE
SPINDLE
INDEX
~~/E!ON
D,
TLAII
TOOL NO. (TOOL LIFE CONTROL)
‘IWO L--
-—.
:1323
~E)~D~
—
6) ~ RI 6(SDI 5~S~
—
EXTERNAL
~1324
FDI~(SDL__
(SDI
“~ 13)
EXTERNAL
=1325
~KLIczETx4
~
RI 4(SDI 3)
INPUT OF S-COMMAND
(SDI 12) ~
Rl~:SDl O)
(S 4 DIGIT) NO. 1
(SDI 11)
INPUT FOR S-COMMAND
:
RI 3(SDI 2) “~Rl 2(SDI 1)
-—.
‘!3
INPUT FOR “USER’S MARCRO
(SDI 10) ‘~9)
.~ -
(S 4 DIGIT) NO. 2
“2
NO. 1
–Z;l:- ““J
—.—
Table
Input
#1326
~“
4-1
List of Standard
Input/Output
Signals
(Cent’d)
Signals
:;
“~-
u:=”
~
u%
‘“
-T–-
--
,
::1
-;:
D,
–—..
--~
-;:O:J”--H9
————
——
IN-PUT FOR “USER’S MACRO” NO. 2
.————— .—.
—
ED 7
M 327
ED6
/
——. ___
ED 4
ED5
———
–—;;8
——
—.
__
ED3
I
ED2
‘
EDI
~
–1
d.
L—
EXTERNAL
~—-
__~
ED()
DATA INPUT NO. 1
-—
#1328
i
L
ED15
——
ED14
.——
—
~
ED13
.—
r
——–
ED12
_
~EDii
EXT~A~T~lNPUT
$1329
EDCL
——
EDS2
. ..3...
—
EDS 1
~ EDS O
—
‘---——. ‘ -7::
CONTROL
‘
EDIO~
ED9—”
ED8
—.—
i
No. 2
EDSD ‘-~.—
SIGNAL FOR- EXTERNAL
EDSC
DATA tiPUT
EDSB
l—EDSA
,___
]
Output Signals
D,
D6
—
M 28
#1200
::2-.,
M 24
I
MFUNCTION
$1201
M30R
I
Mo2R~”
D3
Dp
M18
M14
D,
DO
:;
1~
I
I
Mll
‘1
~M12
BCD OUTPUT
‘.—.
M38
T-”
M 32
M34
M 30
DECODE
OUTPUT
M 02
DECODE
OUTPUT
M 01
DECODE
OUTPUT
M 00
DECODE
OUTPUT
TF
SF
MF
SINVA
IER
ESPS
M-FUNCTION
SAMPLING
OUTPUT
S4
DIGIT OUT
INVERT
STATUS
INPUT
ERROR
OUTPUT
EMERGENCY
STOP
OUTPUT
M 31
I
~
1
#1202
T-FUNCTION
SAMPLING
OUTPUT
#1203
S-FUNCTION
SAMPLING
OUTPUT
~
S28
#1204
I
EDTS
AUTO
MAN
EDIT
OPERATING
STATUS
AUTO
MODE
STATUS
MANUAL
MODE
STATUS
S24
s 22
I
THC
S-FUNCTION
RESET
OUTPUT
RWDS
REWIND
STATUS
THREAD
CUTTING
STATUS
S 18
S21
J!!2Lc
~T
S14
ALARM
OUTPUT
OP
DEN
FEEDING
POSITIONING END
S12
Sll
~
BCD OUTPUT
—
#1205
28
.__Z-E.
~
I TX
T- FUNCTION
-—
#1208
~Z
‘
2 ZP~
Z AXIS
Z AXIS
X AXIS
——
NO. 2 REFERENCE
POSITION
#1216
R iXo7
~ —.—
‘- ZPX
Z=
T18 ~ TIL ~ T12 ~ TII,I
BCD OUTPUT
7“=T
~
CONSTANT
SURFACE
SPEED
CONTROL
X AXIS
REFERENCE
POSITION
(SDD6)
RC6 (SDD 5) I R 05
(SDD4)
—-—T
EXTERNAL
OUTPUT
Ro4 (SDD 3)
FOR S-COMMAND
SpL
STL
FEED
HOLD
LAMP
CYCLE
START
LAMP
Ro3___
(SDD2~R02
(SDDI) [ Rco (SDDo)
J
(S 4 DIGIT) NO. 1
A–31
Table
4-1
List of Standard
Input/Output
Signals
(Cent’d)
Output Signals
D7
D5
D13
D4
D3
D2
D,
DO
——
——
———7—
–———-——
(SDD 12)
Ro12 (SD*II
(SDDIO) RO 1O(SDD9) ~ 9(sDD8)
(SDD15
(SDD 14) @DD
13)
.—
i—_—
.——
.
——
EXTERNAL OUTPUT FOR S-6
MMAND (S 4 DIGIT) NO. 2
M217
:.–—
41219
—
I
tF1218
FSCE
L
~—-
——EREN~
ESEND
—
.—.
——
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
DATA
DATA
SEARCH
INPUT
COMPLECOMPLETION
TION
‘-
‘—
FSMn
END OF
‘UNDER
FS
MEMORY
ALTERATION
EDITING
MODE
——.
L
-—.
TLCH
I
COORDI NATE
SYSTEM
s ETT I N G
OUTPUT
‘1
—
S4
ANALOG
OUT
FS
—
~SETEND
–L.
END OF
ASF
-—
—
I
—-
——’SIDXO
——7
TPSA
TOOL
SPINDLE
s. 5.
CHANGE
COMMAND
(TOOL LiFE
CONTROL)
INDEX
EXECUTING
LIMIT
AREA
CHANGE
END
~
—
SIDXA
SPINDLE
INDEX
END
————
a1220
Uo 7
_!?-c*E-ruL~:&gt;oL..-Lo?L
——
OUTPUT
,dlzzl
—— —
Uo 15
,..—
—— —..
UO13
Uo 14
~
—
——
.—
UO12
!
—
~=
OUTPUT
..!O
———
FOR “USER’S MACRO”
.—
1
--J.
—
FOR “USER’S MACRO
–—— –——–—
Uolo
.—
~rl
—
IJO 9
—
__—
——
__
——
—
._
_
~
_
—— ,
U08
—.
i
_!
2
————
2-—
I
I
~1222
~
.Eo
————— ————
~
Uoll
‘ _
NO. 1
—
—.
A
END OF
F S DATA
CLEAR
t1224
I
MD7
MD6
~
,,
MD5
~
MD4
HIGH-SPEED
MD3
M
FUNCTIONS
MD2
~
MD1
~
—
MDO
-
I
Output Signsls
D7
SSW3
#1260
D5
D6
i
I SSW2
SYSTEM
~
D4
Sswl
NUMBER
D3
Sswo
D~
DI
Do
:
SKIP
I
SKIP
INPUT
SWITCH
I
#1281
I
OFFPB
0,
I
ONPB
POWER
OFF PB.
#1282
1HP7
,
1HP6
I
1HP5
OLD
1
SVAM
ESP
OHT
1
SERVO
EMER -
OVER-
LOAD
ALARM
GENCY
STOP
HEAT
1HP4
1HP3
1HP2
PULSE GENERATOR
lHPI
~
lHPO
~
MONITOR
,
SET3
I
SET2
SETTING
SVMX
1
OVER-
~
I
!
#1284
I
POWER
ON PB.
ND. 1 MANUAL
#1283
~
SET1
SETO
#62’19 MONITOR
SVMX
=~N
(= “NRD”)
#1265
I
0
O
I
o
0’0
I
CONSTANT
‘41286
0!010]0
010
0
o~o
CONSTANT
#1287
PBS
Pcs
PHASE
PG
C PHASE
MONITOR
FOR
PAS
B
PHASE
t
“1”
0’0
1
1
“O”
1~
A
SPINDLE-AXIS
A–33
Table
4-1
List of Standard
Input/Output
Signals
(Cent’d)
Output Signals
M’”
A;
X-AXIS
i P;
TGON PHASE
PG
C
MONITOR
FOR
B
:*‘3 I-e-?k
ALX
~ :X
PHASE
PHASE
A
MONITOR
FOR SERVO UNIT OF X-AXIS
X-AXIS
1
TGONZ
Pcz
I
PAZ
PBZ
Z-AXIS
PHASE
C
* ALZ
PHASE
B
PHASE
A
MONITOR
TGON
PG
MONITOR
FOR
FUZ
*OLZ
I
,
I
SRDZ
FOR SERVO UNIT OF Z-AXIS
Z-AXIS
1
~12w b2Y2
SCOMN 1 SCOM22I scow
SPINDLE
#1291
SCOM48
SCOM44
1 SCOM42
[
i SCOM18 ! SCOM141 scMEg
COMMAND
SCOM38
SCOM41
spl NDLE
MONITOR
COMMAND
SCOM34
SCOM32
I
SCOM31
MONITOR
#1292
.
SPINDLE
‘12’3picb”
ALM28
FOR
OUTPUT
1’0421 ’041 ‘ ’038 1 ’03;
i ’032 I ’031 1
SPINDLE
#1294
MONITOR
ALM24
I
ALM22
MONITOR
ALM21
FOR
OUTPUT
ALM18
—T
ALM12
ALM14
I
ALM1l
—
MONITOR
W295
~]v’~~
FOR
ALARM
CODE
,
~ ALM38
MONITOR
A–:34
1
ALM34
FOR
I
ALM32
ALARM
ALM31
CODE
I
APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES
Causes
Code
Causes
Code
OVERFLOW
012
000
BUFFER
(128CH)
CAPACITY
OVERFLOW
IN
A BLOCK
(128 CHARACTERS).
—.
001
ZR UNREADY
REFERENCE
POINT
RETURN
ZR UNREADY
002
REFERENCE
PROG
014
RETURN
SIGN
NOT CO MPLETEDZ.
“-, ”
PROG
015
003
ERROR
(NO ADDRESS)
ADDRESS
PLUS NO DATA AND NEXT ADDRESS
COMMAND.
OR NO AD DRESS PLUS DATA.
NOT CO MPLETEDX.
(Z)
POINT
PROG
013
(X)
ERROR
SND
“.”
ERROR
( “-, ”
“.”’
)
NOT CORRECTLY
USED
(U NUSABIECH)
UNUSABLE
CHARACTER
PROGRAMMED
IN SIG NFICANT
DATA AREA
IN
016
004
RESET
005
UNREADY
(AFTER
CYCLE START WITHOUT
BUTTON AFTER
EDITING.
EDITING)
DEPRESSING
PROG
017
INPUT
TERS).
RESET
006
018
007
019
008
020
DATA
021
PROG
(8 DIGITS)
OVERFLOW
PRO GE RROR
UNUSABLE
IN OPTIONS
009
ERROR
(MORE
8CHARAC-
(G)
GCODEOR
GCODE
PROGRAMMED.
ERROR
THAN
NOT INCLUDED
(G)
GCODESIN
l, ANDK
GROUPS PROGRAMMED
SIMULTANEOUSLY
IN A BLOCK
010
TH
TAPE
011
HORIZONTAL
TV
TAPE
022
ERROR
PARITY
ERROR
023
ERROR
VERTICAL
PARITY
ERROR.
APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES
Causes
Code
PROG ERROR
024
(Cent’d)
Code
Causes
036
(G, G41-44)
UNUSABLE
GCODE
COMMANDED
RADIUS
COMPENSATION,
DURING
PROG
IP-G1O)
TOO LA RGEP
(N UMBER DESIGNATION)
OFFSET IS PROGRAM-INPUT.
NOSE
037
025
ERROR
PROG
ERROR
‘G1OI
TOO LARGE
R WHEN
IS PROGRAM-INPUT.
PROG
026
RISE ERROR
START.
PROG
027
ERROR
(G41-44)
IN NOSE RADIUS
ERROR
WHEN
VJORK
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
038
COMPENSATION
(G41-44)
039
ERROR DURING
NOSE RADIUS
COMPENSATION
CANCELLATION.
(ERROR
IN CIRCULAR
NTERPOLATION
MODE;.
-.
028
PROG
040
ERROR
M98, G65/66)
P NOT PROGRAMMED
IN G65/66 BLOCK.
POR QNOT PROGRAMMED
IN M98 BLOCK.
-.
041
029
NO PROG
PROGRAM
NO. (SEQUENCE
NO ) NOT FOUND
WHEN PROGRAM
IS CALLED
BY M98, M99, G65, G66,
G, M, ANDT.
PROG
030
ERROR
F OR E COMMAND
IN FEED
E COMMANDED
IN G98 MODE.
NO
?ROG
042
~F!Ej
ERROR
SUBPROGRAM
FIVE-NESTED.
COMMAND
),198, G65/66 NEST)
(M98)OR
LflAC RO CALL
(G65/66)
——
PROG
031
ERROR
(R=O)
CIRCLE WITH RADIUS
LA R ARC COMMAND
043
O COMMANDED
?ROG
ERROR
P NOT SPECIFIED
IN CIRCU -
‘k’1911
IN M91 BLOCK
—
044
032
TOOL
DATA
ERROR
iR AN DC)
THE NOSE R AMOUNT
IS WRITIEN
NUMBER
CO MM AND5D
BY:.::
OF
COMMAND
T **
;.::.;
IN THE
THE
OFFSET
045
033
PROG
034
CIRCULAR
PROG
035
ERROR
ARC
;G02/03;
R DESIGNATION
ERROR
046
(T OF S)
ERROR
NOSE
R)
DURING
TOOL NOSE RADIUS
COMPENSATION,
VARIABLES
LIKE #5041 AN D#5042WHl
CH CANNOT
BE READ IN ADVANCE.
ERROR
LARGE
NO. OF T OFS CODE FOR TOOL
RADIUS
COMPENSATION
AND TOOL LENGTH
COMPENSATION.
MACRO
047
PROG
ERROR
IG41-LL)
TOO
IN TERFERE
NC E CHECK
ERROR
I
Causes
Code
048
PROG
ERROR
I
(G41-44)
INTERSECTION
PO IN TN OT OBTAINED
SECTION COMPUTATION.
049
PROG
ERROR
ERROR
REVERSE
COMMANDED
051
PROG ERROR
PROG
PROG
062
(G34)
ERROR
(Gil/G12
ERROR
063
PROG
EXCEEDING
DURING
IN THREAD)
COMMANDED
IN THREAD
(G32/G33}
THREAD
CUTTING
COMMANDED
MU LTI-START
THREAD
CUTTING
OUT OF SPECIFIED
RANGE.
COMMANDED
FOR BEVEVALUES
OF 1, K, RTOO
ERROR
IN G98 MODE.
COMMAND
B
(G92/’G78/G2l)
1
PROG
ERROR
IN BLOCKS
PROG
ERROR
RAP ID THREAD
PULL-UP
VALUE
IN X-AXIS
DIRECTION
IN THREAD
CUTTING
WITH BEVELING
SMALLER
THAN BEVELING
VALUE
SET BY
PARAMETER.
FOR BEVELING
(GO1)
ANGLE
PROGRAMMING
ANGLE
PROGRAMMING
BY GO1.
053
ERROR
ROUND IN G, BEVELING
CUTTING
BLOCK.
I
iGlll12)
TAPERING
COMMAND
AND ROUNDING.
052
PROG
LEAD lNCREASE/DECREASE
VALUE
MAXIMUM
PROGRAMMABLE
VALUE
VARIABLE
LEA D THREAD
CUTTING,
MI NUSVALU
EOF LEAD COMMANDED.
IN
(Gil/12)
1, K, R NOT CORRECTLY
LING AND ROUNDING.
LARGE.
060
061
—
PROG
Causes
BY iNTER-
(G41-44)
REVERSE
OR ALMOST
M97 MODE.
050
Code
I
PROG ERROP
064
NOT CORRECT
DURING
LINEAR
IN TERPOLAT!ON
(G92/G781G21)
RARID THREAD
PULL-UP
VALUE
DIRECTION
IN THREAD
CUTTING
VA LUESET
BY PARAMETER.
IN Z-AXIS
WITH BEVELING
065
(G50T/G92T)
VALUES
OF TOOL COORDINATE
MEMORY
OUT OF
THE RANGE BETWEEN
51 T0801N
WORK Coordinate
SYSTEM SETTING
BY G7JOT
054
G51 POS-EXT
ERROR
I
COMMAND
VALUE
(EXTERNAL
TO RETURN
AT G51 EXECUTION
TIME IS WRONG.
055
?ROG
ERROR
PROG
CO NT IN UOUS THREAD
TOO SHORT TIME FOR 1 BLOCK
CO NT IN UOUS THREAD
Cutting.
(M, S,T)
ERROR
CA NNOT
VALUE)
M, S, TCOMMANDS
IN THE BLOCK
T CODE CANNOT
BE COMMANDED.
056
066
IN WHICH
M, S,
\
067
!
068
--L-——–—
I
06f3
(AXIS)
PROG ERROR
OF
(G151 DATA)
!
AXIS COMMAND
IN G20, G21 BLOCKS.
AXIS-NOT
CORRECTLY
COMMANDED
IN G04, G36-G38.
ERROR
IS FOUND
IN THE
G151 COMMAND
DATA
1
057
070
PROG ERROR
(M02/’M3O/M99)
MEMORY
OPERATION
NOT GIVEN.
COMPLETION
COMMAND
+
058
MIRROR
G28 IS COMMANDED
MIRROR
DURING
059
071
IMAGE
G151 COMMAND
IMAGE
ERROR
MODE
ZR UNREADY
G28 NOT
G151 ERROR
COMPLETED
ON THE AXIS WHICH HAS
G29 COMMANDER
REFERENCE
POINT RETURN
NOT CO MPLETEDON
THE AXIS WHICH HASG30
COMMAND.
I
072
PROG ERROR
(G50TIG50XZ)
G50TOR G50XZ IS COMMANDED
WHEN THE
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
IS SE TBY THE TCODE.
G68 IS COMMANDED
BY MIRROR
IMAGE
GRADE UP SPECIFICATIONS
(46019D1 = 1).
-
APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES
Code
{Cent’d)
Code
Causes
Causes
085
073
EXTERNAL
CM PERROR
MULTIPLICATION
FACTOR
SET BY PARAMETER
EXCEEDING
11 FOR EXTERNAL
TOO LCOMPENSA
TION.
074
086
EXTERNALCMP
ERROR
ERR OR IN PUT TURN
TOOL COMPENSATION.
075
087
PROG
ED ON DURING
ERROR
EXTERNAL
(G31~G35)
TOUCH SWITCH
NOTON
WHEN MOTION
REACHES
END POINT BY SKIP OR TOOL SET ERROR
COMPENSATION
COMMANDS
076
088
077
RS232C
ERROR
089
(OVER-RUN)
10 CHARACTERS
MORE HAVE
AFTER
STOP CODE HAS BEEN
THROUGH
RS232C INTERFACE
BEEN READ IN
TRANSMITTED
PROG
ERROR
(G90/G92/G94)
UNUSABLE
ADDRESSES
SPECIFIED
G90, G92, AND G94 BLOCKS.
090
078
PROG
P,Q
{G70.76/G72.78)
NOT COMMANDED
091
079
ERROR
PROG
ERROR
IN
IN G70,71,72,73
BLOCKS
(G70-76/G72-78)
BLOCK
OF SE OUENCE
G70 NOT
FOUND
PROG
NO.
NO
SPECIFIED
INCLUDING
BY P,Q
IN G70
IN
BLOCK
.
080
TOO LSETCMP
ERROR
092
TCODE
COMMANDED
BEFORE G35 BLOCK.
COMMANDED
IN OR BEFORE G35 BLOCK.
081
TOO LSETCMP
ERROR
ERROR
082
OF PARAMETER
COMPENSATION
TOOL
ERROR
ERROR
083
SET CMP
WEAR
COMPENSATION
AT TOOL WEAR
084
TOOL
CMP
CMP
FOR TOOL
SET
095
TOOL WEAR COMPENSATION
GIVE N SIMULTANEOUSLY
096
INPUTS
WOM,
WOP
ERROR
(G70-76/G72-78)
PROG
ERROR
IG70-76/G72-78)
PROG
ERROR
!G70-76/G72-78)
FAULTS
IN FINISHED
SHAPE PROGRAM
SPECIFIED
BY P, Q IN G71, G72
G29 COMMANDED
IN FINISHING
SHAPE PROGRAM
SPECIFIED
BY P ANDQ
IN G70, G71, G72, AND G73.
TO 19 DESIGNATE
ERROR
PROG
BEVELING
AND ROUNDING
CO MM AN DS AS LAST
MOVE COMMAND
FOR FINISHED
SHAPE PROGRAM
SPECIFIED
BY P,O IN G70, G71, G72, AND G73.
SET
ERROR
(G70-76/G72-78)
UNABLE
G-AND M-CODE IN FINISHED
SHAPE
PROGRAM
SPECIFIED
BY P,Q IN G70, G71, G72,
AND G73.
094
SETTING
(Z).
NO. EXCEPTO1
COMPENSATION
WEAR
FOR TOOL
ERROR
OF PARAMETER
COMPENSATION
TOOL
093
SETTING
(X)
ERROR
NO. OF BLOCKS INCLUDING
FINISHED
SHAPE
PROGRAM
SPECIFIED
BY ~,0 IN G70, G71, G72
AND G73, OVER 46.
G98
ERROR
PROG
PROG
ERROR
(G70-761G72-78)
D (CUTTING
FREQUENCY
I SPECIFIED
BY G73ZER0
OR 1280R MORE,
1, K I ROUGH CUT TIN GjSPECl
FIED BY G73 BOTH ZFRO
D, K OF G76 EXCEEDING
PROGRAMMABLE
RANGE.
Code
Causes
Code
PROG
097
ERROR
109
(G70-761G72-78)
FOUR OR MORE PROCESSING
INTERRUPTIONS
BY
FINISHED
SHAPE PROGRAM
IN STOCK REMOVAL
CYCLE BY G71 RI, OR G72 RI.
098
PROG
ERROR
DATA SPECIFIED
INTERNAL
KEEP
PROG
099
ERROR
110
CAL
ERROR
(FIXED
CA LERROR
EXPONENT
EXCEEDING
102
CAL
103
CAL
DATA
ERROR
(DOUBLE
CONSTANT
106
ERROR
EXCEEDING
MACRO
TOO MANY
“DO”
115
ROOT)
MACRO
ERROR
108
IN
THE
MACRO
UNDEFINED
FORMAT
ERROR
VARIABLE
COMMAND
CALL
EXCEEDING
(DO-FORMAT)
ERROR
ERROR
MACRO
IN
( [
TO “END.”
]
UN MATCH)
&lt;EQUATION&gt;
ERROR
(DO END
NO. )
“m’’l ND OmOUTOFRANGEl~m&lt;3
INA
117
(CONSTANT)
THE
MACRO
116
ADR)
LIMIT
118
FOR CA NC ELLING
ERROR
OF MACRO
ERROR
MACRO
G67
“n”
In GO
TO
ERROR
nO&lt;
APPROPRIATE
107
G66-M99)
ERROR
NOT CORRESPONDING
FORMAT
.’-
ERROR
CODES
MACRO
ZERO OR OVERFLOW
IS A NEGATIVE
MACRO
(MOVE
IN M99 FINISHING
BY G66.
MULTIPLE
LEVELS
THE UPPER LIMIT4.
114
CHARACTER
WHICH CANNOT
BE REPEATED
BLOCK COMMAND
IN REPETITION.
105
1 5 LIMIT)
OF PARENTHESES
UPPER LIMITS(5).
ERROR
MOVE COMMAND
MACRO CALLED
MACRO
( [
AS
POINT DATA
RANGE.
(SQUARE
ERROR
MACRO
DESIGNATED
113
(DIVISION)
DIVISOR
PROG
EXCEEDING
(# NO. NOT LEFT)
ERROR
MULTIPLE
LAYERS
EXCEED DING THE
112
(FLOATING)
ERROR
ROOT VALUE
104
POINT
OF FLOATING
ALLOWABLE
~;~~{LATION
G76
NO-
POINT)
ERROR
MACRO
111
(G70-761G72-78)
MAGNITUDE
OF FIXED
UPPER LIMIT.
101
r
Q NONREGISTERED
UNUSABLE
ADDRESSES
SPECIFIED
IN G70T0
BLOCKS.
ADDRESS
REQUIRED
IN THE BLOCK
SPECIFIED.
100
MACRO
PRO HIBITED
VA RI ABLE
SUBSTITUTION.
(G70-76/G72-78)
BY G70P,
MEMORY.
Causes
119
(FORMAT)
EXCEPT
(U ND EFIN
FOR
EQUATION.
#NO.)
NO. DESIGNATED.
(GO TO N)
n9999
SEQUENCE
AS AFTER
READ
NO. NOT FOUND.
SUB PRO G/MACRO
ADDRESS
SEARCHED
DURING
EXECUTION
SUBPROGRAM
OR MACRO PROGRAM.
120
PRTN
SEQUENCE
PROGRAM.
ERROR
(NOT
NO. SEARCHED
OF
FOUND)
NOT FOUND
IN PART
OF
APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES
Causes
Code
121
PRTN
ERROR
G31 COMMANDED
(Cent’d)
Causes
Code
(G50/G92)
DURING
PROGRAM
RESTART,
122
134
NO PROG
PROGRAM
NO, SPECIFIED
NO. SEARCH.
NOT FOUND
EXTERNAL
135
123
EXT
(EXTI
DATA
ERR OR IN DA TA GIVEN
INPUT
124
PRTN
ERROR
137
126
138
127
139
128
140
PROG
ERROR
BLOCK.
141
IN
ERROR
ADDRESS
PROG
ERROR
(Gill/’Gll2)
WORD
COMMANDING
DATA
131
EXT
142
DATA
ERROR
IN A GROUP
PROG
DATA.
243
F’ROG ERROR
1u
IN Gill
PROG
M, ST
A-40
Gill
A, B BY Gll
(G1111G112)
lST BEVELING
PORTION
OUTSIDE
RECTANGLE
CO MPOSEDBY
START
AND END POINTS OR
BETWEEN
45
STRAIGHT
LINES OF START TO END
POINTS AND END TO START POINTS.
ERROR
132
ERROR
OF
(Gill/Gl12)
ANGLE
FOR ANGLE
PROGRAMMING
OUT OF RANGE -360G
A, B s360.
130
DATA
PROGRAM
125
129
BY EXTERNAL
136
[MD I MOVE)
AXIS OPERATED
BY MD I AFTER
RESTART
PREPARATION.
BY
COMMAND
ERROR
COMMAND
:G1ll;
G112)
BLOCK
(Glll~Gl12)
IN Gill,
G112 BLOCK
Code
Causes
145
PROG
ERROR
(Gill/Gl12)
ERROR IN CO MM AN DIN G ADDRESS
G112 BLOCK.
146
PROG ERROR
Code
157
WORD
FOR
THE
(Gill/Gl12)
ERROR IN COMMANDING
FOR ME DBYG112
BLOCK.
Causes
PROG
TOOL
PROGRAMMED
(G122/’Gl23)
EXCHANGE
PROG
158
ERROR
ERROR
REQUEST
OUTPUT
(G122/G123)
THERE ARE TOOL NOS. THAT ARE MORE THAN
“31” WITH REGISTERED
TOO LS. WJ,THIN TOOL
GROUP NOS. INSTRUCTED
BY . . . ..OF
WORK PIECE
COORDINATE
SYSTEM SETTING
(G 50 T:::::;
90).
SHAPE
159
147
PROG ERROR
(G1221G123;
MORE THAN 6 TYPES OF COMPENSATION
MEMORY
NOS. ARE REGISTERED
WITH
148
170
MEM
TOOL
149
171
150
172
PROG
ERROR
(G122/’Gl23)
G 122 AND
G 123 CO MM AN D BLOCKS
ARE
NOT
INDEPENDENT
COMMANDS.
THE
SAME
TOOL
IS
REGISTERED
WITH
MORE
THAN
TWO
GROLJPS.
THE
SAME
OFFSET
MEMORY
NO. IS USED
WITH
MORE
THAN
TWO
TOOLS.
ADDRESSES
OTHER
P,
AND
TARE
lNSTRUCTE
DTOTHE”rOLL
INFORMATION
REGISTRATION
PROGRAM.
PROG ERROR (G122/G123)
NO DESIGNATION
OF GROUP NO. P IS GIVE N,OR
VALUE
OTHER THAN 1 ~PS191SGl
VEN. NO
DESIGNATION
OF LAS THE LIFE PER TOOL IS
GIVE N,OR A VALUE
OTHER THAN 1SLS99991S
GIVEN.
173
(G122/G123)
THE TOOL INFORMATION
OF THE
NO. IS REGISTERED
TWICE.
154
PROG
ERROR
ERROR
CHECK
ERROR
(SET)
AR EA TOTAL
MEM
ERROR
PARAMETER
174
CHECK
ERROR,
(PRM)
TOTAL
CHECK
ERROR.
ME MO RY TOTAL
CHECK
ERROR.
—
GROUP
(G122/G123)
AREA
ME ME RR OR (KEEP)
KEEP
175
SAME
MEM
TOTAL
A
PROG
ERROR
[G122/G123)
A VALUE
OTHER
THAN
l&lt;
TOOL
NO. S501S
INSTRUCTED
AS THE
TOOL
NO.
A VALUE
OTHER
THAN
1 S COMPENSATION
MEMORY
NO. &lt;501S
IN ST RUCTED
AS THE
COMPENSATION
MEMORY
NO.
VALUES
OTHER
OOR
MORE
THAN
20 ARE
INSTRUCTED
AS:::;
(GROUP
NO. ) COMMANDS
OF
T L;[u90T0T[:cj95
AND
T[I[:99
COMMANDS.
ERROR
(OFS)
COMPENSATION
SETTING
152
PROG
ERROR
ONE TOOL.
L
151
153
IS ON.
MEM
MACRO
ERROR
TOTAL
(M ACR)
CHECK
ERROR
176
MORE THAN 16 TYPES OF “TOOL NO. +
COMPENSATION
MEMORY
NO. ” ARE ATTEMPTED
TO BE REGISTERED
WI TH ONE GROUP NO.
155
PROG ERROR (G122/G123)
TOOLS OF THE DESIGNATED
GROUP NO. ARE NOT
REGISTERED,
T::::::
92, T::::::
93, T[::[::94
AND
T;::[::95
ARE INSTRUCTED,
BUT THE
CORRESPONDING
COMPENSATION
MEMORY
NOS.
ARE NOT REGISTERED.
177
156
PROG ERROR fG122/G123)
THE CO MM”AND FOR’ TOO L- LIF’E MANAGEMENT
IS
ISSUSED WITH EQUIPMENT
THAT DID NOT HAVE
THE ADDED
FUNCTIONS
OF “T4DIGIT
DESIGNATION”
AND “OFFSET
MEMORY
ADDITION,
”
178
TOOL
NO. SET ERROR
TOOL NO. INPUT SIGNALS
#1317 (D4T0
(D4TOD6)
ARE MORE THAN 51.
D7) #1342
A–41
APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES
Code
Causes
Code
OVER
179
PANEL
180
TEMPERATURE
TOO HIGH.
HDLCSOFT
CO MM AND
NC SIDE RECEIVED
5ATA
TRANSMISSION
PROTOCOL
NC.
192
SEQ ERROR
SEQUENCE
Causes
191
TEMP
INSIDE
(Cent’d)
HDLC8530 SEND
TRANSMISSION
ERROR.
ERROR(1)
ERROR
OTHER THAN
BETWEEN
AC GC AND
ERROR
NC SEND-SIDE
HARDWARE
—
181
193
HDLC8530
ERROR
TRANSMISSION
ERROR,
194
182
HDLC
SAME
FROM
195
183
NC RECEIVE-SIDE
NAK
ERROR
HARDWARE
110 TIMES)
DATA
IS SENT 10 TIMES IN TRANSMISSION
NC TO ACGC WITHOUT
SUCCESS
HDLC
CMOS
FILE
ERROR
CMOS FILE READ OR WRITE
TO NC IS NOT EXECUTED,
REQUEST
FROM
ACGC
.—
196
184
HDLC
1/0 DATA
SYSTEM
VARIABLE
IS NOT EXECUTED.
ERROR
READING
FROM
.
197
185
HDLC
198
DATA
MORE
199
187
REQUEST
ACGC2
201
HDLC
TRANSMISSION
SYSTEM
SO=T
SYS7EM
202
ERROR
SO F”TWARE
ERROR
X.
OT (Z)
ERROR
OVER TRAVEL
ICATION
Z.
SYSTEM
BETWEEN
COMMUNICATION
OT (x)
OVER TRAVEL
190
ACGCTO
ERROR
ERROR
COMMUNICATION
AND NC.
I 89
FROM
TRANSFER
FROM ACGCTO
NC IS DELAYED
THAN 1 MINUTE
DURING
AC GC OPERATION.
AM GCCOMMUN
200
ERROR
COMMAND
OPERATION
COMMUNICATION
.,,IU L
188
NC
—
HDLCNC
OPERATION
REQUEST
NC IS WRONG.
186
ACGCTO
AM GC AND
SYSTEM
BETWEEN
ERROR
ERROR
AC GC120
Causes
Code
I Code
203
215
204
216
205
217
206
218
I
207
Causes
219
I
220
208
S-0T2
(INSIDE)
STORE DSTROKE
(INSIDE
I
209
221
I
I
210
S-0T2
STORED
I
STORE DSTROKE
LIMIT
STROKE
223
S-0T3
STORED
FIR ST AR EAX.
224
S-OT1 (Z)
STORED
STROKE
LIMIT
SECOND
AREA
S-0T3
225
S-0T3
(OUTSIDE
226
Z.
LIMIT
THIRD
AREA
LIMIT
THIRD
AREA
THIRD
AREA
(X)
STORE DSTROKE
FIR ST AREAZ
LIMIT
INHIBIT).
INHIBIT)
X.
(Z)
STORE DSTROKE
214
AREA
(INSIDE)
STROKE
(OUTSIDE
213
SECOND
X.
INHIBIT)
(OUTSIDE
212
LIMIT
INHIBIT)
(OUTSIDE
S-OT1 (X)
AREA
S-0 T2(Z)
STORED
211
SECOND
(X)
STROKE
(OUTSIDE
222
L.IMIT
INHIBIT).
INHIBIT)
1.IMIT
Z.
APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES
Code
(Confd)
Code
Causes
227
Causes
239
-.
228
240
229
2LI
ZR ERR OR-POS
REFERENCE
POINT
:X;
RETURN
POSITION
ERROR
X.
POSITION
ERROR
Z
—
230
242
ZR ERR OR-POS
REFERENCE
231
ZR ERROR-AREA
REFERENCE
232
POINT
ZR ERROR-AREA
REFERENCE
POINT
(X)
RETURN
243
AREA
ERROR
(Z)
RETURN
X.
244
AREA
ERRORZ.
233
245
234
246
235
247
236
248
231
249
238
270
.—
-—
POINT
!2)
RETURN
Code
Causes
Code
Causes
-.
271
P-SET
P SET ERROR
272
P-SET
ERROR
283
(X)
X.
ERROR
284
(Z)
I
P-SET
ERROR
Z
285
273
T
274
286
275
287
276
288
277
289
—
—
+
310
278
SERVO
311
279
280
MACH
MATCH
RDY
UNREADY
312
OFF.
281
313
282
314
SE RVO OFF
POWER
NOT SUPPLIED
APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES
Causes
Code
(C@’d)
Code
Causes
327
315
UN FIN IS HE DPROGGEN
MEMORY
PROGRAM
ERASED.
328
316
GENERATION
SPECIFIED
UNSUITABLE
IS NOT PERFORMED
BY 0,–,9,9,9,9
MUST
MM21
MEMORY
BOARD WHEN PROGRAM
AREA
GENERATION
IS MADE DOES NOT MATCH
CUR RENT MEMORY
BOARD.
329
317
PC CPU
ERROR
PC AN DCPU
ERROR,
(SET #6014 D7TO0
FOR RELEASE)
330
318
EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY
331
319
FUSE
FUSE
332
NC UNREADY
320
NC UNREADY
PSET
FUSE
UNREADY
—
333
321
322
CMOS VACANT
AREA ERROR
DA TA OTHER THAN
“O” ARE WRITTEN
IN THE
C-MOSMEMOR
YAREAOTHER
THAN THE
PARAMETER,
OFFSET,
KEEP MEMORY,
COMMON VA RI ABLE,
OR PROGRAM.
AC GC2 SYNC
323
AM GC SYNC
324
335
ERROR
SYNC HRONOUS ERROR
SIDE CPU. (S ET#6014D5
OF AC GC120 CPU ANDNC
TOO FOR RELEASE)
ERROR
SYNCHRONOUS
ERROR
SIDE CPU. (S ET4601~D5
336
OF AM GC CPU AND
TOO FOR RELEASE)
SYNCHRONOUS
DATA
CPU.
326
(SET
ERROR
OF SERVO
#6014 D6TO0
FOR
AC GC120/AMGC
THE REWASASE
THE ACGC 1200R
SERVO
RVO-OFF
AIMGC.
NC
337
SE RVO CPU ERROR
325
334
OFF
CPU
AND
RELEASE)
REQ
REQUEST
FROM
338
STOP.
(X)
BLOWN
X.
FUSE(Z)
BLOWN
Z
BE
STOP
THE
Causes
Code
Code
Causes
351
339
OL (X)
OVERLOAD
352
340
(1) X.
OL (Z)
OVERLOAD.
SERVO
341
SERVO
ERROR
SERVO
342
SERVO
ERROR
ERROR
(X)
353
(Z)
354
X.
ERROR
Z
343
355
344
356
345
35?
OL (OTHER)
OVERLOAD
346
358
347
359
348
360
349
361
PG ERROR
PG ERROR
350
362
(2)
(X)
X.
PG ERROR
(Z)
PGERRORZ.
A–47
APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES
Code
Causes
(Cent’d)
Code
363
375
364
376
365
377
Causes
.—
PG ERROR
366
(S)
378
PG ERRORS,
367
379
368
380
369
381
AX IS ERR OR(l
AXIS
382
370
371
FG ERROR(l)
383
FGERROR1.
372
FG UNREADY
ERROR(1)
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
384
FG UNREADY.
373
385
374
386
I
ERROR
AXIS
ERROR
ERROR
(2J
(2)
ERROR
(3).
(3)
Code
I
Causes
Code
Causes
399
387
I
I
400
388
SEQ ERROR
SEQUENCE
\
389
SERVO
390
SERVO
PACK
SERVO
391
SERVO
PACK
SERVO
392
PACK
ALARM
I
402
(S)
I
ALARMS.
PACK
ALARM
403
(X)
I
AL ARMX.
PACK
401
ALARM
(Z)
T
SERVO
PACK
ALARM
Z
405
393
394
I
407
395
396
I
408
397
409
398
810
ERROR
(2)
APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES
Code
Causes
(Cent’d)
Code
Causes
823
811
.
812
824
813
825
814
826
815
827
—
—
828
816
—
—.
817
829
.-
-—
CPU
830
818
CPU ERROR
ERROR
(1).
—
-—
831
819
—
820
832
ROM ERROR
ROM CHECK
ERROR
—
833
821
——
—.
822
A–50
834
—
.-
Code
Causes
Code
Causes
835
847
836
848
837
849
838
910
TAPE-MEM
ERROR
ME MO RY VERIFYING
839
920
TAPE
840
842
ERROR
READING-IN
(2).
ALARM
(OFF-LINE)
X-coordinates
diffemt
between
ting start
point
and last block
program.
Z-coordinates
different
cutting
start
point
and
shape
program.
for
cutting
G 71 command
cutfor finished
shape
between
G 72 command
last block
for finished
start
point
by
mand different
from
Z-coordinate
for
block
of the finished
shape
program.
G71 . . . R1 is excepted.
)
X-coordinate
844
ERROR
“095”
Z-coordinate
843
(OFF-LINE).
CPU ERROR
CPU ERROR
841
TAPE
ERROR
for
cutting
start
point
by
mand different
from
X–coordinate
for
block
of the finished
shape
program.
)
G72 . . . R1 is excepted.
X-coordinate
G71 . . . R1.
point.
G71
com-
the first
(Command
G7Z
com-
the first
(Command
for
finished shape program by
Command
exceeding cutting start
845
846
A–51
APPENDIX 5 LIST OF ALARM CODES
Command
specifying
as follows,
formed.
Z-coordinate
for finished
shape
exceeding
G72 . . . R 1 command
point .
program
by
cutting
start
(Cent’d)
values
for addresses
B , X(U)
, Z(W)
second
straight
line are determined
and programmed
shape
cannot
be
—
Command value for B
–360.OCO,
0, 180.000,
– 270.000,
90.000,
–180.CX)O
Address X (U) commanded
fying second straight line.
—.—
-—__
360.000
——.*...
– 90.000
I Address Z (W) commanded
for
_
sp+w-
___
for speci-
fYln9 second straight line.
270.000
Command
values
for addresses
C and D for beveling too large
for the programmed
shape.
Opera–
tion cannot
be made according
to the command .
END
aoINT
ALA:RM
-—.
1
“ 140”
L ::;;
\
. Commanding
X(U)
, Z(W)
one or no
specifying
address
second
of addresses
straight
line.
B,
. Commanding
two addresses
of addresses
B,
X(U)
, Z (W) specifying
second
straight
line.
In addition
to this,
one or no address
commanded among addresses
A, 1, K , specifying
first
straight
line.
‘w
Command
values
for address
P and Q specifying
radius
for rounding
too large
for the program–
med shape.
Operation
cannot
be made according
to the command.
----
“ Address
C specifying
first
beveling
and address
P specifying
first
rounding
commanded.
“
Address
D specifying
dress
Q specifying
ALARM
1’/
X and Z specifying
Q and D specifying
secsecond
POINT
No intersecting
second
straight
point
line.
for
first
straighi
line
and
“ 143”
Command
values
for addresses
A, 1, K specifying
first
straight
line are determined
as follows,
and
programmed
shape
cannot
be formed.
Command Value for A
--380.000,
–180.000,
Address I commanded
360.000
ifying first straight line.
--270.003,
–90.COO,
270.CKJO
?-ART
‘“’”T
First
straight
the same line.
—
C, 180.000,
90.000,
A.-52
&amp;START
&gt;
/
second
beveling
and adsecond
rounding
commanded.
. Commanding
addresses
ond straight
line and
beveling
and rounding.
-1
!
for spec-
Address K commanded for spec~-‘-ifying first straight line.
line and
\
second
straight line on
ALARM
“145”
. X(U)
or
. X(U)
and
“ R not
No intersecting
straight
line.
Z(W)
not
Z (W)
point
between
circular
arc
and
commanded.
both
Or
commanded.
CENTER OF
CIRCULAR
ARC
m
commanded.
“ 0“ commanded
for
R.
K
R
. I and K not commanded.
Ito!l commanded
for I and
. P and
C both
commanded.
“ Q and
D both
commanded.
K.
.----—
No intersecting
end point.
ALARM
“ 146”
Beveling
for
command
C cannot
be
made.
Beveling
for
command
D cannot
be
made.
point
——
between
I
START
POINT
circular
arc
and
CENTER OF
CIRCULAR
ARC
&amp;&amp;
sTART
A–53
APPENDIX
Table 6.1
Address
6 LIST OF DATA
Address Characters
Meaning
Angle designation
for G 01 and G 111, included angle for G 76
B:
Basic
O:
Optional
0
k—
Spindle shift angle 01 multiple thread, angle designation
for multiple cornering
0
User macro character
0
Depth of cut and number of cutting cycles for G 71 to G 76
0
—
Specifications
for precise feed and precise lead for cutting
B
Specifications
for normal feed and normal lead for cutting
B
Preparatcny function
(G-function)
B
User macro character
X-component
0
of arc center,
canned cycle parameter,
beveling value
(radius value)
User macro character
Z-component
Incremental
0
of arc center,
canned cycle parameter,
Number of subprogram repetition,
Sequence
beveling value
B, O
value of variable lead thread
Miscellaneous
function
B, O
0
G 13 to G 16 angle and coordinate
(M-function)
number
Program number
Dwell,
canned cycle starting sequence
Subprogram starting sequence
number, program number, user macro number
number, canned cycle ending sequence
number
Radius of arc, rounding value, tool radius value
Spindle function
(S-function),
Tool funct[on ~-function),
X-axis
incremental
maximum spindle revolution
tool coordinate
command value,
dwell,
memory number
canned cycle parameter
User macro character
Z-axis
incremental
X-axis coordinate
A–54
command value,
canned cycle parameter
value
User macro character
0
Z-axis
B
coordinate
value
Table 6.2
EIA Code
ISO Code
Blank
NuL
BS
~
Tab
‘-
‘-”
Function Characters
Function
1
Error in significant
BS
Disregarded
TH
Disregarded
Remarks
data area in EIA Disregarded
in ISO
.—
-~—
End of Block (EOB)
LFINL
CR
———— —.. —
Disregarded
CR
=+
E
a==-2-4-5
bitS
2-4-7
bits
Control out (comment start)
–——
——
(
=-”--
)
1
Special code
EIA:
Special code
‘- +—
+
+
~
~ Disregarded,
User macro operator
I
Minus sign, User macro operata
=5r*-~
EIA:
Control in (comment end)
atoz
-L=P=characters
o
—
-------=
I
~
-:*;::nt--””
I
DEL
Del
I
Parameter
I
~
starting
Decimal
—
—
I
(Including All Mark)
point”
Sharp (Variable designation)
#
*
*
Disregarded
~ Asterisk
(Multiplication
—
—
Equal mark
[
Left bracket
operatcx)
.j
[
““vA~..
Right bracket
1
‘-
‘“T
‘-(.
J-J
L-
---
d
?
-“1
I
-i
‘—l ‘sermacrOop:=-[&lt;,
L. ---
?
‘–
User macro operator
J
User macro operator
I
Notes :
1. Characters
other than the above cause error in significant data area.
2. Information between
Control Out and Control In is ignored as insignificant
3. Tapa code (EIA of ISO) is automatically
recognized.
data
A–55
APPENDIX
Table
6.3
Tape
6 LIST OF DATA (Cent’d)
Code
Notes :
1. For the hole pettern of EIA code of the
characters
*
*
*
‘with an asterisk,
the pattern
shown In the table w stand~d.
by parameters.
2. EIA code of character
d can be desig-
nated by the parameter ~6017.
*
*
*
*
A–!j6
How-
ever, other patterns may be specified
Table
6.4
Tape
Format
Metric Output
No.
I
Inch Output
Address
Metric
Inch Input
Input
Metric
B:
Basic
~
0:
Option
04
04
Program No.
Inch Input
Input
_~
B
,–-—
2
Sequence
3
G-Function
A
No.
Coordinate
a:
N4
N4
B
G3
G3
B
Wcfd
X, Z, 1, K, U, W, R
(a+
53)
(a+
44)
a+53
B
a+34
———.— ——..
. . .—
5
Feed/rein
6
Feed/rev
and
F 50
F 32
F 50
F 42
B
F 32
F 24
F 42
F 24
.———.—
B
E 34
E 26
E 44
E 26
B
Thread Lead
S2
S2
7
B
–-–—~-
S-Function
S4
—
I
S4
o
---–—~—
T(2
8
+1)
B
—————
T(2
+2)
M3
M-Function
9
u (P) 53
10
Dwell
11
Program No. Designation
12
Sequence
13
No. of Repetitions
14
Angle Designation
Line
for Straight
?5
Angle Designation
Thread
for Multiple
No.
P4
Designation
Inch/Metric
2 Inch/Metric
can be switched
M3
u (P)
0
B
53
B
Q (P) 4
B, O
L8
L8
B
A (B) 33
A (B) 33
0
B3
B3
o
Q
(P) 4
input is set by setting (F6001 Do).
or feed/rev
+2)
B
output is set by setting parameter S6007 Da,
3 F codes for feed/rein
T(2
P4
Notes :
I
T(2+I)
T-Function
by G 98, G 99
APPENDIX
Table
6 LIST OF DATA (Cent’d)
6.5
List of Program Commands
Metric Output
Inch Output
.—
Address
Metric Input
Program
No.
Sequence
O
No.
G function
Inch Input
N
Metric Input
1-9999
1-9999
1-9999
1–9999
0-199
G
Inch Input
0-199
.——
—
Coordinate
Addresst
X,
U,
Z,
1, K,
W,
+ 99999.999
R
——.
mm.
? 3937.0078in.
-99999
9999.9999
.999 mm.
in
—
Feedlmin
F
t –24000
mmlmln
0.01 –944.88in.lmin
1–60960
0.01 –2400
mm/min
OOin./min
,
F
Feed/rev
and Thread Lead
0.01 –500.00
mmlrev
0.0001 –19.6850
inhev
0.01 – 1270.00 mmlrev
0.0001
–50.000C
E
0.0001 –
500.0000
0.00031270. OCCIOmmlrev
o.ooom4-
mmlrev
19.685030
in.lrev
0.00001050000300
S2
o-99
o-99
S4
0-9999
0-9999
T3
0-999
0 – 999
T4
0-9999
0-9999
0-999
0-999
S-function
T-function
M-function
Dwell U, P
0.001-99999.899
Program No. Designation
1-9999
Sequence
1-9999
No. Designation
Sec
0.001 –99999.999
sec
1- 999!3
1-9999
.L
No
of Repetitions
Angle Designation
for Straight Line
Angle Designation
for Multiple Thread
*For angle designation
In./rev
of Included angle for G 76, see
1-99999999
1-99999999
O-? 360.COO0
O- i360.COO
0-360&deg;
0–360&deg;
.28.26.2
Automatic
Threading
Cycle
(G 76).
*
in. /rev
Table
6.6
Data Setting Range
Metric output (screw)
I
Input
output
(screw)
Item
Inch irmut
Metric input
I
~..
Least input increment
‘--”
‘-2388:6?_mrn_
Tool offset
__i.
Tcol radius
O– * 99.999
Minimum stepfhandle
Stwed stroke limit
area designation
unit
Rapid traverse
0.001 or O.Cllmm
~
0.0001 or 0,001 in.
~0-*i30,2601in.
‘
‘---—
-—
O–*9.9999
mm
feed
0.001 mm
0.0001 in
Program
designation
0.001 mm
0.0001 in.
Parameter &amp;
settina
.—
w
in.
O-~
99.999
0.001
:.
mm
O-
L9.9999
0.0001 in.
mm
0.001 mm
---+.—
0.0001 in.
0.001 mm
0.0001 in.
24 mlmin
2400 inches/min
rate
Upper limit
Manual jog
value
FO
2nd reference
value
Backlash
point coordinate
compensation
~
value
O– ~99999.999
O–255
mm
pulses (Note 1)
G9999.9999
k-”-
O–255pulses
I
Notes:
1. l-pulse
2. X-axis
= least input increment
designated
with diameter
(except for pulse display)
in.
in.
:
APPENDIX
6 LIST OF DATA (Cent’d)
Table
Special
G Code
Special
GC odeI
6.7
Group
GCodeIl
–-~
;
~
G 02
G03
G 02
———–+
G 03
G04
~
I
G@l
G04
GCEl
G06~GW5
G 10
. ..1..:”.
GtO
Gll
Gil
Dwell
G 20
G 70
B, O
~
ERROR
DETECT
B, o
‘--;
..
. .(radius R designation)
G21
G 22
–--. —--,~-
G 22
G 23
I
G 27
G 23
0
~Roun~g
0
Inch input s~ification
G27
I
G 28
-—-G1-–--f-FB--
I
.—
Metric input specification
G 23
—
~
G 27
Reference
G28
G 28
~
--+
Gw
*
0
0
B
point return check
+.:%
~ Retunrn to 2nd reference
-+--”---”-G31
!
G31
;
::
j
t
+
~
B
point
o
0
::
I
Variable
multi-start
B, O
threadcutitng
lead threadcutting
0
‘““
Tool set error compensation
==
~
continuous threadcuting,
~
01
*
::-”i
----
Skip function
4 -Threadcutting
-–G:--*
B
Automatic return to reference point
i-“”-”-””-””~ Return from refefence point
G30
::
+
t
~
G31
CW
Radius programming for circular interpolation CCW
.
0
0
Radius programming for circular interpolation
01
.–—
o
Cofnering
G 22
.-.-..
B
—
01
G71
—
B, O
B
~ Beveling
05
G21
,—
OFF positioning
Tool offset value setup
Gll
——
—————
G 20
angle programming for Iinear interpolation
Circular interpolation CCW,
~
G 10
G12
B
01
*
G 12
Section
Circular interpolation CW, (radius R designation)
G03
G 12
Basic
Optional
(rapid traverse feed)
Linear interpolation,
_——
f
B:
O:
Function
Positioning
G02
List of G Codes
Stcred stroke limit 2nd area ON
0
0
07
1
G 37
——————
G 37
G38
G38
-—
0
Stofed stioke limit 2nd area OFF
——-—-–
Stored stroke limit 3rd area ON
G 37
-———
G%
0
08
G39
G 39
~ Stored stroke limit 3rd aea
G 39
0
OFF
t
Tool radius compensation
0
cancel
L
–!
G41
-———&amp;—G 42
~
G41
–——1
G42
G41
G 42
06
I
-:;
No. 1
0
No. 2
0
[’::-’
G43
G44
k
Tool radius compensation
Tool radius compsmsation
+
Tool radius compensation
No. 3
0
Tool radius compensation
No. 4
0
Notes :
1.
G codes in groups from 01 through 11 are modal. When
the control
the
is energized
G codes
marked
with
with
For G 00/G 01, G 98/G
selected
2.
➤ are
power
block.
automatically
99, and G 90/G
G codes of* group are non-modal.
The
switch
or reset,
modal
91, either one is
can
G codes m section B are bas(c
5.
Standard G codes can be converted to special G codes
I by parameters.
6.
They should not be
be commanded
mixedly
Special
tion.
tcgether with the other G codes in one block
G codes
4
selected.
as init ial state by setting parameters.
commanded
3.
the
in a
7.
G code 11can
When
G code
(basic feature)
selected,
[1 cannot
be
the
be
selected
standard
as optional
G codes
and
funcspecial
used.
The initial states of G codes of 05, 07, 08 group when
the control is powered correspond to their respective
setting data.
Table
I
I
Special
G Code
GCcde
I
Special
GCcde
G 92
G 50
Group
II
List of G Codes
(Cent’d)
Function
~
Coordinate
*
G 92
6.7
G65
I
G65
*
~
G65
Basic
Optional
~
Section
system setup
Maximum spindle revolution setup, work coordinate
+i
B:
O:
Return of current display value to origin
system setup
-o
~ User macro simple call
I
User macro modal call
~—User macro modal call cancel
}----
09
r:-:
*--
‘-
G 70
I
G 70
G 72
G71
I
G71
G 73
G72
~
G 72
G 74
10
-+–k..
Mirror image by programming OFF
-Finishing cycle
o
.–-— —–..-~– -— - -––—
o
———. .———
o
Stock removal in facing
———
I
G 73
G 75
G 74
-G 75
G 76
–G 77
1
G 75
I
-L~
G76
~
G76
G 78
Automabc
“o~---
G90
~
G 77
G 20
G92
~
G 78
G21
G-b
-E79
L
01
o
Pattern repeating
G 73
G24
o
Stock removal in turning
—
*
Multiple
repetitive cycles
o
———
Pack drilling in Z-axis
threadcuttlng
cycle
+---
Turning cycle A
B
I Threading cycle
B
~ Facing cycle B
[
Constant surface speed control
~
o
0
~ Mirror image by programming ON
G74
---
+-—–
B
~—–
o
02
~ Constant surface speed control cancel
~ had
~
par minute (mmlmin)
04
Feed per revolution (mmlrev)
B
Absolute command
B
Incremental
B
—
03
~
G122
~
G122
i
G122
~
G123
~
G123
~
G 111
command
Tool registration start
11
G123
G
111 ~
G
111
Tool life control
—.
o
o
*
a“=”il~”
l~Jregis”atiOn
‘nd
Taper multiple bevelinglrounding
o
f“ Arc multiple bevelinglrounding
o
I
Cancel
13
%+%-
groove
width compensation
10
.roovewdthcompensa~on
0
Notes :
1. G
codes in groups from 01 through 11 are modal. When
the control is energized
with the power switch or reset,
the G codes marked with
For G 00/G
selected
2.
are automatically
01, G 98/G 99, and G 90/G
G codes of* group are non-modal.
5.
Standard G codes can be converted to special G codes
selected.
91, either one is
I by parameters.
6.
mixedly in a
(basic feature)
Special G code II can be selected
tion. When selected,
G code
They should not be
together with the other G codes in one block.
The modal G codes can be commanded
block.
G codes in section B are basic.
as init ial state by setting parameters.
commanded
3.
r
4.
~,
as optional func-
the standard G codes and special
u cannot be used.
The initial states of G codes of 05, 07, 08 group when
the control is powered correspond to their respective
setting data.
A–61
YASNAC LX3
CNC SYSTEM
FOR TURNING
APPLICATIONS
TOKYO OFFICE Ohtemachl Bldg. 1-6-1 Ohternachl Ch!yoda-ku Tokvo, 100 Japan
Phone (03) 3284-9111, -9145 Telex YASKAWA J33530 Fax (03) 3284-9034
SEOUL OFFICE Seoul Center Bldg, 91-1 So Kong-Dong, Chung-ku, Seoul, Korea
Phone (02) 776-7844
Fax (02) 753-2639
TAIPEI OFFICE
Union Commercial
Bldg. 14F 137, Nanklng East Road, Sec 2, Ta!pel
Phone (02) 507-7065,
-7732
Fax (02) 506-3837
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC. : SUBSIDIARY
Chicago-Technical
Center
3160 MacArthur Blvd Northbrook,
Ill[nols 60062-1917
U SA
Phone (708) 291-0411
Fax (708) 291-1028
Los Angeles Off]ce
7341 Lincoln Way, Garden Grove, California 92641 U S A
Phone (714) 894-5911
Telex (230) 678396 YASKAWAUS
TSTN
Fax (714) 894-3258
New Je~sey’ Office
30 Two B~ldg&amp; Road Falrfleld New Jersey 07006 u S A
Phone (201) 575-5940
Fax (201) 575-5947
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH : SUBSIDIARY
Taiwan
Monscnauerstrasse
1 W 4000 Dusseldorf 11, Germany
Phone (0211) 950030
Telex (41) 8588673
YASD D Fax [0211) 507737
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE)
PTE. LTD.
–.–..
CPF Bldg 79 Robinson
Road No i3-05
Singapore
0106
phone 2217530
Telex 187) 24890 YASKAWA
RS Fax (65) 224-5854
Y
YASKAWA
ELECTRIC
CORPORATION
YASUAWA
TOE-C843-9.20D
@
Printed in Japan January 199386.5
586-176
lTA @
">
안녕하세요! 저는 Yaskawa LX3 Manual을(를) 지원하도록 특별히 훈련된 AI 챗봇입니다. 문서를 철저히 검토했으며 필요한 정확한 정보를 찾거나 내용을 명확하고 간단하게 설명하는 데 도움을 드릴 수 있습니다. 특정 기능에 대한 지침, 문제 해결 단계 또는 일반적인 사용법을 찾고 계시든 언제든지 질문하십시오. 귀하의 우려 사항이나 필요 사항에 대해 더 자세히 알려주실수록 더 정확하고 효과적으로 도와드릴 수 있습니다!